JP2022000176A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game amusement.SOLUTION: In a game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image, a first performance in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed and a second performance in which a predetermined image disappears when a specific variation after a plurality of variations starts can be executed over a plurality of variations.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 127

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball wins a prize at the starting port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image.
The first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and
A second effect, in which the predetermined image disappears when the specific fluctuation after the plurality of fluctuations starts, can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of holds that have been won before the predetermined image is displayed.
The specific variation is a variation corresponding to a hold won during the plurality of variations.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 2
The plurality of fluctuations is executed after the winning game.
The predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, and is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations after the hit game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 3
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image different from the predetermined image.
After the predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, the specific image is displayed overlapping the predetermined image, and after the hit game, the specific image is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 4.
The plurality of fluctuations is a fluctuation of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol.
The specific variation is the variation of the first special symbol or the other of the second special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 5.
The predetermined image is an image that encourages the ball to enter a specific position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of the 2nd prize winning apparatus. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol hit determination table and the like. It is 1st figure for demonstrating the hit type determination table. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating a hit type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an ordinary symbol hit detection table and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the big prize opening opening pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol hit determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting table of the time saving counter. It is the first flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2. It is the 2nd flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member control processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the variation effect end processing. It is a flowchart of an ending effect pattern determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode status setting table. It is a figure for demonstrating the time saving effect scenario determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the time saving production scenario. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the expectation effect of V. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the winning game production at the time of special drawing 2 winning. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the fluctuation effect at the time of special figure 2 lottery. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the one-time production of crying. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement of the 1st movable accessory 14 in the advance direction. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the combination effect of the 1st movable accessory 14 and an image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 1st light emission mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd light emission mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 1st combination effect of the 1st and 2nd movable accessories. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd combination effect of the 1st and 2nd movable accessories. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the variation timing change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the variation timing change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the variation timing change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the symbol direction change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the symbol direction change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the symbol direction change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern mode change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern mode change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern mode change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern variation area effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern variation area effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern variation area effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the operation promotion effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the operation promotion effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the operation promotion effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement effect A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement effect B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the operation part image display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the operation part image display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the operation part image display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the appearance disappearance effect B of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the appearance disappearance effect C of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the winning notification effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the winning notification effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the winning notification effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the effect A inside and outside the outer shell of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the effect B inside and outside the outer shell of a three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the effect C inside and outside the outer shell of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game ball image production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game ball image production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game ball image production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the specific end face effect A of a 3D image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the specific end face effect B of a 3D image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the specific end face effect C of a 3D image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the union production A of a movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the union production B of a movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the union effect C of a movable accessory. It is a figure which illustrates the 1st aspect of the 1st movable accessory of another embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory of another embodiment. It is a figure exemplifying the third aspect of the 1st movable accessory of another embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the 4th aspect of the 1st movable accessory of another embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number interlocking image display effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number interlocking image display effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number interlocking image display effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number interlocking image display effect D. It is a figure which exemplifies the hold number change interlocking effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the hold number change interlocking effect B. It is a figure which exemplifies the hold number change interlocking effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the hold number change interlocking effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon movement change effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon movement change effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon movement change effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon movement change effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the variable middle-order mode start display effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the variable middle-order mode start display effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the variable middle-order mode start display effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the variable middle-order mode start display effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the predetermined image continuous display effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the predetermined image continuous display effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the predetermined image continuous display effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the predetermined image continuous display effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the background image switching effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the background image switching effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the background image switching effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the background image switching effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the image blur effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the image blur effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the image blur effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the image blur effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the winning notification effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the winning notification effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the hit notification effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the hit notification effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the decorative pattern display area effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the decorative pattern display area effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the decorative pattern display area effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the decorative pattern display area effect D. It is a figure which illustrated the hold correspondence image production A. It is a figure which illustrated the hold correspondence image production B. It is a figure which illustrated the hold correspondence image effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the hold correspondence image production D. It is a figure which illustrated the hold image effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the hold image effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the hold image effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the hold image effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the disappearance effect A of the hold icon. It is a figure exemplifying the disappearance effect B of the hold icon. It is a figure exemplifying the disappearance effect C of the hold icon. It is a figure exemplifying the disappearance effect D of the hold icon. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon image display effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon image display effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon image display effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon image display effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the operation state suggestion effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the operation state suggestion effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the operation state suggestion effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the operation state suggestion effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the operation image stock effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the operation image stock effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the operation image stock effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the operation image stock effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the effect A which can be announced. It is a figure exemplifying the effect B which can be announced. It is a figure exemplifying the effect C which can be announced. It is a figure exemplifying the effect D which can be announced. It is a figure exemplifying the specific object display effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the specific object display effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the specific object display effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the specific object display effect D. It is a figure which exemplifies a plurality of role combination production A. It is a figure which exemplifies the combination production B of a plurality of roles. It is a figure which exemplifies the combination effect C of a plurality of roles. It is a figure which exemplifies the combination production D of a plurality of roles. It is a figure which exemplifies this announcement announcement Aori production A. It is a figure which exemplifies this announcement announcement Aori production B. It is a figure which exemplifies this announcement announcement Aori production C. It is a figure which exemplifies this announcement announcement Aori production D. It is a figure exemplifying the character selection effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the character selection effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the character selection effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the character selection effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the start port light emission effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the start port light emission effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the start port light emission effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the start port light emission effect D.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the gaming machine Based on FIGS. 1 and 2, the structure of the gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the second prize-winning device 36. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction seen by the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a gaming ball based on a player's launch operation, and when the gaming ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. be. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is inside the gaming machine frame 50.
Is attached. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, The effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, and the select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53.
The game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores the game ball. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores the game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61.
It is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the player, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65
It is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed with the progress of the game. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speaker 67 is arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the front frame 53, and produces sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, and a first.
The board movable body 14, the second board movable body 15, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the fixed winning device (navel) 19, the normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, and the first gate (through chucker). 28, 2nd gate (through chucker) 29, 1st big winning device (1st attacker) 31, 2nd big winning device (2nd attacker) 36, general winning opening (normal winning opening)
27, an out port 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball fired by the operation of the handle 60 flows down.
A plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is the first board movable body 14 or the second board movable body 1.
It is also provided inside each of the 5s, and the 1st board movable body 14 and the 2nd board movable body 15 are configured to be capable of producing light emission in a specific mode.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a hold digestion image display area on which the hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons. Hold digestion image 9C
Is an image representing the hold, and is also called a hold icon or a variable icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. Medium production symbol 8 in the symbol display area inside
C is displayed. The right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. Directional design 8L,
8C and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the result of the big hit small hit lottery) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, if a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublets such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a random eye such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the big hit small hit lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the mode of variable display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. Further, when a small hit is won, the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as "135", or the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a random eye. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. After that, the production symbols 8L, 8C,
The effect of displaying 8R is "variable effect of the effect pattern", or simply "variable effect" and "variable display".
Also called. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the effect in the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the fixed stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). .. Therefore, even if the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the fixed stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the effect of the change of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect pattern variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved described later. Second to do
Includes a hold display area. By displaying the hold images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the image is digested (“digestion on hold of special figure” described later).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, there is a movable body 14 on the first board, which is a movable so-called gimmick.
(Also called the first movable accessory 14) is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semiring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to be close to each other (the first movable accessory 14 is stationary). It is possible to advance) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative portion when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves downward (advances) from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 is an image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.
Cover a part of.

A stage portion 11 is formed at the lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. Warp part 1
2 includes an inlet portion into which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion in which the game ball flows out, and causes the game ball flowing in from the entrance portion to flow out from the exit portion to the stage portion 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized via the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 can be visually recognized via the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. Illumination panel 1
Reference numeral 8 is configured to be able to display a few types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction of the LED light and the difference in color.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3.
It is provided with a first starting port (first starting winning opening, first ball entry opening, fixed starting opening) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a random number or the like per special symbol and determining a big hit.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move forward and backward, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is an electric chew solenoid 2
Driven by 4. A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state (advanced state). The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state (retracted state). 2 It may be possible to enter the ball into the starting port 21.

The first gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is the image display device 7 in the game area 3.
It is located on the left side of the game, and each is configured so that the game ball can pass through. Gate (1st
The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 and the second gate 29) is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gates 28 and 29 is a trigger for acquiring a random number per normal symbol and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. It is a process of determining whether or not a big hit is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by comparing with a value corresponding to the "big hit" or the "small hit". The lottery results of the "big hit" and the "small hit" are not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. When the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, the "ordinary symbol lottery" means that when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is used as a predetermined "hit". This is a process of determining whether or not a hit is achieved by comparing with the value corresponding to "." Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42 described later. Is performed, and when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged below the first gate 28 in the game area 3, and includes the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. There is. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33. The first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged below the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 is placed. I have. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a shutter-type opening / closing operation. Opening and closing member 3
7 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38. The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The second big winning device 36 has a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a, and a V region sensor 39a inside.
It includes a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, a non-V region sensor 70a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. V area (specific area)
The 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the second prize-winning device 36 through which a game ball that has passed through the second prize-winning opening 35 can pass. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball to the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball to the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball to the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the second large winning opening 35 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. V opening / closing member solenoid 73
Drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates clockwise from the origin position to V the game ball. First state (rotational state) to be distributed to the region 39
When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is located at the origin and the game ball is placed in the non-V region 7.
It becomes the second state (stop state) to distribute to 0. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state).

FIG. 2A shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of allowing the game ball to pass through the V region 39 (first state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second prize opening 35 passes through the V region 39 after passing through the second prize opening sensor 35a (FIG. 2A). Route A). The route of this game ball is called the "first route". FIG. 2 (B) shows
The state when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized is shown. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of hindering the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 (second state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball winning the second special winning opening 35 passes through the second special winning opening sensor 35a and then rolls on the upper surface of the V opening / closing member 71 to be non-V. It passes through the region 70 (Route B in FIG. 2B). The route of this game ball is called a "second route". In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 is an opportunity to execute the jackpot game (second special game) described later. That is, the winning or losing lottery of the big hit is also performed depending on whether or not the passing of the game ball to the V region 39 is successful. The jackpot won by the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot", and the jackpot won by passing a game ball through the V area 39 is also referred to as a "type 2 jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 1, two ordinary winning openings 27 are provided at the lower part of the game area 3. The number of ordinary winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning openings is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side.
There is. The method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, the method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is "
Call it "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for passing through the second gate 29 and winning a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, right-handed to pass through the first gate 28, the second starting port 21,
It is configured so that a prize can be aimed at the first prize opening 30 and the second prize opening 35.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and the like.
The second special figure holding indicator 43b and the normal drawing holding indicator 44 are included. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 displays the ordinary symbol in a variable manner. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold).
The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 is a normal symbol display 42 operation hold (normal figure hold).
Displays the number of memories of. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 as an opportunity. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as an opportunity. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit and small hit lottery) will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 has an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. A jackpot game (second special game) is performed to open the game. In addition, when the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) of a predetermined small hit stop mode, the open pattern according to the type of the small hit symbol (the type of the winning small hit) displayed as a stop is used. A small hit game (first special game) that opens the second large winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), "○○ ●● ○○ ●●"
(○: lit, ●: extinguished), the jackpot symbol in which the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left are lit is displayed. Also, if you win a small hit (one of the multiple types of small hits described below), the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left will light up, such as "●●●● ○○●●". Display the small hit symbol. If it is lost, "●●●●●●● ○"
As such, the lost pattern in which only the LED on the far right is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed,
The variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is made over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, the mode of variable display is all LE.
D may blink all at once.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random numbers such as random numbers per special symbol acquired for the winning (numerical information). ) Is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if the prize is won in the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 6) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is in the second starting port 21. , Is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are four first special figure reservation storage areas 85a and a second special figure reservation storage area. 8
There is one 5b. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special symbol hold" means to determine a random number or the like per special symbol corresponding to the special symbol hold and execute variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the execution of a medium or special game (big hit game or small hit game), the right to the big hit small hit lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure holding indicator 43b is composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The normal symbol display 42 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display), and then displays the normal symbol in a variable manner.
By displaying the stop, the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 is notified. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an assist for opening the second starting port 21 with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. A game is played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if the lottery result is a win, L is the first and second from the left, such as "○○ ●" (○: on, ●: off).
The normal hit symbol with the ED lit is displayed. If the lottery result is lost, "●● ○
", Which displays a normal loss pattern in which only the right LED is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is
As long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), the lighting mode is not limited to the above, and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the random number per normal symbol acquired for the passage is stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 6). It is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is one. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible.
The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the normal figure hold and execute variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 5). FIG. 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a big hit / small hit lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80.
The progress of the game of the game machine 1 is controlled according to the program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later.
The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. Game control microcomputer 81
Sends and receives data to and from other boards and the like via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, and a first gate sensor 28a.
, 2nd gate sensor 29a, 1st big winning opening sensor 30a, 2nd big winning opening sensor 35a, V
Area sensors 39a, non-V area sensors 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a are exemplified. As the solenoids connected via the relay board 88, the electric chew solenoid 24
, The first special winning opening solenoid 33, the second special winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 are exemplified. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The first gate sensor 28a is provided inside the first gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the first gate 28. The second gate sensor 29a is provided inside the second gate 29 and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second big winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second big winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is a non-V region 7 inside the second large winning opening 35.
A game ball provided at 0 and passing through the non-V region 70 is detected. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is
A game ball provided inside the normal winning opening 27 and winning a prize in the normal winning opening 27 is detected. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening / closing member 71 of the second winning opening 35.

Display units 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display 4
Display control for item 4.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87.
The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and also receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. Ball rental payout device 13
0 pays out the ball for rent. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112
It includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114, and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 by the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95.
The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is
It includes a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling an effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub CPU 92 that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. .. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. Production control microcomputer 91
Sends and receives data to and from other boards and the like via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Sub control board 9
The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to 0 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, and the like.
Image data such as figures, characters, numbers, symbols (including effect patterns) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU
102 executes the program stored in ROM 103. Production control microcomputer 9
1 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 1
06 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the image control board 10
Acoustic data may be stored in ROM 103 of 0.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The effect control microcomputer 91 is
Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 (including the lamps of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) are lit via the lamp control board 107. Take control. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5.
Creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. do. Sub-control board 90 for creating emission pattern data
The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of is used. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and these movable accessories are created according to the operation pattern data. Control the operation. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute lamp lighting control or operation control of a movable accessory based on a command. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern in the ROM.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the effect button detection switch 6
A switch signal is output from 3a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to execute a light emission effect via the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 7A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 7 (B) shows the sub R.
It is a figure for demonstrating the storage area provided in AM94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6A) includes a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. A normal symbol hit type determination table T6, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, and an opening. Command, round specification command, ending command, game state specification command, V passage command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting wait command, hold ball count command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal The symbol ending command etc. are set. Flag set area 8
4b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a big hit flag, a big hit end flag, a small hit flag, a small hit end flag, a V flag, and a time saving. A flag, a V opening / closing member operation flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a first time reduction counter, a second time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process (FIG. 20) described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (holding information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. 1st storage area, 2nd storage area, 3rd storage area, 4th storage area for storage
A storage area is provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number value group (holding information) corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation. The normal figure hold storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number value group (holding information) such as a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the first normal figure hold. In addition, in the main RAM 84,
In addition to the above area, a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like are provided.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 7A) includes a variation effect pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time saving effect scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55. Is stored. These determination tables are the sub-control main processes (sub-control main processes executed by the effect control microcomputer 91).
Will be referred to later) by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. .. The command storage area 94a is an area (described later) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later).
Input buffer), variable start command, variable stop command, opening command,
Round specification command, ending command, game state specification command, V passage command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting wait command, hold ball number command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal symbol ending Commands etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106 are set in the sub control main process (described later). Yes, variable effect start command, variable effect end command, opening effect start command, round effect start command, ending effect start command, normal symbol variable effect start command, normal symbol variable effect end command, normal symbol opening effect start command, normal symbol The ending effect start command etc. are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is
This is an area in which the counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, a normal figure hold effect counter, and a first time reduction effect counter. , The second time saving effect counter, etc. are set. In the mode status set area 94e, a mode status (described later) indicating a gaming state (whether a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state described later) of the gaming machine 1 is set.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 8 (A
) Indicates a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and is shown in FIG. 8 (B).
) Indicates a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The game control microcomputer 81 includes "special symbol per random number", "special symbol per type random number", "reach random number", "variable pattern random number", "ordinary symbol per random number", and "ordinary symbol per type". It is configured to acquire "random numbers" at the timings described later. The "special symbol per random number" is a random number used in a lottery for whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit (big hit small hit lottery), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol hit type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (winning type determination) of the winning big hit or small hit type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the big hit / small hit determination is a loss, and is in the range of 0 to 127. Take the value of. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed out of a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state in which a combination of effect symbols indicating a big hit and a small hit is won (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7"). The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state is the display screen 7.
It may be displayed as if it is shaking in a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127.
The "normal symbol per random number" is a random number used in a winning lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) for whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. "
The "ordinary symbol per type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (winning type determination) of the winning type won in the ordinary symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. "Random numbers per special symbol", "random numbers by type per special symbol", "reach random numbers", and "variable pattern random numbers" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). Will be done. The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 21 is stored. 2nd special figure reserved storage area 85b
Is remembered in. "Random number per ordinary symbol" and "Random number by type per ordinary symbol" are gates (1st
Obtained based on the passage of the gate 28 or the second gate 29). The acquired random value per normal symbol and the type random value per normal symbol are stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a "variable effect pattern random number" and a "time saving effect scenario random number".
And "look-ahead effect random number" are configured to be acquired at the timing described later. The "variable effect pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variable effect pattern, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "time saving effect scenario random number" is a random number used to determine a change scenario of the time saving remaining number (display time saving remaining number) displayed on the image display device 7 in the time saving state, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. "Look-ahead production random number" is
It is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "variation effect pattern random number" is acquired based on the fact that the variation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "time saving effect scenario random number" is acquired based on the output of the ending command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the fact that the pre-determination command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. FIG. 9A shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

In the special symbol hit determination table T1, the random value per special symbol (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) is "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". It is a table referred to for determining which of the above is applicable. In FIG. 9A, in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), when the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as "big hit" and the random number value per special symbol is " In the case of "1000 to 10500", it is determined to be "small hit", and when the random number value per special symbol is 0 to 65535, it is determined to be "missing". .. In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the random number value per special symbol is "
In the case of "0 to 210", it is determined as "big hit" and the random value per special symbol is "1000".
In the case of "0 to 16500", it is determined as "small hit" and the random number value per special symbol is 0 to 6.
In the case of a numerical value other than the above among 5535, it is shown that it is determined to be "missing".

In the reach determination table T2, whether the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "
It is a table referred to to determine whether it corresponds to "no reach". In FIG. 9B, when the reach random value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined to be "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined as "with reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is less likely that the reach in the time-shortened state will be reached in the lost time state than in the non-time-shortened state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

The special symbol per type determination table T3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11.
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol per type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 2. The special symbol hit type determination table T3 is a game control microcomputer 81.
Is the type random value per special symbol acquired in the main control main processing (described later) (0 to 127).
It is a table referred to for determining "big hit type" or "small hit type" and "special symbol type" according to any one of). In FIG. 10, when the “big hit” is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the “non-time saving state”, the type random value per special symbol is “0 to 1”.
In the case of "5", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A", and the stop symbol of special figure 1 (special figure 1 stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is "time reduction". Design 1
Is determined. When the special symbol hit type random value is "16 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot B", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 2". When the random value of the special symbol per type is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is "1".
It is determined that the 5R time reduction 5 times jackpot A "is determined, and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be" time reduction symbol 3 ".
On the other hand, in the case of "small hit winning" in the lottery of Special Figure 1 in "non-time saving state",
The small hit type is determined to be "16R normal small hit A (substantially 5R / V passage is virtually impossible)" regardless of the random value of the special symbol per type random value (any of 0 to 127), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol Is determined to be "small hit symbol 1 without time reduction".

When the "big hit win" is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the "time saving state", if the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the big hit type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times big hit C". , The special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 4". When the special symbol per type random value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 5 times jackpot B", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time reduction symbol 5". On the other hand, in the case of "small hit winning" in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "time saving state", the small hit type is "small hit type" regardless of the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127). 16R Normal small hit B (actually 5)
It is determined that "R / V passage is virtually impossible)", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time reduction no small hit symbol 2".

In FIG. 11, when the “big hit” is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the “non-time saving state”, and the special symbol hit type random value is “0 to 63”, the big hit type is “15R time saving 5 times big hit”. It is determined as "C", and the stop symbol of special figure 2 (special figure 2 stop symbol) which is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined as "time saving symbol 6". The type random value per special symbol is "
In the case of "64 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot A".
Special figure 2 The stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 7". The type random value per special symbol is "96 to 1"
In the case of "27", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot D", and special figure 2
The stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 8". On the other hand, when "small hit winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "non-time saving state", when the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R time saving 5 times small". It is determined that "hit A (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol of special figure 2 is determined to be "small hit symbol 1 with time reduction" on the second special symbol display 41b. When the random value of the special symbol per type random value is "64 to 127", it is determined that the small hit type is "16R time reduction 99 times small hit A (actually 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction". It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 2 ”.

If the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 79" when the "big hit win" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in the "time saving state", the big hit type is "15R time saving 5 times big hit D".
, And the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 9". When the special symbol per type random value is "80 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot B", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time reduction symbol 10". The type random value per special symbol is "
In the case of "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot E", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time reduction symbol 11". On the other hand, when the "small hit win" is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the "time saving state", the type random number value per special symbol is "0 to 63".
In the case of, the small hit type is determined to be "16R reduced working hours 5 times small hit B (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 3 with reduced working hours". When the random value of the special symbol hit type is "64 to 95", the small hit type is "16R time reduction 10 times small hit (
It is determined that "substantially 15R / V can pass through)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 4 with reduced working hours". When the random value of the type per special symbol is "96 to 111", it is determined that the small hit type is "16R time reduction 15 times small hit (actually 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction available". It is determined as "small hit symbol 5". The type random value per special symbol is "112-12"
In the case of "7", the small hit type is determined to be "16R reduced working hours 99 times small hit B (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 6 with reduced working hours". .. By referring to the special symbol hit type determination table T3, in addition to the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol 1 stop symbol and special symbol 2 stop symbol), the "opening" of the special game (OP) command, "round specification command", and "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. The specific contents of each big hit and each small hit will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is a table referred to for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). Is. In FIG. 12, for example, a prize is won in the first starting port 20 in a non-time saving state, and it is determined as a “big hit” in the special symbol hit determination table T1.
When the variation pattern random number value is "111-127", it is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be "P2". Further, for example, in a non-time saving state, a prize is won in the first starting port 20.
It is judged as "missing" in the special symbol hit detection table T1 and the reach judgment table T
In 2, when it is determined that there is no reach and the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", the variation pattern is determined to be "P6" regardless of the variation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). Is shown to be. Further, for example, when a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in a time saving state and it is determined as "small hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). ), It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P17". As shown in FIG. 12, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Also, when it comes to super reach, it is also determined whether or not there is a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 13A shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13B shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit type determination table T6. In 13 (C), a figure for explaining a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is shown. In the normal symbol hit determination table T5, the random value per normal symbol (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "missing". It is a table referred to to determine whether it is applicable. In FIG. 13 (A), a normal symbol (normal diagram) is shown in both the "non-time saving state" and the "time saving state".
In the lottery, if the random value per normal symbol is "0 to 254", it is determined to be "win", and if the random value per normal symbol is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", " It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

The normal symbol hit type determination table T6 has "hit type" and "hit type" according to the normal symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type of ordinary symbol". In FIG. 13 (B), when the lottery of the normal figure in the "non-time saving state" is won, if the random value of the type per normal symbol is "0 to 30", it is determined that the winning type is "long open 1". Then, the stop symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 is determined to be "hit symbol 1". When the normal symbol hit type random value is "100 to 170", the hit type is determined to be "short open 1", and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "win symbol 2". When the random value of the normal symbol per type random value is 0 to 65535 and is a numerical value other than the above, it is determined that the hit type is "short open 2" and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 3". Has been done. On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the normal figure in the "time saving state", it is determined that the winning type is "long open 2" regardless of the random value of the type per normal symbol (any of 0 to 65535). It is shown that the normal symbol stop symbol is determined as "hit symbol 4". By referring to the normal symbol per type determination table T6, it is possible to specify the "normal symbol stop symbol data" (not shown) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map according to the lottery result and the winning type of the normal map in the main control main process (described later). Is. In FIG. 13C, for example, when the lottery result of the normal map in the non-time saving state is "hit" and the hit type is "long open 1", the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be "30 seconds". Is shown to be. Further, for example, when the lottery result of the normal map in the time saving state is "missing", it is shown that the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the normal figure stop symbol (normal figure stop symbol data) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, for example, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol 1”, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be “opening pattern 11”, and for example, the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol”. 4 ”is shown to indicate that the open pattern is determined to be the“ open pattern 14 ”. In FIG. 14B, each opening pattern 1 is shown.
The contents of 1 to 14 are shown. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 having an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second is opened once.
In the opening patterns 11 and 12, the opening (OP) time is 0.01 seconds and the opening time is 0.02.
The electric chew 22 with a second and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. In the opening pattern 14, the opening (OP) time is 0.01 seconds, the opening time is 3 seconds, and the ending (
ED) Open the electric chew 22 once for 0.01 seconds. However, this electric chew 22
If there are a predetermined number of game balls won (specified number of winnings, maximum 2), the opening will be closed even if the opening time remains.

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 30 according to the special figure stop symbol (special figure stop symbol data). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of a winning opening 35. FIG. 15 (A
), The special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "13H", "15H", "1".
6H ”,“ 21H ”,“ 22H ”,“ 23H ”,“ 31H ”,“ 32H ”, or“ 3
When "3H", the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H" or "17H", it is opened. The pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and the special figure stop symbol data is "24H", "2".
When it is "5H", "34H", "35H", "36H", or "37H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23". FIG. 15B shows the contents of each opening pattern 21 to 23. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening number of 1 time and an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 15th rounds. In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, in the 1st round, the number of opening times is 1 and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.
At the 2nd to 6th rounds, the opening number of times was 1 and the opening time of the first big winning opening 30 was 29.5 seconds (long opening). Open (short open) the first big winning opening 30 with a time of 0.1 seconds. Open pattern 23
Then, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 seconds, the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 1.6 seconds is opened once in the 1st round, and the opening count is 1 in the 2nd to 16th rounds.
The first big winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) with an opening time of 29.5 seconds. However,
The opening of the first prize opening 30 and the second prize opening 35 is to win a predetermined number of game balls (
If there is a specified number of prizes, up to 9), it will be closed even if the opening time remains.

4. Explanation of big hits, etc. In game machine 1, "big hits" as a result of special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery),
There are "small hits" and "misses". In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the first jackpot 30 will be opened with the opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed.
Second special game) ”is executed. "Small hit game (1st special game)" that opens the 2nd big prize opening 35 once with the opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of small hit) that is stopped and displayed when the small hit is won. Is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the V area 39 inside the second big winning opening 35 during the execution of the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the winning small hit. The "big hit game (second special game)" to be released is executed. The jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot winning is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot game". Further, the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the game ball to the V region 39 is also referred to as a "type 2 jackpot game". In addition, big hit games and small hit games are also called "special games". This special game may include a round in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times in one round.

The jackpot game is a multiple round game (unit open game) that opens the first big prize opening 30.
And the opening (OP) before the start of the first round game and the ending (ED) after the end of the final round game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. Closing time (interval time) of the first prize opening 30 between round games
Is included in the open round game before its closure. The small hit game consists of a small hit opening game that opens the second big winning opening 35, an opening (interval before opening) before the small hit opening game starts, and an ending (closed) after the small hit opening game ends. After interval)
And, including.

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, the types of jackpots are "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A to E", "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot A, B", and "15R time reduction 5 times jackpot A to".
"D" is set. All of these jackpots span 15R and the first big prize opening 3
This is a jackpot that controls the game state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after executing the jackpot game that opens 0 (type 1 jackpot game). On the other hand, these hits differ in the number of time reductions at which the "time reduction state and high base state" after the big hit game ends. Here, the "time reduction number" is the number of variable display (variable display) of the special symbol that can be executed in the "time reduction state and high base state" after the jackpot game, and is preset for each jackpot type. For example, in "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A to E", the number of time reductions is 99 times, and "1".
In "5R time reduction 15 times jackpot A, B", the number of time reductions is 15 times. It should be noted that the "time reduction state and high base state" ends when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed even before the number of time reductions is achieved.

There are multiple types of small hits. Here, the small hit types are "16R normal small hit A, B", "16R time reduction 5 times small hit A, B", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16".
"R time reduction 15 times small hit" and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit A, B" are set. In these small hits, first, the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V region 39 (V passage), the big hit game (two kinds of big hit games) is executed. Therefore, in the small hit, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 as a small hit game corresponds to the first R, and the big hit game that opens the first big winning opening 30 over 15R, which is executed after that when the V is passed, is performed. Corresponds to the 2nd to 16th Rths. If there is no V passage in the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed. Here, "16R (substantially 5R) normal small hit" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V. On the other hand, "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are small hits that can pass V. .. Whether or not V can pass during the small hit game can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. Specifically, it is as follows.

In each of the above small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once for 1.6 seconds in the small hit game after winning (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type. Specifically, "16R normal small hit" (
In the opening pattern 22), the opening time is 4 seconds, and "16R time reduction 5 times small hit",
The opening time of "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" (opening pattern 23) is 0.01 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type is that the opening timing of the second big winning opening 35 for the V opening / closing member 71 that has been moving in a constant motion from the start of this opening is changed. Because. Here, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for 4 seconds after the opening for 0.01 seconds when the small hit game is started. In the opening pattern 22, since the second big winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the small hit game is started, the V opening / closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened. become. Therefore, in the "16R normal small hit", it is substantially impossible to pass V during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, 0.01 seconds after the start of the small hit game, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are opened at the same time, and both of them continue to be opened for 1.6 seconds, and the second big winning is won. 2 from the closure of mouth 35
.. After 4 seconds, the V opening / closing member 71 will close. Therefore, "16R time saving 5 times small hit",
In "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", V passage during the small hit game is possible.

"16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are big hits when the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. This is to control the game state after the game to the "time saving state and high base state" described later. "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are "time reduction state and high base state"
The number of time reductions in each is different. For example, in "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", the time reduction number is 10 times, and in "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", the time reduction number is 15 times. On the other hand, the "16R normal small hit" is a hit that controls the game state to the "non-time saving state and low base state" described later after the big hit game when the big hit game is executed. However, "16
Since "R normal small hit" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V, a big hit game is rarely executed.

In addition, all the small hits in the special figure 1 lottery in the non-time saving state are "16R normal small hits" in which V passage is practically impossible. On the other hand, the fraction of small hits in the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state is 50% for "16R time saving 5 times small hit", 25% for "16R time saving 10 times small hit", and "16R time saving 15 times small hit". "Is 12.5%," 16R time reduction 99 times small hit "is 12.5%, and" 16R normal small hit "is not included. Since the winning probability of the big hit does not change between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning either "big hit" or "small hit in which the big hit game (type 2 big hit game) is executed" is The special figure 2 lottery in the non-time saving state is higher than the special figure 1 lottery in the non-time saving state. In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the gaming ball is hit to the second starting opening 21 by hitting right in the shortening state, rather than hitting the left in the non-time saving state to win the game ball in the first starting opening 20. It is set so that the player is more advantageous in the state of winning the prize.

In the gaming machine 1, there are "hits" and "misses" as a result of the ordinary symbol lottery (winning lottery). In the case of "hit", the "hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42.
At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. If a hit is won, a "hit game (normal game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is executed with an opening pattern corresponding to the type (type of hit) of the normal symbol displayed as stopped. In this hit game (ordinary game), the electric chew may be opened multiple times in one round. The winning game (normal game) consists of one round game (unit open game), the opening (OP) before the round game starts, and the ending (E) after the round game ends.
D) and is included. There are multiple types of hits. Here, "long opening 1", "long opening 2", "short opening 1", and "short opening 2" are set as the winning types. These hits have different fluctuation times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Explanation of gaming state The gaming control microcomputer 81 of the gaming machine 1 can execute "variation time reduction control" for each of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". ". In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (
The fluctuation pattern is determined using FIG. 12). That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the variable time shortening control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur.
Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute it in the non-time saving state. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) is defined so that a variation pattern having a shorter variation time is more often selected in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. Judgment of the fluctuation pattern using. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, it is compared with the case where the fluctuation time shortening control is not executed.
It is easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 13). "Long open 1" in the normal symbol lottery even in the non-time saving state
If you win, the opening pattern of the electric chew will be "opening pattern 11", which will be a long opening time of 5 seconds, but the probability of being distributed to "long opening 1" as the winning type is 31/655.
It is as low as 36, and in most cases, the opening time is 0.02 seconds even if you win. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew is always 3 seconds when winning, so that in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is substantially longer than in the non-time-saving state. It can be said that it is easy to become. That is, it can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22 in the time saving state. When the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and the open time extension control for the electric chew 22, these controls are not executed. In comparison, the electric chew 22 is opened frequently, and the game ball frequently wins a prize at the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called the "low base state".
That is. In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol and the open time extension control for the electric chew 22 of the normal symbol display 42, the electric chew 22 is more than when the control is not executed. Should be easy to open. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A to E" and "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot A"
, B ”,“ 15R time reduction 5 times big hit A to D ”,“ 16R time reduction 99 times small hit ”,“ 16R
The game state after the big hit game executed by winning "16R time saving 10 times small hit", "16R time saving 5 times small hit", or "16R time saving 5 times small hit" is "time saving state and high base state". be. In the "time saving state and high base state", the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 10 times, 15 times, or 99 times), or the jackpot is won. It ends when the jackpot game is executed. The game state after the big hit game, which is executed by winning the "16R normal small hit", is a "non-time saving state and a low base state".
This gaming state is also called a "normal gaming state". When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is this normal gaming state. Here, the "time saving state and high base state" is also simply referred to as a "time saving state", and the "non-time saving state and low base state" is also simply referred to as a "non-time saving state".

In the high base state (time saving state), it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric chew 22 is easier to open than in the low base state (non-time saving state), and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. be. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the first gate 28, which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) is left-handed.
It is possible to advance the game more advantageously by letting the game ball enter. The electric chew 22 is harder to open than in the high base state, and the first starting port 2 is more difficult than winning the second starting port 21.
This is because it is easier to win a prize at 0. For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is passed through the second gate 29, which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit to the first starting port 20 to win a prize. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than right-handed. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time saving state), if the "long opening 1" is won by passing the game ball to the second gate 29, the electric chew 22 is opened for 5 seconds, so that the second gate 29 is released. 2 Make a right-handed strike to get the game ball to the starting port 21. After closing the electric chew 22, make a left strike again.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The game control microcomputer 8 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) based on FIGS. 16 to 34.
The operation of 1 will be described. The counter that appears in the operation explanation of the game control microcomputer 81,
Flags, statuses, buffers, etc. are provided in the main RAM 84. As will be described below, the game control microcomputer 81 can be used as a hit / fail determination means, a symbol control means, a hit game execution means, a game state control means, and a hit type selection means by reading a program stored in the main ROM 83. It works (eg, FIGS. 22, 27-29, 31,
See FIG. 32).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main processing from the main ROM 83. Main control In the main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003).
In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 is shown in FIG. 8 (A).
Various random number counter values shown in (Special symbol per random value, special symbol per type random value, reach random value, variable pattern random value, normal symbol per random value, normal symbol per type random value)
Is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt processing has a predetermined cycle (for example, 4).
It is executed every msec cycle). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is shown in FIG.
The various random number counter values shown in (A) are updated. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values includes the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and the execution period.
It is performed in both other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S10).
2). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start port sensor detection process (step S103).
), Normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V opening / closing member control processing (step S106), and V area sensor detection processing (step S107) are executed in this order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V area sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hold ball number process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 8
1 is a command set area (output buffer) 84 of the main RAM 84 for holding a ball count command.
Set to a. The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S10).
9). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 has the main RAM 8 in each of the above processes.
The command or the like set in the command set area 84a of 4 is output to the sub control board 90.
After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S110).
). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 4 is based on the number of special figure 2 holding balls described later.
3b is controlled in a display mode indicating the number, and the first special figure holding indicator 4 is based on the number of holding balls in the special figure 1.
3a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 has whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "1 (upper limit value)". Is determined (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process is step S205.
Skip to. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "0" (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, in the game control microcomputer 81, the value of the random number counter per ordinary symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-H) and the value of the type counter per the ordinary symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-HS). ) Is acquired, and the acquired random number value group is used as the main RAM.
It is stored in the first storage area of the normal figure reservation storage area 86 of 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special figure 2 reserved ball number of "1 ().
(Upper limit value) ”is determined (step S206). Special figure 2 What is the number of reserved balls?
It is the number of the second special figure hold, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure hold. Special figure 2 If the number of reserved balls is "1" (step S)
206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S2).
07), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-A), the value of the type random number counter per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-AS). Figure 8:
Label-TRND-RC value), fluctuation pattern random number counter value (Fig. 8: Label-TRN)
The value of D-T1) is acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 is described in the special figure 2 described later.
For the pre-determination process, the acquired random number value group is temporarily stored (retained) in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. After the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209).
.. In the special figure 2 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination with reference to the jackpot determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a preliminary determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. When the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit", the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination. In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern pre-determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, and a reach random number value. do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a variation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 is
The created pre-judgment command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and this process is completed.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (
Step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S211). Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is the first
It is the number of special figure reservations, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure reservations. Special figure 1 If the number of reserved balls is "4" (step S21)
1: YES), this process is terminated. Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or less (step S21)
1: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol, the value of the type random number counter per special symbol, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variable pattern random number counter are set in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the first 1st to the 1st special figure reserved storage areas 85a.
Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area according to the current number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the first special figure reservation storage area 8 for the special figure 1 pre-determination process.
It is temporarily stored (retained) in a buffer different from 5a (predetermination buffer). After the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (
Step S214). The special figure 1 pre-determination process is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. When the electric chew 22 is not operating (step S501: NO)
, The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol is in progress (whether the variable stop time has elapsed) (step S502). When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (step S5)
02: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. When the stop display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S503). When the normal symbol is changing (step S503: Y)
ES), the process proceeds to step S521. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S504). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S504: YE)
S), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO),
Decrement the number of normal symbol reserved balls by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0".
In step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1", and then in this step S505, the hold is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is immediately set to "0". "become. This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) described later.
), The hold is digested in step S1404 and step S1410, and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". In addition, the decrement of the number of normal symbol reserved balls (digestion of the normal symbol hold) is the hold information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol hold storage area 86.
Is executed together with the clearing process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 is a normal symbol hit detection table T5 (FIG. 13 (A)).
The hit determination is made with reference to (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a random value per normal symbol as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold) of the normal figure hold storage area 86. Is read. Then, the random value per normal symbol, the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and the normal symbol hit determination table T5 are used to determine whether or not the game is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, the random value per normal symbol is "0".
In the case of ~ "254", it is judged as "hit", and the random value per normal symbol is "2" other than that.
In the case of "55", it is determined to be "missing" (FIG. 13 (A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal symbol hit type determination table T6 (FIG. 13 (B).
))), The type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stopped symbol) is determined (step S507).
Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 81 wins in the hit determination in the above (step S506), first, the normal symbol hit stored in the first storage area of the normal figure reservation storage area 86. Read the type random value. Then, the hit type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) are determined using the normal symbol per type random value, the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random value of the normal symbol hit type is "0" to "30", the hit type is determined to be "long open 1" and the normal symbol is determined to be "win symbol 1". .. The type random value per normal symbol is "100" to "170"
In the case of, the hit type is determined to be "short open 1", and the normal symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 2". When the random value of the normal symbol hit type is other than that, the hit type is determined to be "short open 2", and the normal symbol is determined to be "win symbol 3" (FIG. 13 (B)). On the other hand, in the case of "missing" in the above-mentioned collision determination, "missing symbol" is set as a normal symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13).
C)) is referred to to select the fluctuation pattern (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using a game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), a hit determination result, a hit type, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. do. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the hit type is "long open 1", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds". Further, for example, in the case of "missing" in the above-mentioned hit determination in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13 (C)).
.. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol fluctuation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub control board 90 of the fluctuation start and fluctuation time of the normal symbol (step S509). For the normal symbol change start command,
It contains information about normal stop symbol data and information about normal symbol fluctuation patterns.
After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the variable display of the normal symbol and ends the present process (
Step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the game has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13 (C)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S521)
: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol as the normal symbol specified in step S507 (the normal symbol that is hit or the normal symbol that is lost). (Figure stop symbol) to stop (step S522)
.. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub control board 90 of the normal symbol fluctuation stop (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the normal symbol and finishes this process (step S524). Here, the stop time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed. When the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO)
, The game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 is (missing) in the hit determination in the above (step S506).
Step S532: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to notify the start of the game (normal game) opening, so that the normal symbol opening is performed. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S53).
3). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is
The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected by using the type of the normal symbol (normal figure stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8.
Here, for example, when the normal symbol is "hit symbol 1", "open pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal symbol is "hit symbol 4", "open pattern 14" is selected (see FIG. 14). .. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S5011).
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 2), or the opening time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The opening time of the electric chew 22 is an opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub control board 90 to notify the start of the ending of the game (ordinary game), so that the normal symbol ending The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S54).
1). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends the present process.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is "special operation status"".
They are called "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, special symbol hit detection, special symbol variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the processing during special symbol change, the output of the change stop command and the like are executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301,
S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (step S1)
301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game) is performed (step S1308). In special electric accessory processing 1,
A jackpot game (type 2 special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessory processing 2, a small hit game (type 1 special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (reserved in special figure 2) is “0” (step S1401). Special figure 2
When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, there is no memory of the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. In that case, the process proceeds to step S1407. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol collision detection processing (step S1401: NO).
Step S1402) and special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403)
To execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the hold information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b (step S1405). By the above step, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side and displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Will be done.
As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S1406).
.. In the special figure 2 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the special operation status is set to “2”. In addition, the fluctuation start command set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (
In the special figure 2 variation start command), information about the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol collision detection process (step S1402) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S).
It contains information about the variation pattern set in 1403).

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" (step S1401:
YES), in the game control microcomputer 81, the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (holding in special figure 1) is "0".
(Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407)
: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special symbol collision detection process (step S1408).
, And the special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1409) is executed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). For example, when the reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) is displayed. It shifts to the hold digestion image display area side and is displayed as the hold digestion image 9C. In addition, the first special figure reserved storage area 8
When there is hold information in the second to fourth storage areas of 5a, the hold image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (of the four hold images 9A, the second, third, and fourth hold from the right). Image 9A) shifts by one to the right. As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). Special figure 1 In the fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is the main RA.
It is set in the command set area 84a of M84 to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol collision detection process (step S1408) and special symbol fluctuations. Information about the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1409) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 is, for example, an ON / OF of a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers.
It may be determined by F. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed. (Step S1414),
This process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold.

[Special symbol collision detection processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol collision determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the process flow of the hit determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the hit determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random number value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process of the special figure 2, the random value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process of the special figure 1, the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (
Read the random number value per special symbol stored in (corresponding to the first item on hold of the first special figure). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by using the reference special symbol hit determination table T1 and the read special symbol hit random value.
In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "hit / miss determination means".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination is "big hit" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag and turns on the big hit flag (step S1505).
, The jackpot type is determined (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the type random number value per special symbol as the determination value. For example, in the hit determination process of the special figure 2, the special symbol per type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process of the special figure 1, the special symbol per type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read special symbol per type random value and the special symbol per type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a “hit type selection means”. After the jackpot type is determined, the special symbol stop symbol data (big hit symbol) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1).
509), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" (step S1503: NO).
), In the case of "small hit" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81
Turns on the small hit flag (step S1512) and determines the small hit type (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol per type random value as the determination value, as in the case of the jackpot type determination. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small hit type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After determining the small hit type, the special figure stop symbol data according to the specified small hit type (
The small hit symbol) is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and this process is terminated.

When the result of the special symbol hit detection is not "big hit" or "small hit" but "missing" (
Step S1503, S1510: NO), special symbol stop symbol data (0) according to the lost symbol
1H) is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S15).
18), this process is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 show a special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: step S1403).
, S1409). Fluctuation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1)
Since the processing flow is the same in 403) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) in FIG. 1, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 8
1 determines whether or not the gaming state is a reduced working hours state (step S1600). The determination of whether or not the time reduction state is performed is performed by whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 8
1 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for non-time saving state jackpot in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state jackpot, the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state jackpot in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (variation patterns are “P1” and “P2” in the special figure 1). The part of, in the special figure 2, the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P14") is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P14" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 2 regardless of the variation pattern random value.

When the jackpot flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602:
NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state small hit table in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) for the fluctuation pattern. Make a selection (step S1)
605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value, as in step S1603 described above. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the portion corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state and the variation pattern random value in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Here, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is
Since the fluctuation pattern is the portion of "P3" in the special figure 1 and the fluctuation pattern is the portion of "P15" in the special figure 2, these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value.

When the small hit flag is OFF in step S1604 (step S1604:
NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the fluctuation pattern selection process of Special Figure 2, the second
The reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9B) and the reach random number value. Here, because it is in a non-time saving state
In the reach determination table T2, the presence or absence of reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the portion where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is "0" to "13").

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 in the non-time saving state reach. The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for the loss with reach in the non-time reduction state, the part corresponding to the loss with reach in the non-time reduction state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern is "P4". , "P
The part of "5" and the part of the variation pattern "P14" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In special figure 1,
From the read fluctuation pattern random value, either "P4" or "P5" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. In the special figure 2, “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random value.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1606: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is used in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to reach in a non-time saving state. None The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for non-reach loss in the non-time reduction state, the portion corresponding to the non-reach loss in the non-time reduction state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern is “P6”. , "P
7 ”, and in the special figure 2, the part whose fluctuation pattern is“ P15 ”) is referred to. In Special Figure 1,
One of "P6" and "P7" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, “P15” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random value. In the special figure 1, since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in Special Figure 1, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more fluctuation patterns with a shorter fluctuation time are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". It is supposed to be done. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is in the reduced working hours state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 24: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1608 is that in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referred to is described in steps S1603, S1605, and S16.
It is different from 07 and S1608. Specifically, steps S1603, S1605, S1607
, S1608 refers to the non-time saving state table in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, whereas steps S1613, S1615, S1617, S161
In 8, the table for the time saving state is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 corresponding to the small hit in the time saving state (special figure 1).
Then, the part where the fluctuation pattern is “P9” is referred to, and in the special figure 2, the part where the fluctuation pattern is “P17”) is referred to. Further, for example, in the case of step S1617, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the reach loss in the time-saving state (the portion where the variation pattern is “P10” in the special figure 1 and the variation pattern in the special figure 2). The part of "P18") is referred to.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and output processing (FIG. 17: step S109).
) Is transmitted to the sub control board 90. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 20: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO
), Finish this process. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is issued to the main RAM 84.
Is set in the command set area 84a (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of the special symbol). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "design control means". The stop display time of the special symbol can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the lottery result of the special figure 2. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800)
: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S1800).
: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the game state management process (step S18).
01). The game state management process is a process for switching the game state according to the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the content will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 8
1 is to set the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the winning big hit (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), and determines the opening pattern. set. Here, regardless of the jackpot type (special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, 31H).
"Opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening (regardless of any of ~ 33H). Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "15" is set in the round counter regardless of the jackpot type (
FIG. 15 (B).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (step S1804), and if it is ON (step S1804: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON.
Switch to OFF (step S1805). As a result, the non-time saving state is set during the execution of the type 1 jackpot game. After that, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, the opening command of the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, set the special operation status to "4" (
Step S1808), this process is completed. When the special operation status is set to "4", the processing shifts to the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game).

When the jackpot flag is OFF in step S1802 (step S180)
2: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: Y
ES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening according to the type of the winning small hit (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 8
In step S1803 described above, the opening pattern of the large winning opening is determined from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9, and the determined opening pattern is set. Here, for example, when the small hit type is "16R normal small hit A" (the special figure stop symbol data is "14H"), the opening pattern of the winning opening is "opening pattern 22".
Is set. Further, for example, when the small hit type is "16R time reduction 5 times small hit A" (special figure stop symbol data is "24H"), "opening pattern 23" is used as the opening pattern of the winning opening.
Is set. The value of the round counter together with the set of open patterns of the big winning opening,
Set the number of rounds according to the type of winning small hit. Here, "16" is set in the round counter regardless of the small hit type (FIG. 15 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening / closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period for operating the V opening / closing member 71. In the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33), when the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening / closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any small hit game, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed as an opening for 0.01 seconds after the small hit game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. When the small hit flag is ON, unlike the case where the big hit flag is ON, even if the time saving flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF. After that, in order to start the small hit game, the small hit opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small hit game is started (step S1814). After that, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and this process is completed. When the special operation status is set to "5", the processing shifts to the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game).

When the small hit flag is OFF in step S1810 (step S181).
0: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1820), and ends this process. As a result, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) again.
A special symbol collision detection, etc. for the next hold is executed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 26: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, in the non-time saving state, the process skips to step S2040. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: Y)
ES), that is, in the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S2010). When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the respective values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2 (step). S2015). The "first time saving counter C1" counts the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state. The "second time saving counter C2" counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state (the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the number of changes in the second special symbol). The initial values set in the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 are determined in the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described later based on the setting table of FIG. 30. On the other hand, when the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time reduction counter C2 (step S2020).

As a result of step S2015 or step S2020, in the game control microcomputer 81, at least one of the values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 is ".
It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step S2030). When neither the value of the first time saving counter C1 nor the value of the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: NO).
, The process skips to step S2040. When the value of at least one of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2035). As a result, the gaming state can be switched from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state. That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the time saving state reaches the number of times shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state is switched to the non-time saving state.

In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not the time reduction state, the respective values of the first time reduction counter and the second time reduction counter, and the like).

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the big hit game currently being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S220)
0: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first special winning opening 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the first big winning opening 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the first big winning opening 30 (step S2203). .. The time (timing) for opening the first big winning opening 30 is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening is temporarily closed after opening. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first large winning opening 30 is opened again has elapsed and the time for starting the opening again has been reached. When it is not the time (timing) to open the first prize opening 30 (step S220)
3: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the first large winning opening 30 (step S2203: Y)
ES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a large winning opening opening process (step S2207).
). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first big winning opening 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the hit type (big hit type or small hit type). 1
When the seed jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the jackpot type. When the two-kind big hit game is being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the small hit type. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game (small hit game and big hit game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. do. As a result, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. In this embodiment, the first large winning opening 30 is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first special winning opening 30 is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the first large winning opening 3.
It may be determined whether or not the opening of 0 is the first opening in one round, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the first large winning opening 30 is open (step S2).
202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the first big winning opening 30 in the round game has reached the specified maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or the first big winning opening 30 is used. It means that one of the times when the closing time is reached (that is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the first large winning opening 30) is satisfied. Then, when the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first large winning opening 30 is satisfied (step S).
2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the first special winning opening 30 (step S2211), and then ends this process.

Time (timing) for opening the first large winning opening 30 in step S2203 described above.
If not, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has been completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the closing of the first large winning opening 30. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the first large winning opening 30 between the round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the first large winning opening 30 was closed. When the round game is not completed (step S222)
0: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter becomes "0". Is determined (step S2226).
If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is,
If the specified number of round games has not been exhausted yet, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: Y).
ES), as the jackpot end process for ending the jackpot game, the ending command of the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2227), and the ending of the jackpot is started (step S2228). The ending command includes information about the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (FIG. 21). After the start of the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process is completed.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2).
200: YES) Since the final round has been completed, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ending time of the jackpot has elapsed (step S2230).
If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S).
2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231) and turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232).
The special operation status is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the game state setting process (step S223) described later.
4) is executed and this process is completed. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets the game state (time reduction state or non-time reduction state) after the big hit game, and in the case of the time reduction state, the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction according to the hit type. This is a process of setting an initial value (number of time reductions) in the counter C2.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 28: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "game state control means" by executing the above-mentioned game state management process (FIG. 27) and the game state setting process. In the game control microcomputer 81, first, the big hit game executed this time is a time saving hit (that is, "15R time saving 5 times big hit", "15R time saving 15 times big hit", "15R time saving 99 times big hit", "1".
"6R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit""16R time reduction 99 times small hit") Do this (step S2301). When the time saving hit is not an opportunity (step S2)
301: NO), that is, when the current big hit game is executed with a normal hit (that is, "16R normal small hit"), the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, when the big hit game this time is executed with the short-time hit as an opportunity (step S2301).
: YES), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 uses the setting table (FIG. 30) described later in the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2.
Each of the set values shown in (step S2303) is set. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time is set to the "short working hours state and high base state". This "time saving state and high base state" is a condition that either the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times or the next big hit (1 type big hit or 2 kinds big hit) is won. It ends with the establishment of. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information regarding the game state that has just been set (whether or not the time reduction state, the respective values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2, and the like).

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a setting table of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described above. In FIG. 30, for example, when the big hit game executed this time is executed with "15R time reduction 99 times big hit" or "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" as an opportunity (special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12".
H ”,“ 15H ”,“ 25H ”,“ 37H ”), 1st time reduction counter C1
And "99" are set in each of the second time reduction counter C2. Further, for example, when the big hit game executed this time is executed with "16R time reduction 10 times small hit" as an opportunity (when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H"), "10" is set in the first time reduction counter C1. It is set, and "15" is set in the second time saving counter C2.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
31 and 32 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory process 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "hit game execution means" by executing the above-mentioned special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game: FIG. 28) and the special electric accessory process 2 (small hit game). do. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400). The "small hit end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning device 36 based on the opening pattern is completed in the small hit game being executed. When the small hit end flag is ON (step S2)
400: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. Small hit end flag is OFF
(Step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second special winning opening 35 is open (step S2402). When it is open (step S24)
02: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

When the second big winning opening 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the second big winning opening 35 (step S2404). .. The time (timing) for opening the second large winning opening 35 is when the opening time of the small hit has elapsed and the opening start time has been reached. The opening time of the small hit is 4 seconds for the open pattern 22 and 0.01 for the open pattern 23.
Seconds. When it is not the time (timing) to open the second prize opening 35 (step S2)
404: NO), this process is completed. When it is time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large winning opening opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second large winning opening 35 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the small hit type. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. As a result, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. After setting the round specification command
This process is completed.

In step S2402 described above, when the second large winning opening 35 is open (step S2).
402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the second major winning opening 35 has reached the specified maximum winning number (for example, 10), or that it is time to close the second major winning opening 35. (That is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the second special winning opening 35) is satisfied. When the closing condition of the second prize opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410:
NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the second big winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the second big winning opening 35, so that the big winning opening closing process is performed. Do (step S241)
2). Here, as a small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the ending command of the small hit game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. After the big winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small hit game corresponds to the 1st round. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416), and ends this process.

In step S2400 described above, when the small hit end flag is ON (step S2).
400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the interval time (ending time) after closing has elapsed (step S2420). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES).
), The game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S).
2430). The "V flag" is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 during the execution of the small hit game, and is a flag turned on in the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later. .. When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the two-kind jackpot game, so the round counter is set to "0" (step S3432) and the special operation status is set to "1". (Step S2434), and this process is completed. As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again.

When the V flag is ON in step S2430 described above (step S2430: Y).
ES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag to OFF (step S2436), and switches the jackpot flag to ON in order to execute the two-kind jackpot game (step S2436).
Step S2437), set the special operation status to "4" (step S2438)
). By setting the special operation status to "4", the next special operation process (Fig. 20)
In, the processing shifts to the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON ().
In step S2440), if it is ON (step S2440: YES), it is switched to OFF (step S2442). As a result, the non-time saving state is set during the execution of the two-kind jackpot game. After that, in order to start the big hit game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening command of the two kinds of big hit games (step S2444), and starts the opening of the big hit game (step S2446). As a result, the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a short time is shifted to the two-kind big hit game.

[V opening / closing member control process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500)
: NO), this process is completed. When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500:
YES), the "V opening / closing member operation process" for operating the V opening / closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern is performed (step S2502), and the V passage of the game ball in the predetermined period (timing) is regarded as valid. Perform the setting process (step S2504). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small hit game is started (FIG. 26).
: Steps S1812, S1814), V opening / closing member operation processing and V validity period setting processing are performed in accordance with this small hit game.

In the V opening / closing member operation processing, a timer for measuring the operating time of the V opening / closing member 71 is set, and based on the timer, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned on when the opening timing of the V opening / closing member 71 is reached. , The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned off when the closing timing of the V opening / closing member 71 is reached. As a result, the V opening / closing member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small hit game. Specifically, the V opening / closing member 71 is first controlled to the passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the small hit game opening, and then to the passing allowable state (open state) for 4 seconds. Then, it is controlled to the passage blocking state (closed state) for 6 seconds.

In the V validity period setting process, the V validity period is set for the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 as described above. The "V valid period" is a period in which the V flag is turned ON by regarding the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a as valid. The V valid period is from the start of opening the V region 39 (when the control of the V opening / closing member 71 is started to allow passage) to the elapse of a predetermined time. The predetermined time is the opening time of the V region 39 (V opening / closing member 71).
A time longer than the time for controlling the passage allowance state (here, the opening time of the V region 39 + 1 second) is set. This is because the time lag until the game ball passing through the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 reaches the V region 39 is taken into consideration. In the V validity period setting process, V
A timer for measuring the validity period is set, and based on the timer, the V valid flag is turned ON when it is time to enable the V area 39, and when it is time to disable the V area 39. Turn off the V valid flag. In the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect depending on whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening / closing member operation processing and the V validity period setting processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has been completed (step S2506). Specifically, the total operating time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 based on the timer set in the V opening / closing member operation process (step S2502). ) Has passed. If the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has not been completed (step S2506: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, when the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 is completed (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this process.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (opening / closing member 32) in the small hit game will be described. As described above, the V opening / closing member 71
Is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the small hit game opening, and then
It is opened for 4 seconds and then closed for 6 seconds. In the "16R normal small hit" (opening pattern 22), the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then 4
.. Closed for 41 seconds. Therefore, the opening pattern 2 of "16R normal small hit"
In No. 2, the V opening / closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second large winning opening 35 is opened, making it virtually impossible for the game ball to pass through the V during the small hit game. On the other hand, "16
"R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit"
, In "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" (opening pattern 23), the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, and then opened for 1.6 seconds. It is then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are 0.01 seconds after the small hit game is started.
Was opened at the same time, both were opened for 1.6 seconds, and 2.4 from the closing of the second prize opening 35.
After a second, the V opening / closing member 71 will close. Therefore, no matter what timing the game ball wins in the second large winning opening 35, the game ball can pass through the V region 39. Here, if the game ball is continuously fired by hitting right, the second big prize opening 35 is sure to win the game ball during the opening period of the second big winning opening 35. Each device such as the grand prize device 36 is arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball passing through the second large winning opening 35 to reach the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds.
From this, "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R
In "15 times small hit" and "16R 99 times small hit", if you hit right during the small hit game and continue to shoot the game ball continuously, the game ball will always pass V. There is.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V validity period is the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 3).
This is the period set by the V valid period setting process (step S2504) of 3). The V valid period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed. Here, 1 second is set as the ball brushing period. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the V valid period (step S2).
602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V-pass command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2604), and ends this process. The "V pass command" is the sub control board 9
It is a command to notify 0 of the passage of V.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 43. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94. As will be described below, the effect control microcomputer 91 functions as an effect execution means by reading the program stored in the sub ROM 93.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. Production control microcomputer 91
Reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "".
1 ”, and the initial value of the counter is“ 0 ”. The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8B to 1.
Add and update. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (
Step S4025). Sub-timer interrupt processing (step S40) while interrupts are enabled
35) can be executed. Sub-side timer interrupt processing is performed by the sub CPU 92 in a predetermined cycle.
It is executed based on the interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs reception command analysis processing (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4).
310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 is the effect button detection switch 63.
Based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from a, the display contents of the display screen 7a are set. After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 is sub-R in the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) or the like.
Various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of AM94 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step 4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S441)
5: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The "look-ahead effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. In the look-ahead effect determination process, the look-ahead effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern selection are performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the look-ahead effect random number random number, and the acquired random number value and
With reference to the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93, whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect are determined. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, when the predetermination command is not received from the main control board 80 (step S441).
5: NO), the above-mentioned look-ahead effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 contains a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). When receiving (step S444)
5: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S445)
5: YES), the variable effect start process (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later.
On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S446)
5: YES), the variable effect end process (FIG. 39) is performed (step S4470). The “variable effect end process” is a process for stopping the variable effect, and the details will be described later.
On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4)
475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480).
). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and substituting the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of winning determination for the big hit or the small hit. Set in RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, FIG. 45). note that,
When the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S).
4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4)
485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490).
The "round effect pattern determination process" is an open game effect pattern (open game effect pattern) executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (big hit game or small hit game).
Content) is the process of selecting. In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and then performs information on the special figure stop symbol data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 9.
Set to 4. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the effect of the sub RAM 94 is the effect of the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect. Command set area 9
Set to 4b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command of the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game.
The details of the ending effect pattern determination process will be described later. Production control microcomputer 91
When receiving the ending command of the small hit game from the main control board 80, performs a process different from the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process. In addition, step S44
In 95, when the ending command of the jackpot game has not been received (step S).
4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol change start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it has been received (step S4505: YES), the normal symbol variation effect start process is performed (step S4510).
The "normal symbol variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a normal symbol variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the normal symbol variation. In the normal symbol variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 9
First, 1 sets the information about the normal symbol change symbol data included in the normal symbol change start command and the information about the normal symbol change pattern (FIG. 13) in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the normal figure, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91. Production control microcomputer 9
1 is an effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 for selecting a preset ordinary symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the ordinary symbol variation pattern and issuing a normal symbol variation effect start command for starting the selected ordinary symbol variation effect. Set to 94b. Direction command set area 9
When the normal symbol variation effect start command set in 4b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined normal symbol variation effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, when the hit type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the "expected effect of V" (FIG. 44) described later. .. If the normal symbol variation start command has not been received in step S4505 (step S4505: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it has been received (step S4515: YES), the normal symbol variation effect end process is performed (step S4520).
The "normal symbol variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the normal symbol variation effect. In the normal symbol variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol variation stop command and sets the normal symbol variation effect end command for ending the normal symbol variation effect in the effect command set area 94b. .. If the normal symbol variation stop command has not been received in step S4515 (step S4515: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). When receiving (step S4525: YES), the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4530). The "ordinary symbol opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting a normal game effect pattern (content) to be executed at the time of a hit game (ordinary game) accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol. The normal game effect selected here includes an opening effect executed during the opening and an open game effect executed during the opening of the electric chew 22. In the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command, and relates to the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol opening command and set at the time of winning determination of the normal symbol. The information is set in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and the effect command of the sub RAM 94 is the normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect. Set area 94
Set to b. When the normal symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 receives a predetermined opening effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the normal symbol opening command has not been received in step S4525 (
Step S4525: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). When receiving (step S4535: YES), the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4540). The "ordinary symbol ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the winning game (ordinary game) accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol. In the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command, and then stores information about the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol ending command in the sub RAM 9.
Set to 4. Then, the effect pattern of the ending effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and the effect command of the sub RAM 94 is the normal symbol ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 receives a predetermined ending effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the normal symbol ending command has not been received in step S4535 (step S4535: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545).
.. In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is a time saving state, etc.)
The sub RAM 94 holds the values of the first time reduction counter and the second time reduction counter, etc.). Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-passing command, the RAM 94 holds the V-passing information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a command other than the above (a command other than the above.
Performs processing based on the customer waiting standby command, advance judgment command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing. The effect control microcomputer 91 has a variable effect end process (step S4470) and an opening effect pattern determination process (step S4480).
It functions as a "directing execution means" by executing.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5).
000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S50).
05). The "mode status M" indicates the effect mode to be executed. The effect mode here is a mode of effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, the images (characters and items appearing, background images, etc.) displayed on the image display device 7 are different.
The variable effect is also executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Here, "1" and "2" are set as the mode status M, "1" corresponds to the non-time saving state, and "2" corresponds to the time saving state. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is “1” or “2”.

When the mode status M is "2" (step S5010: YES), that is, in the time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the time saving effect scenario (step S50).
25). The "time saving effect scenario" is the time saving remaining number displayed on the image display device 7 in the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) described later, which is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game (hereinafter, "display time saving remaining number"). Shows the change scenario of. The time saving production scenario is
It is determined in the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. here"
The "remaining number of times of time reduction" is the remaining number of times of variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the time reduction state after the big hit game, and the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol already executed in the time reduction state is determined by the hit type. It is the remaining number of times until the number of time reductions set accordingly is reached. The number of remaining time reductions corresponds to the value of the first time reduction counter C1 on the main control unit side. The number of remaining time reductions is "0"
When it becomes, the gaming state is switched from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state (FIG. 27: step S2030).
, S2035). The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment performs an effect of making the remaining number of display time reductions displayed on the image display device 7 different from or matching the actual number of remaining time reductions displayed on the image display device 7 based on the time reduction effect scenario. A specific embodiment will be described later. Here, the effect control microcomputer 91
Specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time reduction effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed this time from the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 described later and the time reduction effect scenario. When the mode status M is "1" (step S5010: NO), that is,
In the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 skips the reference to the time saving effect scenario.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variation effect pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variation effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires the variation effect pattern random value for effect determination. Then, from the variation effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, the mode status M, the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command, the variation effect pattern random value, the number of remaining display time reductions specified at the time reduction, and the special effect flag. Set the variable effect pattern corresponding to ON / OFF of. The "special effect flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the "one-time effect of crying" (FIG. 48), which will be described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub RAM 94. The effect control microcomputer 91 is
When the special effect flag is ON, it is switched to OFF and "one-time crying effect" is executed as a variable effect. On the other hand, when the special effect flag is OFF and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is "P12" to "P15", that is, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state is the fluctuation, the "V card" described later will be described. "Shuffle production" (Fig. 44 (G)) is performed.
When the mode status M is "2", the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) described later. Since the effect control microcomputer 91 performs this countdown effect, it functions as a "number display effect execution means".

The effect control microcomputer 91 is further stopped by referring to the contents of the so-called step-up advance notice effect, the advance notice effect such as the chance-up advance notice effect, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T52 based on the variable effect pattern random value. The combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be displayed is determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020). ), End this process. When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 causes a predetermined variation effect. Image ROM 103
Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Fluctuating production end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). When the mode status M is "1" (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. When the mode status M is "2" (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S5110: NO).
Step S5115). The effect control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the variation is the variation of the first special symbol or the variation of the second special symbol from the information about the variation pattern set in the sub RAM 94. When the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S511)
5: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the respective values of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 (step S5120). "
The "first time saving effect counter JC1" is a second time saving effect executed during the time saving state on the sub control unit side.
It counts the number of changes in the special symbol, and is the "first time reduction counter C" on the main control unit side.
1 ”is supported. The "second time saving effect counter JC2" is the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the time saving state on the sub control unit side (the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the number of changes of the second special symbol). It counts and corresponds to the "second time reduction counter C2" on the main control unit side. The initial values set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 are determined by the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, when the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the first special symbol (step S5115: NO).
), Only the value of the second time saving effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S51).
25).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 becomes "0" as a result of step S5120 or step S5125. (Step S5130). If neither the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 nor the value of the second time saving effect counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: NO), the process skips to step S5140. When the value of at least one of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to "1" (step S51).
35). When the mode status M is switched to "1", the effect control microcomputer 91 is
At the same time, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 2 hold, and if there is a special figure 2 hold, the special effect flag is switched to ON. As a result, if there is a special figure 2 hold when shifting from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, the "one-time effect of crying" (FIG. 48), which will be described later, is executed as the first variation effect in the non-time-saving state. .. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is in step S5130.
From the information about the gaming state held in the sub RAM 94, it may be determined whether it is a time saving state or a non-time saving state, and in the case of the non-time saving state, the mode status M may be switched to "1" in S5135. The information regarding the game state held in the sub RAM 94 is updated when the game state designation command is received from the main control board 80. Step S514
At 0, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. After that, this process ends.

[Ending effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4500). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a mode status setting process (step S5505). "
The "mode status setting process" is a process of determining the effect mode after the big hit game. In the mode status setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using the mode status M setting table described below.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table referred to for determining the mode status M according to the hit type (special figure stop symbol data). The effect control microcomputer 91 has the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and the mode status setting table T5.
Determine the mode status from 3. For example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the two-kind jackpot game after winning the "16R normal small hit A", the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 14H, so the mode status M is "1". Is selected. Further, for example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the type 1 jackpot game after winning the "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot E", the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 33H, so that it is set as the mode status M. "2" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 40, when the mode status M set in step S5505 is “1” (step S5510: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 processes in step S55.
Skip to 25. On the other hand, when the set mode status M is "2" (step S).
5510: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the set values according to the type (special figure stop symbol data) in the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 (step S5515). The set value set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 is the same as the value set in the first time saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. Further, the set value set in the second time saving effect counter JC2 is the same as the value set in the second time saving counter C2 on the main control unit side. A setting table similar to the setting table of FIG. 30 is stored in the sub ROM 93, and the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and this setting table to shorten the first time. It is possible to specify the set value to be set in the effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "99" is set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2, respectively. Further, for example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H", "10" is set in the first time saving effect counter JC1.
Is set, and "15" is set in the second time saving effect counter JC2. After setting the set values in the time saving effect counters JC1 and JC2, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the time saving effect scenario determination process (step S5520). The "time reduction effect scenario determination process" is the number of time reduction remaining times (display time reduction remaining number of times) to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the later-described "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) executed in the time reduction state after the big hit game. ) Is a process for determining a change scenario. In the time saving effect scenario determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the time saving effect scenario using the time saving effect scenario determination table T54 described below.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the time saving effect scenario determination table T54. The time saving effect scenario determination table T54 is a table referred to for determining the time saving effect scenario according to the hit type (special figure stop symbol data) and the time saving effect scenario random value. The effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires a time-saving effect scenario random value. Then, the time saving effect scenario is determined from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command, the acquired random number value, and the time saving effect scenario determination table T54. For example, in the case of the ending of the two-kind big hit game after winning "16R time saving 99 times small hit A" (special figure stop symbol data 25H), if the acquired time saving effect scenario random value is "0 to 63". "Scenario B" is selected as the time-saving effect scenario, and if the time-saving effect scenario random value is "64 to 95", "scenario C" is selected as the time-saving effect scenario, and the time-saving effect scenario random value is "96 to 127".
If "," Scenario D "is selected as the time-saving production scenario. Also, for example, "15
In the case of the ending of the 1st type jackpot game after winning the "R time saving 5 times jackpot D" (special figure stop symbol data 31H), "scenario H" is selected as the time saving effect scenario regardless of the acquired time saving effect scenario random value. Be selected.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the specific contents of the time saving effect scenario. FIG. 43 shows
In each time saving effect scenario (scenarios A to H), the remaining time saving number (display time saving) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) executed in the time saving state after the big hit game. The correspondence between the remaining number of times) and the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is shown. For example, in "scenario A", the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the same value as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions. In "scenario B", when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions, and then the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "9".
6 ”is reduced, and the number of remaining display time reductions is reduced as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is reduced. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from "99" to "96", the number of remaining display time reductions changes from "5" to "2". And the first time saving production counter JC1
When is "95", the number of remaining display time reductions is set to "1" and the remaining number of display time reductions is 94.
A display suggesting an increase, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, until the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "94" to "1", the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the number of remaining display time reductions. In "scenario E", when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "15", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions, and then the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "12". The number of remaining display time reductions is reduced as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is reduced. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from "15" to "12", the number of remaining display time reductions changes from "5" to "12".
2 ”. Then, when the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "11", the display time reduction remaining number is set to "1", and a display suggesting that the display time reduction remaining number is increased by 10, for example, "+10" is displayed. Then, the first time saving effect counter JC1 is changed from "10" to "1".
, The same value as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is displayed as the number of remaining display time reductions. In this way, by making the number of remaining display time reductions different from the actual number of remaining time reductions, that is, the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1, the player is expected that the number of remaining display time reductions may increase in the middle. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M and determines the ending effect pattern (step S5530). A plurality of types of ending effect patterns are prepared, and the ending effect pattern is determined based on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command. Production control microcomputer 91
Sets the ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94 so that the ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized (step S5).
535), this process is completed.

8. Production example of this embodiment [Expected production of V (when a normal symbol is won in a non-time saving state)]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected effect of V. This expected effect of V is won with a normal symbol while the special figure 1 is changing or stopped in a non-time saving state, and the winning type is "long open 1".
Or it is executed in the case of "short opening 1" (see FIG. 13). The expected production of V is the electric chew 22
It is an effect that suggests whether or not the long opening is made, and further suggests the result of the hit / fail determination in FIG. 2 when the game ball enters the electric chew 22.

The expected effect of V is during the variable effect of FIG. 1 as shown in FIG. 44 (A) using the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when left-handed in a non-time saving state (here, a decorative pattern is used). It is executed when the game ball passes through the second gate 29 and is won with a normal symbol and the winning type is selected as "long opening 1" or "short opening 1". That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the normal symbol variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4505: YES), and the normal symbol variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4510).
In, the hit type is "from the information about the normal stop symbol data included in this command.
It is determined to be "long opening 1" or "short opening 1", and is executed by selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the expected effect of V. As the expected effect of V, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the display area of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is reduced and displayed in the display area HR1, and the variable effect of the special figure 1 is displayed until then. Using the area that has been performed, the expected cut-in effect of V that displays the image GA1 suggesting that the expected effect of V is started is executed. The display area HR
1 is provided in one corner of the display screen 7a. For the effect of the display area HR1, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: Y).
ES), the variation start process (FIG. 37: step S4460) is executed by setting the variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step S5020).

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a V-level challenge effect that displays an image GA2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 and an image GA3 that indicates an indicator capable of expressing an increase in points is executed. .. In this V-level challenge effect, the player can increase the point of the indicator of the image GA3 by pressing the effect button 63 to increase the V level. Even in this V-level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

When the hit type of the normal symbol is "short opening 1", the short opening of the electric chew 22 for 0.02 seconds (FIG. 14) is accompanied by the indicator, as shown in FIG. 44 (D). Image GA4 that lowers the point and suggests that the V level is down and the V level could not reach a certain level, and image GA5 that the V level is down and suggests that this time it cannot be expected to be a big hit.
The V level down effect that displays and is executed. In this V level down effect, FIG. 4
As shown in 4 (D), the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

On the other hand, if the hit type of the normal symbol is "long open 1", then 5 of the electric chew 22
As shown in FIG. 44 (E), the image GA6 suggests that the V level has increased and the V level has reached a certain level or higher by raising the point of the indicator with the long opening for a second (FIG. 14).
Then, the V level is raised to move to the next stage, and the V level up effect of displaying the image GA7 suggesting that the jackpot can be expected is executed. In this V level up effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), an image GA8 for urging the player to hit right for entering the game ball into the electric chew 22 for the transition to the next stage is displayed on the right. Perform a hitting suggestion effect. In this right-handed suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the display area HR1
Following the above, the variable effect of Special Figure 1 is shown. This right-handed suggestion effect is the display area HR.
It is executed until the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 displayed in 1 is completed. This right-handed suggestion effect is executed based on the normal symbol opening command (FIG. 37: step S4525) received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91.

If no ball has entered the electric chew 22, after the above-mentioned right-handed suggestion effect, FIG. 4 described above.
The V level down effect shown in 4 (D) is executed. This V-level down effect is executed based on the normal symbol ending command (FIG. 37: step S4535) received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91. On the other hand, when one or more balls enter the electric chew 22, after the above-mentioned right-handed suggestion effect, as a variable effect of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), the back side in which the V card and the lost card are mixed. V to display the image GA9 that shuffles the facing card
Perform a card shuffle effect. In this case, the display area HR2 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the variable state of the decorative symbol. The V-card shuffle effect and the effect of the display area HR2 are executed based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91 when the second start port 21 is awarded a prize.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V card shuffle effect, then, as shown in FIG. 44 (H), three shuffles are performed by the V card shuffle effect. One of the cards is selected and turned over, and the V card selection effect of displaying the image GA10 indicating that the turned card is a V card is executed. Display area HR
In 2, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the doublet symbol arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 big hit is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (I), the image GA suggesting that the jackpot game is executed.
The expected success effect of V that displays 11 and the right-handed suggestion image GA12 that encourages right-handedness is executed. This expected success effect of V suggests that the expected effect effect of V is successful and the expectation of the jackpot (1 type jackpot or 2 type jackpot) is high, in other words, the expectation degree that the jackpot game is executed is high. It is a production that suggests that. This expected success effect of V is started in the display area HR2 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the expected success effect of V is started, and after the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the expected success effect of V is started. It is configured so that the timing (time) until the time is equal to. "Equal" here does not mean an exact match, and there may be an error in timing as long as the player feels that they are equal. The error is, for example, ± 2.
About seconds can be exemplified. In the case of a small hit, after the expected success effect of this V, the small hit game is executed, and when the player passes V by right-handed hit, two kinds of big hits are made and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the fluctuation effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (type 2 big hit) game is executed even though the V has not passed (FIG. 44). (I)) is started. Then, during the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the same effect (FIG. 44 (I)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit together with the stop of the variable effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the V card shuffle effect, then one of the three cards shuffled by the V card shuffle effect as shown in FIG. 44 (J). A lost card selection effect is executed in which a card is selected and turned over, and an image GA13 indicating that the turned card is a lost card is displayed. In the display area HR2, the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (K), the expected failure effect of V displaying the image GA14 suggesting that the expected effect of V is a failure, and the big hit game is not executed due to a loss without a big hit or a small hit. To execute. In this case, in the display area HR2, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown by using a decorative symbol. If there is a hold of the special figure 2, after the expected failure effect of V, the process shifts to the V card shuffle effect (see FIG. 44 (G)) again. If there is no hold of the special figure 2, the production shifts to the normal effect corresponding to the special figure 1.

The variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (H), and (I) is the variation pattern “P1”.
This is an example of an effect executed when "3" (FIG. 12) is selected. FIGS. 44 (G), (J), (
The variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in K) is an example of the effect executed when the variation pattern “P14” (FIG. 12) is selected.

In addition, a V-level challenge effect (FIG. 44 (C)) and a V-level down effect (FIG. 44 (D)).
), The V level up effect (FIG. 44 (E)), and the right-handed suggestion effect (FIG. 44 (F)) show the variable effect of FIG. 1 shown in FIG. 44 (A) in the display area HR1. However, if the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is completed and there is a hold of the special figure 1, the variation effect corresponding to the next special figure 1 is continuously displayed.

Further, in the expected effect of V shown in FIG. 44, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is omitted. Further, in the effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 and 50 described later, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is also omitted.

[Hit game production]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game effect when the special figure 2 lottery is won. This winning game effect is executed when a big hit or a small hit is made in the lottery of the special figure 2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the opening command of the big hit game or the small hit game from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4475: YES), and in the opening effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4480). , When it is determined from the information about the special figure stop symbol data included in this command that the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, the corresponding opening effect start command is set and executed. This hit game effect: FIG. 45 (A) shows, for example, an effect suggesting that a big hit game is executed (V expected success effect: FIG. 44 (I), V roulette success effect: FIG. 4).
6 (C), successful targeting effect: It is executed after FIG. 48 (C).

First, at the start of the big hit game associated with the type 1 jackpot, or at the start of the small hit game associated with the small hit, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), the jackpot game is executed by the action of a predetermined character. The suggested image GB1 and the right-handed suggested image GB2 are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45B, an image GB3 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed using a predetermined character or the like and a right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed.

The effects of FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are continued in the type 1 jackpot game from the start of the jackpot game until a predetermined period (hereinafter, also referred to as “first game period”) elapses. Further, in the small hit game, the game is continued from the start of the small hit game until the first game period elapses. That is, in both the type 1 big hit game and the small hit game, the same content (similar) is produced during the first game period. It should be noted that this first game period is at least the opening time of the small hit game (opening pattern 23) (here, 0.01 seconds).
It is a time equal to or longer than the total time (1.61 seconds) with the opening time (here, 1.6 seconds) of the second large winning opening 35. Here, the first game period is the period from the start of the small hit game to the end of the small hit game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (
1.6 seconds) + ending time (3 seconds)) is set to 4.61 seconds. When the first game period has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game associated with the first-class jackpot, or when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small-hit game and the second-class jackpot by passing V is confirmed. As shown in FIG. 45 (C), the image GB4 clearly suggesting that the jackpot game is in progress.
And the right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed. That is, when two types of big hits are made after the small hit game, the effects shown in FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C) are executed in the same manner as when one type of big hit is made.

On the other hand, when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small hit game accompanying the small hit and the non-execution of the big hit game is confirmed by V non-passage, the non-execution of the big hit game is shown in FIG. 45 (D) instead of the image GB4. As shown, the image GB5 suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is displayed.

In the hit game production in the present embodiment, the production during the type 1 big hit game, the small hit game accompanying the small hit, and the production during the type 2 big hit game are the same (FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B)).
, (C)). In other words, the effect from the start of the type 1 jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game and the effect from the start of the small hit game to the end of the type 2 jackpot game are configured to be the same. Even if the two types of big hits are not executed after the small hits associated with the small hits, at least during the small hits game, the same effect as in the case of the one type big hits (FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B)). ) Is performed, and after the lapse of the first game period, a different effect (FIG. 45 (D)) from the case of the type 1 jackpot is performed. The "similar (same) production" here means that the content should be close enough to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the big hit and small hit productions, and the productions do not have to be exactly the same. .. For example, when some characters are different, when a part of a predetermined character's mode (for example, clothes, color of clothes, equipment) is different, or when the appearance timing of a predetermined character is slightly different. Naturally, it is included in the same production. Further, in the hit game production in the present embodiment, when two types of big hits are obtained after the small hit game, the big hit game production (FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B)) is started based on the fact that the V is passed by the small hit game. Instead of doing so, it is configured to start the big hit game effect at the start of the small hit game (that is, based on the definite display of the small hit symbol). In other words, in this embodiment, when a small hit is made,
At the time of the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game (for example, the effect of instructing the player to aim at V) is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, after the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display 41, the small hit game effect (
The timing (time) until the start of FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)) and the jackpot game effect (FIG. 45 (A), (B), (C) after the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. )) Is configured to be equal to the timing (time) until the start. As is clear from the above, the series of effects suggesting that the jackpot game is executed (expected success effect of V: FIG. 44 (I) → FIG. 45 (A) → FIG. 45 (B)) is small. In the case of a hit and the case of a type 1 jackpot, the same content (similar effect) is obtained for a predetermined period from the start of a series of effects. The predetermined period is a period equal to or longer than the period from the start of the expected success effect of V to the end of the small hit game at the time of winning the small hit. For example, when the expected success effect time of V is 5 seconds and the small hit game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. The series of effects suggesting that the jackpot game is executed are as follows: V roulette success effect: FIG. 46 (C), targeting success effect: FIG. 48, instead of V's expected success effect: FIG. 44 (I). (C)) may be used. Here, the V roulette success production time and the targeting success production time are both 5 seconds.

[Special figure 2 Fluctuation effect at the time of lottery (when the time is shortened)]
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation effect at the time of special drawing 2 lottery. The variable effect at the time of the special figure 2 lottery is the small hit of the special figure 2, the big hit of the special figure 2, or the special figure 2 in the time saving state.
It is executed at the time of loss. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), this command is used. When it is determined from the information about the included variation pattern that the variation pattern is "P16" to "P19" (FIG. 12), it is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step). S5020).

In the variable effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery, first, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), a V roulette effect that displays an image GC1 showing how the roulette having the loss zone and the V zone rotates is executed. In this case, the display area HR3 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the variable state of the decorative symbol.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the roulette that was rotating in the V roulette effect stops. The V zone selection effect for displaying the image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is the V zone is executed. In the display area HR3, after the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown, the doublet pattern arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 big hit is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), the image GC suggesting that the jackpot game is executed.
3 and the right-handed suggestion image GC4 are displayed, and the V roulette success effect is executed. This V roulette success production suggests that the V roulette production is successful and the expectation of the jackpot (1 type jackpot or 2 type jackpot) is high, in other words, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. It is a suggestive production. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), this V roulette success effect is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement in the display area HR2. It will be started. That is, the special symbol display 4
The timing (time) from the confirmation display of the small hit symbol to the start of the V roulette success effect, and the timing (time) from the confirmation display of the big hit symbol to the start of the V roulette success effect. , Are configured to be equal. In the case of a small hit, after this V roulette success production, a small hit game is executed, and V is performed by the player's right-handed strike.
After passing, it becomes a big hit of two kinds, and it shifts to a big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the fluctuation effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (type 2 big hit) game is executed regardless of whether or not the V has passed (FIG. 46). (C)) is started. Then, during the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment,
With the stop of the variable effect, the same effect is applied in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit (Fig. 46 (Fig. 46).
C)) is started. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the V roulette effect, FIG. 46 (D)
), The roulette wheel that was rotating in the V roulette effect is stopped, and the loss zone selection effect that displays the image GC5 indicating that the stop zone is the loss zone is executed. In the display area HR3, the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), the V roulette failure effect for displaying the image GC6 suggesting that the V roulette effect is a failure, the game is lost, and the jackpot game is not executed is executed. In the display area HR3, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown by using a decorative symbol. If there is a hold of the special figure 2, after the V roulette failure effect, the process shifts to the V roulette effect (see FIG. 46 (A)) again.

In the time saving state, the hit / fail judgment is made in the special figure 1 and a big hit (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P8" is selected) or a small hit (FIG. 12: fluctuation pattern "P9").
(When selected), as in the case of a big hit or a small hit in Special Figure 2, FIGS. 46 (A) to (
Perform the production of C). Further, in the case of a loss (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern “P10” is selected) in the case of the loss in the special figure 1, the same as in the case of the loss in the special figure 2, FIGS. 46 (A) and (D).
), (E) is executed. Further, in the time saving state, there is a loss in the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern “P19” is selected), or a loss in the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 (FIG. 12: fluctuation pattern). (When "P11" is selected), a variable effect for quickly notifying the loss is executed using a decorative pattern.

[Countdown effect (during time-saving fluctuation effect)]
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the countdown effect. This countdown production is
This is an effect of displaying an image of the remaining number of times of time reduction on the display screen 7a during each variation effect in the time reduction state. The countdown effect is shortened after the jackpot game and starts from the first change of the special symbol. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the mode status M Is "2", it is executed by setting the corresponding variable effect start command (FIG. 38: step S5020).
The "remaining number of times of time reduction of the countdown effect" indicated by the image is determined with reference to the time reduction effect scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the time reduction effect scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the "display time reduction remaining number" indicated by the time reduction remaining number image is the same number of times as the actual time saving remaining number (actual remaining time reduction number of times) until the end of the time saving state, or the number of times less than the actual time saving remaining number. Is shown as a pseudo time-saving remaining number of times. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of the effect corresponding to “scenario C”.

In the countdown effect based on "Scenario C", first, as shown in FIG. 47 (A),
The countdown effect A is displayed. In this countdown effect A, in the first fluctuation after the time reduction state is set, the time reduction remaining number image GDA with the "display time reduction remaining number" set to 5 is displayed, and the second to fifth fluctuations are the previous fluctuations. The displayed time reduction remaining number image GDA representing the number of times obtained by subtracting one from the displayed time reduction remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect A,
In the second fluctuation, the time saving remaining number image GDA with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 4 times is displayed, and 5
In the variable eye, the time-reduced remaining number image GDA with the "display time-reduced remaining number" as one is displayed.

When the display of the time reduction remaining number image GDA of the fifth variation in the countdown effect A is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), the charge effect A is executed during the variation effect of the fifth variation. In this charge effect A, a charge image CHA suggesting that the "display time reduction remaining number" is charged (increased) about 10 times is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (C), the countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, in the sixth variation, which is the next variation of the charge effect A, the charge amount (10 times) is subtracted by one from the remaining number (1 time) in the previous variation (fifth variation). The number of times (10 times) increased by the number of times) is set as the "display time reduction remaining number". The time saving remaining number image GDB is displayed, and the 7th to 15th fluctuations are one from the remaining number shown in the previous fluctuation. The time saving remaining number image GDB showing the subtracted remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect B, 6
The image GDB of the remaining number of time reductions in which the "remaining number of display time reductions" is 10 is displayed in the variable eye, and the image GDB of the remaining number of time reductions in which the "remaining number of display time reductions" is 9 is displayed in the 7th variation. At the fifteenth variation, the time saving remaining number image GDB with the "display time saving remaining number" as one is displayed.

When the display of the time reduction remaining number image GDB of the 15th variation in the countdown effect B is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 47 (D), the charge effect B is executed during the variation effect of the 15th variation. In this charge effect B, a charge image CHB suggesting that the "display time reduction remaining number" is charged (increased) by about 84 times is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (E), the countdown effect C is executed. In this countdown effect C, in the 16th variation, which is the next variation of the charge effect B, the previous variation (15).
The number of times (84 times) increased by the charge (84 times) to the number of times (0 times) subtracted from the remaining number of times (1 time) in the variable eye) is defined as the "display time reduction remaining number" Image GDC
Is displayed, and from the 17th variation to the 99th variation, a time-saving remaining number image GDC representing the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting one from the remaining number of times indicated by the previous variation is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect C, the time reduction remaining number image GDC with the "display time reduction remaining number" set to 84 is displayed at the 16th variation, and the time saving remaining number with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 83 times at the 17th variation. The remaining number of times The image GDC is displayed.

The countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing of each variation effect in the time saving state. For example, it may be executed at the start timing of each variation effect, or may be executed at the end timing of each variation effect. Further, during each variation effect, the image of the number of remaining time reductions may be continuously displayed.

[One-time production of crying (production of the first fluctuation (special figure 2) after the end of the time saving state)]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the one-time effect of crying. This one-time effect of crying is a variation effect executed by the next variation of the variation when the hold of the special figure 2 is held in the last variation of the time reduction state, that is, the first effect after the time reduction state. It is a fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), a special effect flag is used. When is ON, it is executed by setting the corresponding variable effect start command (FIG. 38: step S5020).
).

In the one-time production of crying, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the image GE1 showing how the "target" consisting of the hit zone and the loss zone is rotating, and the state advantageous to the player are the last. The targeting start effect of displaying the image GE2 indicating that the image is GE2 is executed. In this case, the display area HR4 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the variable state of the decorative symbol.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, the arrow hits the hit zone as shown in FIG. 48 (B) after the target hit start effect. A hit effect for displaying the image GE3 indicating that is executed. In the display area HR4, after the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown, the doublet pattern arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 big hit is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the image GE suggesting that the jackpot game is executed.
4 and the right-handed suggestion image GE5 that encourages right-handedness are displayed, and the target is successful, and the jackpot (
A successful targeting effect is performed, which suggests that the expectation of the 1st type jackpot or the 2nd type jackpot is high, in other words, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), this target success effect is performed in the display area HR2.
It starts after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement. That is, the timing (time) from the confirmation display of the small hit symbol on the special symbol display 41 to the start of the successful targeting effect, and the period from the confirmation display of the big hit symbol to the start of the successful targeting effect. It is configured so that the timing (time) of is equal to.
In the case of a small hit, the small hit game is executed after this successful hitting effect, and when the player passes V by right-handed hit, two types of big hits are made and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the fluctuation effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (type 2 big hit) game is executed regardless of whether or not the V has passed (FIG. 48). (C
)) Start. Then, during the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, along with the stop of the variable effect, the same effect (in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit)
FIG. 48 (C)) is started. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. In addition, the display area H in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit.
Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed on R2 are different, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the targeting start effect, then FIG. 48
As shown in (D), the target loss effect for displaying the image GE6 indicating that the arrow hits the target loss zone is executed. In the display area HR4, the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the target hit failure effect of displaying the image GE7 suggesting that the target hit is a failure and the big hit game is not executed due to a loss without a big hit or a small hit is executed. .. In the display area HR4, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown by using a decorative symbol.

In addition, the effect shown in FIGS. 48 (A) to 48 (C) in the one-time effect of crying is when the variation pattern P13 (see FIG. 12) is selected in the first variation of the transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. The effect shown in FIGS. 48 (A), (D), and (E) above is an example of the effect executed in FIG.
See) is an example of the effect performed when is selected.

9. Operation of the movable board The operation of the movable board (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 58. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display a specific image on the image display device 7 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation at the time of turning on the power, or the like, or may display a specific image on the first movable accessory 14.
And display / light emission control is performed such that the second movable accessory 15 emits light in a specific mode.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. 49 shows the first
It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement (advancement direction movement) of a movable accessory 14 in the advance direction (advancement direction movement). FIG. 50 shows
It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the image display device 7. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the first movable accessory 14. 53 and 54 are explanatory views illustrating the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14 includes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14.
Includes R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 has a retracted position in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a.
It can be stationary at the home position) (first aspect). At this time, the left movable accessory 14
A part of L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a state where they can be visually recognized. In the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. 49, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) from the state of FIG. By moving, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 50, and one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed (second aspect). Here, the coalesced accessory forms the contour of the face. In this second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united is
On the front surface of the image display device 7, a part of the display screen 7a near the center is covered, and the display screen 7a stands still in a visible state from the opening formed in the center. That is, the united accessory is configured so that only the outline of the face is formed, there is no central portion of the face, and the display screen 7a can be visually recognized instead. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united accessory, so that the human face is completed as a whole. That is, a combination effect of the character and the image that completes one object (for example, a human face) by displaying the insufficient part (for example, the central part of the face) in the combined character as an image on the display screen 7a. Can be done. The target completed by the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to the human face. For example, it may be the entire human body, a robot, or the like. That is, the head, body, right arm, and both legs may be completed by the combined accessory, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 can move (evacuate) from the advance position of FIGS. 50 and 51 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the state of FIG. 49, and is stationary there. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 52, the combined accessory can rotate vertically in front of the display screen 7a. That is, the united accessory can rotate about an axis parallel to and horizontal to the display screen 7a as a rotation axis, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. At this time, the central opening of the united accessory gradually becomes an elliptical shape narrow in the vertical direction when viewed from the player. On the display screen 7a,
The image of the human face to be displayed is deformed according to the deformation of the opening into an elliptical shape. Thereby, for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a can be used to produce an effect as if a human face is bowing.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be capable of emitting light. Specifically, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side on the surface of the united accessory (decorative member), and each of them can be switched on and off. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the right movable accessory 14
R can be made to emit light in conjunction with (corresponding to) the light emission of the frame lamp 66. Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the right movable accessory 14R and the left movable accessory 14L can be interlocked with each other to emit light.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 shows the second
It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the movable accessory 15. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable and left and right rotationally movable. The second movable accessory 15 is
As shown in FIG. 1, it is possible to stand still at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 55 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, the decorative portion can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise (rotated clockwise in the figure) in front of the display screen 7a, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 57, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can both perform the first combination effect by being in the second mode. That is, when both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advance position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can be partially overlapped and combined to stand still.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are the second movable accessory 15.
Covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15
It is possible to perform a second combination effect in which and is tilted at a predetermined angle. In this second combination effect, after the first combination effect, two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilting) together, and each of them moves to the advance position in a tilted state and overlaps with each other. In some cases, the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the first combination effect.

10. Other production examples, effect examples, modification examples, and embodiment examples of the present embodiment Each effect example (display effect example, accessory movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

Hereinafter, fluctuation timing change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. This fluctuation timing change effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and analyzes the variation effect start command.
When the instruction to execute the variation timing change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory are included. 15 is driven.

[Variation timing change effect A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect A. In the variation timing change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has 2
The set of decorative patterns is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. Display screen 7a The pending display position at the bottom center (
Above the rectangular image), the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. 2 from the right
A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position, which is the third from the right (here, the leftmost side). Here, the hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, the star-shaped hold icon, the black spherical hold icon, and the white spherical hold icon, the star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical hold icon is 2. The second highest hit expectation, the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the fluctuation where the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position.
At the same time that the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, 2
Two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.
That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively low expectation of winning, the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start to change at the same time and are stopped and displayed at the same time. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the hold icon 9 of the black sphere at the first hold display position
A moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the stop display is maintained for the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). As shown in FIG. 59 (D), as soon as the hold icon 9A of the black sphere reaches the hold display position, the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. That is, when the hold icon 9C is a hold icon of a black sphere, the stop display of the two decorative symbols is not simultaneous, but
It is configured so that the timing of the stop display is off. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol 2
Although l, 8c, and 8r are supposed to be stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R,
It may be the opposite. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change (may be random) for each change. As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon 9C, which is a black spherical icon having a relatively medium expectation of winning, two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) are used.
While the decorative pattern) starts to change at the same time, the stop display is not at the same time and the timing is off.
As shown in FIG. 59 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position
Moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbol starts variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative pattern. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative symbol starts variable display. In this embodiment, the second decorative pattern 8L,
It is assumed that 8C and 8R start to change before the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c and 8r, but the opposite may be true. Also, which one starts the fluctuation first may change (may be random) for each fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continue the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change (may be random) for each change. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped hold icon 9C with a relatively high expectation of winning, the change start timing of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the stop display are displayed. The timings are different. FIG. 59 (J
), The hold icon 9A of the white sphere at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. In the fluctuation where the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position, FIG. 59 (A)
As shown in the above, at the same time when the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

[Variation timing change effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect B. In the variation timing change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has 3
The decorative patterns of the set are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes 8 ml of the left decorative symbol, 8 mc of the middle decorative symbol, and 8 mr of the right decorative symbol, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not the hit is achieved by the combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.
A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, which is the second from the right. 3 from the right
A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position (here, the leftmost side). Here, the hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, which are a star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon.
The star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in the fluctuation where the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position.
At the same time that the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, 3
Two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the hold icon reached (
The variable effect corresponding to the hold icon) is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8 ml, 8mc, 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. To. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively low expectation of winning, three decorative symbols (first)
The decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) start to change at the same time, and are stopped and displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the hold icon 9 of the black sphere at the first hold display position
A moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the stop display is maintained for the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol). As shown in FIG. 60 (D), at the same time when the hold icon 9A of the black sphere reaches the hold display position, the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. To start. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbol 8m.
The first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while l, 8mc, and 8mr continue the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third
The decorative symbols 8 ml, 8 mc, and 8 mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. That is, when the hold icon 9C is a hold icon of a black sphere, the stop display of the three decorative symbols is not simultaneous, and the stop timing of the first decorative symbol is the stop of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol. It is configured to be out of sync with the timing. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change (may be random) for each change. Further, the timing at which each of the three decorative patterns stops may be different. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon 9C, which is a black spherical icon with a relatively medium expectation of winning,
While the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) start to change at the same time, the stop display is not all at the same time, but the timing is shifted at least in a part.
As shown in FIG. 60 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position
Moves toward the hold display position. At this time, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol,
Of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative pattern. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start moving and start variable display before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position reaches the hold display position. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative symbol starts variable display. In the present embodiment, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start to change before the first decorative symbol, but they may be opposite. Also, which one starts the fluctuation first may change (may be random) for each fluctuation. Further, the timing at which the three decorative patterns start to fluctuate may be different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be variablely displayed. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol), but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change (may be random) for each change. Further, the timing at which each of the three decorative patterns stops may be different. As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon 9C having a relatively high expectation of winning, at least a part of the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol). In, the fluctuation start timing and the stop display timing are different from each other.
After FIG. 60 (J), the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed. Start variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8
r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8 ml, 8mc, 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

[Variation timing change effect C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect C. FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B) of the variation timing change effect C are shown in FIG. 60 (F) of the variation timing change effect B.
And the same as in FIG. 60 (G). That is, FIG. 61 (A) of FIG. 61 (A) of the fluctuation timing change effect C.
60 (A) to 60 (E) are executed before. In FIG. 61 (A), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed, and then the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8 ml, 8mc, 8r are stopped and displayed at the same time. .. The first decorative pattern is the left decorative pattern 8l,
It is a set of symbols that includes a middle decorative symbol 8c and a right decorative symbol 8r, and can notify whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative pattern is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C,
It is a set of symbols that includes the right decorative symbol 8R and can notify whether or not it is a hit by a combination of these stop symbols. The third decorative pattern is 8 ml of the left decorative pattern, 8 mc of the middle decorative pattern, and 8 of the right decorative pattern.
It is a set of symbols that includes mr and can notify whether or not it is a hit by a combination of these stop symbols. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the black spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears) is executed. Two hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, which is the second from the right (here, the leftmost side). The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, the star-shaped hold icon, the black spherical hold icon, and the white spherical hold icon, the star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical hold icon is 2. The second highest hit expectation, the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position
Moves toward the hold display position. At this time, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol,
Of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative pattern. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start moving and start variable display before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position reaches the hold display position. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the second movable accessory 15 advances downward, stands still in the second mode, and then moves to the retracted position (first mode). The first decorative symbol disappears from the display as the second movable accessory 15 moves without starting to change. This suggests that the pseudo-continuous production starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, after that, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the first decorative pattern starts to change again, and 3
All three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit "555". The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same hit as the second decorative symbol.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the fluctuation timing change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 59 (D) to (H) and FIGS. 60 (D) to (H).
, As shown in FIGS. 61 (D) to 61 (H), a first effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and a first decorative pattern after the first effect. Can execute the second effect in which the second decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the second decorative symbol does not start the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), in the second effect, the hold icon is changed to the hold icon in the second decorative symbol before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by the shift movement. The corresponding fluctuation is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (D) to (H) and FIGS. 61 (D) to (H), in the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first is displayed. 3 The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed,
In the second effect, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and
It is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 59 (H) to (J), (A), and FIGS. 61 (H) to (J).
, (A), after the first effect, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the second effect. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), FIGS. 60 (D) to (H), and FIGS. 61.
As shown in (D) to (H), when the hold icon is star-shaped, the second effect is performed after the first effect, and when the hold icon is a white sphere, after the first effect. The third production is performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variation timing change effect.
[Modification 1]
The first variation of FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), the second variation of FIGS. 59 (C) to 59 (F), and FIG. 59 (G).
)-(J) may be executed in any order. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. Also, the same type of variation may be performed repeatedly. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61. The type of the hold icon is not limited to the above embodiment.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be arbitrary. As long as the first decorative symbol 2l, the second decorative symbol 8L, and the third decorative symbol 8ml are symbols displayed on the image display device 7, the type, shape, and display method of the symbols are not limited to the above.

[Modification 3]
The first decorative symbol 2l, the second decorative symbol 8L, and the third decorative symbol 8ml are not limited to the above-mentioned modes of variable display indicating that they are changing. For example, the variable display may be in a mode that is not displayed on the image display device 7. Further, the numbers may be displayed in such a manner that the numbers move at a high speed and the numbers cannot be discriminated, or they may move at a speed that can be discriminated. Further, the fluctuation speed may change on the way.

[Modification 4]
The first decorative symbol shall start to change when the hold icon reaches the hold display position. However, it may be immediately before or after that. Immediately before and after here is, for example, a range of a few seconds before and after.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
After the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first effect that the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the second decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
In the second effect, the variation corresponding to the hold icon is started in the second decorative symbol before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by the shift movement.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1 or the aspect A1-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
In the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
In the second effect, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4, which is subordinate to aspect A1-2.
When the hold icon is the first aspect, the second effect is performed after the first effect.
When the hold icon is the second aspect, the third effect is performed after the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the symbol direction change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. This symbol direction change effect can be executed during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107
Analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and drives the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 when an instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect is included.

[Design direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect A. In the design direction change effect A,
First, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the decorative pattern 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Of 8C and 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L
Each number constituting is moved in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the right. That is,
Each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower left direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8
C and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. In particular,
The specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is the first
It is located on the upper side in the vertical direction from the position of. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Stop is displayed. .. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changing, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R is
Frame in from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and move diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is variablely displayed in a direction different from the variable direction of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the fluctuation display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2"
”) Temporarily rests when it is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a. Next, FIG. 62 (F)
As shown in, a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image having different contents. Specific image C
HA covers a part of the upper part of a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. In particular,
The specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the direction is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the fluctuation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable direction different from the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is the direction of travel (
It is displayed facing down). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, ""
2 ”) is temporarily stopped when it is located near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Next, FIG. 62 (
As shown in J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C), but is stopped and displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Design direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect B. In the design direction change effect B,
First, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the decorative pattern 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Of 8C and 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8
C and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. In particular,
The specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is the first
It is located on the upper side in the vertical direction from the position of. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Is stopped and displayed. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8
C is not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changing, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R is framed in from near the upper center of the display screen 7a.
Move diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R is the direction (posture) of the number.
Moves while tilting to the left. That is, it moves in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the numbers when the left decorative symbol 8L is changed. Each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. In particular,
The specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the direction is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop and display at that position. Will be done. With the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner. In other words, the fluctuation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C
Each number constituting is moved in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is,
It moves in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the numbers when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are changed. Each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the fluctuation display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2")
) Temporarily rests when it is located near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also
The orientation (posture) is tilted as in the case of a specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C). Specific image CHA and
The specific numbers (medium decorative pattern 8C) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (I), an effect is performed in which a specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. In particular,
The specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the direction is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop and display at that position. Will be done. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L
, The middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as fixed stop.

[Design direction change effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect C. In the design direction change effect C,
First, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the decorative pattern 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Of 8C and 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8
C and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed below this specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part below a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. In particular,
The specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is the first
It is located on the upper side in the vertical direction from the position of. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Stop is displayed. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8
C is not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changing, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R is framed in from near the upper center of the display screen 7a.
Move diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R is the direction (posture) of the number.
Moves while tilting to the left. That is, it moves in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the numbers when the left decorative symbol 8L is changed. Each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the specific image CHA is displayed below the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part below a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. In particular,
The specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the direction is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the stop display is displayed at that position. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the fluctuation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable direction different from the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (
Here, when "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stands still. Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (J), a specific image CHA is above this specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C).
Is not displayed, but is displayed as a stop. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the design direction change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B), the left decorative symbol is oriented along the first direction and is oriented along the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right). After the first effect and the first effect, which are variablely displayed in the direction), as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) to 62 (E), the left decorative pattern is different from the first direction (direction). For example, it is possible to execute the second effect of stopping and displaying in the direction along the vertical direction). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction (for example, the diagonally right direction). Later, FIG. 62 (C)
), The direction is along the second direction (for example, the vertical direction) while moving toward the second position located above the first position in the vertical direction, and the second position is shown. After reaching the position, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), it moves toward the third position located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position while maintaining the direction along the second direction. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62B and 62C, in the second production,
When the left decorative pattern reaches the first position and then moves toward the second position, the specific image CH
A makes it difficult to see part of it. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), after the second effect, the right decorative symbol is newly moved to the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right) from the state where it is not displayed. After the third effect, which is variablely displayed in the direction along the first direction, and as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the right decorative pattern is along the second direction. It is possible to execute the fourth effect, which is stopped and displayed in the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), after the fourth effect, the intermediate decorative pattern is oriented in a third direction (for example, a vertical direction) different from the first direction. It is possible to execute the fifth effect which is variablely displayed in the direction along the third direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the first direction is the image display device 7.
The direction is oblique to the display screen 7a of the above, and the second direction is a direction along the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pattern direction change effect.
[Modification 1]
The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, the left decorative symbol 8L bounces and becomes a direction along the vertical direction after the fluctuation display, but if the direction is different from the fluctuation direction, the direction may be along a direction other than the vertical direction. good. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L may be tilted to the left and stopped and displayed after bouncing.
It may be tilted sideways and stopped. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed by changing its direction without bouncing after the variable display.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C, the fluctuation of the right decorative symbol may be visible (variation display is displayed) before the left decorative symbol is stopped, or after the left decorative symbol is stopped. Fluctuations may be visible (variation display is displayed). The same applies to the medium decorative design.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be set to the symbol direction change effect C. Further, for example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the change direction and the stop mode of the intermediate decorative symbol may be set to the symbol direction change effect C.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern.
The first effect in which the first decorative pattern is variablely displayed in the direction along the first direction and in the direction along the first direction, and the first effect.
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
In the second effect, after the first decorative symbol reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction, the second decorative symbol is located on one side in the vertical direction from the first position. While moving toward the position, the direction becomes the direction along the second direction, and after reaching the second position, the second direction is reached.
A third position located on the other side of the vertical direction from the second position while maintaining the direction along the direction of
Move towards the position of
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1 or the aspect A2-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image.
In the second effect, when the first decorative symbol reaches the first position and then moves toward the second position, a part of the first decorative symbol becomes difficult to see due to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative symbol that constitutes a set of decorative symbols that can notify whether or not the image is a hit, together with the first decorative symbol.
After the second effect, the second decorative pattern is newly displayed in a direction along the first direction from a non-displayed state in a direction along the first direction. And the production of
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the direction along the second direction can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-4.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative symbol that constitutes a set of decorative symbols that can notify whether or not the image is a hit, together with the first decorative symbol.
After the fourth effect, the fifth effect in which the third decorative pattern is varied and displayed in a direction along the third direction different from the first direction. Is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5.
The first direction is a direction that is oblique to the display means.
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the character symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. This character symbol cooperation effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory symbol cooperation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is imaged. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107
Analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and drives the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 when an instruction to execute the accessory symbol cooperation effect is included.

[Character design cooperation production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the character symbol cooperation effect A. The character symbol cooperation effect A is one of the variation pattern effects including the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (J) are executed with one variation. In the accessory symbol cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is a part of the display screen 7a. It stands still at the advance position in front of it. As the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually collapsed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols, and the fluctuation is executed again. That is, you can notice that the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.
Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. You can make an impression and improve your interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the variable display is started again. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), FIG. 6
The pseudo-continuous continuation suggestion effect shown in 5 (G) is executed. The pseudo-ream continuation suggestion effect is the same as the above-mentioned pseudo-ream start suggestion effect. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position. With the movement to this advance position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8 displayed on the display screen 7a
The shapes of C and 8R change (deform). Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in shape in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, decorative patterns 8L, 8C,
8R is crushed by the second movable accessory 15 and deformed so as to be distorted. It should be noted that the mode of modification may be different from the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (I), the variable display is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stop display. Here, the stop display is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Character design cooperation production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the character symbol cooperation effect B. The character symbol cooperation production B is one of the fluctuation pattern productions including the pseudo-continuous production. FIGS. 66 (A) to (B) are the previous one fluctuations, and FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) are. It is the following one variation including the pseudo-continuous production. First, FIG. 66 (A)
), Two sets of decorative patterns are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop display). At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. Next, FIG. 66
As shown in (C), the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r start variable display. 1st decorative pattern 8L, 8C
, 8R keeps the stop display. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position.

Next, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, first, in the state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue the variable display, the first decoration that continues to stop at the previous confirmed stop display result "123". The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears temporarily, and instead, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display of "I'm going !!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a to display. It stands still at the front advance position that covers a part of the screen 7a. After the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change (deform) in shape as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position. do. Here, the shapes of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually collapsed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8
C and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15 and deformed so as to be distorted. Since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols, and the change is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue to be variablely displayed. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. I can impress that,
It is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue the variable display, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. As a result, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue to be variable display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (including temporary stop display). ), And then, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8
C and 8R start the variable display again. That is, the pseudo-continuous production is executed. Then, FIG. 6
As shown in 6 (J), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r
Both are displayed as confirmed stop. Here, the stop display is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Character design cooperation production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the character symbol cooperation effect C. The character symbol cooperation effect C is one of the variation pattern effects including the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIGS. 67 (A) to (B) are the previous one variation, and FIGS. 67 (C) to (J) are. It is the following one variation including the pseudo-continuous production. First, FIG. 67 (A)
), Two sets of decorative patterns are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop display). At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. Next, FIG. 67
As shown in (C), the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r start variable display. 1st decorative pattern 8L, 8C
, 8R keeps the stop display. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position.

Next, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 67 (D) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, first, in the state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue the variable display, the first decoration that continues to stop at the previous confirmed stop display result "123". The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears temporarily, and instead, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display of "I'm going !!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. A part of the screen 7a is covered, and a rotation operation is executed at that position. As a result, after the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again are the second movable accessory 15.
The shape changes (deforms) with the downward movement and rotation of the. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are cracked in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15, and the first decorative symbols are cracked.
The shape gradually collapses. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15, and are distorted and deformed so as to be cracked. The player is the first stop displayed
Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed, distorted, and cracked by the second movable accessory 15, the stop-displayed symbol is not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again.
That is, you can notice that the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 has returned to the retracted position, one large character (that is, "OARO") similar to the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. .. The image displayed on the display screen 7a is
The image may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented by the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and does not have to have exactly the same color and shape. At this time, the first decorative pattern 8L
, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are neither displayed. here,
Both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. , It is possible to impress the player that it is a special production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2
The fluctuation display of both l, 8c, and 8r is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue to be variable display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (including temporary stop display). ), And then FIG. 67 (
As shown in I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the variable display again. That is, the pseudo-continuous production is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (J), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8
Both C and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c and 8r are displayed as fixed stop. Here, the stop display is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the character symbol cooperation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8
After the first effect in which C and 8R are stopped and displayed, and after the first effect as shown in FIG. 65 (G).
As the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position that covers a part of the display screen 7a, the second effect of changing the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), in the second production,
As the second movable accessory 15 moves, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are distorted. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the second movable accessory 15
Has a decorative portion represented as "OARO", and as shown in FIG. 65 (H), after the second effect, a third effect in which "OARO" is displayed on the display screen 7a is performed. Can be done.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (C) to (J).
As shown in, the first effect and the second effect are executed during one change, and in the first effect, the first effect is stopped after the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed. In the displayed mode, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (G) to (J).
As shown in, after the third effect, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) and 67 (C), one of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a decorative pattern, and in the first effect, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the character symbol cooperation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the character symbol cooperation effect A, it is assumed that FIGS. 65 (A) to (J) are executed with one variation. However, FIGS. 65 (A) to (B) and FIGS. 65 (C) to (J) may have different variations.
Further, in the character symbol cooperation effects B and C, FIGS. 66 (A) to (B) and FIGS. 67 (A) to (B) are changed by one, and FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and FIGS. 67. It is assumed that (C) to (J) are the following one variation. However, FIGS. 66 (A) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (J) may be executed with one variation.

[Modification 2]
The modes of deformation of the decorative symbols illustrated in the accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C are examples thereof, and are not limited to these modes. That is, the deformation of the decorative symbol when the second movable accessory 15 advances is not limited to the distorted mode. For example, a decorative pattern may collapse and fall apart.
It may have the same shape but be smaller in size.

[Modification 3]
In the character symbol cooperation production A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set to specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. A set of decorative patterns 8 is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Although it is assumed that only L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear or may not be continuously displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Here, the variable display means a state in which the variable mode is visually displayed.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the character symbol cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 66 (E) of the character symbol cooperation effect B, the effect of FIG. 67 (E) of the character symbol cooperation effect C may be performed. Further, for example, in the pseudo-continuous production of FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) of the character symbol cooperation effect B, the pseudo-continuous effect of the character symbol cooperation effect A may be executed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine including a movable accessory that can be moved in front of the display means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
The first effect that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and
After the first effect, it is possible to perform a second effect in which the shape of the decorative pattern changes as the movable accessory moves to the advance position that covers a part of the display means. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1.
In the second effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted with the movement of the movable accessory.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1 or the aspect A3-2.
The movable accessory has a decorative portion on which a specific object is represented.
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific object is displayed on the display means can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-3.
After the third effect, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4.
The first effect and the second effect are executed during one variation.
In the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern.
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. This specific image symbol cooperation effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is imaged. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperation effect, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory Thing 1
Drive 5.

[Specific image design cooperation production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out of line "123".
The stop display (including the temporary stop display) is displayed with. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

After that, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by the frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA is a decorative pattern 8L which is stopped and displayed.
, 8C, 8R, and then reciprocate along the horizontal direction. Here "
"Reciprocating along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a generally horizontal direction. That is, anything that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in the one that is moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the stop display are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is
It is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, "the image is displayed on the front side" with respect to other images means that when the two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the front side (front side). This means that the images are displayed without being chipped in the overlapping portion of the two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapped part of the two images. , The image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

As shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R by reciprocating in the horizontal direction, and is displayed on the front side thereof and FIG.
As shown in 8 (E), both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped with each other, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed.
It reciprocates horizontally on the back side of these. By reciprocating on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R
A mode in which both of the above are overlapped and displayed on the back side thereof, and a mode in which the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped and displayed on the back side thereof as shown in FIG. 68 (G). The production that repeats is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), a fade-out effect is performed. In particular,
The decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are the decorative patterns 8L, 8C of the specific image CHA.
, In the state of being located on the back side of 8R, the image is gradually thinned so that it gradually becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player gradually becomes difficult to see the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stop display. Here, the stop display is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Specific image design cooperation production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the variable display are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 at "789". Stop display (including temporary stop display)
Will be done. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "line up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that are lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and 69 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (C) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a and moves downward on the display screen 7a. do. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA is a decorative pattern 8L which is stopped and displayed.
, 8C, 8R, and then reciprocate along the horizontal direction. Here "
"Reciprocating along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a generally horizontal direction. That is, anything that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in the one that is moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the stop display are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is
It is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, "the image is displayed on the front side" with respect to other images means that when the two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the front side (front side). This means that the images are displayed without being chipped in the overlapping portion of the two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapped part of the two images. , The image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

As shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R due to the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof and the specific image. As shown in FIG. 68 (E) of the symbol cooperation effect A, an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the specific image CHA has the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, which are stopped and displayed.
It is displayed on the back side of 8R and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. Decorative pattern 8
As shown in FIG. 69 (C), the reciprocating movement on the back side of L, 8C, and 8R overlaps both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof and the specific image. As shown in FIG. 68 (F) of the symbol cooperation effect A, the effect of overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R and repeating the mode displayed on the back side thereof is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are the specific image C.
With the HA located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the image is gradually thinned and gradually becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player gradually becomes difficult to see the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stop display. Here, the stop display is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB
Is displayed. The jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that the jackpot has been confirmed, and here, the characters "I did it!" Are displayed. Here, two jackpot confirmation suggestion images CHB are displayed. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB move to positions overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the jackpot. Specific image CH
Both A and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed on the front side of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front surface of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and further, the specific image CH is displayed.
A jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed in front of A. In this way, by overlapping a plurality of images, it is possible to produce a three-dimensional effect in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA is stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Move back and forth. Left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C during stop display
Since the right decorative symbols 8R are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA continuously has the decorative pattern 8L,
It is displayed on the front side of 8C and 8R. The specific image CHA is reciprocated in the horizontal direction.
As shown in FIG. 69 (G), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped and displayed on the front side thereof, and as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and Right decorative pattern 8
An effect that overlaps with both of R and repeats the mode displayed on the front side of these is performed.
After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), the specific image CHA is a decorative pattern 8L which is stopped and displayed.
It is displayed on the back side of 8C and 8R, and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. As shown in FIG. 69 (H), by reciprocating motion on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in FIG. 69 (H).
The mode that overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and is displayed on the back side of these,
As shown in FIG. 69 (C), both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped with each other, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (I) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are the specific image C.
With the HA located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the image is gradually thinned and gradually becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player can notice that the jackpot game is started after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the jackpot that are stopped and displayed gradually become difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), the right-handed image MGU is displayed, and then the jackpot game is executed.

[Specific image design cooperation production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. The specific image CHA is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. Specific image CH
In A, a specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a.
The display screen 7a is moved to a position overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specific image CH
A is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variablely displayed. Specific image CHA
Represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the specific image CHA is a decorative pattern 8L which is variablely displayed.
, 8C, 8R, and reciprocate along the horizontal direction. Here, "reciprocating along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a generally horizontal direction. That is, anything that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in the one that is moving in the horizontal direction. At this time, the specific image CH being moved
A is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, "the image is displayed on the front side" with respect to other images means that when the two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the front side (front side). This means that the images are displayed without being chipped in the overlapping portion of the two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapped part of the two images. , The image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R
The fluctuation speed of is slowed down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction with the numbers visible. Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving numerical images constituting the left decorative symbol 8L. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
The fluctuation speed of is slowed down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction with the numbers visible. on the other hand,
The fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "1"). Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, the right decorative pattern 8R
Overlaps multiple moving numeric images that make up. It also overlaps with the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the right decorative symbol 8R. In addition, it is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), the medium decorative symbol 8C among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R
The fluctuation speed of is slowed down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction with the numbers visible. on the other hand,
The fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "7"). Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C
Overlaps multiple moving numeric images that make up. It also overlaps with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the intermediate decorative pattern 8C. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8 during the stop display are displayed.
It is displayed on the front side of each of R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the deviation "167", a change effect in which the shape of the specific image CHA is changed is executed. Here, as one of the change effects, an effect of increasing the specific image CHA is performed, but the mode of change is not limited to this. For example, in the specific image CHA, the content of the image may be changed to a different content. Even during the change effect, the specific image CHA reciprocates on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are continuously stopped and displayed. By this change effect, the decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed at the wrong eye
, 8C, 8R can be expected to change again, and the interest can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a pluralization effect in which a plurality of specific image CHAs are displayed is executed. Here, as one of the plurality of effects, an effect of additionally displaying one specific image CHA is performed, but the mode of the pluralization is not limited to this. For example, specific image CHA
May be additionally displayed in combination of two or more. Even during the pluralization effect, the specific image CHA before being added is reciprocating on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are continuously stopped and displayed. The newly added specific image CHA is reciprocating on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. With this multiple effect, it is possible to further raise the expectation that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the wrong eye will change again.
It is possible to improve the interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), the effect of frame-out of the two specific image CHAs is performed. Here, one of the two specific image CHAs moves upwards, the other moves downwards, and is framed out at the same time. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (I), a pseudo-ream suggestion image NKM suggesting that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started (start of pseudo-ream) is displayed.
Here, the pseudo-ream suggestion image NKM represents the characters "second time !!" indicating the number of pseudo-reams. At this time, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), when the pseudo-continuous suggestion image NKM disappears, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner again.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the specific image symbol cooperation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to 68 (E), a first effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the figure. 68 (F) ~
As shown in (G), after the first effect, the second effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to 68 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the first effect and the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8
R includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R that can notify whether or not a hit is made. After the image CHA is displayed overlapping with one or more of the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle It is displayed so as to overlap with the other one or more of the symbol images of the decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) to (G), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. , The specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), in the first production,
After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed while the specific image CHA is not displayed, the specific image CHA is newly decorated by frame-in as shown in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (D). , 8C, 8R includes the effect displayed on the front side. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), after the second effect,
The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA become difficult to see due to the fade-out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific image symbol cooperation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A and B, the specific image CHA is assumed to overlap at the same time as the two symbol images. However, the specific image CHA may sequentially overlap with only one symbol image, or may overlap with three symbol images at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the specific image CHA is assumed to move along the horizontal direction. However, the specific image CHA may be arcuate or meandering. Further, it may move left and right while shaking in the vertical direction. Further, it may be stopped in the middle.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set to specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear or may not be continuously displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Here, the variable display means a state in which the variable mode is visually displayed.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, FIG. 68 (A)
)-(I) may be followed by FIGS. 70 (A)-(J). Further, for example, FIG. 70 (A).
)-(J) may be followed by FIGS. 69 (D)-(J).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image.
The first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and
After the first effect, the second effect in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
In the first effect and the second effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-2.
The decorative symbol includes a plurality of symbol images capable of notifying whether or not it is a hit.
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed so as to overlap one or more of the plurality of symbol images, and then displayed so as to overlap the other one or more of the plurality of symbol images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-3.
In the first effect, the symbol images are stopped and displayed side by side in the first direction, and the specific image reciprocates along the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4.
The first effect includes an effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the specific image is not displayed, and then the specific image is newly displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol by frame-in. Yes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5.
After the second effect, the decorative pattern and the specific image become difficult to see due to fading out.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative pattern mode change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. This decorative pattern mode change effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative pattern mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern mode change production A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect A. In the decorative pattern mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display screen 7a is displayed.
The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once after being displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved orbit that draws an arc so as to bend to the right from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. It is displayed variable while. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates sideways at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative symbol 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the rotation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one or a plurality of rotations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), after the left decorative symbol 8L is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "9" is changed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is
From the aspect of the image of the number "9", the image of the number "9" becomes a little smaller and the number "9"
The image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of "9". Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a curved orbit that draws an arc so as to bend leftward from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. It is displayed variable while. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) becomes the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the right decorative symbol 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the rotation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), after the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "5" is changed. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is
From the aspect of the image of the number "5", the image of the number "5" becomes a little smaller and the number "5"
The image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of "5". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes further slower, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in this embodiment) becomes the intermediate decorative symbol. 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "3" is changed. Specifically, the medium decorative design 8C is
From the aspect of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "3" becomes a little smaller and the number "3"
The image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of "3". Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8
L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern mode change production B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect B. In the decorative pattern mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display screen 7a is displayed.
The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once after being displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed while moving diagonally upward to the left from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. .. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates sideways at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative symbol 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the rotation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one or a plurality of rotations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), after the left decorative symbol 8L is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "9" is changed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is
From the aspect of the image of the number "9", the image of the number "9" becomes a little smaller and the number "9"
The image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of "9". Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side diagonally downward to the left while the moving speed becomes slower. .. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) becomes the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the right decorative symbol 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the rotation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), after the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number “5” is changed. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is
From the aspect of the image of the number "5", the image of the number "5" becomes a little smaller and the number "5"
The image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of "5". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes even slower, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in this embodiment) becomes the intermediate decorative symbol. 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "3" is changed. Specifically, the medium decorative design 8C is
From the aspect of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "3" becomes a little smaller and the number "3"
The image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of "3". Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8
L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern mode change production C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect C. In the decorative pattern mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display screen 7a is displayed.
The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once after being displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved orbit that draws an arc so as to bend to the right from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. It is displayed variable while. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) is the left decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the number "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L
The image changes from blue to red. The color of the left decorative pattern 8L may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L changes the aspect of the image of the red number "9". Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, from the aspect of the image of the red number "9", the image of the red number "9" becomes a little smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "9". The image of the character is attached to the character. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a curved orbit that draws an arc so as to bend leftward from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. It is displayed variable while. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where the 8R is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R
The image changes from blue to red. The color of the right decorative pattern 8R may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), in the right decorative symbol 8R, the aspect of the image of the red number "5" is changed. Specifically, in the right decorative symbol 8R, from the aspect of the image of the red number "5", the image of the red number "5" becomes a little smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "5". The image of the character is attached to the image. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes even slower, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in this embodiment) is the intermediate decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the number "3" of the medium decorative pattern 8C
The image changes from blue to red. The color of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), the mode of the image of the red number "3" is changed in the intermediate decorative pattern 8C. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the image of the red number "3" becomes slightly smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "3" is obtained from the aspect of the image of the red number "3". The image of the character is attached to the character. Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as a mode of loss (missing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern mode change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8
R is variablely displayed in the first aspect (for example, numbers, etc.), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a change from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, numbers + characters, etc.) for decoration. Design 8L
, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in the second aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8
R changes from the first aspect to the second aspect at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8
R changes from the first aspect to the second aspect while rotating laterally at the stop display position.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L
Is variablely displayed while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving along a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L
Is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L
Is gradually displayed smaller as it moves, and the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern mode change effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were all displayed in a variable manner while moving in different directions, but the movement of two of the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The directions may be the same. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be variablely displayed while moving in the same direction, and the middle decorative symbol 8C may be variablely displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. ..
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R other than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at the stop display position are produced so as to disappear. However, for example, after the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position remains and is displayed. May be good.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the first aspects (for example, numbers and the like).
It is variablely displayed in, changed from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, a number + a character, etc.), and stopped and displayed in the second aspect. The aspect here is, for example, decoration. Various aspects such as the type, color, and shape of the image representing the pattern are included. It may change from any aspect to any aspect. Further, the number of changes may be once or may be a plurality of times.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variablely displayed in this order, changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and stopped and displayed. The order of change, stop display, etc. is not limited to this, and may be any order.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
The first effect in which the decorative pattern is variablely displayed in the first aspect, and
A second effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed by changing from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect, and
It is possible to perform the third effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
In the second effect, the decorative pattern changes from the first aspect to the second aspect at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1 or the aspect A5-2.
In the second effect, the decorative pattern changes from the first aspect to the second aspect while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3.
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern.
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along the first direction.
In the first effect of the second decorative pattern, the display is varied while moving along a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-4.
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc.
In the first effect of the second decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-4 or the aspect A5-5.
In the first effect of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol is gradually displayed smaller as it moves.
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is gradually displayed larger as it moves.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative symbol variation region effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. This decorative symbol variation region effect can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation area effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect A. In the decorative symbol variation area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display screen 7a is displayed.
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
Is displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that were variablely displayed disappear from the first display area R1 and are left-decorated. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. And the first
A part of the display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)).
Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) moves downward as it is without stopping at the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. .. That is, it does not form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol). Right decorative pattern 8R
Is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1.
Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. The right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and is combined with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) to form a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). 2 Display area R2
Stop is displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is the first display area R.
It is displayed larger than when it was displayed in 1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), an effect is performed in which the once disappeared middle decorative symbol 8C appears. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and descends in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center portion of the first display area R1. and,
A part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
R moves from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (reducing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
R moves from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (reducing). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
R fits in (returns to) the first display area R1 and is displayed. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost.
It is stopped and displayed with a lost pattern).

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect B. In the decorative symbol variation area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display screen 7a is displayed.
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
Is displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that were variablely displayed disappear from the first display area R1 and are left-decorated. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. And the first
A part of the display area R1 is transparently displayed through the transparent left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)).
Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) moves downward as it is without stopping at the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. .. That is, it does not form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol). Right decorative pattern 8R
Is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1.
Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. The right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and is combined with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) to form a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). 2 Display area R2
Stop is displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is the first display area R.
It is displayed larger than when it was displayed in 1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is transparently displayed through the transparent right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), an effect is performed in which the once disappeared middle decorative symbol 8C appears. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and descends in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center portion of the first display area R1. and,
A part of the first display area R1 is transparently displayed through the transparent intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), in the second display area R2, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have been stopped and displayed disappear from the second display area R2, and the left decoration is displayed. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state where it is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the effect of reappearing the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have disappeared again is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 in a reduced state. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R
Is stopped and displayed in the form of loss (loss pattern).

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect C. In the decorative symbol variation area effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display screen 7a is displayed.
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
Is displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that were variablely displayed disappear from the first display area R1 and are left-decorated. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. And the first
A part of the display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)).
Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. As a result, the reach state is formed by the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) and the right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. After forming the reach state, another reach effect may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the effect of the once disappeared middle decorative symbol 8C appearing is executed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and descends in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
R moves from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (reducing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
R moves from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (reducing). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
R fits in (returns to) the first display area R1 and is displayed. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost.
It is stopped and displayed with a lost pattern).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation area effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the display screen 7 of the display device 7
In the first display area R1 (first area) of a (display means), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R
In the second display area R2 (second area) including the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, after the first effect in which is variablely displayed and the first effect, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C
, 8R can be expanded and displayed in a variable manner than in the first effect, and the second effect can be executed.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second effect, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are enlarged and variablely displayed is the first display area R1. It is displayed overlapping with. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the first display area R1 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear from the first display area R1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second selection, whether or not the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach state is produced. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The third effect to be performed can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is possible to further execute the fourth effect, which does not form a state and is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the fourth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move while being reduced from the second display area R2 to the first display area R1. It is further feasible to perform the fifth effect displayed to be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern variation area effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation area effects A to C, the display screen 7 of the display device 7 is used.
The first display region R1 in a has a rectangular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a circular shape, an elliptical shape, a square shape, or the like. Further, various shapes can be adopted as the shape of the second display area R2. Further, the second display area R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part thereof.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation area effects A to C, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L
, At least a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so as to overlap the first display area R1, but may be displayed so as not to overlap the first display area R1. For example, it may be displayed so as to fit within the second display area R2.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation area effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and variablely displayed in the reach fanning effect of whether or not to form a reach state. In various productions, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged and displayed in a variable manner.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed in this order, but the order of the stop display is not limited to this, and may be any order. May be good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
In the first area of the display means, the first effect in which the decorative pattern is variablely displayed and
After the first effect, in the second area including the first area in the display means, the decorative pattern is enlarged and variablely displayed as compared with the first effect. Is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1.
In the second effect, at least a part of the decorative symbol that is enlarged and variedly displayed is displayed so as to overlap the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1 or the aspect A6-2.
In the first effect, after the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the first region of the display means, the decorative symbol disappears from the first region.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3.
In the second election, whether or not the decorative pattern forms a reach state is produced.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-4.
After the second effect, it is possible to further perform a third effect in which the decorative symbol forms a reach state in the second region of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-4.
After the second effect, in the second region of the display means, the decorative symbol does not form a reach state, and the fourth effect of being stopped and displayed by the lost symbol can be further executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-6.
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further perform a fifth effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed so as to move from the second area to the first area while being reduced.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation promotion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. This operation promotion effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation promotion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation promotion effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It is shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. Hold digestion image 9
C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during the time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After this, ally character C
The battle between RA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the size change effect is executed. The size change effect
This is an effect of increasing the size of the button image BG and displaying it. This suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. Button rotation production
A button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, is displayed.
It is an effect of rotating as shown by the arrow YG about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. therefore,
At the end of the button image BG, there is a part that is not displayed. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually turns upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press"
Is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8
C, the right effect symbol 8R stops at the same number and forms so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, the message image MG "victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It is shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. Hold digestion image 9
C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during the time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After this, ally character C
The battle between RA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the button movement effect is executed. Button movement production
It is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. Button rotation production
A button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, is displayed.
It is an effect of rotating as shown by the arrow YG about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. therefore,
At the end of the button image BG, there is a part that is not displayed. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually turns upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press"
Is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 78 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8
C, the right effect symbol 8R stops at the same number and forms so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, the message image MG "victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It is shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. Hold digestion image 9
C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during the time-saving game. Further, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7". The display screen 7
A button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After this, ally character C
The battle between RA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. A button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the color change effect is executed. Color change production
It is an effect of changing the color of the upper surface of the button image BG. For example, the white top is blue, green,
It will be changed to red. This suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. Button rotation production
A button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, is displayed.
Rotate as indicated by the arrow YG about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. therefore,
At the end of the button image BG, there is a part that is not displayed. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

When the player presses the effect button 63, the press promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 79 (G). In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually turns upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time,"
The message image MG "press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8". The message image MG "defeated" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. note that,
In some cases, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may be shifted to the fixed stop effect (loss) in FIG. 79 (H).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, is displayed and rotated as indicated by an arrow YG about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface (FIG. 77 (FIG. 77). E), FIG. 78 (
E), FIG. 79 (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the promotion of operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so as not to fit in the display screen 7a, and a portion not displayed at the end is formed (FIGS. 77 (F), 78 (F), 79 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a (FIG. 78 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually turns upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed (FIGS. 77 (G), 78 (G), 79 (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of displaying the button image BG is performed first (FIGS. 77 (C) (D), 78 (C), 79 (A) to (D)). According to this configuration, attention can be paid to the effect button 63 prior to the operation of the effect button 63, which contributes to the improvement of the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, from the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) to FIG. 79 (H).
There may be a shift to the fixed stop effect (loss) shown in. That is, after the effect of displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button confirmation effect, and the pressing promotion effect may not be executed. According to this configuration, the range of production can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation promotion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect were performed as a series of effects.
Either the button rotation effect or the button enlargement effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
The above is an example of the effect in the variation during the time-saving game, but it may be applied to the variation during the normal game that is left-handed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, following the battle start effect, the size change effect (FIG. 77 (D)) and the color change effect (FIG. 79 (D)) were performed. Such a size change effect or a color change effect may be performed, for example, when a game ball enters the ball. For example, it is conceivable to set the timing when the second special figure hold increases. Further, for example, it is conceivable to set the timing of over-winning.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and capable of performing an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
In the operation promotion effect of promoting the operation of the operation unit, an image of the operation unit imitating the operation unit is displayed on the display screen as an image of the operation unit viewed from a predetermined direction, and the image is rotated about the predetermined direction. Includes a rotating effect to make
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-1.
The operation promotion effect includes an enlarged effect in which the entire image of the operation unit does not fit on the display screen and its end portion is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2.
The operation promotion effect includes a movement effect in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral edge portion to the other peripheral edge portion so as to cross the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3.
The operation promotion effect includes a promotion effect that displays an image of the operation unit and prompts the user to press the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
After the display effect in which the operation unit image is displayed in the display screen, the operation promotion effect shifts to the operation promotion effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-5.
Even when the display effect is executed, it may not shift to the operation promotion effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-5 or the aspect B1-6.
In the display effect, the expectation of a big hit is suggested by the ball entering a predetermined entrance of the game ball.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-5 to B1-7.
The display effect is executed from the start of the change of the effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning notification effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. This winning announcement effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is used. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Winning notification production A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA is the enemy character CR
Perform a production that hits B.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (B). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, ally character CR
The attack of A hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (D). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of five button image BGs are stocked. The number of stocks of the button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the pressing promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (initial), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), the pressing promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top. The pressing promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. Rainbow background R where the ally character CRA appears and the background is displayed in 7 colors of the rainbow
It is a production that becomes B. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C,
The right effect symbols 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA is the enemy character CR
Perform a production that hits B.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (B). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, ally character CR
The attack of A hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (D). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, one button image BG is obtained, and a total of three button image BGs are stocked. The number of stocks of the button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the pressing promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (initial), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), the pressing promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top. The pressing promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low. Here, it is shown that the stocked button image BG is used up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8".

[Winning notification production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA is the enemy character CR
Perform a production that hits B.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (B). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, ally character CR
The attack of A hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (D). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of five button image BGs are stocked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, ally character CR
The attack of A hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (F). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of eight button image BGs are stocked. The number of stocks of the button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. Rainbow background R where the ally character CRA appears and the background is displayed in 7 colors of the rainbow
It is a production that becomes B. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C,
The right effect symbols 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning announcement effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button get effect in which the button image BG is stocked is performed (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), FIGS. 81 (B) (D), FIGS. 82 (B) (D) (F). )), After that, the player presses the effect button 63 to perform a press promotion effect that digests the stocked button image BG (FIGS. 80 (E) (F), 81 (E) (F)). , A big hit confirmation effect is performed in the middle of the pressing promotion effect (FIG. 80 (G)). According to this configuration, the winning of the big hit is notified by pressing the effect button 63, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button get effect in which the button image BG is stocked is performed a plurality of times. In addition, one or more button image BGs are stocked in one button get effect (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F)). ). According to this configuration, the stock of the button image BG that enables the operation of the effect button 63 is gradually increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the stock number of the button image BG by the button get effect suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. According to this configuration, the number of stocks of the button image BG in the button get effect becomes an important factor, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation effect for notifying the confirmation of the jackpot (FIGS. 80 (G) and 82 (G)). According to this configuration, when the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, it is possible to immerse in a sense of superiority and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the button get effect is executed, the jackpot confirmation effect can be executed without pressing the effect button 63 (FIGS. 82 (B) (D) (F) (FIG. 82) (D) (F).
G)). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning notification effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, as a big hit confirmation effect, a ally character CRA is introduced and the background is a rainbow background RB. On the other hand, any effect may be used to notify the confirmation of the jackpot. For example, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be rotated in a so-called doublet state to perform a full rotation effect. Further, for example, it may be a premier effect of displaying a premium image in which a big hit is confirmed. For example, the effect button 63 may be vibrated, air may be sent to the player, or a specific lamp may be turned on.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the press promotion effect, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top (FIG. 81 (F)). Here, if the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed and the stocked button image BG is used up, the player is rejected (FIG. 81 (G)). On the other hand, it is possible to perform an effect that clearly indicates that the player has been rejected in the middle of the press promotion effect.

[Modification 3]
The above is an example of notifying the winner of the jackpot lottery, but even if the winner of the lottery for the number of rounds when the jackpot is hit or the winner of the furnace in the transition lottery to the high accuracy state after the jackpot game is notified. good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and capable of performing an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
The first effect in which the operation unit image imitating the operation unit is stocked on the display screen, the second effect in which the operation unit image stocked by the first effect is consumed by the operation of the operation unit, and the first effect. 2 It is possible to execute a winning notification production including a third production that can notify the winning in a specific lottery in the middle of the production.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
The first effect is an effect in which one or more images of the operation unit are stocked a plurality of times.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-1 or the aspect B2-2.
The number of stocks of the operation unit image in the first effect suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the specific lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3.
The specific lottery in the third effect is a big hit lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4.
The third effect is a definite effect that notifies the confirmation of the jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5.
It is possible to execute the third effect after the first effect without executing the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5.
The final effect includes a full rotation effect that fluctuates with the effect symbols aligned.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the operation unit image display effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. This operation unit image display effect can be executed during various effects such as a variation effect of a decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Operation unit image display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect A. In the operation unit image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83A, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed (
MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion production) in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. Note that MAX suggests an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in this jackpot. Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83B, the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed on the lower side of the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. As a result, MA can be operated with a single operation.
It suggests that an effect will be performed to determine whether or not X can be obtained. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG on which the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the sword image K
The button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the G. Of the sword image KG, button image B
The portion where G overlaps is difficult to see.
Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 83 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (E) and 83 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), the sword image KG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image S.
G is displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is a sword member 6 for the player.
It is an image prompting the operation of 4, and here, the character image MG4 of "push in !!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG overlaps the upper part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player pushes the sword member 64 and the MAX acquisition is confirmed, the character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. ..

[Operation unit image display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect B. In the operation unit image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot (
MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion production) in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. Note that MAX suggests an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in this jackpot. Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed on the lower side of the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. As a result, MA can be operated with a single operation.
It suggests that an effect will be performed to determine whether or not X can be obtained. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG except that the size is different. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG,
The portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the sword image K
The button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the G. Of the sword image KG, button image B
The portion where G overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. In addition, the button image BG and the sword image K
G is displayed smaller than when it was displayed in FIG. 83 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are shown in FIG. 84 (
It is displayed larger than it was displayed in C) and (D). The display screen 7
The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are shown in FIG. 84 (
It is displayed larger than it was displayed in E) and (F). The display screen 7
The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (I), the sword image KG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image S.
G is displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is a sword member 6 for the player.
It is an image prompting the operation of 4, and here, the character image MG4 of "push in !!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG overlaps the upper part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player pushes the sword member 64 and the MAX acquisition is confirmed, the character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. ..

[Operation unit image display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect C. In the operation unit image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85A, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed (
MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion production) in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. Note that MAX suggests an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in this jackpot. Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85B, the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed on the lower side of the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. As a result, MA can be operated with a single operation.
It suggests that an effect will be performed to determine whether or not X can be obtained. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG on which the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. That is, the button image B
G is a transparent image. The button image BG and the sword image KG are shown in FIG. 85 (B).
It is displayed smaller than when it was displayed in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized somehow. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B). The character image CG and the character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a.
3 is displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Sword image KG
Of these, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized somehow. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Sword image KG
Of these, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and 85 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized somehow. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and 85 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (I), the button image BG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button image BG of FIGS. 85 (B) to 85 (H). The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63.
The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the button image BG and is displayed in front of the button image BG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that urges the player to operate the effect button 63, and here, the character image MG6 of "press !!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front surface of the button image BG so as to overlap the upper part of the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (J), when the player presses down the effect button 63 and MAX cannot be acquired, the character image MG7 of "MAX acquisition failed!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. To.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the button image BG (first operation unit image) and the sword image KG (second operation unit image) are displayed so as to overlap each other. And the production of
A second effect in which either the button image BG or the sword image KG is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the portion of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is visually recognized through the button image BG. Displayed as possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, before the first effect, a third effect in which the sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG is further executed. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the third effect, the portion of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to see due to the sword image KG. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first effect and the size of the button image BG displayed in the third effect are different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation unit image display effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed during the round game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed during a normal game, before a round game, during a big hit game, or the like.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed in the effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be acquired as the total number of rounds for the jackpot (MAX acquisition challenge effect). It is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed in an effect of determining whether or not a specific effect is successful, an effect of determining whether or not it is a big hit, an effect of determining whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit, and the like.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the size is gradually increased each time the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed, but the size is gradually reduced each time the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. Or it may be displayed in the same size.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are the same as the image showing the appearance of the effect button 63 as the button image BG and the sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. Although the image was used, as the operation unit image, the effect button 63 and the sword member 64
, The sword button 65, and other images showing the appearance of various operation units can be used.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, a background image may be displayed in the background of the button image BG and the sword image KG, and the button image BG and the sword image KG may be displayed in front of the background image.
Further, in the background image, the portion where the button image BG and the sword image KG overlap may be made visible through the button image BG and the sword image KG.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
The first operation unit and the second operation unit that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation unit image representing the second operation unit.
The first effect displayed so that the image of the first operation unit and the image of the second operation unit overlap with each other.
It is possible to perform a second effect in which either one of the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
In the first effect, the first operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2.
In the first effect, a portion of the second operation unit image located behind the first operation unit image is visually displayed through the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3.
Prior to the first effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the second operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4.
In the third effect, the portion of the first operation unit image located behind the second operation unit image is difficult to see due to the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B3-4 or the aspect B3-5.
The size of the first operation unit image displayed in the first effect is different from the size of the first operation unit image displayed in the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the appearance / disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. In FIGS. 86 to 88, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the image is displayed. Various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted from the ease of viewing the drawing, and the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted from the ease of viewing the drawing. be.

The appearance / disappearance effect of this effect button is executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change), or during a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player. Operation of the effect button 63 by the player (pressing operation)
This intention can be reflected in the progress of the production. That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands). When an instruction to execute the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button is included in the analysis, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described in order.

[Appearance and disappearance of the effect button A]
First, the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button. Appearance and disappearance of the effect button The effect A is
When a reach is formed during a variation effect of a decorative pattern, it is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects. In the effect button appearance / disappearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (number).
(Temporarily stopped by the number "7" here), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged in and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63.
As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit.
→ The expectation of a big hit is set high in the order of seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (big hit rich)).

When the reach is formed, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed. The effect button appears and disappears. It is possible to perform the appearance and disappearance production of. In other words, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button defines an effective period during which the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed, and the player intends to operate (press) the effect button 63. It is a period that can be reflected in the progress of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button. In the present embodiment, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). good.

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 86 (B). On the upper left side of the screen 7a, the same image as the first effect button image BTN (an image in which the characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button are all the same) or an image similar to the image (part or all of the characteristic information). Similar images (light emission modes may be the same or different.
)) The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed in a mode in which the effect button 63 appears, and the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 in order to encourage the player to operate (press the effect) the effect button 63. Is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 86 (C),
The second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN 2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN displays an image in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition to being displayed, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63,
The first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the second effect button image BT displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
N2 disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 is the image display device 7.
The first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emitting mode is continued, while the first effect button image BTN disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is reached, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance / disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "9", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "7", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is a number “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is a number “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a number on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it was stopped and displayed as "7" and the deviation was confirmed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, the number "7"). When 7 ”) are all stopped and displayed, a big hit game (big hit production) that becomes a big hit and gives a profit to the player is performed.

In a state where the reach shown in FIG. 86 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at all. If not operated), the appearance and disappearance of the effect button will be performed during the effect execution period.
When the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button shown in FIGS. 6 (B) to 86 (E) is not performed and the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is reached, the left decorative symbol 8L shown in FIG. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R will be stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a random position (arbitrary position) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap with the first effect button image BTN. There is.

[Appearance and disappearance of the effect button B]
Next, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button. The appearance and disappearance effect B of the effect button is
When a reach is formed during a variation effect of a decorative pattern, it is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects. In the effect button appearance / disappearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (number).
Temporary stop is displayed with (here, temporary stop with the number "7"), and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged in and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63.
As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit.
→ The expectation of a big hit is set high in the order of seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (big hit rich)).

When the reach is formed, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed. The effect button appears and disappears. It is possible to perform the appearance and disappearance production of. In other words, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button defines an effective period during which the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed, and the player intends to operate (press) the effect button 63. It is a period that can be reflected in the progress of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button. In the present embodiment, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). good.

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87 (B). A hole image MH that imitates a mole hole is displayed on the left side and a right side of the screen 7a, respectively, and a hole image M that imitates a mole hole is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
H is formed, and a hole image MH that imitates a mole hole is displayed on the left side and a right side near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a hole of the mole is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Five imitated hall image MHs are displayed. Here, the five hole image MHs have the same shape, the same size, and the same color.

From the hole image MH on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 near the upper side, an image imitating a mole having a grinning face (hereinafter referred to as "niconico mole image") "MCH1 is displayed in a manner of showing a face. , An image that is the same as the first effect button image BTN (an image in which characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button is all the same) or an image similar to the image (one with the characteristic information) above the Nico Nico Mole image MCH1. The second effect button image B as a part or all similar images (the light emission modes may be the same or different).
It is displayed in a mode in which TN2 is arranged and appears. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), as shown in FIG. 87 (C).
The second effect button image B displayed on the left side of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
TN2 disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the same time, an image imitating a mole having a face that turns its eyes and is dazzling from the smiley mole image MCH1 (hereinafter, , "Kurakuramogura image".) Displayed in a changed manner to MCH2. The second effect button image B
While the TN 2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emitting mode is continued. To.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), colored glasses (for example, black glasses) are used from the hole image MH on the right side near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. An image imitating a mole with a face (hereinafter referred to as "glasses mole image") "MCH3 is displayed in a mode in which a face appears. At this time, in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image B imitating the effect button 63.
The TN is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. In addition to the glasses mole image MCH3, the glasses mole image MCH
In some cases, the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and appears above the head of 3.

When the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 multiple times (here, three times),
As shown in FIG. 87 (E), the glasses mole image MCH3 to the caspase mole image MCH2
It is displayed in the changed mode to. Glasses mole image MCH3 is Nico Nico mole image MCH1
Unlike the struck and strong, when the glasses mole image MCH3 appears, the effect button 6
Unless the operation (pressing operation) of 3 is performed a plurality of times (here, three times), the spectacles mole image MCH3 that is strongly struck does not change to the caspase mole image MCH2. The first
The effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. In addition, the glasses mole image MCH3 and the glasses mole image MCH3
When the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the head of the player, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, three times).
The second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
At the same time, it is displayed in a mode in which the spectacle mole image MCH3 is changed to the caspase mole image MCH2.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the NicoNico mole image MCH1 makes a face from the hole image MH on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in the form of being put out, and the Nico Nico Mole image MCH1
The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the head of the screen. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), as shown in FIG. 87 (G).
The second effect button image B displayed on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
TN2 disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a mode in which the Niconico mole image MCH1 is changed to the Kurakuramogura image MCH2. The second effect button image BTN 2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is an image display device in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. 7 display screen 7
It is displayed in a.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the Niconico mole image MCH1 appears from the hole image MH in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), as shown in FIG. 87 (I).
It is displayed in a changed manner from the Nico Nico Mole image MCH1 to the Kurakura Mole image MCH2. The first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

After that, when the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is reached, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance / disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 87 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "9", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "7", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is a number “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is a number “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a number on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it was stopped and displayed as "7" and the deviation was confirmed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, the number "7"). When 7 ”) are all stopped and displayed, a big hit game (big hit production) that becomes a big hit and gives a profit to the player is performed.

In a state where the reach shown in FIG. 87 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at all. If not operated), the appearance and disappearance of the effect button will be performed during the effect execution period.
When the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button shown in FIGS. 7 (B) to 87 (I) is not performed and the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is reached, the left decorative symbol 8L shown in FIG. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R will be stopped and displayed.

As described above, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a fixed position where the Nico Nico mole image MCH 1 and the glasses mole image MCH 3 appear.

[Appearance / disappearance effect C of effect button]
Next, the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button. The appearance and disappearance effect C of the effect button is
It is performed during a jackpot game (big hit production) in which a profit is given to the player, and is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, before the jackpot production ends).
It is not done when there is a so-called "holding ream" where there is a big hit in the holding ball). The presence or absence of this pending sequence is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command. If the hold-ream effect is not performed, in other words, there is no jackpot in the hold ball before the jackpot effect ends.

In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the image display device 7
On the display screen 7a of the above, the player can select the effect mode after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) in a specific period of the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). The mode selection screen is displayed. In the specific period, in order to convey the mode transition to the selected effect mode after the first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode and the first period (effect mode selection period) have elapsed. It is composed of the second period (effect mode confirmed notification period) and. In the present embodiment, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) (that is, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game)). In order to perform a catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed and a slogan prevention effect in which a warning for dependence on the game is displayed, the start of this predetermined period and the end of the specific period match. ing.

When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, the player can operate the effect button 63 (press operation).
First effect button image B imitating the effect button 63 in order to encourage the selection of the effect mode by
The TN is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. In the part of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63, the English word "
"PUSH" is engraved. As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, it is blinking in white.

The effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated to specify a specific area. The selection unit SEL in which the effect mode reached to is displayed larger than that of other effect modes is displayed on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode. When the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, the A mode is arranged in a specific area as the default, but when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default (
That is, the A mode) may always be arranged in the specific area, or the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area when the effect mode selection screen was displayed last time.

To the right of the selection unit SEL, a demo area DS that explains the contents of the currently selected production mode with various images and various characters is on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the character "DEMO" indicating the demo screen of the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side thereof.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS, which is the same image as the first production button image BTN. (Images in which characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission mode are all the same) or similar images (images that are partially or all similar to the characteristic information (light emission modes may be the same or different) The second effect button image BTN2 is the demo area DS as ()).
It is placed and displayed on the lower right side of. In addition, explanation M about progress of production by A mode
ME is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (B). When the A mode moves downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
The effect button image BTN of is continuously displayed.

In B mode, the production with the theme of "cloud" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "cloud" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (C). When the B mode moves downward, the A mode located below the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
The effect button image BTN of is continuously displayed.

In C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" progresses, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (D). When the C mode moves downward, the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
The effect button image BTN of is continuously displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" progresses, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in the D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (E). When the D mode moves downward, the C mode located below the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode placed above the D mode is specified from above. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates toward the region, and the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is located in the specific region again. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, in a state where the A mode is in the display mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the first period for selecting the effect mode (effect mode selection period) elapses, and the selected effect mode is entered. At the beginning of the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the four corners of the demo area DS, which is a rectangular area, are the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a mode that expands toward the four corners (enlarged mode), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a theme that imitates the "sun" that progresses with the theme of "sun" in A mode. The image PM is displayed in a large size, and on the right side of the theme image PM, a message MG indicating that the selected effect mode is the A mode is displayed on the display screen 7 of the image display device 7.
It is displayed large from the center of a toward the center of the right side, and the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) elapses and the start of this predetermined period arrives in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) (that is,). During the predetermined period (for example, when the start of the jackpot game) immediately before the end of the jackpot production (big hit game) arrives), the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed, and the attention to the dependence on the game is alerted. Is displayed, and when the end of a predetermined period, that is, the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game), the effect is performed with the theme of "sun" in A mode, as shown in FIG. 88 (G). The theme image PM imitating the advancing "sun" is displayed large on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be displayed.

Then, based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21), the front of the theme image PM is displayed. Left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Reel.
When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the theme image PM, which is a background image arranged behind the decorative pattern, can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

In this way, in the effect button appearance / disappearance effect C, each time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the reel rotates in the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. The effect mode that reaches a specific area by rotating the reel is displayed larger than other effect modes. At this time, when the A mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears in the demo area DS, and when the B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears from the demo area DS. It will disappear (disappear). In other words, in the effect button appearance / disappearance effect C, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the display screen 7a (demo area DS) of the image display device 7. It is designed to disappear (disappear).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 86 (A) to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86 (E), an effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player and an image display device 7 (display means) that can display various images are provided, and the effect button 63 (operation) is provided. means)
The effect button 63 (operation means) was operated (pressed) while the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the above was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) based on the first effect. , Second
The effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). You can do at least one of them. According to this configuration, a second effect imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means).
The effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), hidden (appears), or disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means). )) Because it can be done, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. Appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I), FIG. 88
The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons in FIGS. (A) to 88 (E).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 86 (A) to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86 (E), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is
The first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) in the first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). ) And are displayed in different positions. For example, the first effect button image BTN
(First operation means image) is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is an image display device. It is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of 7 and on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display) is arranged so that the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are arranged differently. Since it is displayed on the means), the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the effect button appearance / disappearance effect B of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While it is displayed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display means) or on the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display means). Because it is displayed
The same is true.
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While it is displayed, a second effect button is displayed in the demo area DS (lower right side of the demo area DS) arranged on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means). Image BTN2 (2nd
This is the same because the operation means image) is displayed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 86 (A) to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86 (E), the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) displays an image when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during a predetermined effect). The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the device 7 (display means), and the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is an image display device 7 (display means). ) Can be displayed after it is displayed. According to this configuration, when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during a predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is the image display device 7 (display means). ), The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) of 1 is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually an image. When displayed on the display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BT
The display mode in which N2 (second operation means image) appears can visually entertain the player and improve the interest. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the jackpot effect (big hit game) ends in a specific period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). When the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select a later effect mode is displayed (during a predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. 2nd when A mode is selected after being displayed in 7 (display means)
Since the effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be set to be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the first effect button image BTN (first effect means image) can be displayed. After the operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the A mode is actually selected and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means image).
When displayed on the display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears in a display mode that can visually entertain the player and improve the interest. Can be done.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 86 (A) to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86 (E), the image display device 7 (display means) can display the reach effect in the variable effect display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is the first. The predetermined effect in which the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a reach effect. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be a period during which the reach effect is performed. , In addition to the image by the reach effect, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image). Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 88 (A) to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 88 (E), the image display device 7 (display means) can display a jackpot effect (effect of a hit game), and the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) can be displayed. The predetermined effect displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a big hit effect (effect of a winning game).
Is. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is the period during which the jackpot effect (effect of the winning game) is performed. Of these, it can be set to a specific period, and after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) in addition to the image by the jackpot effect (effect of the hit game), the second effect button is further displayed. Since the image BTN2 (second operation means image) can appear, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 86 (A) to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86 (E), the color of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. It has become.
According to this configuration, the first effect button image BT displayed on the image display device 7 (display means).
N (first operation means image) color and second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image)
Depending on the color of, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. Appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I), FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (FIG. 88)
The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button in E).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button.
[Modification 1]
Appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, FIG. 88.
In the effect C, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is the image display device 7 (display means). Second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means). ) Is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the second effect.
The effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). I was able to do one of them. However, instead of the effect button 63 (operation means),
It may be a sword member 64 or a sword button 65. In this case, the image display device 7 (display means) has
First effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and second effect button image BTN2 (1st effect button image)
The second operation means image) is an image imitating the sword member 64 and the sword button 65.

[Modification 2]
Appearance and disappearance of the effect button in FIG. 86 In the effect A, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means).
When the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) again after disappearing from (disappearing), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means).
It had been. However, after the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is pressed a plurality of times (for example, twice, three times, ..., 9 times, 10 times, a predetermined fixed number, or 2 to 10 times, only a random number set in real time by a lottery in the production control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101). It may be operated (pressed operation). By doing so, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the image display device 7 (display means) is seconded.
Effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is erased (disappeared) or displayed (appeared)
It can contribute to eliminating the monotonousness of being struck. Further, depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) in the image display device 7 (display means). , Display (appearance)
Since the player can discover the correspondence relationship such as being done by himself, the effect button 63
By making it difficult to feel monotonous in the act of the operation (pressing operation), it is possible to contribute to suppressing the decrease in the motivation to play.

[Modification 3]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86 and the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Every time (disappears) and is displayed (appears), the second effect button image BTN2 (second)
The size of the operation means image) may be gradually increased toward the maximum size. In this case, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressing operation), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is always gradually increased toward the maximum size. Alternatively, the image may be kept at a certain size from before the maximum size (the size several steps before the maximum size (in the middle)). By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) that gives profit to the player by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be generated, and the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) can be increased. It can contribute to making it difficult for the player to be reluctant.

[Modification 4]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86 and the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Every time (disappears) and is displayed (appears), the second effect button image BTN2 (second)
The color of the operation means image) may be gradually changed to a color that raises the expectation that a big hit game (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player is generated. For example, white → blue → green →
It changes gradually from red to golden to seven colors (rainbow color). By doing this, the production button 63
It is possible to contribute to making it difficult for the player to be reluctant to the operation (pressing operation) of.

[Modification 5]
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button in FIG. 88, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode
Was displayed on the left side of the demo area DS. Such a video is a video explaining the progress of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be a video by 3D CG, a video by animation, or a movie. It may be one scene. A still image may be used instead of the moving image.

[Modification 6]
Appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, FIG. 88.
In the effect C, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). , The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is an image display device based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means). The first effect displayed (appearing) on 7 (display means) and the second effect button image BT
It is possible to execute the second effect in which N2 (second operating means image) is hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). did it. However, in a state where the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation means) Is operated (pressed), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means).
The first effect is executed, and for example, the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated only 10 times (when the pressing operation is performed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is accompanied by the operation. Is hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears from the image display device 7 (display means) (
(Disappearing)) It may be possible to execute the second effect. In addition, the effect button 6
The effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating 3 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Second effect button image BTN2 (operation) that imitates the effect button 63 (operation means) each time it is operated.
The second operating means image) is hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (image display device 7 (image display device 7).
The second effect that disappears (disappears) from the display means) is executed. For example, when the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) only 10 times, the second effect button image BT is accompanied by this.
It may be possible to execute the first effect in which N2 (second operating means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modification 7]
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. 88, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the jackpot effect (effect of the hit game). Later, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as the effect of the hit game, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the effect in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect. Second production button image B
The TN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or the first effect button image BTN (1st effect button image BTN) may be displayed in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect. After the first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). You may do so.

[Modification 8]
Appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, FIG. 88.
The appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button may not include a part of the described effect, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying various images.
Based on the fact that the operation means is operated while the image of the first operation means imitating the operation means is displayed on the display means.
The first effect in which the image of the second operating means imitating the operating means is displayed on the display means, and
A second effect in which the image of the second operating means is hidden from the display means, and
At least one of them can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B4-1.
The second operating means image is displayed at a position different from that of the first operating means image in the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B4-1 or the aspect B4-2.
The first operating means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined effect.
The second operating means image can be displayed after the first operating means image is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3.
The display means can display the reach effect in the variable effect display of the decorative pattern.
The predetermined effect is the reach effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3.
The display means can display the effect of the winning game.
The predetermined effect is an effect of the hit game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5.
The color of the first operating means image and the color of the second operating means image are the same color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The winning notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning notification effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

In all of the winning notification effects A to C, the effect button 63 is enabled during the battle effect, and when the number of operations of the effect button 63 reaches 1, 5, 8, 12, or 14, the jackpot confirmation effect is achieved. It is a production to execute. If the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed even after reaching 14 times, the loss is confirmed.

[Winning notification production A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It is shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. Hold digestion image 9
C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during the time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (C), the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB was fought, and finally the ally character C
When RA defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. That is, although the display screen 7a is not displayed to prompt the pressing of the effect button 63, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Detects the operation of. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle effect (initial), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle effect (mid-term), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. Rainbow background R where the ally character CRA appears and the background is displayed in 7 colors of the rainbow
It is a production that becomes B. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot. In addition, the message image MG "It's a big hit" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle production (mid-term), the jackpot confirmation production was executed when the operation of the production button 63 reached 12 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that informs the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message image MG of "victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C,
The right effect symbols 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It is shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. Hold digestion image 9
C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during the time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB was fought, and finally the ally character C
When RA defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. That is, although the display screen 7a is not displayed to prompt the pressing of the effect button 63, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Detects the operation of. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. Rainbow background R where the ally character CRA appears and the background is displayed in 7 colors of the rainbow
It is a production that becomes B. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot. In addition, the message image MG "It's a big hit" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle effect (mid-term), the jackpot confirmation effect was executed when the operation of the effect button 63 reached 5 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that informs the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message image MG of "victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C,
The right effect symbols 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It is shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. Hold digestion image 9
C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during the time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB was fought, and finally the ally character C
When RA wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character "press" is displayed. The effect control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the effect button 63 based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108.
The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle effect (initial), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character "press" is displayed. Display screen 7
On the right side of a, the actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle effect (mid-term), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character "press" is displayed. Display screen 7
On the right side of a, the actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that informs the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the enemy character C
The RB is displayed in the center and the message image MG "defeated" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C stops at "8".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is repeatedly operated (pressed) during the battle effect.
By doing so, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation effect when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number of times (FIGS. 89 (E) (F), 90 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the promotion of operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of operation times of 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 times are set as predetermined operation times. According to this configuration, since there are a plurality of timings at which the jackpot confirmation effect may be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed by 14 operations, which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91 (E)), the loss in the jackpot lottery is determined. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without having unnecessary expectations.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is enabled during the period when the effect button 63 is enabled.
(FIGS. 89 (C) to (E), FIG. 90 (C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it a back command-like production only for the players who know it.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is enabled during the period when the effect button 63 is enabled.
There are cases where the effect of urging the operation of is performed (FIGS. 91 (C) to (E)) and cases where the effect is not performed (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E), FIGS. 90 (C)). According to this configuration, the range of production can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning notification effect.
[Modification 1]
Although the operation of the effect button 63 has been illustrated above, it can be similarly applied to the operation of a lever, a sword, or the like.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was an example of notifying the winning of the big hit lottery, but it can also be applied to the winning of the maximum number of rounds in the lottery of the number of rounds at the time of the big hit and the winning of the transition lottery to the high accuracy state after the big hit. be.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and capable of performing an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined effect, it is possible to notify the winning in a specific lottery when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1.
A plurality of operation times are set as the predetermined number of operations.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2.
If there is no notification of winning even if the number of operations of the operation unit exceeds the upper limit of the predetermined number of operations, the loss in the specific lottery is determined.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
During the predetermined effect, the promotion effect for encouraging the operation of the operation unit is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
During the predetermined effect, there are cases where a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the operation unit is performed, and cases where the promotion effect is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5.
The specific lottery is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the appearance inside / outside effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. Figure 9
2 to FIG. 94, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the display of the image display device 7 is omitted. Screen 7a
The decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed in are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

The inside / outside effect of the three-dimensional image is executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the change), or during the big hit game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit. It can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands), and buttons are displayed. ROM 10 when an instruction to execute the effect is included.
The corresponding image data is read from 3 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described, and then the outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described.
, And the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Outside and outside production A of stereoscopic image]
First, the outer / outer outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as a FRM, it approaches or
It is displayed in a mode of moving away, stopping, and swinging (including rotation; the same applies hereinafter). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4").
) As a boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). It will be divided into areas of. Here, the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
The outer region FRMb of is a background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The inner region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") with (contour) as the boundary.
It is divided into a region of Ma and an outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an approaching manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. By increasing the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM
The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of (number “4”) becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7a becomes large. The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The image display device 7 is displayed on 7a or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is far away.
When it is displayed on the display screen 7a of, similarly, the outer shell (number "4") of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed.
As the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the contour) occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region (contour) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is accompanied by this. The ratio of FRMb occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low or high.

A pattern (not shown) is displayed on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Outer region FRM of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
In b, as the first geometric pattern, a quadrangle arranged in a matrix shape is displayed by arranging the quadrangles in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the frame of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be increased or one or both may be decreased. It is displayed in the mode of At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FR with the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary.
It is divided into the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of M and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After that, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shell (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The first geometric pattern (number "4") displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") at the timing of switching from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). A pattern in which the quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval), and the second is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
As a geometric pattern of, it is displayed by switching to a pile of bricks. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the inner region F of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
A character body CRA appears in the RMa and moves in the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced.

The outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are increased.
When the inner region FRMa of the image display device 7 is displayed in a large size, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller and the image display device 7 becomes smaller. The ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of is low. On the other hand, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced, and the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. When the inner region FRMa of the (contour) is displayed small, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large and the image is imaged. The proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 becomes high.

After this, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
When one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of them becomes smaller, the inner region of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is similarly displayed. As the proportion of FRMa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRM of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is accompanied by this.
The ratio of b occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low or high.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again from the color-opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM is switched to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern of.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image is displayed again, and a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both are increased or one or both are decreased. To.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The second geometric pattern (number "4") displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") at the timing of switching from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). From the pattern of stacked bricks), octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally as a third geometric pattern on the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. It is displayed by switching to the one placed in. The third geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the inner region F of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
In RMa, a character body CRB newly appears and moves in the inner region FRMa.
The moving image of the character body CRB is played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM is switched to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally at predetermined intervals and arranged in a matrix) is the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). ) Is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a colored opaque stereoscopic image F from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image F.
When switching to RM and a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in such a manner that one or both become larger or one or both become smaller. Will be done.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The third geometric pattern (number "4") displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") at the timing of switching from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The octagons are arranged in a matrix by arranging them in the vertical and horizontal directions with each other separated by a predetermined interval.
As the geometric pattern of, the alphabetic V-shape is displayed by switching to the one arranged continuously in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear and approach each other in the inner region FRMa, and moving images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are displayed. Will be played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are enlarged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and an action effect by two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the two character bodies CRA and C
The background image of the RB is also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the decorative symbols are not aligned on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), an action effect is developed, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the game is won, whereas the left-handed game is started when the character RCA is defeated in the game with the character RCB (for example). Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

By increasing one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, or the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger. As one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the inner region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is accompanied by this.
The size of the character displayed on Ma is not displayed large (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized. The area around the character expands. In addition, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized also becomes smaller. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player side) in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The size of the character is displayed large in, but it is far away (
When moving away from the player side), the size of the character is displayed small.

[Outside and outside production B of stereoscopic image]
Next, the outer / outer outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as a FRM, it approaches or
It is displayed in a mode such as far away, stopped, or rocked. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the stereoscopic image F with the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary.
The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of RM (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
) Outer region (contour) and FRMb. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The inner region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") with (contour) as the boundary.
It is divided into a region of Ma and an outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an approaching manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. By increasing the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM
The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of (number “4”) becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7a becomes large. The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The image display device 7 is displayed on 7a or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is far away.
When it is displayed on the display screen 7a of, similarly, the outer shell (number "4") of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed.
When the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the contour) to occupy the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes higher or lower accordingly. The ratio of occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low or high.

A pattern (not shown) is displayed on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Outer region FRM of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
In b, as the first geometric pattern, a quadrangle arranged in a matrix shape is displayed by arranging the quadrangles in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image is displayed, and the stereoscopic image board is a color-opaque plate. It switches as a three-dimensional image FRM, and when a plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears, it approaches or
It is displayed in a manner of moving away, stopping, or rotating in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image with the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. FRM
It will be partitioned into the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After this, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shell (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , Plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM inner region FRMa and plate-shaped stereoscopic image F
It is partitioned into a region of FRMb, which is the outer region of the outer shell (contour) of the RM. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The first geometric pattern (number "4") displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") at the timing of switching from the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). From the pattern in which the quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval), bricks are placed as a second geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. It is displayed by switching to the stacked ones. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
In, the character body CRA appears and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced. The inner region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
Ma is a surface, and the shape of the character body CRA in which the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space is also deformed.

When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an approaching manner,
The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a large size, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher, so that the outer region of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is increased. The FRMb becomes smaller and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes smaller. On the other hand, the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 is such that the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is far away.
When displayed on a, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed small, and the proportion of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced, so that the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) becomes large, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes large.
Will occupy a higher proportion.

After that, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, similarly, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. As the proportion of 7a becomes higher or lower, the proportion of the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. It gets expensive.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the color-opaque 3D image FRM (number "number") from the color-opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image.
4 ”), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number“ 4 ”) appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4").
It is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the contour), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is again colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopped, or rotating manner.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The second geometric pattern (number "4") displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") at the timing of switching from the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). From the pattern of stacked bricks), octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally as a third geometric pattern on the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in a matrix shape. It is displayed by switching to the one placed in. The third geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
In the mode, the character body CRB newly appears and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape of the character body CRB is also deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image is displayed again with the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "number".
4 ”), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number“ 4 ”) appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) is the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") displayed in. ) Outer region FR
It is inherited and displayed as it is in Mb, and it does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FR is displayed as a predetermined image.
When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears after switching to M, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, or rotating.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The third geometric pattern (number "4") displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") at the timing of switching from the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The octagonal shapes are arranged in a matrix by arranging them in the vertical and horizontal directions with each other separated by a predetermined interval. It is displayed by switching to the one in which the V-shape is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the inner region FR appears.
The motions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are reproduced in a mode in which the inside of Ma approaches each other. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the inner region FRM according to the angle in the three-dimensional space.
The shapes of the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in a are also deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are enlarged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and an action effect by two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the two character bodies CRA and CRB.
The background image of the above is also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the decorative symbols are not aligned on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), an action effect is developed, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the game is won, whereas the left-handed game is started when the character RCA is defeated in the game with the character RCB (for example). Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

As the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, or the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FR becomes larger.
When M moves far away (moves away from the player side), the outer shell of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (
The inner region FRMa of the contour) is getting smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), in addition to the character, the area around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized is expanded. In addition, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
As the size of the character becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is not displayed smaller (reduced display).
The area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized also becomes smaller. Of course, the character displayed in the inner region FRma of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the inner region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
In Ma, the size of the character is displayed large when approaching (moving toward the player side), while the size of the character is displayed small when moving far away (moving away from the player side). To.

[Outside and outside production C of stereoscopic image]
Next, the outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as a FRM, it approaches or
It is displayed in a manner of moving away, stopping, or swinging. At this time, the image display device 7
The display screen 7a of the display screen 7a has an inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (numerical number "4") with the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary.
4 ”) will be partitioned into the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The inner region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") with (contour) as the boundary.
It is divided into a region of Ma and an outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an approaching manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. By increasing the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM
The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of (number “4”) becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7a becomes large. The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The image display device 7 is displayed on 7a or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is far away.
When it is displayed on the display screen 7a of, similarly, the outer shell (number "4") of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed.
As the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the contour) occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region (contour) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is accompanied by this. The ratio of FRMb occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low or high.

A pattern (not shown) is displayed on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Outer region FRM of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
In b, as the first geometric pattern, a quadrangle arranged in a matrix shape is displayed by arranging the quadrangles in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. 3D image FRM viewed from the front (hereinafter, stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (number "4")
). ), And when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, or moving in the vertical and horizontal directions. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a boundary with the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a boundary. ), And the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Here, the stereoscopic image FRM (front view)
The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-view stereoscopic image FR 7a appears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
A stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front with the outer shell (outline) of M (number "4") as the boundary.
) Is divided into an inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) and an outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. In addition, the stereoscopic image FR viewed from the front
The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of M (number “4”) becomes the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The number displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") at the timing of switching from the color opaque frontal view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") from the number "4"). From the geometric pattern of 1 (a pattern in which quadrilaterals are arranged vertically and horizontally and arranged in a matrix with each other separated by a predetermined interval), the outside of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The second geometric pattern is displayed in the region FRMb by switching to a stack of bricks. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the character body CRB appears and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. ..

The display screen 7 of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front approaches.
When displayed on a, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes high, so that the front surface is displayed. The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes smaller. On the other hand, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outer shell (number "4") of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Inner region of contour) FRMa
Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes large and the image display device 7 The proportion occupied by the display screen 7a becomes high.

After this, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches the image. A stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or viewed from the front.
) Is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, similarly, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is the image display device 7.
As the ratio of occupying the display screen 7a of is increased or decreased, this is accompanied by this.
The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is again colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopped, or rocking manner. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed. 4 "
The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is inherited as it is to the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Is displayed and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image is viewed again from a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, moving in the vertical and horizontal directions.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
At the timing of switching from the color-opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") from the number "4"), the number displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). 3D image FRM viewed from the front from the geometric pattern of 2 (pattern of stacked bricks)
In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of (number "4"), octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally at predetermined intervals as a third geometric pattern, and are switched to and displayed in a matrix. Will be done. The third geometric pattern is a still image.

Further, here, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches and a part of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") protrudes (jumps out) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") Two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa are formed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as discontinuous regions of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the image display device 7, and straddle the two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa. In the embodiment, a character body CRA with a sword newly appears and moves in two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is again colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed.
4 ”) The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) is three-dimensional. It is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image and a color-opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM ( When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front appears after switching to the number "4"), it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or moving in the vertical and horizontal directions.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The number displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (numerical value "4") at the timing of switching from the colored opaque frontal stereoscopic image FRM (numerical value "4") from the numerical value "4"). From the geometric pattern of 3 (a pattern in which octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally at predetermined intervals and arranged in a matrix), the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is It is displayed in the outer region FRMb by switching to a fourth geometric pattern in which an alphabetic V-shape is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image.
Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the character body CRB reappears and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is again colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopped, or rocking manner. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed. 4 "
The fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of) is the outer shell (number "4") of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). It is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the contour), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image and a color-opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM ( When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front appears after switching to the number "4"), it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving in the up / down / left / right direction, and stopping.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM) is displayed as a predetermined image.
The number displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (numerical value "4") at the timing of switching from the colored opaque frontal stereoscopic image FRM (numerical value "4") from the numerical value "4"). From the geometric pattern of 4 (a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are arranged continuously in the vertical and horizontal directions), the fifth geometry is formed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. As a pattern, the tiles are displayed by switching to the one arranged side by side in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fifth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front
) In the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour), the character body CRA reappears and the inner region F
It moves in the RMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front are the image display device 7. Is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the above, and the action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also included. It will be displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the decorative symbols are not aligned on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), an action effect is developed, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the game is won, whereas the left-handed game is started when the character RCA is defeated in the game with the character RCB (for example). Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

The stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front approaches (moves toward the player).
As a result, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front
The inside of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front due to the increase in size or the distance of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front (moving away from the player side). As the region FRMa becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger, the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is accompanied by this. The size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of is not displayed in a large size (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character are visually recognized. The area around the character that can be expanded. Further, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is accompanied by this. Inner region FR of
The size of the character displayed on Ma is not displayed small (reduced display), but the area around the character described above is reduced, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") in which the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is viewed from the front.
When approaching (moving toward the player side) in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour), the size of the character is displayed large, but when it is far (moving away from the player side). The size of the character is displayed small in.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the outside / inside / outside effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer outer surface effect A of the stereoscopic image, an image display capable of displaying various images is displayed. A device 7 (display means) is provided, and when a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is formed inside. Character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined). A background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image formed outside the image). The frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is movably displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the character body CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). And character body CRB (1st
And various geometries displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Since it is possible to perform an effect using a background image having a pattern (second effect image), it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the outer shell inside / outside effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Outer shell (contour)
Character body CRA or character body CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of
(First effect image) and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) are displayed. Since it is possible to perform an effect with a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns, it is possible to perform an effect.
The same is true.
In the outer shell inside / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the stereoscopic image is formed inside the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Front-viewed stereoscopic image The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") and the front-viewed stereoscopic image. Image FR
A background image (second effect) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") formed on the outside of M. The same applies because the effect of (image) and can be executed.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour) and the outer region FRMb (second) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. It is different from the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area). According to this configuration, the inner region F of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
While the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the RMa (first region), the outer region FRMb (second) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the area), the first effect image and the second effect image are displayed with the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. Unlike, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the outer / outer outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the character is set in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Body CRA
And the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed, while the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FR
Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of M, the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. As a boundary, the first effect image and the second effect image are different and the same.
In FIG. 94 (B), FIG. 94 (D), FIG. 94 (F), and FIG. Inner region FRMa (
While the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the first region), the outer region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed.
Since a background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in Mb (second region), the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is used as a boundary. The first effect image and the second effect image are different and the same.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer outer surface effect A of the stereoscopic image, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined). The image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is small and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the character is bounded by the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Frame-shaped stereoscopic image on which the body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM becomes large, a background image having various geometric patterns. Since the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which the (second effect image) is displayed becomes smaller, the player can be visually entertained. It is possible to improve the interest.
In the outer / outer outer shell effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). By doing so, the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. When the inner region FRMa (first region) becomes large, a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed.
This is the same because the area of) becomes smaller.
In FIG. 94 (B), FIG. 94 (D), FIG. 94 (F), and FIG. By moving and displaying on the display means), the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a boundary. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front.
When becomes large, a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed.
Is smaller, so the same is true.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer outer surface effect A of the stereoscopic image, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined). The image) is a stereoscopic image. According to this configuration, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is defined as the boundary of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image.
(First region) and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM can be easily recognized as a partitioned region, and the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of (contour) and outer region FRM of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
A background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns displayed in b (second area), and
Because it can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the player, it can visually entertain the player.
It is possible to improve the interest.
In the 3D image outer shell inner / outer effect B of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and FIG. 93 (F), the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as a boundary to form a plate. 3D image FR
The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of M and the outer shell (the outer shell of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM).
The outer region FRMb (second region) of the contour) and the region are easily visible as a partitioned region.
The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the outer shell of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (first effect image). This is the same because it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the contour).
In FIG. 94 (B), FIG. 94 (D), FIG. 94 (F), and FIG. By using the outer shell (contour) as the boundary, the inner region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is used.
Ma (first region) and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front can be easily visually recognized as a partitioned region, and the front surface. The viewed stereoscopic image The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") and the viewed stereoscopic image. To improve visibility with a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the image FRM (number "4"). The same is true because it can contribute.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour) is the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image.
The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the inner region of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. It is an outer region of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM with the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. According to this configuration, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image.
Since the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM can be used as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The region FRMb (second region) and the region FRMb (second region) are more easily visible as a partitioned region. This will result in
Frame-shaped stereoscopic image The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FR.
Since it can contribute to the improvement of visibility with the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of M. It is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In FIG. 93 (B), FIG. 93 (D), and FIG. 93 (F), the outer shell (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, can be used as a boundary in the outer / outer outer shell effect B of the stereoscopic image. , Inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FR
The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of M and the region are more easily visible as a partitioned region. As a result, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (
Character body CRA or character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the first area)
And the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, by improving the visibility. The same is true because it can contribute.
In FIG. 94 (B), FIG. 94 (D), FIG. 94 (F), and FIG. Since the outer shell (contour) can be used as a boundary, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") has the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) and the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "number"). The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of "4") and the region are more easily visible as a partitioned region. As a result, the inner region FR of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is
Character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in Ma (first area), and outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front.
This is the same because it can contribute to the improvement of visibility with the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in (second region).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the outer / outer effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Modification 1]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In the FRM, the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, it is the title (or a characteristic word included in the title) of any of the plurality of music used as a predetermined image to show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Alternatively, the title of the music may be a structure (which may be flat or three-dimensional) that can be associated (imaged).

[Modification 2]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In the FRM, the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, it may be an image described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 as a predetermined image (for example, "OARO").

[Modification 3]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In the FRM, the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, the reserved images 9A and 9B
Or the reserved digestion image 9C may be used as a predetermined image. In this case, the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A, 9B and the reserved digested image 9C and the reserved image are bounded by the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A, 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. Outer shell of 9A, 9B and reserved digestion image 9C (
It can be divided into an outer region (second region) of the contour) and a region of. Hold images 9A, 9
In the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of B and the reserved digestion image 9C, still images and moving images (
A movie by 3D CG, a movie by animation, a scene of a movie) is displayed, and a background image (still) is displayed in the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. Images and moving images (3D CG moving images, animated moving images, movie scenes) are displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In the FRM, the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L,
With the outer shell (outline) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R as the boundary, the inner region (first area) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, and the left decoration Design 8L
, The middle decorative symbol 8C and the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the right decorative symbol 8R can be divided into regions. In the inner area (first area) of the outer shell (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, still images and videos (movies by 3D CG, videos by animation, and one scene of a movie) ) Is displayed, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C,
A background image (still image, moving image (moving image by 3D CG, moving image by animation, one scene of a movie)) is displayed in the outer area (second area) of the outer shell (outline) of the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 5]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and the outer shell inner / outer effect of the stereoscopic image of FIG. In B, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of a certain front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) was a background image having various geometric patterns as still images.
However, the background image may be replaced with a still image as a moving image, or a still image and a moving image may be mixed. As a moving image, for example, in addition to moving various geometric patterns, 3D C
It may be a video by G, a video by animation, or a scene of a movie.

[Modification 6]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is one stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate which is one stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In the three-dimensional image FRM of the shape and the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. Was one stereoscopic image. However, a plurality of stereoscopic images may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of each stereoscopic image.
May be the same image (background image) or different, and one image may be the whole of one image through the inner region (first region) of the outline (contour) of each stereoscopic image. The image may be displayed so that it can be grasped, the same image may be displayed in the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of each stereoscopic image, or different images may be displayed. You may. In this way, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the outer / outer outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, becomes larger or one or both becomes smaller. It was displayed in such a manner. However, the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with this configuration, the character displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Body CRA and character body CRB (
Various types to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (first effect image) and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Since it is possible to perform an effect using a background image (second effect image) having a geometric pattern, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.

[Modification 8]
In FIG. 94 (B), FIG. 94 (D), FIG. 94 (F), and FIG. Although it was moved and displayed on the display means), it is not limited to the one viewed from the front, and even if the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is a display mode that rotates in a three-dimensional space or a display mode that rotates and moves. good. in this case,
When a stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in an approaching manner and a part of the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) protrudes (jumps out) from the image display device 7 (display means), a discontinuous stereoscopic image FRM (discontinuous stereoscopic image FRM) A plurality of stereoscopic images (predetermined images) are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed.
A plurality of independent inner regions are formed in the image display device 7 (display means) as regions in which FRMa is discontinuous. In an manner straddling the independent inner regions FRMa, ... FRMa formed in a plurality of manners in this way, the character body CRA and the character body CRB appear and move in the independent inner regions FRMa, ... FRMa formed in a plurality of forms. As an embodiment, a moving image of the character body CRA or the character body CRB is reproduced.

[Modification 9]
The outer / inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, the outer / outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, and the outer / outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. The effect of may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
A first formed inside the predetermined image when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means.
It is possible to execute the effect by the first effect image displayed in the area of the above and the second effect image displayed in the second area formed outside the predetermined image.
The predetermined image is movably displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C1-1.
The first effect image and the second effect image are different.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C1-1 or the aspect C1-2.
When the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means and the first area is large and displayed on the display means, the second area is small and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3.
The predetermined image is a stereoscopic image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4.
The first region is an inner region of the outer shell of the stereoscopic image with the outer shell of the stereoscopic image as a boundary.
The second region is an outer region of the outer shell of the stereoscopic image with the outer shell of the stereoscopic image as a boundary.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the selection display blocking effects A to C of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. In FIGS. 95 to 97, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the image is displayed. Device 7
Some of the decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the above are omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

This effect mode selection display blocking effect can be executed during a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change, a specific period during a big hit game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and the like. , The intention of the player to operate the effect button 63 (press operation) can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 10
1 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command, a pre-judgment command, various jackpot game opening commands, a jackpot game round designation command, a jackpot game ending command), and produces a button effect. When the instruction to be executed is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode will be described, the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode, and the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be described in order.

[Production mode selection display blocking effect A]
First, the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode. The selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change. In the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Decorative design (design: number "1" in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a.
"~ The variable display of the number" 9 ") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the image of the "cloud") arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

The message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as a digestion of special symbol reservation
The reserved digested image 9C corresponding to the above is arranged and displayed in the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed on the left side of the reserved digested image 9C. The reserved image 9A is linearly arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digested image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digested image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

On the right side of the hold digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area becomes the effect mode in which the effect mode is selected, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, a model of a “cloud”) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "sun" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "clouds" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is displayed downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the B mode is displayed. The C mode arranged above is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above toward a specific area.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is displayed downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the C mode is displayed. The D mode arranged above is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above toward a specific area.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) in the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is directed downward, so that the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode is displayed. The A mode arranged above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward the specific area, and the A mode is displayed in a display mode in which the reel is located in the specific area again.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 95 (A) starts to change, there are cases where reach is not formed and cases where reach is formed. When the reach is formed, the reach is produced based on the expectation that it will be a big hit. There are multiple reach productions. If reach is formed, FIG. 9
Following 5 (A), as shown in FIG. 95 (B), after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L
Is temporarily stopped by a symbol (number) (here, it is temporarily stopped by the number "1"), and the medium decorative symbol 8
C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the C mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the theme image PM imitating "rain" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is inside. In this state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the first special figure hold does not increase because the upper limit of the four first special figure holds has already been reached, and the five hold images 9A are displayed. The image display device 7 is linearly arranged and arranged under the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a and is not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the D mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the change of the decorative pattern starts, the left decorative pattern 8L,
Following the right decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "5" temporarily stops), and then the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1" and the middle decorative symbol. 8C becomes the number "5", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

The left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "5".
When it is stopped and displayed as "3", the period until the next decorative pattern starts to change (hereinafter,
It is called "interval". ), Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect mode cannot be selected. ing. As a result, in the interval, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern change starts, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), the image display device 7 starts to change due to the start of the change of the next decorative pattern.
Of the four reserved images 9A arranged and arranged linearly on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a, the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side is the reserved digested image 9.
When the image is moved to the right as C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are shifted to the right one by one and displayed. "Change mode with the effect button" that tells you that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative pattern starts to change.
Message MG is the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).
It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of a, and the effect mode can be selected.

In the series of effects from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 95 (A) to FIG. 95 (D), the reach was not formed, whereas in the case where the reach is formed, the reach is formed. Following FIG. 95 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have the same symbol (number).
(Here, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "1"), and when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed and the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), the selection unit is displayed at this point. The SEL is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL may be moved downward. You can select the production mode. In addition, after the change of the decorative pattern starts, the first
When the game ball enters the starting port 20, four holding images 9 are held as the four first special figure holdings.
A is a display screen 7 of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
It is arranged and displayed below a.

When the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), a car image GYK imitating a car as a special image forms a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the effect of traveling all at once is developed (so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized and the selection unit SEL is displayed from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 after disappearing (disappearing), the selection unit S
The EL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. Even if the group notice is given, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the reach production progressed, and the left decorative symbol 8L was the number "1" and the middle decorative symbol 8C was the number "1".
"0", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "1" and is stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. Even in this state, the selection unit SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (
Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. It has become.

Since the group notice was given, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. However, the production mode cannot be selected, and the left decorative pattern 8
The player operates the effect button 63 even during the period from when L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change (hereinafter referred to as "interval"). Even if (pressing operation), the effect mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the two periods, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the group notice is given, the already selected production mode is continued unless the next decorative symbol change starts, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. It will be displayed large in 7a. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (J), the image display device 7 starts to change due to the start of the change of the next decorative pattern.
Of the four reserved images 9A arranged and arranged linearly on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a, the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side is the reserved digested image 9.
When the image is moved to the right as C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are shifted to the right one by one and displayed. "Change mode with the effect button" that tells you that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative pattern starts to change.
Message MG is the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).
It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of a, and the effect mode can be selected.

[Production mode selection display blocking effect B]
Next, the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode. The selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change. In the effect mode selection display prevention effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Decorative design (design: number "1" in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a.
"~ The variable display of the number" 9 ") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the image of the "cloud") arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

The message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as a special pattern hold digestion
The reserved digested image 9C corresponding to the above is arranged and displayed in the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed on the left side of the reserved digested image 9C. The reserved image 9A is linearly arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digested image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digested image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

On the right side of the hold digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area becomes the effect mode in which the effect mode is selected, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, a model of a “cloud”) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "sun" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "clouds" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is displayed downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the B mode is displayed. The C mode arranged above is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above toward a specific area.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is displayed downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the C mode is displayed. The D mode arranged above is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above toward a specific area.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) in the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is directed downward, so that the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode is displayed. The A mode arranged above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward the specific area, and the A mode is displayed in a display mode in which the reel is located in the specific area again.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 96 (A) starts to fluctuate, there is a case where the effect suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A may contain a big hit (so-called “look-ahead effect”) is not performed. A look-ahead effect for the reserved image 9A may be performed. When the look-ahead effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), following FIG. 96 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) after the start of the change of the decorative symbol. (Here, it is temporarily stopped by the number "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state,
When the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly arranged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations of the image display device 7. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the C mode, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the theme image PM imitating "rain" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is inside. In this state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the first special figure hold does not increase because the upper limit of the four first special figure holds has already been reached, and the five hold images 9A are displayed. The image display device 7 is linearly arranged and arranged under the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a and is not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the D mode, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the change of the decorative pattern starts, the left decorative pattern 8L,
Following the right decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "5" temporarily stops), and then the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1" and the middle decorative symbol. 8C becomes the number "5", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

The left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "5".
When it is stopped and displayed as "3", the period until the next decorative pattern starts to change (hereinafter,
It is called "interval". ), Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect mode cannot be selected. ing. As a result, in the interval, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern change starts, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the next decorative pattern starts to change, the image display device 7 is shown in FIG. 96 (E).
Of the four reserved images 9A arranged and arranged linearly on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a, the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side is the reserved digested image 9.
When the image is moved to the right as C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are shifted to the right one by one and displayed. "Change mode with the effect button" that tells you that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative pattern starts to change.
Message MG is the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).
It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of a, and the effect mode can be selected.

In the series of effects from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 96 (A) to FIG. 96 (D), the effect suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A may include a jackpot (so-called so-called). Although the "look-ahead effect") was not performed, when the look-ahead effect for the reserved image 9A is performed, as shown in FIG. 96 (G) following FIG. 96 (A). After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped by the symbol (number) (here, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. It has become. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Assuming that the hold image 9A placed closest to the hold digestion image 9C is the first hold image 9A, the second hold image 9A is placed to the left of the first hold image 9A and the second hold image 9A. The third reserved image 9A is arranged to the left of the reserved image 9A, and the first starting port 2 this time is to the left of the third reserved image 9A.
The reserved image 9A added by the game ball entering 0 is arranged as the fourth reserved image 9A.

When an effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting that a jackpot may be included in the hold information corresponding to the fourth hold image 9A is performed, the display mode of the fourth hold image 9A as a special image is different. Is displayed differently from the display mode of the reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). For example, in the look-ahead effect, which is a special image,
Based on the degree of expectation that will be a big hit, as a display mode of the reserved image 9A, for example, blue → green →
Expectations for big hits are set higher in the order of red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). Here, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A is such that it emits red light, and the other reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). ) Is displayed in a white light emission mode (when the look-ahead effect is not performed, the expectation of a big hit is the lowest).

In the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, the display mode of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape is, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)) based on the expectation of a big hit. ), Which is expected to be a big hit, but it may be a character body instead of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape. In this case, in the mode in which the reserved image 9A is displayed as a character, the expectation of the jackpot is at least the expected degree of the jackpot set in the mode of displaying the reserved image 9A in red. Is set to.

When the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is performed, the display of the special image is prioritized, the selection unit SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 6
Even if the operation 3 (pressing operation) is performed, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. Even if the look-ahead effect is performed, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C are erased (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Never.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), after the change of the decorative symbol starts, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "3" is used. Temporary stop)
, The middle decorative pattern 8C is changing. In this state, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
The production mode cannot be selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), after the change of the decorative symbol starts, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the decorative symbol 8C). (Temporarily stopped at the number "5"), then the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "5".
, The right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3" and is stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

After that, when the next decorative pattern starts to change, the image display device 7 is shown in FIG. 96 (J).
Of the four reserved images 9A arranged and arranged linearly on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a, the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side is the reserved digested image 9.
When the image is moved to the right as C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are shifted to the right one by one and displayed. Although the decorative pattern starts to change, the look-ahead effect has already been performed, so that the selection unit SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 even in this state. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

In this way, if the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, the effect mode is selected during the change before the look-ahead effect is performed. However, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation. Furthermore, when the look-ahead effect is performed,
The reserved image 9A on which this look-ahead effect is performed moves to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, and the decorative symbol starts to change, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed.
The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) even in a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change in which the effect mode can be selected in the period until the loss is confirmed and displayed. Even so, the production mode cannot be selected. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8 in the reserved image 9A in which the look-ahead effect is performed.
Even during the period from when R is stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode Cannot be selected. As a result, in such a series of periods,
The already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the hold image 9A on which the look-ahead effect is performed is digested as the hold digestion image 9C. The selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the hold image 9A on which the look-ahead effect is performed is digested as the hold digest image 9C and becomes a big hit, the effect button 63 is operated as shown in FIG. 96 (A) after the big hit effect is completed. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" indicating that the effect mode can be changed by pressing operation) is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). Is displayed, and the effect mode can be selected.

Further, even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is set on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Production mode selection display blocking effect C]
Next, the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode. The effect mode selection display prevention effect C is an effect that is performed during a specific period during a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and is an effect that is not performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ((
For example, it is not performed when there is a so-called "holding ream" in which there is a big hit in the holding ball before the big hit production ends). The presence or absence of this pending sequence is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command.

Here, a case will be described in which a player plays a right-handed game and becomes a big hit, a big hit game (big hit effect) occurs, and after the big hit game (big hit effect) is completed, the right-handed game is continued. If the hold-ream effect is not performed, in other words, there is no jackpot in the hold ball before the jackpot effect ends.

During the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), there is a game production period from the beginning of the jackpot production (big hit game) to the end of all the production of each round game, and this game production period. Then, a notification period for notifying the game state (for example, a state of returning to left-handed, a state of continuing right-handed) after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game), and following this notification period, a big hit effect (big hit game). A specific period in which the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of is displayed, and a catch phrase effect or game in which the catch phrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed following this specific period. There is a predetermined period in which a slogan prevention effect is displayed, in which a warning for dependence on addiction is displayed.

In the specific period, in order to convey the mode transition to the selected effect mode after the first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode and the first period (effect mode selection period) have elapsed. It is composed of the second period (effect mode confirmed notification period) and.

The catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed. The catch phrase effect and the warning for dependence on the game are displayed.
The end of the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot production (big hit game) coincides with that.

In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is used to produce the effects of each round game in the jackpot effect (big hit game), and all of them are completed. By doing so, the end of the game production period is reached, and accordingly, at the beginning of the notification period, the message MG "continue right-handed" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue right-handed. .. Further, the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative pattern. , The second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
Instead of the hold image 9B corresponding to the special figure hold, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. Figure hold and number H respectively
It is arranged and displayed as an MG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. here,
For example, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the number "0" is on the left side, and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Are four and the numbers "4" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

The message MG of "continue right-handed" in FIG. 97 (A) is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the end of the notification period (for example, 3 seconds). At the beginning, there are cases where the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) is displayed, and cases where the effect mode selection screen is not displayed. ..

When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the effect button 6 is used to prompt the player to select the effect mode by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation).
The first effect button image BTN imitating 3 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, it is blinking in white. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

An effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated to specify a specific area. The selection unit SEL in which the effect mode reached to is displayed larger than that of other effect modes is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode. When the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, the A mode is arranged in a specific area as the default, but when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, the A mode) may always be arranged in the specific area, or the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area when the effect mode selection screen was displayed last time.

To the right of the selection unit SEL, a demo area DS that explains the contents of the currently selected production mode with various images and various characters is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be done. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the character "DEMO" indicating the demo screen of the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side thereof.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS, which is the same image as the first production button image BTN. The second effect button image BTN2 is the demo area DS as an image (an image in which the characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button is all the same) or a similar image (an image partially or all similar to the characteristic information). It is placed and displayed on the lower right side. An explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the effect in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 97 (C). When the A mode moves downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
The effect button image BTN of is continuously displayed. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In B mode, the production with the theme of "cloud" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "cloud" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific area. Is displayed. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special drawing hold and the second are based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is the number HMG, and the image display device 7
Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" progresses, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific area. Is displayed. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special drawing hold and the second are based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is the number HMG, and the image display device 7
Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" progresses, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in the D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

With the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63 and the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode has elapsed. At the beginning of the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition to the selected effect mode, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the four corners of the demo area DS, which is a rectangular area, are images. It is displayed in a mode that expands toward the four corners of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (enlarged mode), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the production proceeds with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. The theme image PM imitating a "cloud" is displayed in a large size, and a message MG indicating that the selected production mode is B mode is displayed on the right side of the theme image PM from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed larger toward the center. It should be noted that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) elapses, and a catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the gaming machine maker is displayed and a slogan prevention effect in which a warning for dependence on the game is displayed are performed. At the beginning of the period, and when this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), the theme image imitating the "cloud" that progresses the production with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. PM is the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
The effect displayed in large size will be advanced.

At the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" in FIG. 97 (A) is displayed, and accordingly, at the beginning of the specific period, a series from FIG. 97 (B) to FIG. 97 (D). In the effect of, the effect mode selection screen is displayed, and the effect after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) is advanced in the selected effect mode. On the other hand, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Since the number of special figure hold is zero and the number is "0", and the number of second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is four and the number is "4", the second start port 21 When the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the ball contains a big hit, the display of the special image is prioritized to produce the hold ream, which is a special image. Do not display the mode selection screen.
Therefore, when the effect mode selection screen is not displayed, FIG. 9 (A) is followed by FIG.
As shown in 7 (G), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first starting port 20
The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.
The special figure hold is continuously displayed as a number HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the reserved series image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape suggesting the existence of the reserved series is shown in FIG.
As shown in 7 (H), it is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A first character body HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is arranged on the lower side of the first surface of the reserved series image HRC having a V-shape, whereas a holding series having a V-shape is arranged. A second character body HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is arranged on the upper side of the second surface (the surface opposite to the first surface) of the image HRC. The reserved continuous image HRC rotates around the vertical line passing through the center of the lower side of the reserved continuous image HRC as a rotation axis, and the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC and the second surface of the reserved continuous image HRC appear repeatedly. It becomes a display mode.

When an effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting that a jackpot may be included in the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A (for example, FIGS. 1 and 96 (G) to 96 (J)) is performed, for example, special The display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A as an image is another reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A,
The display mode is different from that of the second reserved image 9A, the third reserved image 9A), the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A, and the third. The display mode of the reserved image 9A of the eyes has a circular shape, whereas the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A has a circular shape, instead of the first character body HRC1 or the second character body HRC2. May be. That is, the first character body HRC1 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC.
The second character body HRC2 is the same character as the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A when the look-ahead effect is performed.

The character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is smaller than the size of the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC. Further, the characters displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A are the first character body HRC1 and the second character body H arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC.
Although it is the same character as RC2, the orientation and posture of the character may be different.

The first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is forward (player side).
If it is stopped and displayed toward, although it is not possible to tell the type of hit,
While it is possible to convey that the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 includes a jackpot, the second character body HRC2 When the second surface of the HRC is displayed as a stop facing forward (player side), four second special figures are reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. In the pending information corresponding to
16 rounds (maximum round (MAX round)) jackpots are more than a predetermined number (for example)
2) You can tell that it is included.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed toward the front (player side), and the second start port 21 is displayed. It is informed that the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball. It should be noted that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Display screen 7
It is continuously displayed on the upper left side of a.

After that, it is the beginning of the period for performing the catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the gaming machine maker is displayed and the slogan prevention effect in which the alert for dependence on the game is displayed, and this period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. By doing so, it will be the end of the big hit production (big hit game). At the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), the theme image PM that imitates the production mode before the jackpot production (big hit game) occurs, for example, the theme of the "sun" in A mode, is the image. An effect that is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 will be advanced.

In addition, when the production of the pending ream is performed, and then the big hit production (big hit game) ends and the right-handed game is started, when the production mode selection screen is displayed in the previous big hit production (big hit game). When the effect mode selected in is maintained, the jackpot game (big hit effect) occurs again, and the effect mode selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the maintained effect mode is set. Although it will be arranged in a specific area, the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63.

In the present embodiment, the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode is performed in the specific period, but the effect of the hold ream is also performed in the same period as this specific period. That is, in the first period (effect mode selection period), the effect mode selection display blocking effect C allows the player to select the effect mode, whereas the hold-ream effect produces a flash image. F
H, and the pending continuous image HRC will be used for the production. Then, in the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period), the effect of preventing the selection display of the effect mode is performed to convey the transition of the selected effect mode, whereas the effect of the pending ream is such that there is a big hit. Perform a production to convey. The specific period in which the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode is performed and the specific period in which the effect of the hold sequence is performed are the same period. As a result, following FIG. 97 (A), FIGS. 97 (B) to 9
The time required for a series of productions to 7 (D), and following FIG. 97 (A), FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (Fig. 97).
Since the time required for a series of effects to I) matches, a catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the gaming machine maker is displayed and a slogan prevention effect in which a warning for dependence on the game is displayed are performed. The start of the predetermined period is also the same, and there is no difference in the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) after the predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect of preventing the selection display of the effect mode.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (H) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A.
), An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images is provided, and one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple effect modes) can be selected. The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) and the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). At least one of the two effects can be executed, and when the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Based on the arrival of the next period (satisfaction of predetermined conditions) in which the effect (group notice) of running all at once toward the image display device 7 is developed, the selection unit SEL (SEL) to the image display device 7 by the first effect.
A car image GY that imitates a car on the image display device 7 by the second effect by blocking the display of the selected image)
The display of K (special image) can be executed. According to this configuration, the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is used as the image display device 7 (display means). Even if it is displayed, a production (group notice) in which a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car runs all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked. As a result, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Selection of effect mode of FIGS. 96 (H) to 96 (J) In display blocking effect B, one effect mode can be selected from A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plural effect modes). Even if the SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the look-ahead effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (satisfaction of a predetermined condition) in which the look-ahead effect which is a special image is performed. The selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means).
It is the same because it will be done.
Selection of effect mode of FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I) In display blocking effect C, one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple effect modes) can be selected. Even if the SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the hold ream is based on the arrival of the next period (satisfaction of a predetermined condition) in which the effect of the hold ream, which is a special image, is performed. When the effect is performed, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is blocked from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased from the image display device 7 (display means) ( The same applies because it will disappear).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (A) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A.
) To As shown in FIG. 95 (J), an image display device is a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple effect modes). The first effect to be displayed on the 7 (display means) can be executed in a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the change, and the car image GYK (special image) imitating the car is displayed on the image display device 7. The second effect displayed on (display means) can be executed in a specific period from the start of change of the decorative pattern to the stop of change. According to this configuration, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (
The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car. )
The second effect of displaying the image on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. can.
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect B of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), A mode, B mode, C mode and D are performed in a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change.
An image of a first effect of displaying a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the modes (multiple effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means) and a look-ahead effect which is a special image. This is the same because the second effect displayed on the display device 7 (display means) can be executed.
In the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I), the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode are used in a specific period during the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit. The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the D modes (multiple effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the hold sequence which is a special image. This is the same because the second effect of displaying the effect of the above on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (A) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A.
) ~ As shown in FIG. 95 (J), the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (plural operation means) that can be operated by the player are provided, and the effect button 63 and the sword member 64 are provided.
, Sword button 65, select button 68 (plural operation means), only when the effect button 63 (specific operation means) is operated, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plural effect modes) One production mode can be selected. According to this configuration, among the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (plural operation means),
Of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 arranged on the front frame (front frame portion) 53 and around the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, the effect button 63 is arranged at the position closest to the player side. In addition, because it is formed larger than the select button 68, A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple production modes) within a limited period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of fluctuation. It is most preferable as an operation means for selecting one of the effect modes. Select display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), FIG. 97.
The same applies to the selection display blocking effect C of the effect modes (A) to FIG. 97 (I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (A) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A.
) ~ As shown in FIG. 95 (J), when the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed as an image display device 7 (display) based on the arrival of the next period (satisfaction of predetermined conditions) in which a production (group notice) of traveling all at once in a group is developed. When displayed on the means), the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode are executed before the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating the car on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed. And D mode (
The effect mode (here, B mode) already selected in the first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means). ) Is maintained. According to this configuration, when the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and finished, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode and the D mode are executed. Since the effect mode (here, B mode) already selected before the second effect is executed among the modes (multiple effect modes) is maintained, the player is visually entertained. It is possible to improve the interest.
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect B of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), when the second effect of displaying the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and ended. , A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes), the same is true because the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed is maintained. ..
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I), a second effect of displaying the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed. When finished, the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plural effect modes) is maintained, so that the same applies. Is.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (A) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A.
) To As shown in FIG. 95 (E), an image display device is a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple effect modes). In the first effect displayed on 7 (display means), the names of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (plurality of effect modes) are arranged in a reel shape, rotated and displayed, and selected. The effect mode of is arranged in the foreground side. According to this configuration, since the names of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple effect modes) are arranged in a reel shape, the type of selection mode to be rotated and displayed and one effect mode can be used. It is easy to understand the effect mode to be arranged after that, and since the selected effect mode is the display mode arranged on the front side, it is easy to select the effect mode and the player can visually see the player. It can be entertained and can be enjoyed. FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (E)
The same applies to the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode and the selection display blocking effect C of the effect modes of FIGS. 97 (B) to 97 (C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 97 (G) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect C.
) ~ As shown in FIG. 97 (I), a special image, a hold ream, is produced (predetermined condition).
Includes a condition that suggests the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player that there is a jackpot in the reserved ball before the jackpot production is completed by performing the hold ream. can.

[Modification example]
The following is a modification of the effect mode selection display prevention effect.
[Modification 1]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect A of FIG. 95 (H), the vehicle image GYK (special image) imitating a car forms a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 all at once. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of predetermined conditions) in which the running effect (group notice) is developed, the image display device 7 (selection image) of the selection unit SEL (selection image) is developed. The selection unit SEL (selected image) was erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display on the display means). However, even if the next period in which the effect (group notice) is developed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the effect (group notice) is not developed and the image display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) is performed. The display on the device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 develops the effect (group notice), and if it is won, the effect (group notice) is developed, whereas if it is lost, the effect (group notice) is performed. Group notice) will not be deployed. The image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery for whether or not to develop the effect (group notice) instead of the sub control board 90.
In the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIGS. 96 (G) to 96 (J), this look-ahead effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (satisfaction of a predetermined condition) in which the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, is performed. Then, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means). Was there. However, even if the next period in which the look-ahead effect is performed arrives (even if certain conditions are met)
, The look-ahead effect may not be performed, and the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 performs the pre-reading effect, and if the sub-control board 90 is won, the pre-reading effect is performed, whereas if the sub-control board 90 is defeated, the pre-reading effect is not performed. The image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery for whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect instead of the sub control board 90.
In the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I), the hold sequence is based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, is performed. When the effect of is performed, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is blocked from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased from the image display device 7 (display means). It was (disappeared). However, even if the next period in which the effect of the hold sequence is performed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the effect of the hold sequence is not performed, and the image display device 7 (display means) of the selection unit SEL (selected image) is used. The display to may continue. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 produces the hold-ream effect. .. In addition, the lottery for whether or not to produce the hold ream is determined by the sub control board 90.
The image control microcomputer 101 may be used instead of the above.

[Modification 2]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect A of FIG. 95 (H), the car image GYK imitating a car as a special image forms a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized and the selection unit SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It was (disappeared). However, instead of the car image GYK that imitates a car as a special image, a full-body image of the character, a partially enlarged image of the character, a composite image of the character or item, a group image of multiple characters, etc. are cut-in notices (additional). It may be an image inserted as an effect). Further, when the eye-catching image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) along with the progress of the reach effect, the eye-catching image is set as a special image, so that the display of the eye-catching image, which is a special image, is prioritized. The selection unit SEL is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
It may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of. Further, when the character of the manufacturer that produces the game machine 1 appears on the image display device 7 (display means), the character of this manufacturer is set as a special image, the display of the character of the manufacturer is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL is the image display device. It may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of 7.

[Modification 3]
In the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIGS. 96 (G) to 96 (J), when the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, the look-ahead effect is performed. Before it is performed, the effect mode can be selected during the change, whereas when the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the change, and further, the look-ahead effect cannot be selected. Even during the period (interval) from when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reserved image 9A where the effect was performed are stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change, the player However, even if the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the effect mode cannot be selected. However, the reserved image 9A on which the look-ahead effect was performed moves to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, and the decorative symbol starts to change, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is displayed. It may be possible to make it impossible to select the effect mode only during the period until the confirmation is displayed, or even if the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the change. The effect mode may be selected during the period until the reserved image 9A on which the reading effect is performed moves to the right as the reserved digested image 9C and the decorative pattern starts to change.

[Modification 4]
Selective display blocking effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95, Selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIG. 96
In the interval, since the already selected effect mode is continued, the effect mode cannot be selected unless the next decorative symbol change starts. However, it may be possible to select the effect mode only at the interval in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and then the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the predetermined effect among the plurality of types of reach effects. As a predetermined effect, there is a high expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) that is advantageous to the player will occur, and after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the so-called normal reach, the variable display of the decorative symbol starts. In the interval that is done
The production mode cannot be selected.

[Modification 5]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I), the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped toward the front (player side). If it is displayed, the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, although it cannot be notified by the type of hit. I was able to tell that it was, but I could not tell the number of jackpots to the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be transmitted to the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold. For example, when there are three jackpots in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold, the first of the hold series image HRC having the first character body HRC1 facing forward (player side). "+3" may be displayed on the right side of the surface, or the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 may be displayed by arranging three horizontally, three vertically, or three diagonally. May be good.

[Modification 6]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIG. 97, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode was displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS. Such a video is a video explaining the progress of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, and the like, and is a three-dimensional C.
It may be a video by G, a video by animation, or a scene of a movie. A still image may be used instead of the moving image.

[Modification 7]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIG. 97, a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plural effect modes) is displayed as an image. The first effect displayed on the device 7 (display means) was executed during the jackpot effect (effect of the winning game). However, in addition to the big hit production, during the production in the small hit game (or in the production in the small hit game instead of the big hit production)
, The selection unit SEL (selected image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). In this case, the second effect of displaying the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means).
As for the effect of, in addition to the big hit effect, it may be executed during the effect in the small hit game (or during the effect in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect).

[Modification 8]
Selective display blocking effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95, Selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIG. 96
In FIG. 97, the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode may not include a part of the described effect, or may have another effect added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
The first effect of displaying a selected image in which one of the plurality of effect modes can be selected is displayed on the display means, and the first effect.
At least one of the second effect of displaying the special image on the display means can be executed.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the display of the selected image on the display means by the first effect and display the special image on the display means by the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C2-1.
The first effect and the second effect can be performed in a specific period.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C2-1 or the aspect C2-2.
Equipped with multiple operating means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of effect modes can be selected only when a specific operation means is operated among the plurality of operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3.
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4.
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of the plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated and displayed, and one selected effect mode is arranged on the foremost side.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5.
The predetermined condition includes a condition suggesting the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The game ball image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. This game ball image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 10
1 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the game ball image effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is included. It is an effect to display an image on the screen.

[Game ball image production A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It is shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. Hold digestion image 9C
Corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during the time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision production is
It is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the color change effect is executed. Color change production
This is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the white upper surface is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision production is
It is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the color change effect is executed. Color change production
This is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the upper surface of green is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG in which the color of the upper surface is changed by the color change effect is displayed. In addition, the message image MG "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C,
The right effect symbols 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Game ball image production B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image production B.
First, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It is shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. Hold digestion image 9C
Corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during the time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision production is
It is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the first movable accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the color change effect is executed. Color change production
This is an effect of changing the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision production is
It is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the first movable accessory (left movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the color change effect is executed. Color change production
This is an effect of changing the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C,
The right effect symbols 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Game ball image production C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the hold stock effect is executed. The hold stock effect is an effect that causes the maximum number of storages of the second special figure hold to be "4" in the fluctuation. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a, and the message image MG "Right-handed to save the hold" is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. The panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the letters "CHANGE" are "BIG"
It has been changed to "CHANGE".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the characters "BIG CHANCE" have been changed to "Gekiatsu".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), the battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory effect is an effect of notifying that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background thereof is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C
, Right production symbol 8R is stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the game ball image production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect using the gaming ball image UG is executed (FIG. 98 (C) (FIG. 98).
E), FIGS. 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)), suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the jackpot game (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F)). , FIGS. 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production using the game ball image UG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the gaming ball image UG is made to collide with the collision target (FIG. 98 (C) (FIG. 98 (C)).
E), FIGS. 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)), suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the jackpot game by changing the color of the collision target (FIG. 98 (D) (F)). , FIGS. 99 (D) (F), FIGS. 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by producing a color change due to the collision of the game ball image UG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG (FIG. 98) imitating the effect button 63 and a panel image PG in which characters are displayed are adopted as collision targets of the gaming ball image UG (FIG. 1).
00). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a unified effect on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first possible accessory 14 (
The left movable accessory (14L) is used (Fig. 99). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a dynamic effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball collision effect using the game ball image UG is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (FIGS. 98 (C) and 98 (E)). , Figure 99 (C
) (E), FIGS. 100 (B) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to feel as if the game ball collision effect was executed by the game ball that entered the ball, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the game ball image production.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the number of game balls represented in the game ball image UG is one, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision target.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of the over winning after the second special figure hold reaches the upper limit.

[Modification 4]
The above is an example suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a big hit, but it may be applied as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a high-accuracy or low-accuracy time-saving game.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
It is possible to execute a game ball effect using a game ball image, which is an image imitating a game ball, and to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-1.
In the game ball effect, the game ball image is made to collide with the collision target, and the display color or the color development mode of the collision target is changed, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
The collision target is an image displayed on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3.
The collision target is an accessory arranged in the game area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4.
The game ball effect is executed when the game ball enters a predetermined entrance.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5.
The advantageous game is a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6.
The advantageous game is a time-saving game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-5.
The predetermined ball entry port is a start port, and is executed when the ball enters the start port after the hold memory due to the entry of the game ball into the start port reaches the upper limit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the specific end face effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103.
In FIGS. 101 to 103, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the visibility of the drawing, and the decorative design displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also seen in the drawing. Some of them are omitted for ease of use, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing in the drawing. There is something that has been done.

The specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image, the ROM 10
The corresponding image data is read from 3 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image, the position, inclination, and light emission of the second movable accessory 15 are included. Change the aspect.

Here, first, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described, and then the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described.
, And the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Specific end face effect A of stereoscopic image]
First, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 shows
It is a figure for demonstrating the specific end face effect A of a 3D image. The specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. be. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the image display device 7
On the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative pattern (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is temporarily stopped at the number "8", and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is rotated by the number "8" (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease toward the rear while rotating from the upper side to the lower side, this time, another rotation (for example, from the right side to the left side of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image) is adopted. The left decorative pattern 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, is finally displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (C). The display mode is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R and the rotation is stopped. As will be described later, this is done in order to greatly display the mode of double doors by the right side of the left side middle decoration symbol 8CL and the left side of the right side middle decoration design 8CR, which are obtained by dividing the middle decoration symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image into left and right.

After that, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the three-dimensional image is divided into left and right with a vertical line (center line) passing through the middle point of the upper side and the middle point of the lower side of the middle decorative symbol 8C in the three-dimensional image as a boundary, and the middle decorative symbol on the left side of the three-dimensional image. 8
It is divided into CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR of the stereoscopic image, and as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the right side of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are displayed in a double-door manner. Here, a stereoscopic image in which the right end face of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is the open side end face, which is the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, and the left end face of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR is the open side end face. This is the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.

The middle decorative symbol 8C is formed as colored opaque, but when the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, the left middle decorative symbol 8C
The specific end face 8CLa of L and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are represented in a mode of having transparency. Here, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8
Each of the specific end face 8CRa of CR becomes a transparent region.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed on the specific end surface 8 of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL.
It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of CLa and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR.

Here, two character bodies CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and two character bodies CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, showing the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Even if the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are gradually opened in the form of a Kannon opening, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size of each other do not change. It has become. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR have just been opened in the form of double doors, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8C
The transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of R is small, and the specific end face 8CL of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL
Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of a and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are transparent, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner. As the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR become larger, the character body CRB is formed from the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL. A part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are wide open in the manner of double doors, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is the character body CRB. The transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR becomes large until the presence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 101 (E), as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the display screen 7 of the image display device 7
The flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the specific end surface 8C of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is displayed.
The character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of La and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and 2 Action production by two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR. Two character bodies CRA,
The background image of the CRB is also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit effect) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative pattern 8L is a number "on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7".
9 ”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number“ 8 ”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number“ 9 ”. The Rukoto.

[Specific end face effect B of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 shows
It is a figure for demonstrating the specific end face effect B of a 3D image. The specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. be. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the image display device 7
On the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative pattern (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape described as “OARO” on the front surface is retracted above the image display device 7 (home position). The image is advanced (moved) downward from the stationary state to a position (advanced position (effect position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advanced position (directed position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle is clockwise from the horizontal state. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes tilted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), "OAR" described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15.
The character string "O" appears in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a character string image LG of a colored opaque stereoscopic image called "OARO". The appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as the "OARO" described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15, or the appearance may be the same but the colors may be different.

After that, when the character string image LG of the three-dimensional image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease in distance, this time, the display mode is switched to another rotation (for example, the rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and the image gradually approaches forward while rotating. As shown in FIG. 102 (E), it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rotation was stopped. It becomes a display mode. This is done in order to largely display the mode of double doors by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right, as will be described later.

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and "OA" is the left character string image L.
It is divided into character string images of two stereoscopic images with GL and "RO" as the right side character string image LGR, and as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR are. It is a display mode that opens in a Kannon opening mode. Here, the right end face of the character "A" which is the right end face of the left side character string image LGL is the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL which is a stereoscopic image which is the open side end face, and the left side of the right side character string image LGR. The left end face of the character "R" which is the end face is the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image whose open side end face is.

The character string image LG is formed as colored opaque, but when the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened in a double-door manner, the left side character string image LG
The specific end face LGLa of L and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are represented in a manner having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image L
Each of the specific end face LGRa of GR becomes a transparent region.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are displayed in a double-door mode, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed as a specific end face L of the left side character string image LGL.
It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of GLa and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

Here, two character strings CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and the two character strings CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually opened in the manner of Kannon opening, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size of each other do not change. It has become. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR have just been opened in the manner of double doors, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LG
The transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of R is small, and the specific end face LGL of the left character string image LGL
Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of a and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are transparent, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened in a Kannon-opening manner. When the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR become larger, the character body CRB is formed from the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL. A part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are wide open in the manner of a Kannon opening, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the transparent region of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL is the character body CRB. The transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR becomes large to the state where the existence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 102 (G), as shown in FIG. 102 (H), the display screen 7 of the image display device 7
The flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the specific end face LG of the left character string image LGL.
The character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of La and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and 2 Action production by two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. Two character bodies CRA,
The background image of the CRB is also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit effect) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative pattern 8L is a number "on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7".
9 ”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number“ 8 ”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number“ 9 ”. The Rukoto.

[Specific end face effect C of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 shows
It is a figure for demonstrating the specific end face effect C of a 3D image. The specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. be. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the image display device 7
On the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative pattern (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is retracted above the image display device 7 (home position). The image is advanced (moved) downward from the stationary state to a position (advanced position (effect position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advanced position (directed position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle is clockwise from the horizontal state. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes tilted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), "OAR" described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15.
The character string "O" appears in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a character string image LG of a colored opaque stereoscopic image called "OARO". The appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as the "OARO" described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15, or the appearance may be the same but the colors may be different.

After that, when the character string image LG of the three-dimensional image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease in distance, this time, the display mode is switched to another rotation (for example, the rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and the image gradually approaches forward while rotating. As shown in FIG. 103 (E), it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rotation was stopped. It becomes a display mode. This is because, as will be described later, the display mode in which the front surface of the left side character string image LGL obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and close is displayed in a large size. It is done in.

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and "OA" is the left character string image L.
It is divided into character string images of two stereoscopic images with GL and "RO" as the right character string image LGR, and as shown in FIG. 103 (F), the left side of the left character string image LGL is the right side of the left character string image LGL. The display mode is such that the right side of the right character string image LGR is rotated forward with the vertical direction as the axis, and the right side of the right side character string image LGR is the display mode of rotating forward with the left side of the right side character string image LGR as the axis. Here, the surface described as "OA" of the left side character string image LGL immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103 (E)) is divided into "left side character strings". It is called "the front of the image LGL" and is just before it is divided into two character string images (
The surface of the right-hand character string image LGR described as "RO" in the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103 (E) is referred to as "the front surface of the right-hand character string image LGR" after being divided.

As the rotation between the left character string image LGL and the right character string LGR progresses, the left character string image L
The display mode is such that the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are rotated so that the front surface of the GL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other (hereinafter, "the front surface of the left side character string image LGL"). The display mode is closed so that the front surface of the right character string image LGR faces each other and overlaps with each other. ").

As a result, the right end face of the character "A" which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL becomes the closed side end face, and the left end face of the character "O" which becomes the left end face of the left side character string image LGL becomes the open side end face. Further, the left end face of the character "R" which is the left end face of the right character string image LGR is the closed side end face, and the right end face of the character "O" which is the right end face of the right side character string image LGR is the open side end face.

The left end face of the character "O", which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL, is the open side end face.
Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image, and the right end face of the character "O", which is the right end face of the right side character string image LGR, are open side end faces, and are stereoscopic images here. It becomes the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

The character string image LG is formed as colored opaque, but when the display mode is such that the front surface of the left side character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other.
The specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are represented in a manner having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL
And the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent areas, respectively.

When the display mode is such that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is transparent to the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL. Area and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR can be visually recognized.

Here, two character strings CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and the two character strings CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Yes, the left side character string image LGL is gradually closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed.
And the right character string image LGR are closed, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size of the two characters do not change. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR have just been closed so that the front surface of the left side character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to be in a display mode. The transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the left side character string image LGL is closed, as the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are closed, the specific end surface LGLa of the left side character string image LGL When the transparent area and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR become large, a part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, and the right side character string image LGR can be visually recognized. A part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGRa of.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed until the display mode is such that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, FIG. 103 (G) is shown. As shown in, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large enough to be able to visually recognize the existence of the character body CRB, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR. Increases to a state in which the presence of the character CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 103 (G), as shown in FIG. 103 (H), the display screen 7 of the image display device 7
The flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then, as shown in FIG. 103 (I), the specific end face LG of the left character string image LGL.
The character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of La and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and 2 Action production by two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. Two character bodies CRA,
The background image of the CRB is also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit effect) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative pattern 8L is a number "on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7".
9 ”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number“ 8 ”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number“ 9 ”. The Rukoto.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 101 (A) to FIG. 101 (A) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image.
As shown in FIG. 101 (E), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images is provided, and the image display device 7 (display means) has a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image and an intermediate decoration of the stereoscopic image. Design 8
C, When displaying the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image, the specific end face 8CLa of the left intermediate decorative symbol 8CL in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided and the right middle of the right side in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided. The specific end surface 8CRa of the decorative pattern 8CR is represented in a manner having transparency, and the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8C of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.
First, the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through Ra.
Can be performed. According to this configuration, two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are formed through the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR represented by the aspect having transparency. Since it is possible to provide a novel effect that has never been seen before, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL The two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the right side character string image LGR and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and the same is true.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 101 (A) to FIG. 101 (A) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image.
As shown in FIG. 101 (E), in the first effect, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL represented by the transparent aspect and the right middle decorative symbol represented by the transparent aspect are shown. The left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR, in which the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided, are opened (rotated) in a double-door manner so that the area of the 8CR with the specific end face 8CRa becomes large. ing. According to this configuration, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened (rotated) in a double-door manner, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL represented in a transparent manner is obtained. And the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR represented by the aspect having transparency, the area becomes large, and the two character body CRs
Since the area where A and CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized can be increased, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G), the left character string image L
When the GL and the right character string image LGR are opened (rotated) in a double-door mode, they are represented by a specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, which is represented by a transparent mode, and a transparent mode. The area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR and the area of 2
The area where one character body CRA and CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized can be increased, and the same is true.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the left character string image L
The GL and the right side character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner by being rotated in a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed. The area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR represented by the aspect having transparency becomes large, and the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined image) The area where the image can be visually recognized can be increased, and the same is true.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, the number “8” which is the intermediate decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is before the first effect. It is possible to execute the second effect of displaying the size of the image on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, before the first effect, the size of the number "8", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a large size, so that the decorative symbol 8CL is displayed. The player with respect to the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR before and after the specific end surface 8CLa of the above and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are represented in a manner having transparency. Since it can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102 (E), before the first effect, the mode of the Kannon opening by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR is greatly expanded by the image display device 7 ( By being able to be displayed on the display means), the specific end surface of the left character string image LGL is represented before and after the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR have transparency. It can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player to the LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and is the same.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103 (E), before the first effect, the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed is greatly increased. By being able to be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the left side character string before and after the specific end surface LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are represented in a manner having transparency. It can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player to the specific end surface LGLa of the image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and is the same.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the second effect, the number "8" which is the intermediate decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is The number "8", which is the medium decorative pattern 8C in the three-dimensional image, is displayed smaller by moving away from the depth direction, and then the number "8", which is the inner decorative pattern 8C in the three-dimensional image, is displayed by moving toward the front. The size of "8" is displayed large. According to this configuration, the mode of the double door opening by the right side of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR can be displayed in a large size, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. Can be planned.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102 (E), the mode of the double doors opening by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR can be displayed in a large size, which is the same.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103 (E), the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed can be displayed in a large size, which is the same. ..

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 101 (C) to FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image.
As shown in FIG. 101 (E), in the first effect, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided into a plurality of left middle decorative symbols 8CL and right middle decorative symbols 8CR, and the divided left middle decorative symbols 8CR. Performing an effect in which two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the specific end surface 8CLa of 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR (specific end surface in each divided stereoscopic image). Can be done. According to this configuration, as a result of dividing the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the three-dimensional image into a plurality of parts, the number of the three-dimensional images increases, and as a result, the specific end faces in each of the divided three-dimensional images also increase. Since it is possible to give the player many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined image) through the specific end face in the image, the player can be visually entertained and enjoyed. It can be improved.
Specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 102 (E) to 102 (G), FIGS. 103 (E) to 1
In the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image of 03 (G), the result of the character string image LG being divided into two character string images in which "OA" is the left side character string image LGL and "RO" is the right side character string image LGR. ,
As the number of stereoscopic images increases, the number of specific end faces in each of the divided stereoscopic images also increases. Therefore, two character body CRAs are passed through the specific end faces in each of the three-dimensional images thus increased.
, CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized, and the same can be given to the player.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 102 (C) to FIG. 102 (C) of the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image.
As shown in FIG. 102 (D), a second movable accessory 15 (movable member) that can be moved to an advance position (predetermined position) in front (front surface) of the image display device 7 (display means) is provided. Movable accessory 1
5 (Movable member) operates when a reach is formed during a variation effect of a decorative pattern, and a reach effect including a specific end face effect of a stereoscopic image is performed from among a plurality of types of reach effects (at a predetermined timing). The third effect of moving to the advance position (predetermined position) can be executed. In the second effect, the character "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) can be executed. A character string image LG of a colored opaque stereoscopic image whose column is "OARO" is displayed. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the advance position (predetermined position), the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is triggered by this. Since the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a character string image LG of a colored opaque stereoscopic image called "OARO", the second movable accessory 15 (movable). A mode in which the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the member) is shaken off from the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) to the image display device 7 (display means). Since it is possible to perform a novel production, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. The same applies to the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 103 (C) to 103 (D).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Modification 1]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL
And the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are regarded as transparent areas, and in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102 and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL And the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR were regarded as a transparent area. However, the specific end faces 8CLa and 8CRa in the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101
, Specific end faces LGLa, LGRa in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, FIG. 103.
The specific end faces LGLa and LGRa in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image may have translucency, and may have translucency such as frosted glass. In this way, for example, the specific end face is represented by a translucent aspect such as frosted glass, and the specific end face gradually becomes a transparent region from a blurred aspect in which a predetermined image cannot be clearly seen through the specific end face. As the transparency increases, the predetermined image may be made easier to see through the specific end face. Even with this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
Specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, FIG. 10
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of 3, 2 as a predetermined image through the specific end face of the stereoscopic image.
Two character bodies CRA and CRB can be visually recognized, and two character bodies CRA and C can be visually recognized.
It was a still image of RB facing each other with a sword. However, a moving image may be used instead of the still image. The moving image may be, for example, explaining the flow until two character bodies CRA and CRB face each other with a sword, may be a moving image by 3D CG, may be a moving image by animation, or may be a moving image of a movie. It may be one scene.

[Modification 3]
Specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, FIG. 10
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of 3, the stereoscopic image is divided into two stereoscopic images. However, it may be divided into a plurality of stereoscopic images of three or more. By doing so, as the number of stereoscopic images increases due to the division, the specific end faces in each stereoscopic image also increase, and as a result, there are many opportunities to visually recognize the predetermined image through the transparent specific end faces. It can be given to the player.

[Modification 4]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8C
R is gradually opened in the mode of opening the Kannon, and in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually opened in the mode of opening the Kannon, and the three-dimensional image in FIG. 103 is specified. In the end face effect C, the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are gradually closed so as to face each other and overlap each other.
L and the right character string image LGR were closed. However, the stereoscopic image may be rotated in the same direction or may be rotated in different directions. For example, in the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are rotated in the same direction (for example, right rotation, left rotation, etc.) without using the double door opening mode. It may be a mode of backflip, a mode of backflip, etc.), or it may be rotated in different directions, for example, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL may be forward-turned, while the right middle decorative symbol 8CR may be backflip. Or the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is backflip, while the right middle decorative symbol 8CR is right rotation. Further, in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a right rotation mode and a left rotation mode). It may be a mode of forward rotation, a mode of backward rotation, etc.), or it may be rotated in different directions, for example, the left character string image LGL may be rotated forward, whereas the right character string image LGR may be rotated backward. Or, the left character string image LGL is rotated backward while the right character string image LGR is rotated clockwise. Further, FIG. 103.
In the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, right) without closing the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR. A mode of rotating, a mode of rotating counterclockwise, a mode of rotating forward, a mode of backflip, etc.) may be used, and a mode of rotating in different directions, for example, a mode of rotating the left character string image LGL forward. The right side character string image LGR may be backflip, or the left side character string image LGL may be used.
Is backflip, whereas the right character string image LGR is right-handed.

[Modification 5]
Specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, FIG. 10
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of 3, the world view of the effect of the game machine 1 is shown as a predetermined image through the specific end face of the stereoscopic image. However, it may suggest the development destination of the reach production. Since there are multiple types of development destinations for reach production, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur by the development destination that can be visually recognized through a specific end face, and a predetermined image and a jackpot at the development destination. It can also contribute to the player himself / herself finding a relationship with the degree of expectation that the game will occur.

[Modification 6]
Specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, FIG. 10
In the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image of 3, the world view of the effect produced by the gaming machine 1 is shown as a predetermined image. As an indicator of the world view of the production, for example, two character bodies CRA,
In addition to the one that the CRB has a sword, it may be an item such as a sword or a shield, or it may be a vehicle. It may be expressed by two Chinese characters such as a character and the character "Musou".

[Modification 7]
Specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, FIG. 10
The specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of 3 may not include a part of the described effect, or may have another effect added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
When a stereoscopic image is displayed on the display means, the specific end face in the stereoscopic image is represented in a mode of having transparency, and the first effect of making the predetermined image visible through the specific end face can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1.
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is rotated so that the region of the specific end face becomes large.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2.
Prior to the first effect, a second display means for displaying a large size of the stereoscopic image on the display means.
Is possible to produce
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3.
In the second effect, the stereoscopic image is displayed in a small size by moving away from the depth direction, and then the size of the stereoscopic image is increased by moving toward the front. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4.
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is divided into a plurality of parts, and the effect that the predetermined image can be visually recognized through the specific end face in each of the divided three-dimensional images can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4.
A movable member that can be moved to a predetermined position on the front surface of the display means is provided.
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the movable member operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position.
In the second effect, the three-dimensional image in which the movable member is three-dimensionally expressed is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the combined effects A to C of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. Figure 1
In 04 to 106, decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and are arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. 2 Some movable accessories 15 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

The combined effect of the movable accessory can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 1
01 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and when an instruction to execute a combined effect of a movable accessory is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a combined effect of the movable accessory.
Positions of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2,
The tilt and light emitting mode can be changed, the position, tilt and light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 can be changed, and the frame lamp 66 and the front arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53. The light emitting mode with the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the frame 53 (hereinafter, referred to as “light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66”) may be changed.

It should be noted that the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission (plural), and the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L may be a multicolor emission mode. Yes, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 has a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors.
The light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, which is mounted (plurally provided), can be set to the multicolor light emitting mode. Further, the second movable accessory 15 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (plurally provided), and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 can be set to the mode of multicolor light emission.
The frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are each equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (multiple). The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 can be set to the multicolor light emitting mode.

Here, first, the combined effect A of the movable accessory will be described, and then the combined effect B of the movable accessory and the combined effect C of the movable accessory will be described in order.

[Combining production of movable characters A]
First, the combined effect A of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect A of the movable accessory. First, in the combined production A of the movable accessory, FIG. 104
As shown in (A), the left movable accessory 14L is a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed from the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
While advancing (moving) toward the advancing position in the center of the front (front) of the right side movable accessory 14
R is a light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory), and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Advance (move) toward the advance position in the center of the front (front). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, which is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory 14L of the left movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are the display screens 7a of the image display device 7, respectively.
Advance (move) toward the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the image display device 7 (in the direction close to each other), and as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the center position of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring shape attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative part, which is half of the decorative part of the It is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Less than,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image with wide open eyes and a smile is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image with squinting eyes and a smile. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the combined character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104 (C) and 104 (D), the united accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to the original "nodding (person)". The face is bowing) ”. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, an image expressing emotions is also displayed according to the motion of the combined accessory tilting toward the front side (player side) and returning to the original side. It is a display mode in which the facial expression of the combined accessory is also changed three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape described as "OARO" on the front surface is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. The image display device 7 advances (moves) downward to a position closer to the center (advancement position (effect position)) of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it will be in a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged. It will be in a state of covering a part of the upper side. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off the light, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emitting mode for turning off the light. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory 15 when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The light emitting mode for the second movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory).

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode of turning off to the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory again, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp. The light emitting mode of 66 is controlled again from the light emitting mode for turning off the light to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L becomes the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and the second movable accessory. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R). The same light emission mode as the light emission mode)
And the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 are different light emitting modes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, stops, and is originally horizontal. In a state of
When the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (directing position) to the evacuation position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory.
It is controlled to another light emitting mode (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to the light emitting mode to turn off.

Subsequently, in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other, the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) While retreating (moving) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (left movable accessory). The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects).
Retreat (move) from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed,
The light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off the light, and the right movable accessory 14R is different from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). Retreat (light emission mode) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
When the movement) is completed, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emitting mode for extinguishing. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same light emitting mode as that of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode is turned off from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). Is controlled to.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (
(During the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position), it is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. It is controlled to the light emission mode of.

The light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in time series. It proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66. Will proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (right movable accessory 14R).
(During the period from advancing toward the advancing position, retreating, and returning to the home position), the right-side movable accessory is controlled to the same light-emitting mode as that of the right-side movable accessory 14R. When the 14R is operated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R are individually provided, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the right movable accessory according to the respective light emission pattern data. The light emitting mode of the object 14R may proceed, or instead of the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting of the right movable accessory 14R according to the light emitting pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R. You may proceed with the embodiment.

[Combining production of movable characters B]
Next, the combined effect A of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect B of the movable accessory. First of all, in the union production B of the movable accessory, FIG. 105
As shown in (A), the left movable accessory 14L is a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed from the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
While advancing (moving) toward the advancing position in the center of the front (front) of the right side movable accessory 14
In a light emitting mode in which R is turned off, the image is advanced (moved) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is a light emitting mode that is exactly the same as the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and is a light emitting mode that is extinguished. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are the display screens 7a of the image display device 7, respectively.
Advance (move) toward the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the image display device 7 (in the direction close to each other), and as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the center position of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring shape attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. One decorative member (combined accessory) in which the right decorative portion, which is half of the decorative portion of the above, is united, and the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. It is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is for the left movable accessory. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode to the extinguishing mode, and the region formed in the ring becomes a circular region (hereinafter referred to as "circular region") 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image with wide open eyes and a smile is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image with squinting eyes and a smile. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the combined character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape described as "OARO" on the front surface is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. The image display device 7 advances (moves) downward to a position closer to the center (advancement position (effect position)) of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it will be in a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged. It will be in a state of covering a part of the upper side. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is maintained in the light emitting mode of turning off, and both the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are turned off. Is maintained. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is the second movable accessory 1.
When 5 advances, it is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. The light emitting mode for the second movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and is different from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, which will be described later). The light emission mode is different from that of the mode).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 105 (D) and 105 (E), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode of extinguishing to the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory again.
The light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is controlled from a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off to a light emitting mode in which the right movable accessory is emitted (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R, and is controlled from the light emitting state of extinguishing to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and is movable on the left side. The light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory of the second movable accessory 15 are different. That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L becomes the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and the second movable accessory. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R). The light emitting mode is the same as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is different from each other.

Then, the united character performs a "nodding (like a person's face bowing)" action of tilting from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side) and returning to the original side. At this time,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, the united accessory is tilted toward the front side (player side), and the image expressing emotions is also changed and united according to the movement of returning to the original side. The facial expression of the character is also displayed in a three-dimensional manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, stops, and is originally horizontal. In a state of
When the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (directing position) to the evacuation position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory.
It is controlled to another light emitting mode (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to the light emitting mode to turn off.

Subsequently, in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other, the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) While retreating (moving) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (left movable accessory). The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects).
Retreat (move) from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed,
The light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off the light, and the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the first 2 The front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for movable accessories)
When the retreat (movement) is completed from the advance position in the center (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R becomes the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory. (Light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory)
It is controlled to a light emitting mode that turns off from. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). It is controlled from a different light emitting mode) to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (
(During the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position), it is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. It is controlled to the light emission mode of.

The light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in time series. It proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66. Will proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (right movable accessory 14R).
(During the period from advancing toward the advancing position, retreating, and returning to the home position), the right-side movable accessory is controlled to the same light-emitting mode as that of the right-side movable accessory 14R. When the 14R is operated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R are individually provided, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the right movable accessory according to the respective light emission pattern data. The light emitting mode of the object 14R may proceed, or instead of the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting of the right movable accessory 14R according to the light emitting pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R. You may proceed with the embodiment.

[Combining production of movable characters C]
Next, the combined effect C of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect C of the movable accessory. First, FIG. 106 shows the combined production C of the movable accessory.
As shown in (A), the left movable accessory 14L is a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed from the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
While advancing (moving) toward the advancing position in the center of the front (front) of the right side movable accessory 14
R is a light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory), and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Advance (move) toward the advance position in the center of the front (front). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, which is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory 14L of the left movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are the display screens 7a of the image display device 7, respectively.
Advance (move) toward the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the image display device 7 (in the direction close to each other), and as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the center position of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring shape attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative part, which is half of the decorative part of the It is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Less than,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image with wide open eyes and a smile is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image with squinting eyes and a smile. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the combined character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 106 (C) and 106 (D), the combined accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to the original "nodding (person)". The face is bowing) ”. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, an image expressing emotions is also displayed according to the motion of the combined accessory tilting toward the front side (player side) and returning to the original side. It is a display mode in which the facial expression of the combined accessory is also changed three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the left movable accessory 14L is an image display device in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. The display screen 7 of the image display device 7 from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of 7.
While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of a, the right movable accessory 14R is an image display device in a light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). It retreats (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed,
The light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off the light, and the right movable accessory 14R is different from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). Retreat (light emission mode) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
When the movement) is completed, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emitting mode for extinguishing. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same light emitting mode as that of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode is turned off from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). Is controlled to.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (
(During the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position), it is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. It is controlled to the light emission mode of.

The light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L defined in the time series, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is the right movable mode defined in the time series. The process proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the accessory 14R, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (right movable accessory 14R).
(During the period from advancing toward the advancing position, retreating, and returning to the home position), the right-side movable accessory is controlled to the same light-emitting mode as that of the right-side movable accessory 14R. When the 14R is operated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R are individually provided, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the right movable accessory according to the respective light emission pattern data. The light emitting mode of the object 14R may proceed, or instead of the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting of the right movable accessory 14R according to the light emitting pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R. You may proceed with the embodiment.

Further, in the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104 and the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" described on the front surface is the image display device 7. The clock advances (moves) downward from a stationary state at the upper retracted position (home position) to a position closer to the center (advanced position (directing position)) of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It rotates in a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in a direction to stop, and then stops.
The second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, stops, returns to the original horizontal state, and retracts from the advance position (directing position). While it was retracted (moved) upward to the position (home position), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 by the second movable accessory 15 is shown in the combined effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106. There is no effect that it appears in front (front) of. This is a jackpot game (big hit effect) when executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation).
As for the degree of expectation that the above occurs, the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104 is the highest, followed by FIG. 105.
This is because the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 106 is set to be high, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106 is set to the lowest.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the combined production of movable accessories.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 104 (A) to 1A of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 04 (H), a front frame 53 provided with a frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) and an opening formed in the front frame 53. An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and a traveling position in front of the image display device 7 (display means). The left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 that can be moved to (predetermined position) and combined are on the game board 2. The left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are provided with a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor emission). Each LED) is provided, and when the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined, the first movable accessory 14 Of the left movable accessory 14L of 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14, the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is provided. Light emission modes of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) and a frame lamp 66 (first) provided on the front frame 53.
Light emitting means: The light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) is the same as the light emitting mode. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can be moved to the advance position and combined. This makes it possible to visually entertain the player, and at the same time, a plurality of LEs provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14.
The light emitting mode of D (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multiple colors)) are different. By having the same light emitting mode, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. FIG. 10 of FIG. 10 (A) to FIG.
The same applies to the combined effect C of the movable accessory of 6 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 104 (A) to 1A of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 04 (H), the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 1
When the right side movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of 4 is combined, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. , A plurality of LEDs (second) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 (other movable members excluding the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14). Light emitting means: Light emitting mode of the LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided in the front frame 53. Is designed to have a different light emission mode. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14
In addition, the player can be visually entertained by the mode in which the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 moves to the advance position and is united, and the player can be visually entertained.
A plurality of LEDs (second) provided on the movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) on the right side of the movable accessory 14.
Light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and a plurality of LEDs provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 (second light emitting means: capable of emitting multiple colors). L
By making the light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode of ED), the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 104 (E) to 1 of FIGS. 104 (E) to FIG.
As shown in 04 (F), the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 1
A part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the left movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 without being combined with the right movable accessory 14R (multiple movable members) of 4. A second movable accessory 15 (2nd movable accessory 15) that can be moved so as to cover one or both of a part of 14 L (another movable member).
It is equipped with a non-union movable member). According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (multiple movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are newly separated from the second movable accessory. Since the object 15 (non-combined movable member) appears and does not combine with the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14, the game It is possible to visually entertain people and improve their interests. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 104 (E) to 1 of FIGS. 104 (E) to FIG.
As shown in 04 (F), a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member), and the second movable accessory is provided. A plurality of LEDs provided in 15 (non-union movable member) (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)
) Is as follows: when the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined, the right movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 is movable. Character 14
A plurality of LEDs provided on each of the R (specific movable member) and the left movable accessory 14L (other movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors).
The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided in the front frame 53. .. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (multiple movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are newly separated from the second movable accessory. An object 15 (non-union movable member) appears, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-union movable member) emit light. A plurality of LEDs (first) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the left movable accessory 14L (other movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 respectively. 2. Light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and a frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multiple colors)). Since the light emitting mode is different from that of the light emitting mode, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 104 (A) to 1A of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 04 (H), the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the first
A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the second movable accessory 15. LE
D (third light emitting means) is an LED (light emitting means) capable of emitting multiple colors. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14, and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 Multiple LEs provided
Since the plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided on the D (second light emitting means) and the second movable accessory 15 can emit light in multiple colors, the player can be visually entertained. , It is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 104 (A) to 1A of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 04 (H), before displaying the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the variable effect of the decorative pattern (for example,). (Period from the start of change of the decorative pattern to the stop of change)), the first movable accessory 14
Left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 (multiple movable members)
Can be united. According to this configuration, before displaying the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state on the image display device 7 (display means) (during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation)). , The left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advance position and are combined to have an impact on the player. It is possible to provide a certain effect and visually entertain the player, and it is possible to improve the interest. Combined production B of movable accessories of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G), FIGS. 106 (A) to 10
The same applies to the combined effect C of the movable accessory in 6 (F).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 104 (A) to 1A of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 04 (H), the first movable accessory 1 is in the period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player to the end (that is, during the jackpot effect).
The left movable accessory 14L of 4 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can be combined. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 during the period from the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (big hit effect) to the end (during the jackpot effect). By moving the movable accessory 14R (multiple movable members) on the right side of the above to the advance position and combining them, it is possible to provide the player with an impactful effect and visually entertain the player. It can be done and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the combined effect of the movable accessory.
[Modification 1]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable of the first movable accessory 14 are shown. Character 14
The movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) on the right side of the above was moved to the advance position and united. However, one of the movable members 14L on the left side of the first movable accessory 14 and the movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) on the right side of the first movable accessory 14 or all the movable members move to the advance position. You may return to the evacuation position (home position) and move to the advance position again, or reciprocate between the evacuation position (home position) and the advance position, and as a result, you may perform a combination effect of movable accessories that do not combine. .. Even in this case, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14
Light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and a frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (multicolor light emitting)) provided in (specific movable member). The light emitting mode is the same as the light emitting mode by the LED)), and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: Light emission mode of (LED capable of multicolor light emission) and light emission of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of multicolor light emission) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode is different from the mode. In addition, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14.
The right side of the movable accessory 14 The movable accessory 14R (multiple movable members) is in the retracted position (home position).
Even if the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) newly appears when the movable accessory that does not merge as a result is being combined, the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) appears. Character 15 (
The light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided in the non-combined movable member) is the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member 14) of the first movable accessory 14. ) And a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L (another movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the front frame. Frame lamp 66 provided in 53 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (L capable of emitting multiple colors)
The luminescence mode is different from that of ED)).

[Modification 2]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable of the first movable accessory 14 are shown. Character 14
The two movable accessories 14R on the right side of the above moved to the advance position and merged. However, it may be a mode in which three or more movable accessories move to the advance position and are united. In this case, the first movable accessory 1 is a specific movable accessory having the same emission mode as that of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)).
It may be the right movable accessory 14R of 4, or it may be replaced with another movable accessory different from the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and some of the movable accessories may be selected. It may be a movable accessory.

[Modification 3]
The left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 that operate on the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106. When the right movable accessory 14R of the movable accessory 14 is positioned (standby) at the retracted position (home position), the left decorative member that hides the existence of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R
The right decorative member that hides the existence of the player is provided on the game board 2, and the left decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs that can emit multiple colors, and the right decorative member is equipped with a full-color L that can emit multiple colors.
A plurality of EDs may be mounted. In this case, when the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are each positioned (standby) in the retracted position (home position), the first movable accessory 14 A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the object 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are turned off. Even so, the light emission effect of the left side decorative member and the right side decorative member can be performed by the light emission of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the left side decorative member and the right side decorative member, respectively. For example, the light emitting mode of the left side decorative member and the light emitting mode of one or both of the right side decorative members and the frame lamp 66.
The light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 can be the same light emitting mode.

[Modification 4]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable) of the first movable accessory 14 is used. Light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and a frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided on the member). LED))
The light emission mode was the same as the light emission mode according to. However, the light emitting mode and the front frame 53 of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. While the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the first movable accessory 14 has the same light emitting mode, a plurality of frames provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are different from each other. It may be good, or the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14.
The light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided in (specific movable member) and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53. Is a different light emitting mode, whereas a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emitting means) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 can emit light. The light emitting mode of the LED) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 may be the same light emitting mode.

[Modification 5]
In the union effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the union effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the union effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative part, which is half of the part, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L. When one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R is formed,
The united character performed a "nodding (like a human face bowing)" action of tilting from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side) and then returning to the original position. However, the combined accessory rotates and moves between the left side and the right side toward the front side (player side) and returns to the original state.
(Like a person's face turns left and right) ”may be performed. In this case, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D is an image in which the eyes are crossed (batten) as an image expressing emotions (see, for example, FIG. 54), which is sad. It may be an image expressing emotions.

[Modification 6]
As an expectation that a big hit game (big hit effect) will occur when the decorative symbol is executed during the variable effect (for example, the period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the change), the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104. Was the highest, followed by the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106 was set to the lowest. However, in the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit by the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106. It may be executed as a production. It may be executed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 by the player, or may be executed based on the operation of the sword member 64 (the operation of pushing downward) by the player. Operation of the sword button 65 provided at the upper end of the sword member 64 by the player (
It may be executed based on the pressing operation).

[Modification 7]
The light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory of the right movable accessory 14R are completely different light emitting modes, and further, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the right movable accessory. The light emitting mode is exactly the same as that of the object 14R for the right movable accessory, which is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L. However, during the period until the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R operate, advance toward the advance position, retreat, and return to the home position, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L are used. When the 14R is interlocked with the same light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the left movable accessory 14 are used.
The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of L. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are interlocked to form the same light emitting mode, for example, red lighting, blinking, or gradation lighting, whereas the frame lamp 66 is extinguished. Alternatively, the light emitting mode is different from that of the left movable accessory 14L, such as lighting in white or lighting in gradation.

[Modification 8]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, a part of the described effects may not be provided, and others. The effect of may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
The front frame provided with the first light emitting means,
A display means visually recognizable through the opening formed in the front frame, and
A gaming machine including a plurality of movable members that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means and combined.
The plurality of movable members are each provided with a second light emitting means.
When the plurality of movable members are combined, a light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on a specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and a light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame. Has the same light emission mode as
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1.
When the plurality of movable members are united, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the other movable members other than the specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the said first provided on the front frame. The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the light emitting means of 1.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2.
A non-combined movable member that is movable so as to cover one or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member without being combined with the plurality of movable members.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3.
A third light emitting means is provided on the non-union movable member.
In the light emitting mode of the third light emitting means provided on the non-union movable member, when the plurality of movable members are united, the second light emission provided on the specific movable member and the other movable member, respectively. The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the means and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided in the front frame.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4.
The first light emitting means, the second light emitting means, and the third light emitting means are light emitting means capable of multicolor light emitting.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5.
Before displaying the occurrence of the effect of the winning game on the display means, the plurality of movable members can be combined.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5.
The plurality of movable members can be combined in a period from the occurrence of the production of the winning game to the end.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

11. Operation of the First Movable Accessory 14 in Other Embodiments When the effects of FIGS. 175 to 182, which will be described later, are executed, the configuration of the first movable accessory 14 is shown in FIG.
It is different from FIGS. 49 to 58. The first movable accessory 1 when the production of FIGS. 175 to 182 is executed.
The configuration of 4 will be described. The configuration of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment for executing the effect of FIGS. 175 to 182 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110.

FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first aspect of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a third aspect of the movable accessory 14 in another embodiment.
FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a fourth aspect of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment includes the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. The left fixed accessory 14L is not configured to be movable, and is stationary so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a in front of the display screen 7a. The right movable accessory 14R is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. Left fixed accessory 1
Half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side of 4L and the right movable accessory 14R, respectively. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. The right movable accessory 14R can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). When the right movable accessory 14R is in the retracted position, all of them are located on the back side of other members, and all of them are in a state where it is difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 107, in the left fixed accessory 14L, a pair of movable members 14LP are housed at the tip of the arc-shaped left decorative portion. FIG. 107 shows a state in which the pair of movable members 14LP are housed in the left decorative portion (retracted state). In another embodiment, the state of FIG. 107 is also referred to as a first aspect of the movable accessory 14. The movable member 14LP is a rod-shaped member and is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The movable member 14LP is located on the back side of the left decorative portion at the time of storage and is difficult to see, and protrudes to the right as shown in FIG. 108 at the time of advancing. In FIG. 108, the advance position (deployment position) in which the pair of movable members 14LP project to the right in parallel with each other.
It is shown. In another embodiment, the state of FIG. 108 is also referred to as a second aspect of the movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 109, with the pair of movable members 14LP protruding from the tip of the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R advances and moves to the left, whereby the pair of movable members 14L
P comes into contact with the right movable accessory 14R to form one decorative member (combined accessory) as a whole (
Third aspect). Then, as shown in FIG. 110, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united accessory, so that the human face is completed as a whole. Further, when both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advance position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can be partially overlapped and combined to stand still. The state of FIG. 110 is also referred to as a fourth aspect of the movable accessory 14.

12. Other production examples, effect examples, modification examples, and embodiment examples of the present embodiment Each effect example (display effect example, accessory movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

Hereinafter, the holding number interlocking image display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114.
This hold number interlocking image display effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is,
When the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold number interlocking image display effect, and the hold number reaches a predetermined number, the ROM 103 starts. The display screen 7 of the image display device 7 by reading out the corresponding image data.
Display an image on a.

[Image display effect linked to the number of pending numbers]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold number interlocking image display effect A. The hold number interlocking image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. In the image display effect A linked to the number of pending numbers, first, FIG. 11
As shown in 1 (A) and FIG. 111 (B), the hold is exhausted with the stoppage of the decorative symbol, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 111A, the game state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the random number “567”.
In conjunction with this fixed stop, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (hold digestion). In addition, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (number of holds 2).

In FIG. 111B, by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the earlier (right side) hold icon 9A displayed earlier moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the hold icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two hold icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 111 (B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to the "specific fluctuation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101.
The specific fluctuation may be executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the gaming state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). It may be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image showing whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a specific fluctuation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the hold icon 9 is obtained by winning the first special symbol.
The state where one A is added and the total becomes two is shown. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a state in which the number of hold icons 9A is three in total is shown by the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, the hold number suggestion image HSG described as "3 hold now !!" is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies that fact when the hold number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is 2 or less. Subsequently, FIG. 111
As shown in (E), the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG disappears during a specific fluctuation after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display. FIG. 111 (F) further shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol, resulting in a total of four. At this time, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed for a certain period only when the hold number is 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is other than that. As shown in FIG. 111 (G), after that, the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. That is, the specific fluctuation ends. After this,
FIGS. 112 (H) to 112 (J), which will be described later, are executed.

FIG. 111 (H) shows a state in which the first special symbol has not been won after the start of the specific fluctuation shown in FIG. 111 (B). That is, the decorative pattern has stopped being fixed after a predetermined time has passed after the specific change. In this way, the number of holds is a predetermined value (here, 3) even if it is a specific fluctuation.
If this is not the case, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped without displaying the hold number suggestion image HSG.

As shown in FIG. 111 (C), FIG. 111 (I) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added after a specific change to make a total of 2, and then the first special symbol is not won. There is. That is, a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed after a specific fluctuation, and the decorative pattern has stopped being fixed. As described above, even if the fluctuation is specific, if the number of holdings does not reach a predetermined value (here, 3), the decoration symbol is fixedly stopped without displaying the number of holdings suggestion image HSG.

FIG. 111 (J) shows a state in which the first special symbol has not been won after the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 111 (E). That is, the pending number suggestion image HSG
Is displayed, the decorative pattern has stopped being fixed after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. As described above, in a specific variation, after the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed once, the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped without being displayed again.

[Holding number interlocking image display effect B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the hold number interlocking image display effect B. The hold number interlocking image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. Figure 112 (A) ~ of FIG. 112 (A) of image display production B linked with the number of pending numbers
FIG. 112 (D) is the same as FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (D) of FIG. 111 (A) to FIG. 111 (D) of the hold number interlocking image display effect A. That is, as shown in FIGS. 112 (A) and 112 (B), the hold is exhausted with the stoppage of the decorative symbol, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 112 (A), the game state is normal, the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost, and the decorative symbol is a random pattern “56”.
7 ”has been confirmed and stopped. In conjunction with this confirmation stop, the hold icon (variable icon)
9C disappears (pending digestion). In addition, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (number of holds 2).

In FIG. 112B, by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the earlier (right side) hold icon 9A displayed earlier moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the hold icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two hold icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 112 (B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to the "specific fluctuation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101.
The specific fluctuation may be executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the gaming state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). It may be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image showing whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a specific fluctuation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), the hold icon 9 is obtained by winning the first special symbol.
The state where one A is added and the total becomes two is shown. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a state in which the number of hold icons 9A is three in total is shown by the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, the hold number suggestion image HSG described as "3 hold now !!" is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies that fact when the hold number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is 2 or less. Hold number suggestion image H
The display of SG disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After that, the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped in a specific fluctuation, and the next fluctuation is started. FIG. 112
(E) illustrates the state of a particular variation during the next variation. Here, the hold icon 9A
Is consumed and two (2 pending numbers) are displayed. FIG. 112 (F) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol during this fluctuation, resulting in a total of three. At this time, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even though the hold number is 3. That is, in the next variation of the specific variation, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even if a predetermined condition (the reserved number becomes 3) is satisfied for the reserved number. In other words, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed only when there is a specific fluctuation. As a result, the player can get a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in the next variation of the specific variation. After that, the next fluctuation is further started. FIG. 112 (H) illustrates a state during the next variation of a particular variation. Here, one hold icon 9A is consumed and two (hold number 2) are displayed. FIG. 112 (I) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol during this fluctuation, resulting in a total of three. At this time, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even though the hold number is 3. That is, in the next variation following the specific variation, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even if a predetermined condition (the hold number becomes 3) is satisfied for the hold number. In other words, the pending number suggestion image HSG
Is displayed only for certain fluctuations. As a result, the player can get a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in the next variation following the specific variation.

[Image display effect C linked to the number of pending numbers]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the hold number interlocking image display effect C. The hold number interlocking image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. FIG. 113 (A) of the hold number interlocking image display effect C is the same as FIG. 111 (A) of the hold number interlocking image display effect A. That is, FIG. 112 (A)
As shown in, the hold is exhausted with the suspension of the confirmation of the decorative pattern, and the next new fluctuation is started. In FIG. 112 (A), the game state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the random number “567”. In conjunction with this fixed stop, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (hold digestion). In addition, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (number of holds 2).

In FIG. 113 (B), by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the earlier (right side) hold icon 9A displayed earlier moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the hold icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two hold icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 113 (B) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to the "specific fluctuation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101.
The specific fluctuation may be executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the gaming state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). It may be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image showing whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a specific fluctuation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 is displayed during this particular variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is described as "10 seconds left", and the countdown is started after the display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), the hold icon 9 is obtained by winning the first special symbol.
The state where one A is added and the total becomes two is shown. The timer image TM1 continues the countdown, which is shown here as "8 seconds left". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), a state in which the number of hold icons 9A is three in total is shown by the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, the hold number suggestion image HSG described as "3 hold now !!" is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies that fact when the hold number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is 2 or less. While the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Then, as shown in FIGS. 113 (E) and 113 (F), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At the same time, the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at a specific variation, and the next variation is started. Since FIG. 113 (G) is the same as FIGS. 112 (G) to 112 (J) of the held number interlocking image display effect B, the state during the next fluctuation of the specific fluctuation will be omitted.

In FIGS. 113 (H) to 113 (J), as shown in FIG. 113 (C), one hold icon 9A is added after a specific change to make a total of 2, and then the first special symbol wins. It shows the state that there was no. That is, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses after a specific fluctuation, the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", and then the timer image TM1 disappears and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. In this way, even if it is a specific fluctuation, the number of holds is a predetermined value (
If 3) is not satisfied here, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped without displaying the hold number suggestion image HSG.

[Image display effect D linked to the number of pending numbers]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the hold number interlocking image display effect D. The hold number interlocking image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. In FIG. 114 (A) of the image display effect D linked to the number of pending numbers, it is notified that the time saving game is started after the big hit game. Specifically, "Start time saving mode !!" is displayed. Here, the number of time reductions is one, and the description will be made assuming that the normal state is restored after one lottery for the second special symbol. Further, in the hold number interlocking image display effect D, since the hold icon is not displayed, the current hold number is shown in the lower right of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 114 (A), the hold of the second special symbol is changed from 0 to 1 by right-handed, and FIG. 11
It becomes 0 at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol of 4 (B).

In FIG. 114 (B), one hold of the second special symbol is consumed, the rest becomes 0, and the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. The variation of the decorative design shown in FIG. 114 (B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. Here, the "specific variation" refers to the variation of the first second special symbol to be executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions is one of the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery is not included in the number of time reductions. The number of time reductions can be any number. Further, not only the second special symbol lottery but also the first special symbol lottery may be included in the count of the number of time reductions. An image showing whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a specific fluctuation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 is displayed during this particular variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is described as "10 seconds left", and the countdown is started after the display. In FIG. 114 (B), the hold of the second special symbol is changed from 0 to 2 due to the continuation of the right-handed strike.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), the hold of the second special symbol is changed from 2 to 3 by continuing the right-handed strike. In conjunction with this, the hold number suggestion image HSG described as "3 hold now !!" is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies that fact when the hold number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is 2 or less. While the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down.
Here, "5 seconds left" is shown. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 114 (D) and 114 (E), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At the same time, the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789" in a specific fluctuation, and the number of reserved second special symbols is changed from 3 to 2. Then, the gaming state is switched from the reduced working hours state to the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), "normal mode start !!" is displayed before the fluctuation display. After that, a variable display is made.

In FIG. 114 (H), the timer image TM together with the variation display during the next variation of the specific variation.
2 is displayed. This timer image TM2 only represents the content of the timer "10 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed with "10 seconds left" without performing a countdown. In this case, such an image is also referred to as a timer image. After the confirmation stop, the number of holds is 2
From 1 to 1, the next fluctuation is started. At this time, the timer image TM3 is displayed. This timer image only shows the content of the timer "5 seconds left" and disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed without performing a countdown. After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (J), the determination is stopped. The number of reserved second special symbols changes from 1 to 0. , FIGS. 114 (H) to 114
In (J), as in FIGS. 112 (G) to 112 (J) of FIGS. 112 (G) to 112 (J) of FIG. 112 (G) to FIG. Hold number suggestion image H
SG is not displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the image display effect linked to the number of pending numbers.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, when the number of holdings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation, the holding number suggestion image HSG is displayed. And after the first effect, during the same fluctuation in which the first effect was executed, the hold number suggestion image H
It is possible to execute the second effect in which the SG disappears. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, in the first effect, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) of 2 or more.
It is not displayed before the number of pending numbers reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 113, when the number of holdings does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 3) during a specific fluctuation, the holding number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. According to this configuration, since the hold number suggestion image HSG may not be displayed, the impression when it is displayed can be increased. In this way, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest of the player by the novel production that has never existed before.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, when the timer image is displayed at the start of a specific fluctuation and the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed during the specific fluctuation, the hold number suggestion is displayed. The image HSG disappears with the timer image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, the holding number suggestion image HS
G is an image showing the content suggesting that the number of reservations has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved by a novel effect that has never been seen before, in which a predetermined image representing the number of pending images is suddenly displayed. ..
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed during the variation executed after the specific variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented novel effect that the predetermined image does not appear even if the number of holds is predetermined in the next fluctuation, unexpectedly by the player. , It is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the specific variation is executed in the time saving state, and the variation executed after the specific variation is executed in the normal state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the image display effect linked to the number of pending numbers.
[Modification 1]
The number of holdings on which the suggestion image HSG is displayed is not limited to 3, and can be any number. In addition, it is preferable that the number of holdings suggestive image HSG is a plurality of holdings. Further, the number of holdings in which the holding number suggestion image HSG is displayed may be a plurality of times. For example, it may be configured to be displayed when the number of pending numbers is 2 and 4.

[Modification 2]
The content represented by the hold number suggestion image HSG is not limited to the above. For example, "It's an even number now."
Or "I don't have it yet" or "I'm full".

[Modification 3]
The above-mentioned timer image may represent the contents of the timer such as "10 seconds left" or "3:00". It is not always necessary to count down. For example, even in a mode in which "100 seconds left" is displayed and then disappears in the first fluctuation, and "10 seconds left" is displayed and then disappears in the next fluctuation, it is called a timer image.

[Modification 4]
The configurations of the image display effects A to D linked to the number of pending numbers can be combined as appropriate. Further, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all fluctuations may correspond to "specific fluctuation".

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image.
The first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed when the number of holdings reaches a predetermined number due to winning during a specific fluctuation, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears during the same variation in which the first effect is executed can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
In the first effect, the predetermined image is displayed when the number of holdings reaches a predetermined number of 2 or more, and is not displayed before the number of holdings reaches the predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
If the number of holds does not reach the predetermined number during the specific fluctuation, the predetermined image is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image.
The timer image is displayed at the start of the specific fluctuation, and the display disappears when the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value.
When the predetermined image is displayed during the specific fluctuation, the predetermined image disappears together with the timer image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The predetermined image is an image showing content suggesting that the number of reservations has reached a predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
During the variation performed following the particular variation, the predetermined image is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
The specific variation is executed during the time saving state, and the variation executed after the specific variation is
Executed under normal conditions,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the holding number change interlocking effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118. This hold number change interlocking effect can be executed after a big hit game, during a change effect of a decorative pattern, and the like.
That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command and the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and includes an instruction to execute the hold number change interlocking effect, and the hold number is predetermined. When the change occurs, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Holding number change interlocking production A]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the hold number change interlocking effect A. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the fluctuation started after the end of the specific effect. It is a production. Here, the "specific effect" is a variable display effect of the decorative symbol in the normal state, and the "predetermined change" in the number of holds means that the number of holds increases by 3 or more during the specific effect, and is "predetermined". The "image" will be described as an expected degree suggestion image KSG. In addition, in this embodiment, "predetermined image"
May be the timer image TM1.

In the hold number change interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), a variable effect of the decorative symbol is executed. This variable effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to the "specific effect" in the claims. Here, whether or not this fluctuation corresponds to a "specific effect" is determined by the image control microcomputer 101.
Is randomly determined by. The specific effect may be a variation effect executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state may change (for example, from the time saving state to the normal state). It may be a variable effect that is executed when (changes to a state). An image showing whether or not the variable effect corresponds to a specific effect may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the gaming state is the normal state, and the hold is the hold of the first special symbol lottery. During this variable effect (specific effect), as shown in FIG. 115 (B), when the number of holdings changes (increases) from 1 to 4 due to three winnings, when the "specific effect" is being executed. In addition, the number of holds has made a "predetermined change". Then, after the definite stop shown in FIG. 115 (C), FIG. 115
As shown in (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation. Here, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is described as "chance", and suggests the expectation degree of hit in the fluctuation. The following variation shown in FIG. 115 (D) is the "first" of the claims.
It corresponds to "variation of". In addition, in the previous fluctuation shown in FIGS. 115 (A) to 115 (B), when the number of holds does not change by a predetermined value, in the next fluctuation, the expectation degree suggestion image KS
G is not displayed.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 115 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (E), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing (for example, 2 seconds after the display) after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of both the reduced expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears after that, as shown in FIG. 115 (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the timer image TM2 is further subjected to the same fluctuation.
Is always displayed. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes “0”, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 115 (I). Further, in the next variation (next variation following a specific effect) shown in FIG. 115 (J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed. The next variation shown in FIG. 115 (J) is the "second" of the claims.
It corresponds to "variation of". In addition, the timer image TM3 may be counted down, or only shows the contents of the timer "3 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time with "3 seconds left" without counting down. May be good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, the confirmation is stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production B]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the hold number change interlocking effect B. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the fluctuation started after the end of the specific effect. It is a production. Here, the "specific effect" is the variable display effect of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the hold number ""
"Predetermined change" means that the number of reserved 2nd special symbols is 0 due to the winning of the 2nd special symbol during a specific production.
It is increased from 1 to 1, and the “predetermined image” is described as being an expectation degree suggestion image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the hold number change interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIGS. 116 (A) and 116 (B), after the determination of the first special symbol is stopped, the hold icon corresponding to the next first special symbol is held together with the hold digestion. Shifts to become the hold icon 9C, and the next fluctuation is started. This variable effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to the "specific effect" in the claims. Here, whether or not this fluctuation corresponds to the "specific effect" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. In addition, in a specific effect, the number of fluctuations is a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game).
It may be a variable effect executed when the game state reaches, or it may be a variable effect executed when the gaming state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image showing whether or not the variable effect corresponds to a specific effect may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the gaming state is the normal state, and the hold is the hold of the first special symbol lottery. During this variable effect (specific effect), as shown in FIG. 116 (B), when the number of holdings changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol, the "specific effect" is executed. At that time, the number of holds has made a "predetermined change". Then, after the fixed stop shown in FIG. 116 (C),
As shown in FIG. 116 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation in which the second special symbol lottery is performed. Here, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is described as "chance", and suggests the expectation degree of hit in the fluctuation. The following variation shown in FIG. 116 (D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the scope of claims. It should be noted that FIGS. 116 (B) to 1
If there is no prize for the second special symbol in the previous variation shown in 16 (C), the expectation suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 116 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 116 (E), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after being displayed.
When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of both the reduced expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears after that, as shown in FIG. 116 (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the timer image TM2 is further subjected to the same fluctuation.
Is always displayed. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 116 (H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes “0”, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 116 (I). Further, in the next variation (next variation following a specific effect) shown in FIG. 116 (J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed. The next variation shown in FIG. 116 (J) is the "second" of the claims.
It corresponds to "variation of". In addition, the timer image TM3 may be counted down, or only shows the contents of the timer "3 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time with "3 seconds left" without counting down. May be good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, the confirmation is stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production C]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the hold number change interlocking effect C. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the fluctuation started after the end of the specific effect. It is a production. Here, the "specific effect" is the variable display effect of the first special symbol in the reduced working hours state, and the hold number ""
"Predetermined change" means that the number of reserved 2nd special symbols is 0 due to the winning of the 2nd special symbol during a specific production.
It is increased from 1 to 1, and the “predetermined image” is described as being an expectation degree suggestion image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the hold number change interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), after the big hit game,
It has been notified that the time-saving game will start. Specifically, "Start time saving mode !!" is displayed. Here, the number of time reductions is one, and the description will be made assuming that the normal state is restored after one lottery for the second special symbol. In FIGS. 117 (A) and 117 (B), a variable effect corresponding to the hold of the first special symbol obtained by winning a prize before the big hit game is performed. This variable effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to the "specific effect" in the claims. That is, here, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time-saving state corresponds to the "specific effect". If there is a prize for the second special symbol by right-handed during this specific effect, the hold icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 117 (B). During this variable effect (specific effect), as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the number of holdings changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol, the "specific effect" is executed. At that time, the number of holds has made a "predetermined change". Then, FIG. 11
As shown in 7 (C), after the fixed stop, the variation effect of the second special symbol in the reduced working hours state is performed.

In the next variation of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the gaming state is a time-saving state, and the variation effect by the pending digestion of the second special symbol lottery is executed. At this time, FIG. 117 (D)
As shown in, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation. Here, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is described as "chance", and suggests the expectation degree of hit in the fluctuation. The following variation shown in FIG. 117 (D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the scope of claims. In addition, in the previous fluctuation shown in FIGS. 117 (B) to 117 (C),
If there is no prize for the second special symbol, the expectation suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next fluctuation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 117 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 117 (E), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after being displayed.
When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of both the reduced expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears after that, as shown in FIG. 117 (F). In FIG. 117 (F), there is a prize for the second special symbol by right-handed, and the hold icon 9B is newly displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), the timer image TM2 is further subjected to the same fluctuation.
Is always displayed. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", FIG. 11
As shown in 7 (H), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. After that, the gaming state is switched from the reduced working hours state to the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 117 (I), "normal mode start !!" is displayed, and the change of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. After that, in the next variation (next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 117 (J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation effect of the decorative symbol. The following variation shown in FIG. 117 (J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the scope of claims. The timer image TM3 may be counted down.
It only represents the content of the timer "3 seconds left", and may disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed with "3 seconds left" without counting down. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, the confirmation is stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production D]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the hold number change interlocking effect D. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the fluctuation started after the end of the specific effect. It is a production. Here, the "specific effect" is an effect when waiting for the prize of the second special symbol in the reduced working hours state, and the "predetermined change" of the number of pending numbers is the effect of the second special symbol during the specific effect. The number of reserved second special symbols is increased from 0 to 1 by winning a prize, and the "predetermined image" is described as being an expectation degree suggestion image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" is the timer image T.
It may be M1.

In the hold number change interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIGS. 118 (A) to 118 (C), it is notified that the time-saving game starts after the big hit game. Specifically, "Start time saving mode !!" is displayed. Here, the number of time reductions is one, and the description will be made assuming that the normal state is restored after one lottery for the second special symbol. In FIG. 118 (A), after the jackpot game, the first
The state in which both the special symbol and the second special symbol are not held is shown. Here, the effect of waiting for the prize of the second special symbol in the short time state after the big hit game corresponds to the "specific effect" in the claims. That is, here, the state in which the fluctuation is not performed in the time saving state or the display of "time saving mode start !!" corresponds to the "specific effect". During this particular production, if there is a prize for the second special symbol by hitting right, FIG. 118 (B)
The hold icon 9B is displayed as shown in. As shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the number of holds changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol while this "time saving mode starts !!" is displayed (specific effect). , When the "specific effect" is being executed, the number of holds has made a "predetermined change". After the fixed stop, the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is performed in the reduced working hours state.

In the next variation of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the gaming state is a time-saving state, and the variation effect by the pending digestion of the second special symbol lottery is executed. At this time, FIG. 118 (D)
As shown in the above, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation of a specific effect. Here, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is described as "chance", and suggests the expectation degree of hit in the fluctuation. The following variation shown in FIG. 118 (D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the scope of claims. If there is no prize for the second special symbol in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 118 (B) to 118 (C), the expectation suggestion image K is used in the next variation.
SG is not displayed.

In the next fluctuation shown in FIG. 118 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the fluctuation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 118 (E), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after being displayed.
When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of both the reduced expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears after that, as shown in FIG. 118 (F). In FIG. 118 (F), the second special symbol is won by right-handed, and the hold icon 9B is newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (G), the timer image TM2 is further subjected to the same fluctuation.
Is always displayed. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", FIG. 11
As shown in 8 (H), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. After that, the gaming state is switched from the reduced working hours state to the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 118 (I), "normal mode start !!" is displayed, and the change of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. After that, in the next variation (next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 118 (J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation effect of the decorative symbol. The following variation shown in FIG. 118 (J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the scope of claims. The timer image TM3 may be counted down.
It only represents the content of the timer "3 seconds left", and may disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed with "3 seconds left" without counting down. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, the confirmation is stopped.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect linked to the change in the number of holds.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, when the number of holdings changes by a predetermined value while the specific effect is being executed, the first method is started after the end of the specific effect. It is possible to execute the first effect in which a predetermined image (expectation suggestion image KSG or timer image TM1) is displayed in the fluctuation. According to this configuration, with a novel production that has never existed before
It is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the predetermined image may be the timer image TM1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, in which a timer image is always displayed when the number of holds changes to a predetermined value while a specific effect is being executed. It can be done and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the timer image TM1
Is displayed at the start of the first variation, and in the first variation, after the first timer image TM1 disappears, the second effect of displaying the second timer image TM2 during the same variation is executed. be able to. According to this configuration, the timer image is always displayed twice with the same fluctuation, which is a novel effect that has never been seen before, which can visually entertain the player and improve the interest. Can be planned.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the second variation executed after the first variation, a third effect in which the third timer image TM3 is displayed is executed. can do. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, in which the timer image is always displayed even if the next fluctuation occurs, and the interest is improved. be able to.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the predetermined image (expected degree suggestion image KSG) is displayed at the start of the first variation, and the size changes during the same variation. According to this configuration, the expected degree suggestion image KSG, which is always displayed in the first fluctuation, can visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, in which the size always changes. It is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the specific effect is a variation effect of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first variation is the first special symbol. Or the second
It is a variation of the other of the special symbols, and in the predetermined image, during the variation of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the reserved number of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a predetermined change (here,). 0 → 1
), It is displayed in the fluctuation of the other symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the specific effect and the first variation are executed in the time saving state, and the second variation is executed in the normal state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold number change interlocking effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, it is assumed that the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is displayed as a predetermined image.
The predetermined image is not limited to the above. For example, the predetermined image may be a timer image TM1, a character image, or an image showing a place where a game ball is aimed.

[Modification 2]
The specific effect of FIG. 117 is a variation effect of the first special symbol, the first variation is the variation of the second special symbol, and the predetermined image is the second special symbol during the variation of the first special symbol. When the number of pending numbers changes by a predetermined value (here, 0 → 1), it is assumed that the number is displayed in the change of the second special symbol.
However, in the specific effect of FIG. 117, the first special symbol and the second special diagram may be opposite to each other. That is, the specific effect is the variation effect of the second special symbol, the first variation is the variation of the first special symbol, and the predetermined image is the variation of the first special symbol during the variation of the second special symbol. When the number of holdings changes by a predetermined value (here, 0 → 1), it may be displayed in the change of the first special symbol.

[Modification 3]
The timer image of the above embodiment has been described as counting down. However, the timer image is not limited to the digital display, and may represent the remaining period until the end point by a needle or an area. Further, the timer image does not necessarily have to move as long as it is an image representing the timer. For example, a timer image that is displayed multiple times.
Each time it is displayed, the timer image also includes the one in which the remaining period until the end is reduced.
Further, if the image clearly represents the timer, it is included in the timer image even if it is not moving.

[Modification 4]
The expected degree suggestion image KSG was moved to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. However, the expectation suggestion image KSG may be large or may not move.

[Modification 5]
The contents of the hold number change interlocking effects A to D may be combined as appropriate.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image.
If the number of holds changes by a predetermined change while the specific effect is being executed, the first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed in the first variation started after the end of the specific effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The predetermined image is a first timer image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2.
The first timer image is displayed at the start of the first variation,
In the first variation, after the first timer image disappears, a second effect in which the second timer image is displayed during the same variation can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3.
In the second variation executed after the first variation, the third effect of displaying the third timer image can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The predetermined image is displayed at the start of the first variation and changes in magnitude during the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The specific effect is a variable effect of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol.
The first variation is the variation of the first special symbol or the other of the second special symbol.
The predetermined image is displayed in the change of the other symbol when the reserved number of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes in a predetermined manner during the change of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Be done,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to claim 4.
The specific effect and the first variation are performed in a time-saving state,
The second variation is carried out under normal conditions.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the hold icon movement change effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122. This hold icon movement change effect can be executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon movement change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Hold icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect A. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. The four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, and each of them corresponds to each change after the next change, and can indicate the degree of expectation of a hit in each change after the next change. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by the color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the hold icon 9C disappears when the decorative symbol is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the next variation is initiated. This Figure 1
The variation shown in 19 (C) corresponds to "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The four hold icons 9A do not move when the next variation (specific variation) begins. That is, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move at the start of the change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern). In other words, the four hold icons 9A are in the same state as at the time of the previous change. After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), the four hold icons 9
A shifts to the right. At this time, the hold icon (mesh pattern) on the far right is
It moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed, becomes the hold icon 9C, and has three hold icons 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the hold icon 9C disappears when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the next variation is initiated. When the next fluctuation starts, the three hold icons 9A do not move. That is, of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, FIG. 1
As shown in 19 (G), the three hold icons 9A shift to the right. At this time, the hold icon (white) on the far right moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed.
The hold icon 9C becomes the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A becomes two.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the hold icon 9C disappears when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (I), the next variation is initiated. The two hold icons 9A do not move when the next fluctuation begins. That is, of the two hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (black). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, FIG. 1
As shown in 19 (J), the two hold icons 9A shift to the right. At this time, the hold icon (black) on the far right moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed.
The hold icon 9C becomes the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A becomes one.

[Hold icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect B. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. The four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, respectively.
It corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by the color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The four hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the next variation is initiated. The variation shown in FIG. 120 (C) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) begins, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120 (D). At this time, the four hold icons 9A are in the same state as that displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) moves to the right and the display screen is as shown in FIG. 120 (E). Frame out from 7a. The other three hold icons 9A
Does not move. As a result, the number of hold icons 9A becomes three.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (F), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. Three hold icons 9 when the next fluctuation begins
A is not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, FIG. 120 (G)
), Three hold icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as that displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) does not move at the time of the current change. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (H), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. When the next fluctuation starts, the hold icon 9A is not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, two hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120 (I). At this time, the two hold icons 9A are reduced by one from the time when they were displayed at the time of the previous fluctuation. On the other hand, of the two hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (black) does not move at the time of the current change. After that, the two hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (J), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The two hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation corresponding to the hold icon 9A (white) on the leftmost side is started.

[Hold icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect C. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. The four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, respectively.
It corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by the color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the character image CHA is displayed, and one of the hold icons 9A (here, the third from the right) is held and changed. Specifically, the color of the hold icon 9A changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation corresponding to this pending change has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The four hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), the next variation is initiated. The variation shown in FIG. 121 (D) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) begins, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121 (E). At this time, the four hold icons 9A are in the same state as that displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved to the left as shown in FIG. 121 (F). do. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (G), the enlarged hold icon stops at a position overlapping the other hold icons 9C. After that, these hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (H), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. When the next fluctuation starts, the hold icon 9A is not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, three hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121 (I). At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as that displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) does not move at the time of the current change. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (J), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. FIG. 121 (J) corresponds to FIG. 120 (H) of the hold icon movement change effect B, and then FIGS. 120 (I) and (J) of the hold icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Hold icon movement change effect D]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect D. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. The four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, respectively.
It corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by the color. In FIG. 122 (A), the hold icon 9A is not yet in a state of suggesting the degree of expectation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the character image CHA is displayed, and two of the hold icons 9A (here, the rightmost and the third from the right) are held and changed.
Specifically, one of the colors of the hold icon 9A changes from white to a mesh pattern, and the other changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation corresponding to this pending change has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The four hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the next variation is initiated. The variation shown in FIG. 122 (D) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) begins, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (E). At this time, the four hold icons 9A are in the same state as that displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved to the left as shown in FIG. 122 (F). do. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (G), the enlarged hold icon stops at a position overlapping the other hold icons 9C. After that, these hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (H), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. When the next fluctuation starts, the hold icon 9A is not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, three hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (I). At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as that displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) does not move at the time of the current change. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (J), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. FIG. 122 (J) corresponds to FIG. 120 (H) of the hold icon movement change effect B, and then FIGS. 120 (I) and (J) of the hold icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon movement change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (C) to 119 (E), a first effect in which a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed during a specific fluctuation is executed. It is possible, and each of the plurality of predetermined images corresponds to each variation after the specific variation, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit in each variation, and a specific of the plurality of predetermined images. The predetermined image corresponding to the fluctuation can perform the second effect of starting the predetermined movement after the specific fluctuation starts. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved by the unprecedented novel effect of shifting after the start of the fluctuation. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), in the first effect, a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed side by side in a row. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect of the hold icon that shifts and moves after the start of the fluctuation, and the interest can be improved. 120 to 1
The same applies to 22.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the predetermined image (holding icon 9C) indicates the degree of expectation by the color. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect of the hold icon that shifts and moves after the start of the fluctuation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed during the fluctuation before the specific fluctuation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (F) to (G) and 122 (F) to (G), in the second effect, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is different. Moves to a position that overlaps with the predetermined image of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (F), 120 (G), 121 (I), and 122 (I), a plurality of predetermined variations are performed during the next variation of the specific variation. A third effect of displaying a predetermined image excluding a predetermined image corresponding to a specific variation among the images can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon movement change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, it is assumed that four hold icons 9A as predetermined images are displayed side by side at the time of a specific change. However, the hold icon 9A as a predetermined image does not necessarily have to be configured to be able to display four as long as it is configured to be able to display a plurality (two or more) at a specific fluctuation.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the first special symbol is used as a predetermined image that corresponds to each change after the next change and suggests the degree of expectation of a hit in each change after the next change.
Although A is exemplified, the predetermined image is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined image may be the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol, or may be another image. That is, any image that corresponds to each variation after the next variation and suggests the degree of expectation of a hit in each variation after the next variation can be used as a predetermined image.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the hold icon movement change effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all fluctuations may correspond to "specific fluctuation".

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image.
It is possible to perform a first effect in which a plurality of the predetermined images are displayed during a specific fluctuation.
Each of the plurality of predetermined images corresponds to each variation after the specific variation, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit in each variation.
Of the plurality of predetermined images, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation can execute a second effect of starting a predetermined movement after the specific variation starts.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
In the first effect, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed side by side in a row.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
The predetermined image suggests the degree of expectation by color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
During the variation prior to the particular variation, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
In the second effect, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is moved to a position overlapping with another predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
It is possible to execute a third effect in which a predetermined image other than the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is displayed among the plurality of predetermined images during the next variation of the specific variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the variable middle mode start display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. This variable intermediate mode start display effect may be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation intermediate mode start display effect, the ROM 10
The corresponding image data is read from 3 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the variable middle mode start display effect A. If the special figure lottery result corresponding to this specific change (the change) is lost during the change, the next mode start display effect is changed even before the end (fixed stop) of the change. It is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. here"
The "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (hit or loss) of the variation. The "mode" here means a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the variable middle mode start display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 12
The variation shown in 3 (A) corresponds to "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 123 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. In this fluctuation, when the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit game is executed after the change is completed, and then the "success mode" of the time-saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the game state remains the normal state and the "failure mode" is entered. In both success mode and failure mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) has elapsed after the variation display in FIG. 123 (A), the variation display disappears and the text "success mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 123 (B). The mode image MDG that has been set is displayed. Further, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss.

When the fluctuation is lost, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), the failure mode entry image LMG described in characters as "failure mode entry" is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63. As a result, it is notified that the failure mode has been entered. That is, the end of this particular variation (
Even before the fixed stop), the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation is lost is notified. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the failure mode entry image LMG. Here, the background image is switched to the diagonal line. The background image here includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochromatic image, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the failure mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the variable display, the four hold icons 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the hold icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop (end of the specific fluctuation). Here, the confirmation is stopped at "567". At this time, since the failure mode has already been entered, the background image and the like are already in the failure mode, and this continues. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next variation (next variation of the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 123 (F). The next fluctuation is also the normal state of the game (non-time saving state)
The first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image is continuously in failure mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), the hold icon 9C disappears when the confirmation is stopped. Here, the confirmation is stopped at "721". Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next variation (the next variation following the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 123 (H). In the next fluctuation, the gaming state is also a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image is continuously in failure mode.

Returning to FIG. 123 (B), when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation (specific fluctuation) in FIG. 123 (A) is a big hit, the decoration is as shown in FIG. 123 (I) according to the operation of the effect button 63. The symbol stops in the form of a big hit. Here, it is confirmed and stopped at "333". After that, the jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game is completed, the game state is switched to the reduced working hours state, and as shown in FIG. 123 (J), the success mode entry image WMG described in characters as "success mode entry" is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the success mode has been entered. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the success mode entry image WMG.
Here, it switches to a background image that shows many fine cross patterns. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the variable middle mode start display effect B. If the special figure lottery result corresponding to this specific change (the change) is lost during the change, the next mode start display effect is changed even before the end (fixed stop) of the change. This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. here"
The "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (hit or loss) of the variation. The "mode" here means a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the variable middle mode start display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 12
The variation shown in 4 (A) corresponds to "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 124 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. In this fluctuation, when the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit game is executed after the change is completed, and then the "time saving mode" of the time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the game state remains the normal state and the "battle mode" is entered. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) has elapsed after the variation display in FIG. 124 (A), the variation display disappears as shown in FIG. 124 (B), and the characters "time saving mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The mode image MDG that has been set is displayed. Further, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss.

When the fluctuation is lost, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), the battle mode mode entry image LMG described with the characters "battle mode entry" is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63. As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, even before the end (fixed stop) of this specific fluctuation, the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation is lost is notified. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG. Here, the background image is switched to the diagonal line. The background image here includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochromatic image, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 124 (D), a movie image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed.
In addition, four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in total. After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), the ally character CRA is defeated, the confirmation is stopped due to a loss, and the hold icon 9C disappears. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be. At this time, since the battle mode has already been entered, the background image and the like are already in the battle mode, and this is continuing. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts,
As shown in FIG. 124 (F), the next variation (next variation of the specific variation) is initiated. In the next fluctuation, the gaming state is also a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be in battle mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (G), the ally character CRA is defeated, the confirmation is stopped due to a loss, and the hold icon 9C disappears. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next variation (the next variation following the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 124 (H).
In the next fluctuation, the gaming state is also a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed.
The background image continues to be in battle mode.

Returning to FIG. 124 (B), when the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 124 (A) is a big hit, the decoration is as shown in FIG. 124 (I) according to the operation of the effect button 63. The design stops in the form of a big hit. Here, it is confirmed and stopped at "333". After that, the jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game is completed, the game state is switched to the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 124 (J), the time saving mode entry image WMG described in characters as "time saving mode entry" is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the time saving mode has been entered. At this time, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the time saving mode entry image WMG.
Here, it switches to a background image that shows many fine cross patterns. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect C]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the variable middle mode start display effect C. If the special figure lottery result corresponding to this specific change (the change) is lost during the change, the next mode start display effect is changed even before the end (fixed stop) of the change. It is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. here"
The "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (hit or loss) of the variation. The "mode" here means a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the variable middle mode start display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), four hold icons 9B and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 12
The variation shown in 5 (A) corresponds to "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 125 (A) is executed is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this fluctuation, when the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit game is executed after the change is completed, and then the "time saving mode" of the time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, it enters the "battle mode" in the normal state. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) has elapsed after the fluctuation display in FIG. 125 (A), the fluctuation display disappears as shown in FIG. 125 (B), and the characters "time saving mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The mode image MDG that has been set is displayed. Further, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the variation (specific variation) is a hit or a loss.

When the fluctuation is lost, the battle mode mode entry image LMG described with the characters "battle mode entry" is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 125 (C). As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, even before the end (fixed stop) of this specific fluctuation, the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation is lost is notified. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG. Here, the background image is switched to the diagonal line. The background image here includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochromatic image, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the expectation degree image KG showing the expectation degree of the jackpot after the next fluctuation is displayed. Here, since there are four hold (hold icon 9B) of the second special symbol lottery at the time of the change (specific change), 4
Two expectations are shown. The one corresponding to the first hold to be executed next is "Round 1 ...
It is "10%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second hold to be executed next is "2nd round ... 15%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the 3rd hold is "3rd round ... 18%", and the one corresponding to the 4th hold is "4th round ... 21%".
". When this expected degree image KG is displayed, the specific fluctuation ends and the symbol is fixedly stopped. After the fixed stop, the gaming state switches from the reduced working hours state to the normal state. Since it has already entered the battle mode, the background image etc. are already in the battle mode, and it continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (E), with the start of the next fluctuation (the next fluctuation of the specific fluctuation), the characters "Start the first round!" Are displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CR are displayed.
The movie image in which B battles is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is definitely stopped due to loss. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125 (G), when the next fluctuation (the next fluctuation after the specific fluctuation) starts, the characters "Start the second round!" Are displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character are displayed. The movie image in which the CRB battles is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is definitely stopped due to loss. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125 (I), when the next fluctuation (the next next fluctuation after the specific fluctuation) starts, the characters "3rd round start!" Are displayed, and the ally character CRA is displayed. A movie image in which the enemy character CRB battles is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Here, as shown in FIG. 125 (J), the ally character CRA wins, and the symbol stops at a big hit. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be.
The background image continues to be in battle mode.

In addition, when returning to FIG. 125 (B) and the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation (specific fluctuation) of FIG. 125 (A) is a big hit, FIGS. 124 (I) and FIG. The same effect as 124 (J) is executed.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect D]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the variable middle mode start display effect D. If the special figure lottery result corresponding to this specific change (the change) is lost during the change, the next mode start display effect is changed even before the end (fixed stop) of the change. It is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. here"
The "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (hit or loss) of the variation. The "mode" here means a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the variable middle mode start display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), four hold icons 9B and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 12
The variation shown in 6 (A) corresponds to "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 126 (A) is executed is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this fluctuation, when the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit game is executed after the change is completed, and then the "time saving mode" of the time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, it enters the "battle mode" in the normal state. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) has elapsed after the variation display in FIG. 126 (A), the variation display disappears as shown in FIG. 126 (B), and the characters "time saving mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The mode image MDG that has been set is displayed. Further, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the variation (specific variation) is a hit or a loss.

When the fluctuation is lost, the battle mode mode entry image LMG described with the characters "battle mode entry" is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 126 (C). As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, even before the end (fixed stop) of this specific fluctuation, the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation is lost is notified. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG. Here, the background image is switched to the diagonal line. The background image here includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochromatic image, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the expectation degree image KG showing the expectation degree of the jackpot after the next fluctuation and the timer image TM1 are displayed.
Here, since there are four hold (hold icon 9B) of the second special symbol lottery at the time of the change (specific change), four expectations are shown in the expectation image KG. The one corresponding to the first hold to be executed next is "1st round ... 10%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second hold to be executed next is "2nd round ... 15%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the third hold is "3rd round ... 18%", and the one corresponding to the 4th hold is "4th round ... 21%". When the timer value becomes "0" due to the countdown of the timer image TM1, the expectation image KG and the timer image TM1
Both disappear from the screen, and then the design stops (certain fluctuation ends). After the fixed stop, the gaming state switches from the reduced working hours state to the normal state. Since it has already entered the battle mode, the background image etc. are already in the battle mode, and it continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), with the start of the next fluctuation (the next fluctuation of the specific fluctuation), the characters "Start the first round!" Are displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CR are displayed.
The movie image in which B battles is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the expectation degree image KG is displayed again. Here, four expectations are shown as in the case of the previous fluctuation (specific fluctuation). Then, FIG.
As shown in 26 (G), the part of "1st round ... 10%" corresponding to this change moves to the right and is framed out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (H), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is definitely stopped due to loss. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 126 (I), when the next fluctuation (the next fluctuation following the specific fluctuation) starts, the characters "Start the second round!" Are displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character are displayed. A movie image of the CRB fighting is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (J), the expectation degree image KG is displayed again.
Here, unlike the previous fluctuation, the three expectations that "1st round ... 10%" has disappeared are shown. After that, the part of "2nd round ... 15%" corresponding to this change may or may not move to the right to frame out.

In addition, when returning to FIG. 126 (B) and the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 126 (A) is a big hit, FIGS. 124 (I) and FIG. The same effect as 124 (J) is executed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the variable middle mode start display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), if the lottery result corresponding to the change is lost during the specific change, the change is caused even before the end of the change. The first effect (display of the failure mode entry image LMG) for notifying the start of the mode (failure mode) to proceed when the corresponding lottery result is lost can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the production that straddles a plurality of fluctuations. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), in a specific fluctuation, an operation means image (button image BTN) is displayed before the notification. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), in a specific fluctuation, an image showing a mode (success mode) in which the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is hit before the notification. (Mode image MDG) is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 12
The same applies to FIGS. 4 to 126.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), in a specific variation, a specific image (expectation) suggesting the degree of expectation of each variation executed after the notification and after the specific variation. Degree image KG) is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 126.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming state (time saving state) at the time of a specific fluctuation and the gaming state (normal state) in the mode of advancing at the time of loss are different from each other. The gaming state at the time of a specific fluctuation is more advantageous to the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before.
It is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to FIG. 126.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming state (time saving state) at the time of a specific fluctuation and the gaming state (time saving state) in the mode of advancing at the time of hitting are the same gaming state. In each case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the gaming state (normal state) in the mode in which the player is lost. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 126
Is the same.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variable middle mode start display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, "failure mode entry" (variable middle mode start display effect A) and "battle mode entry" (variation) are used to notify the start of the mode to be advanced when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. It is assumed that the image LMG represented by the intermediate mode start display effects B to D) is displayed. However, the content of the image LMG is not limited to these, and may be any content. Further, the characters "rush" and "start" are not necessarily required to notify the start of the mode, and only the mode name may be used. Even in this case, the start of the mode can be notified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the decorative pattern may not be displayed in the portion where the decorative pattern is displayed, or may be displayed in a different size (for example, smaller). If the decorative pattern is small or not displayed, it is difficult to tell whether or not the fluctuation continues at the start of the mode, and the sense of unity of the effect that straddles a plurality of fluctuations can be further enhanced.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the variable middle mode start display effects A to D may be appropriately combined. Further, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all fluctuations may correspond to "specific fluctuation".

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
If the lottery result corresponding to the change is lost during a specific change, the first notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to the change is lost even before the end of the change. Can perform production,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 further comprises.
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means.
In the particular variation, the operating means image is displayed prior to the notification.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
In the specific variation, before the notification, an image showing the mode to be advanced when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is hit is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
In the particular variation, after the notification, a specific image suggesting the degree of expectation of each variation executed after the particular variation is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The gaming state at the time of the specific fluctuation and the gaming state in the mode of advancing at the time of the loss are different from each other, and the gaming state at the time of the specific fluctuation is more advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The gaming state at the time of the specific fluctuation and the gaming state in the mode of advancing at the time of hitting are the same gaming state, and both are more advantageous to the player than the gaming state in the mode of advancing at the time of losing. Is in a state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, predetermined image continuous display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. This predetermined image continuous display effect can be executed after a big hit game, during a change effect of a decorative pattern, or the like. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start or command variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a predetermined image continuous display effect, the corresponding image data is generated from the ROM 103. Is read out and the image display device 7
The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined image continuous display effect A. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as a predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the hold icon 9C is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 127 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 127 (B), there is a prize for the first special symbol during this fluctuation, and the hold icon 9A
Is newly displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), there is a prize for the first special symbol during this fluctuation, and one hold icon 9A is newly displayed, resulting in a total of two. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "567", and the hold icon 9C disappears.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), the hold icon 9A shifts to the right one by one, and the oldest hold icon 9A located on the far right is the relevant one. Moves to the hold display area and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (E),
At the start of this variation, a predetermined image CHA representing the character is displayed. This predetermined image CHA
Is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example thereof, is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown.
That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Whether or not this predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game).
It may be displayed when the gaming state changes (for example, from the time saving state to the normal state).
The condition for displaying the predetermined image CHA can be any condition.

This fluctuation naturally corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9 is concerned.
C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This fluctuation also corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 127 (H), during this fluctuation, the hold icon 9A is newly displayed by winning the first special symbol.
After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (I), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "123", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), the next fluctuation is further started. This variation falls under the category of "specific variation" in the claims. When the next fluctuation (specific fluctuation) is started, the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this fluctuation. This variation (specific variation) is the predetermined image CHA.
This is because it corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to the winning after the is displayed.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined image continuous display effect B. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as a predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the hold icon 9C is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 128 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 128 (B), there is a prize for the first special symbol during this fluctuation, and the hold icon 9A
Is newly displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), there is a prize for the first special symbol during this fluctuation, and one new hold icon 9A is displayed, resulting in a total of two. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "567", and the hold icon 9C disappears.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), the hold icon 9A shifts to the right one by one, and the oldest hold icon 9A located on the far right is the relevant one. Moves to the hold display area and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (E),
At the start of this variation, a predetermined image CHA representing the character is displayed. This predetermined image CHA
Is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example thereof, is configured as a character image representing a smile face. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown.
That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Whether or not this predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game).
It may be displayed when the gaming state changes (for example, from the time saving state to the normal state).
The condition for displaying the predetermined image CHA can be any condition.

This fluctuation naturally corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9 is concerned.
C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 128 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This fluctuation also corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 128 (H), during this fluctuation, the hold icon 9B is newly displayed by winning the second special symbol.
After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (I), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "123", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (J), the next fluctuation is further started. This variation falls under the category of "specific variation" in the claims. When the next fluctuation (specific fluctuation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this fluctuation. This variation (specific variation) is the predetermined image CHA.
This is because it corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to the winning after the is displayed.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect C]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined image continuous display effect C. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as a predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), two hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 129 (A
) Is executed, the gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 129 (B), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the jackpot roll (aspect) of "333", and the hold icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (C), the opening effect of the jackpot is started. Here, the character image of "start of big hit game" is displayed. After that, a jackpot game is executed. When the predetermined jackpot game is completed, the ending effect of the jackpot is executed as shown in FIG. 129 (D). Here, a character image of "end of big hit game" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example thereof, it is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. When the jackpot game is completed, the game state is switched to the reduced working hours state here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, 1
One hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 129 (E) is executed is the time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold won before the big hit of FIG. 129 (B) is executed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold won before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B).

After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (F), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of the fluctuation of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This fluctuation also corresponds to the hold that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B).
As mentioned above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to winning prior to the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B). As shown in FIG. 129 (H), during this fluctuation, the hold icon 9B is newly displayed by winning the second special symbol. After that, FIG. 129 (I)
As shown in the above, the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "123", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of the fluctuation of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (J), the next fluctuation is further started. This variation falls under the category of "specific variation" in the claims. The game state continues to be in a short time state. When the next fluctuation (specific fluctuation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this fluctuation. This fluctuation (specific fluctuation) is held by winning a prize before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B) (hold icon 9).
This is because it corresponds to B).

[Predetermined image continuous display effect D]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined image continuous display effect D. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as a predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect D, the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (non-time saving state), and then, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the decorative symbol is "3".
33 ”is a big hit (aspect) and the decision is stopped, and the hold icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the opening effect of the jackpot is started. Here, the character image of "start of big hit game" is displayed. After that, a jackpot game is executed. When the predetermined jackpot game is completed, the ending effect of the jackpot is executed as shown in FIG. 130 (C). Here, a character image of "end of big hit game" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example thereof, it is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

When a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined image CHA is displayed, the specific image CHB is displayed so as to cover a part of the predetermined image CHA. Here, the specific image CHB is the predetermined image CHA.
Similarly, it is an image showing a specific object, and here, it is configured as a character image showing a smile wearing sunglasses. After that, the jackpot game ends, and here, the game state is switched to the reduced working hours state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, 1
One hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 130 (E) is executed is the time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold won before the big hit of FIG. 130 (A) is executed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold won before the jackpot in FIG. 130 (A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (F), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and are continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 130 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. Predetermined image CHA and specific image C
HB is continuously displayed. This fluctuation also corresponds to the hold that was won before the big hit in FIG. 130 (A). As described above, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning prior to the jackpot in FIG. 130 (A). FIG. 130 (H)
As shown in the above, during this fluctuation, the hold icon 9B is newly displayed by winning the second special symbol. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (I), the fluctuation is completed and the decorative pattern is changed to "123".
, And the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the start of the fluctuation of this fluctuation, and are continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (J), the next variation is further initiated. This variation falls under the category of "specific variation" in the claims. The game state continues to be in a short time state. When the next fluctuation (specific fluctuation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB disappear at the same time as the start of this fluctuation. This fluctuation (specific fluctuation) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to the winning before the big hit in FIG. 130 (A).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the predetermined image continuous display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 (E) to 127 (I), the first effect in which the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and FIG. 127 (J). As shown in, a second effect in which the predetermined image CHA disappears when a specific fluctuation after a plurality of fluctuations starts can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. 128 to 13
The same applies to 0.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the plurality of fluctuations means the predetermined image C.
A variation corresponding to a plurality of holds won before HA is displayed, and a specific variation is a variation corresponding to a hold won during a plurality of variations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 128 to 130.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the plurality of fluctuations are executed after the hit game, and the predetermined image predetermined image CHA is displayed during the hit game and after the hit game. , Is displayed continuously in multiple fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 130.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, a predetermined image CH is performed during the hitting game.
After A is displayed, the specific image CHB is displayed so as to overlap with the predetermined image CHA, and after the winning game, it is continuously displayed in a plurality of fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the plurality of fluctuations is the variation of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the specific variation is the first special symbol or The other variation of the second special symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 130.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the predetermined image continuous display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, it is assumed that the character image is displayed as the predetermined image CHA. but,
The predetermined image CHA may have any content. For example, the predetermined image CHA may be a character image showing a specific content, an image for calling attention to the ball removal, or a game ball to be inserted at a specific position. It may be an image that prompts. Alternatively, it may be a right-handed image.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, the multiple fluctuations shown in FIGS. 129 (E) to 129 (I) are the fluctuations of the first special symbol lottery, and the specific fluctuations shown in FIG. 129 (J) are the second special. It was assumed that it was a change in the design lottery. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be opposite to each other. That is, even if the multiple fluctuations shown in FIGS. 129 (E) to 129 (I) are the fluctuations of the second special symbol lottery and the specific fluctuations shown in FIG. 129 (J) are the fluctuations of the first special symbol lottery. good.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the predetermined image continuous display effects A to D can be appropriately combined.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image.
The first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and
A second effect, in which the predetermined image disappears when the specific fluctuation after the plurality of fluctuations starts, can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of holds that have been won before the predetermined image is displayed.
The specific variation is a variation corresponding to a hold won during the plurality of variations.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2.
The plurality of fluctuations is executed after the winning game.
The predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, and is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations after the hit game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image different from the predetermined image.
After the predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, the specific image is displayed overlapping the predetermined image, and after the hit game, the specific image is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The plurality of fluctuations is a fluctuation of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol.
The specific variation is the variation of the first special symbol or the other of the second special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The predetermined image is an image that encourages the ball to enter a specific position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The background image switching effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. This background image switching effect can be executed after a big hit game, during a variable effect of a decorative pattern, or the like. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start and command variation effect start commands received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the background image switching effect, the corresponding image data is output from the ROM 103. Read out image display device 7
The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of.

[Background image switching effect A]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect A. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) at the same time as the fixed stop of the symbol, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect A, first, FIG. 131 (
As shown in A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R). Four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The gaming state is the normal state (non-time saving state).

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face as an example.
The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and the background image includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image but also a monochromatic image or a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the position displayed may change due to the movement. It may also disappear or appear.
Here, in the first background image HG1, other parts of the predetermined image CHA are represented by a single color.
It may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), the timer image TM
1 is displayed. Here, "3 seconds left" is described. At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 131 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, then as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the decorative pattern (8L,
The fluctuation of 8C, 8R) slows down and temporarily stops at "789". The temporary stop here means a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed side by side with the decorative patterns slightly raised and lowered.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are fixedly stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, in the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown on the entire display screen 7a. Second background image H
G2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, the decorative pattern that has been stopped for confirmation disappears, and the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 131 (F). The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "coming soon". As shown in FIGS. 131 (G) and 131 (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 131 (E) to 131 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the determination of the symbol is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next fluctuation, decorative patterns (8L, 8)
C, 8R) is displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), the character image MLG of "Spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "coming soon" and the text image ML.
G is "Spring", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "Spring is coming soon". Decorative pattern (
8L, 8C, 8R) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect B]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect B. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) at the same time as the fixed stop of the symbol, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect B, first, FIG. 132 (
As shown in A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R). Here, a design (8l, 8c, 8r) is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. Further, four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The game state is a reduced working hours state.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example.
The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and the background image includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image but also a monochromatic image or a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the position displayed may change due to the movement. It may also disappear or appear.
Here, in the first background image HG1, other parts of the predetermined image CHA are represented by a single color.
It may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the timer image TM
1 is displayed. Here, "3 seconds left" is described. At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 132 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, then as shown in FIG. 132 (D), the decorative pattern (8L,
The fluctuation of 8C, 8R) slows down and temporarily stops at "789". The temporary stop here means a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed side by side with the decorative patterns slightly raised and lowered. Design (8l, 8c, 8r
) Continues the variable display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) and the symbols (8).
l, 8c, 8r) is fixedly stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, in the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown on the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) that have been stopped for confirmation disappear, and the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 132 (F). The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "coming soon". At this time, the design (8l, 8c,
In 8r), the display is maintained in a fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 132 (G) and 132 (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears from the left side of the display screen 7a (
Frame out). The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in a fixed stop. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 132 (E) to 132 (H), the second background image HG is in the process of stopping the determination of the symbol.
The display of 2 is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next fluctuation, decorative patterns (8L, 8)
C, 8R) and the design (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (J), the character image MLG of "Spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "coming soon" and the text image ML.
G is "Spring", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "Spring is coming soon". Decorative pattern (
8L, 8C, 8R) and the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect C]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect C. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) at the same time as the fixed stop of the symbol, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect C, first, FIG. 133 (
As shown in A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, the game state is the reduced working hours state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. The decorative symbol (8L, 8C, 8R), the hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face as an example.
The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and the background image includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image but also a monochromatic image or a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by the movement. It may also disappear or appear.
Here, in the first background image HG1, other parts of the predetermined image CHA are represented by a single color.
It may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), the timer image TM
1 is displayed. Here, "3 seconds left" is described. At this time, the first background image HG
1 is continuously displayed. As shown in FIG. 133 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, then, as shown in FIG. 133 (D), the first background image HG1
The predetermined image CHA disappears from. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixedly stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, in the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown on the entire display screen 7a. 2nd background image HG2
May include an image representing a particular object. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (F),
The telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "coming soon". At this time, the design (8l, 8c, 8r)
) Is maintained in the fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 133 (G) and 133 (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in a fixed stop. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 133 (E) to 133 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the determination of the symbol is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next fluctuation, the design (8l, 8c,
8r) is displayed in a variable manner. From this fluctuation, the gaming state is switched to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (J), the character image MLG of "Spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "coming soon" and the text image ML.
G is "Spring", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "Spring is coming soon". Design (8l
, 8c, 8r), the variable display is maintained.

[Background image switching effect D]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect D. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) at the same time as the fixed stop of the symbol, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect D, first, FIG. 134 (
As shown in A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, at the lower left of the display screen 7a, a hold promotion image of "Reserve hold !!" and a hold number image showing the current hold number of the second special symbol of "hold number 0" are displayed. The game state is a reduced working hours state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. Decorative design (8L,
8C, 8R), the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are not displayed.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example.
The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and the background image includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image but also a monochromatic image or a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the position displayed may change due to the movement. It may also disappear or appear.
Here, in the first background image HG1, other parts of the predetermined image CHA are represented by a single color.
It may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the timer image TM
1 is displayed. Here, "3 seconds left" is described. Due to the winning of the second special symbol, the number of pending images is "2 on hold". As shown in FIG. 134 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the end image of "up to that point !!" and the "first hold ..."
・ Expectation suggestion images of "10%" and "second hold ... 20%" are displayed. The expectation suggestion image shows the expectation of the jackpot of each of these two holds. Specifically, it shows that the expectation of the next fluctuation is 10% and the expectation of the next fluctuation is 20%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), the predetermined image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1. Then, the character image of "It's about to start" is displayed. This suggests that the fluctuations corresponding to the two holds will begin soon. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixedly stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, in the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown on the entire display screen 7a. 2nd background image HG2
May include an image representing a particular object. Then, as shown in FIG. 134 (F),
The telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "coming soon". At this time, the design (8l, 8c, 8r)
) Is maintained in the fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 134 (G) and 134 (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in a fixed stop. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 134 (E) to 134 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the determination of the symbol is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next fluctuation, the design (8l, 8c,
8r) is displayed in a variable manner. From this fluctuation, the gaming state is switched to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (J), the character image MLG of "may hit" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "coming soon", the character image MLG is "may be hit", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "may be hit soon". The variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) is maintained.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the background image switching effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (A) to 131 (D), the first background image H
After the first effect of changing the decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) while displaying G1 and the first effect, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped and the background image is displayed. After the second effect of switching from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2 and the second effect.
As shown in FIGS. 131 (E) to 131 (H), it is possible to execute the third effect of maintaining the display of the second background image HG2 while the determination of the decorative symbol is stopped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131 (I), after the third effect, the background image is changed from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 with the start of the next variation of the decorative pattern. The fourth effect of switching can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), in the first effect, the timer image TM1 is displayed while the first background image HG1 is displayed, and the timer value of the timer image TM1 is a predetermined value. When (here, 0) is reached, the second effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (F) to (H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP is framed in while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. A fifth effect of frame-out can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (F) to (H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP flows while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), in the fourth effect, the character image MLG is displayed while the third background image HG3 is displayed, and in the third effect, the telop image TRP. The characters represented by the above and the characters represented by the character image MLG in the fourth effect are continuous so as to form one sentence when combined. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the background image switching effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, the background image may be completely switched in an instant or may be partially switched gradually. Further, both background images may be superimposed and displayed for a predetermined period.

[Modification 2]
The configurations of the background image switching effects A to D can be appropriately combined.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
A part of the plurality of types of images is a plurality of types of background images.
The first effect of changing the decorative pattern while displaying the first background image, and
After the first effect, the second effect of switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image while fixing and stopping the decorative pattern.
After the second effect, the third effect of maintaining the display of the second background image while the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
After the third effect, a fourth effect of switching the background image from the second background image to the third background image can be executed at the start of the next variation of the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image.
In the first effect, the timer image is displayed while the first background image is displayed.
When the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image.
In the third effect, it is possible to execute the fifth effect in which the predetermined image is framed in and out of the frame while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 4.
The predetermined image is a telop image and is
In the third effect, the telop image flows while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-6]
The gaming machine according to claim 5, which is subordinate to claim 2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a character image.
In the fourth effect, the character image is displayed while the third background image is displayed.
In the third effect, the characters represented by the telop image and the characters represented by the character image in the fourth effect are continuous so as to form one sentence. ing,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The image blurring effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. Figure 135
-In FIG. 138, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the visibility of the drawing, and the decorative design displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also easy to see the drawing. The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that is there.

This image blurring effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 101
Analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and when an instruction to execute an image blur effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position and light emission mode of 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the image blurring effect A will be described, and then the image blurring effect B, the image blurring effect C, and the image blurring effect D will be described in order.

[Image blur effect A]
First, the image blur effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect A. The image blur effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blur effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad
This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8).
Even if the R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach, the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponds to the left decorative symbol 8L). Even if the decorative symbol 8R of the above and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
If L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed.
Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the above is aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

The hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9C.
When moving to d and becoming the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is
It is about 1.5 times the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation for the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad. When moving to, when the hold icon displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, unless the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape, respectively. The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before moving.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, the second starting port 2
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 1 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side with zero pieces.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 135 (A).

The variable display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 135 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "3" temporarily stops. Is displayed). The left decorative symbol 8L displayed as a temporary stop is clearly in focus, and is displayed on the display screen 7a immediately before the temporary stop is displayed (or when the vehicle is decelerated to display the temporary stop). It is displayed large in the area on the left half of. At this time, the hold icon 9C, 4
The hold display position 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. "0 0"
) Is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as a temporary stop is clearly in focus, and is immediately before the temporary stop is displayed (or when decelerated to display the temporary stop). In the central area of the display screen 7a, the size is the same as (or almost the same as) the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that has already been temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped is in focus, the left decorative symbol 8L that is already temporarily stopped is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). It is unclear.

The clear right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed in focus is at least a part of the blurred and unclear left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed (the number "left decorative symbol 8L" here. It is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of (3)) about the right side part).

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 5 (B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 135 (B).

Blurred and obscure images are processed by blurred image processing (eg Gaussian blur).
It is created by the process of blurring the image by changing the standard deviation using the Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or for the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the image in real time from the in-focus clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103. It is created by doing. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed, returns to the size at the time of fluctuation and becomes smaller and becomes clear in focus. The left decorative symbol 8L starts moving into its own variable display area and is temporarily stopped and displayed again. In addition, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed, returns to the size at the time of fluctuation and becomes smaller, and at the same time, it becomes clear in focus (right decorative symbol 8).
The size of R and the size of the left decorative symbol 8L are the same, and the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L are both in focus (clear)), and the right decorative symbol 8R is its own. The movement is started in the variable display area, and the temporary stop is displayed again. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (C). Further, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in parallel with the upper side of the display screen 7a and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the upper left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L (hereinafter, simply referred to as "upper left decorative symbol 8La"; here, the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 8L on the side, and the upper right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R (hereinafter, simply referred to as “upper right decorative symbol 8Ra”; here, the number “2”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 8R on the side. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a and temporarily stopped, and are displayed in the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 8L on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L (hereinafter, simply referred to as "lower left decorative symbol 8Lb") has the same symbol as the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra (here, the number "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the display screen 7a is displayed. Right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 8R on the lower right side (hereinafter, simply "lower right decorative symbol 8R"
b ". ) Is the same as the upper left decorative symbol 8La (here, the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed.

As a result, the upward-sloping symbol alignment line L1 connecting the lower left decorative symbol 8Lb and the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra becomes the same symbol (here, the number "2"), and the first reach is formed, and the upper left is formed. The downward-sloping symbol alignment line L2 connecting the decorative symbol 8La and the lower right decorative symbol 8Rb becomes the same symbol (here, the number "3"), and a second reach is formed. That is, a so-called "double reach" is formed by the upward-sloping symbol alignment line by the first reach and the downward-sloping symbol alignment line by the second reach. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C still fluctuates at high speed in a semi-transparent state within its own variable display area. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C changes its fluctuation speed from a translucent state to an opaque state again in its own fluctuation display area, and the fluctuation display continues. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "1") is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the number "9" preceding the number "1" is displayed in a low-speed variable manner in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed from the lower part of the number "9". While it disappears toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the number "2" following this number "1" is displayed at a low speed in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. It is variablely displayed and the lower part of the number "2" appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a. Since the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed behind the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd.
Even if the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed, the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd are not covered by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C so that the visibility is not obstructed. ..

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 5 (E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is shown in FIG. 135 (E).
Is still maintained.

As shown in FIG. 135 (G), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C has a reel that rotates the number "2" following the number "1" from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in its own variable display area. It is displayed variable at low speed in the display mode to be displayed, temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the lower left decorative symbol 8Lb, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the upper right decorative symbol are displayed on the upward-sloping symbol alignment line by the first reach. Designs with the same 8Ra (here, the number "2") are lined up. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (H), the upper left decorative symbol 8La and the lower right decorative symbol 8Rb on the downward-sloping symbol alignment line due to the second reach are out of focus and blurred (so-called). , "Out of focus") becomes obscure. In addition, the first starting port 20
The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.
The numerical value HMG (here, “0 0”) indicating the special figure hold is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (G). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (G).

Lower left decorative pattern 8Lb, middle decorative pattern 8 on the upward-sloping pattern alignment line by the first reach
c, the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra becomes a big hit when the same symbol (here, the number "2") is lined up, and as shown in FIG. 135 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol By increasing the size of each of the 8Rs, they are stopped and displayed in a straight line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoints on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area. , The variable display ends, and then the big hit game (big hit production) is started.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 5 (H). Further, the state in which the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (H). Further, with the end of the variable display, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The size of the medium decorative symbol 8C in FIGS. 135 (F) and 135 (G) is the same as the size at the time of fluctuation (for example, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 135 (D)). Because it is the size of, upper left decorative symbol 8La, lower left decorative symbol 8Lb, upper right decorative symbol 8Ra
, Lower right It is larger than the size of the decorative pattern 8Rb. Further, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 135 (I) are the sizes in the normal state (for example,).
Although it is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 135 (D), the size of the left decorative symbol 8L in FIGS. 135 (B) and (C) and the right in FIG. 135 (C). It is small compared to the size of the decorative pattern.

In this way, in the image blurring effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a clear image that is in focus, and the unclear image (out-of-focus, unclear image) that is out of focus are used. With a certain left decorative pattern 8L, it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the decorative pattern, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the order of the images that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the production (in other words, the left decorative design 8L and then the right decorative design 8R) are focused and the player wants to pay attention (in the production). It can contribute to communicating the creator's thoughts)) to the player.

Further, in the image blurring effect A, for example, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image (out-of-focus, unclear image) that is out of focus, are used. While a certain left decorative symbol 8L realizes an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the decorative symbol, in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (I), the numerical value HMG is the game of the game machine 1. Regardless of the state, it is always in focus and clear. As a result, the player grasps the first special drawing hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special drawing hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. Can be made easier.

[Image blur effect B]
Next, the image blur effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect B. The image blur effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blurring effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad
This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8).
Even if the R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach, the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponds to the left decorative symbol 8L). Even if the decorative symbol 8R of the above and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
If L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed.
Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the above is aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

The hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9C.
When moving to d and becoming the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is
It is about 1.5 times the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation for the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad. When moving to, when the hold icon displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, unless the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape, respectively. The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before moving.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, the second starting port 2
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 1 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side with zero pieces.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 136 (A).

The variable display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 136 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the effect button imitating the effect button 63 is prompted to the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. The image BTN is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. This effect button image BTN is clearly focused and is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (A).

In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit (variable effect start command)
Based on, for example, the expectation of a big hit is set high in the order of white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (big hit rich)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), in order to encourage the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and predetermined. Is displayed in the light emission mode (here, white blinking). At this time, the effect button image BTN that has already been displayed is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left side, and the sword image KG is focused.
It is a clear one that matches, and is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the effect button image BTN that has already been displayed becomes unclear because its focus is out of focus (so-called "out of focus"). There is.

The clear sword image KG that is in focus is the out-of-focus and unclear production button image B.
It is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of at least a part of the TN (the right part of the effect button image BTN).

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 6 (B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 136 (B).

The out-of-focus and unclear effect button image BTN is a still image, and has a predetermined light emission mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, it is either in the lit state or in the extinguished state in the still image. It is in a state). Further, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left side, the size of the effect button image BTN does not change.

Blurred and obscure images are processed by blurred image processing (eg Gaussian blur).
It is created by the process of blurring the image by changing the standard deviation using the Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or for the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the image in real time from the in-focus clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103. It is created by doing. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the effect button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or changes) to a clear one in focus (focus).
It is moved from the left side of the display screen 7a to the center again, and is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. At this time, the already displayed sword image KG is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side and displayed, and the effect button image BTN is clearly focused and is in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the area of. Direction button image BT
Since the focus is on N, the already displayed sword image KG is in focus (
The focus) is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus") and unclear.

The focused and clear effect button image BTN is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of at least a part of the out-of-focus unclear sword image KG (the left part of the collar of the sword image KG).

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 6 (C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 136 (C).

The out-of-focus, unclear sword image KG is a still image, and is in a predetermined light emitting mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, it is in a lit state or an extinguished state in the still image. It has become). Further, when the sword image KG is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (D) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (B), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed (for example, changed from blinking white to blinking blue).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the sword image K displayed in an out-of-focus state.
G changes (or changes) to a clear one that is in focus (focus), and the display screen 7
It is moved from the right side of a to the center again, and is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. At this time, the effect button image BTN that has already been displayed is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side and displayed, and the sword image KG is clearly focused and is in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the area of. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the effect button image BTN that has already been displayed is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus") and unclear. There is.

The clear sword image KG that is in focus is the out-of-focus and unclear production button image B.
It is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of at least a part of the TN (the left part of the effect button image BTN).

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 6 (D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (D).

The out-of-focus and unclear effect button image BTN is a still image, and has a predetermined light emission mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, it is either in the lit state or in the extinguished state in the still image. It is in a state). Further, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (E) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (D), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed (for example, changed from blinking blue to blinking green).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the effect button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or changes) to a clear one in focus (focus).
The display screen 7a is moved from the right side to the left side without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. In addition, the sword image K that is displayed in a clear state with focus.
G is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. At this time, the numbers HM indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively.
G (here, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (E). Further, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a.
The state of disappearing from is continued to be maintained in FIG. 136 (E).

It should be noted that the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (F) is shown in FIG. 136 (F).
The effect button image BTN in E) may be the same as a predetermined light emitting mode, or may be changed to one with a high expectation of being a big hit (for example, changing from green blinking to red blinking). Further, the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (F) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (E), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed (for example, changed from blinking green to blinking red).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), the effect button image BTN displayed in a clear state of being in focus moves from the left side of the display screen 7a to the center again without changing the size. At the same time, it is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the effect button image BTN, a message MG "press !!" prompting the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. At this time, the sword image KG displayed in a clear state of being in focus is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 6 (F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (F).

It should be noted that the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (G) is shown in FIG. 136 (G).
The effect button image BTN in F) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode, or may be changed to one with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, changed from red blinking to gold blinking (yellow blinking)). good.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 136 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, middle The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area. The fluctuation display ends. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3", so that it is out of order.

Even if the fluctuation display is completed, the first special drawing is held and the second is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The numbers HMG (here, “0 0”) indicating the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (G). Further, when the variation display ends, the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation display ends.

On the other hand, following FIG. 136 (F), as shown in FIG. 136 (I), the sword image KG displayed in a clear state in focus is moved from the right side of the display screen 7a to the center again. It is moved without changing its size and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. Sword member 6
A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of 4 is displayed. also,
The sword image KG displays a message MG of "push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface. At this time, the effect button image BTN displayed in a clear state of being in focus is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. "0 0"
) Is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (F). Further, FIG. 13 shows a state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a.
It is still maintained at 6 (F).

The predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (I) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (F), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed (for example, from red blinking to gold blinking (yellow blinking) or seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (big hit rich)).

When the player operates (pushes down) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L
, Medium decorative symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area. And the fluctuation display ends. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "1", so that the same symbol is used. It is displayed as a stop and becomes a big hit, and then a big hit game (big hit production)
Will be started.

Even if the fluctuation display is completed, the first special drawing is held and the second is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The numbers HMG (here, “0 0”) indicating the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (I). Further, even after the variable display ends, the state in which the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 136 (I). With the end of the variable display, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the case where the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG are displayed in FIG. 136 (F), the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (G) is selected and displayed, and in FIG. 136 (I).
) Sword image KG may be selected and displayed, and the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (I) is selected as compared with the case where the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (G) is selected and displayed. The probability that a big hit game (big hit effect) will occur is higher when the image is displayed.

In this way, in the image blurring effect B, the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are clear images that are in focus, and the unclear image that is out of focus (focus) (
Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG by using the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are out-of-focus and unclear images), the player can be given a sense of depth. It can be visually entertaining and can improve the interest.

In addition, the image that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the production (in other words, the production button image BTN, the sword image KG, the production button image BTN, and the sword image KG are focused in this order (in other words).
It can contribute to telling the player the order of the images (the thought of the creator of the production) that the player wants to focus on and pay attention to.

Further, in the image blur effect B, for example, an effect button image BTN or a sword image KG, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (out-of-focus indistinct). The effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, realize the expression with a sense of depth in the arrangement of the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG. In 136 (J), the numerical value HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player grasps the first special drawing hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special drawing hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. Can be made easier.

[Image blur effect C]
Next, the image blur effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect C. The image blurring effect C is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blurring effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad
This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach. ing.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8).
Even if the R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach, the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponds to the left decorative symbol 8L). Even if the decorative symbol 8R of the above and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
If L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed.
Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the above is aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

The hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9C.
When moving to d and becoming the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is
It is about 1.5 times the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation for the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad. When moving to, when the hold icon displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, unless the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape, respectively. The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before moving.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, the second starting port 2
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 1 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side with zero pieces.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 137 (A).

When the reach is formed in FIG. 137 (A), as shown in FIG. 137 (B), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63. Is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. This effect button image BTN is clearly focused and is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the first starting port 2
The number HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 0 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is It is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (A).

In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit (variable effect start command)
Based on, for example, the expectation of a big hit is set high in the order of white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (big hit rich)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), the display screen 7
The upper body of the character CRA with a sword is arranged and displayed in almost the entire right area of a.
This character CRA is clearly in focus and is displayed large in the entire right side region of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB, which were displayed in a clear state of being in focus, disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. "0
"0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (B). In addition, the hold icon 9C, 4
The state in which the hold display position 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 137 (B). The character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is rearranged in the center of the display screen 7a. Is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. At this time, the effect button image BTN is placed in front of the already displayed character CRA and focused (
It is clearly in focus and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 137).
It is displayed in the same position as that shown in (B)). Since the effect button image BTN is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is out of focus and blurred (so-called “out of focus”) and unclear. ..

Clear in-focus effect button image The BTN is displayed overlaid on the front side of at least part of the out-of-focus, obscure character CRA (the right shoulder, right arm, and sword of the character CRA). There is.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 7 (C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 137 (C).

Blurred and obscure images are processed by blurred image processing (eg Gaussian blur).
It is created by the process of blurring the image by changing the standard deviation using the Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or for the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the image in real time from the in-focus clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103. It is created by doing. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. In addition, the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA
Is a still image. Further, the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137 (D) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137 (B), and there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit. It may be changed to something (for example, changing from white blinking to blue blinking or gold blinking (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), the display screen 7
The upper body of the character CRB holding a sword is arranged and displayed facing the character CRA almost in the center of a. This character CRB is clearly focused and is displayed in a large size in almost the entire left side region of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB that were displayed in a clear state in focus.
Is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. Also, because the character CRB is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is still out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus") and unclear. There is.

The in-focus, clear character CRB appears to overlap at least part of the out-of-focus, obscure character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword of the character CRA). ing.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 7 (D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 137 (D). The character CRB may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the character CRA displayed in an out-of-focus and unclear state changes to a clear one in focus, and covers almost the entire right area of the display screen 7a. A clear character CRA that is in focus is displayed, and a clear character CRB that is in focus is displayed in almost the entire left area of the display screen 7a (that is, the character CRB is the character CRA). Display screen 7a to keep time
It is displayed by moving from almost the center to the left side of. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (E).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), the message MG of the vertical writing image "Battle start" is displayed in the area extending from the center to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The message MG of this vertical writing image is a clear one that is in focus, and the two characters CRA and CRB that have already been displayed are out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). It is unclear.

The message MG of the vertical image that the clear "battle start" is in focus is
At least a part of the out-of-focus obscure character CRA (the sword part of the character CRA) is displayed overlapping the front side, and at least a part of the out-of-focus obscure character CRB (the right shoulder of the character CRB). And the part of the sword) is displayed in an overlapping state on the front side.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 7 (F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 137 (F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (H), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the out-of-focus state are changed to clear ones in focus and displayed on the display screen 7a, 2 Action production (battle production) by one character CRA and CRB is developed (started). At this time, the numbers HMG (here) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. Then, "
0 0 ") is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (G). In addition, the hold icon 9C,
The state in which the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 137 (G).

In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (I), an enlarged motion blur in which the alphabet V approaches from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front side is displayed. This magnified motion blur to the remnants of the letter V is also created as an unclear one whose focus is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). This out-of-focus, obscure image is performed by magnified motion blur image processing, and the target image (or the sprites that make up the image) is
Alternatively, the target layer among a plurality of layers is blurred in the direction of diffusion from the center, and the blur becomes stronger from the center to the outer circumference as the distance dimension from the center increases. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the image in real time from the in-focus clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103. It is created by doing.

When the player sees the image of the alphabet V processed by this magnified motion blurred image, the player can be given the impression that he / she is heading toward the image of the alphabet V, and at the same time, he / she is moved to the center of the image of the alphabet V. You can get a sense of speed to move forward, and the ally character CRA is the enemy character C.
It is possible to suggest that the RB will be defeated soon. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (H). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), an action production (battle production) is developed (started).
At the end of the action production (battle production), a production is performed to notify the victory of the ally character CRA, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message MG of "victory" is on the left of the ally character CRA. It is placed and displayed in the direction. If an effect is performed to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG "defeated" is displayed on the left side of the enemy character CRB. Arranged and displayed.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 7 (I). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 137 (I).

After that, although not shown, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a (here, the number "1"), and when the variable display ends, the variable display is completed. A jackpot game (big hit production) that becomes a jackpot and gives profits to the player will be performed. Even after the variation display ends, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are held. Number H to indicate
MG (here, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (J). Further, even when the variable display ends, the state in which the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (J). With the end of the variable display, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

On the other hand, on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1" and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "1".
2 ”, the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number“ 1 ”, and the same symbol (here, the number“ 1 ”) is not aligned and is stopped and displayed. When the variable display ends, the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a.
However, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

In this way, in the image blurring effect C, the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, which are clear images that are in focus, and the unclear image (out of focus, indistinct) that is out of focus. Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN by using the character CRB which is an image), the player can visually see the player. It can be entertained and can be enjoyed.

In addition, we want the player to pay attention to the image (in other words, first, the effect button image BTN, the character CRA, the effect button image BTN, and the character CRB) that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the effect. It can contribute to telling the player the order of the images (thoughts of the creator of the production).

Further, in the image blur effect C, for example, a character CRA or an effect button image BTN, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (out of focus, unclear). The character CRB, which is an image), realizes an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, whereas FIGS. 137 (A) to FIG. In FIG. 137 (J), the numerical value HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player grasps the first special drawing hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special drawing hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. Can be made easier.

[Image blur effect D]
Next, the image blur effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect D. The image blurring effect D is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blur effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad
This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach. ing.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8).
Even if the R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach, the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponds to the left decorative symbol 8L). Even if the decorative symbol 8R of the above and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
If L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed.
Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the above is aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

The hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9C.
When moving to d and becoming the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is
It is about 1.5 times the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation for the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad. When moving to, when the hold icon displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, unless the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape, respectively. The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before moving.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, the second starting port 2
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 1 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side with zero pieces.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 138 (A).

When the reach is formed in FIG. 138 (A), as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the upper body of the character CRA holding the sword is arranged and displayed on almost the entire right side region of the display screen 7a. This character CRA is clearly in focus and is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed large in almost the entire right area of. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. "0 0") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 38 (A). The character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (C), the upper body of the character CRB having a sword is arranged and displayed facing the character CRA substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRB is clearly focused and is displayed in a large size in almost the entire left side region of the display screen 7a. At this time, since the character CRB is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is out of focus and blurred (so-called “out of focus”) and unclear. There is.

The in-focus, clear character CRB appears to overlap at least part of the out-of-focus, obscure character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword of the character CRA). ing.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 8 (B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 138 (B).

The clear character CRB that is in focus may be a still image or a moving image. Further, the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA is a still image.

Blurred and obscure images are processed by blurred image processing (eg Gaussian blur).
It is created by the process of blurring the image by changing the standard deviation using the Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or for the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the image in real time from the in-focus clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103. It is created by doing. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), the character CRB is displayed by moving from substantially the center of the display screen 7a to the left side in order to keep a distance from the character CRA, and is displayed in an out-of-focus state. The character CRA changes to a clear one that is in focus, and almost the entire body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (battle effect). To be started). At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (here). Then, "0 0") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 7 (C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 137 (C).

In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the message MG "It is a big hit by winning the ally character !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 138 (D).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the initial stage of the action effect (battle effect) is performed. In the initial stage of action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the production of hunting down the ally character CRA to the right is performed. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (E).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), in the middle stage of the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. At this time, the first special drawing hold and the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20
Number HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into
”) Is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (F). Further, FIG. 1 shows a state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a.
It is still maintained at 38 (F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (H), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). Advance (move) to the front (front) center position of the display screen 7a (advance position (advance position))
In the unfolded position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion, which is halved, is combined to form one decorative member (combined accessory) in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Less than,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode).
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have a white light emitting mode, and the alphabetic character "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively, to win the ally character CRA. A suggestive production is performed. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light in a predetermined manner (for example,). Due to other light emission modes (for example, red light emission modes) different from the white light emission mode), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have a red light emission mode, but the alphabetic character "V" does not appear. , There is no production that suggests the victory of the ally character CRA.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), and the letter "V" is formed on the light guide plate, and the outer circumference excluding the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate is formed. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed on the light guide plate.
The letter "V" appears due to diffuse reflection at "V". Further, on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Lights up (for example, red) and emits light toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R through the light guide plate, but the alphabetic character "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Retreat (move) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 8 (G). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 138 (G).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (I), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), an effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and "victory". Message MG is placed and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. At the end of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CR
When the effect of notifying the victory of B is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and "
The message MG "Defeat" is placed and displayed on the left side of the enemy character CRB.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 0 ") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 8 (H). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 138 (H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8 are displayed on the display screen 7a.
C, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stop with the same symbols (here, the number "1"), and when the variable display ends, it becomes a jackpot and a profit is given to the player. Is done. Even after the variation display ends, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are held. The indicated number HMG (here "0 0") is subsequently displayed in FIG. 138 (I). Further, even if the variable display ends, the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7.
The state disappeared from a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (I). With the end of the variable display, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

On the other hand, when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L is a number "1" and the middle decorative symbol 8C is a number on the display screen 7a. "2", right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "1" and the same symbol (here,
When the numbers "1") are not aligned and the display is stopped, and the fluctuation display is completed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. When the variable display ends, the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the hold icon 9 comes with the end of the variable display.
C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the image blurring effect D, the character CRB (enemy character CRB), which is a clear image that is in focus, and the unclear image (out of focus, indistinct) that is out of focus (out of focus). Since it is possible to realize an expression with a sense of depth in the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB by using the character CRA (ally character CRA) which is an image), the player can be visually entertained. It is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, an image (in other words, a character CR) that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the production.
The order of the images that you want the player to pay attention to by focusing in the order of A (friendly character CRA) and then character CRB (enemy character CRB) (thoughts of the creator of the production).
) Can be contributed to telling the player.

Further, in the image blurring effect D, for example, a character CRB (enemy character CRB), which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (out of focus, unclear). Character CRA (ally character CRA) that is an image)
And, while the expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB is realized, in FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (J), the number HMG is the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Regardless of, it is always in focus and clear. This will result in
It is easy for the player to grasp the first special drawing hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special drawing hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. be able to.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image blur effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 135 (B) to 135 of the image blurring effect A
As shown in (C), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided.
The first effect of displaying the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (B), which is a clear first image, and the first effect.
FIG. 1 shows the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (B), which is the first image clearly displayed by the effect of.
The second effect that is obscured like the left decorative pattern 8L of 35 (C) and the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (C) that is the first image that is obscured by the second effect. The third effect of clearly displaying the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is the second image, at a position different from the above can be executed. According to this configuration, the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image, and the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is an unclear first image, form a first.
Because it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image.
It is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the image blurring effect B of FIGS. 136 (B) to 136 (C), the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), which is a clear second image, and FIG. 136 (C), which is an unclear first image. ) Production button image BTN makes it possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image, so that the player can be visually entertained and enjoyed. It can be improved.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (C) to 137 (E), for example, the character CRB of FIG. 137 (E), which is a clear second image, and FIG. 137, which is an unclear first image, are shown. E)
By using the character CRA of the above, it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. be able to.
In the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (B) to 138 (C), the character CRB of FIG. 138 (C), which is a clear second image, and FIG. 138 (C), which is an unclear first image. With the character CRA of the above, it is possible to realize an expression with a sense of depth in the arrangement of the first image and the second image, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. be able to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (C) of the image blurring effect A, FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image clearly displayed by the third effect. The right decorative symbol 8R overlaps with at least a part of the left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 135 (C), which is the first image obscured by the second effect. Specifically, in FIG. 135 (C), the clearly focused right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed is at least the out-of-focus and unclear left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of a part (about the right part of the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3")). According to this configuration
It can be expressed as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136 (C), the clear sword image KG, which is the second image in focus, is at least one of the out-of-focus and unclear effect button images BTN, which is the first image. It is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of the part (the right part of the effect button image BTN). According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 (E), the in-focus and clear character CRB of the second image is at least a part (character) of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA of the first image. It is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the right shoulder, right chest, right arm and sword of CRA. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 (C), the in-focus and clear character CRB of the second image is at least a part (character) of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA of the first image. It is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the right shoulder, right chest, right arm and sword of CRA. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 of the image blurring effect A
As shown in (C), the image display device 7 (display means) is capable of displaying the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9C is not displayed in FIG. 135 (C) when the third effect is executed. Is displayed. According to this configuration, FIG. 13 is an obscure first image due to the third effect.
The left decorative pattern 8L of 5 (C) and the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image.
And, since the visibility is not hindered by the hold icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is an unclear first image, and FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image. The right decorative pattern 8R and the right decorative pattern 8R can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the effect is produced by the powerful and unclear first image, the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135 (C), and the clear second image, the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135 (C). It can be provided to the player.
In the image blurring effect B of FIGS. 136 (A) to 136 (C), the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C), which is an unclear first image due to the third effect, and the clear second effect. Since the visibility of the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), which is an image, is not obstructed by the hold icon 9C, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C), which is an unclear first image, is clear. The second image, the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). This is a powerful, obscure first image, FIG. 136.
The effect button image BTN of (C) and the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C) which is a clear second image.
It is possible to provide the player with the effect of.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (E), the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E), which is an unclear first image due to the third effect, and the clear second image are used. Figure 1
Since the visibility of the character CRB of 37 (E) is not obstructed by the hold icon 9C, the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E), which is an unclear first image, and the clear second image. The character CRB of FIG. 137 (E) can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, FIG. 1 is a powerful and obscure first image.
It is possible to provide the player with the effect of the character CRA of 37 (E) and the character CRB of FIG. 137 (E) which is a clear second image.
In the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (C), the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C), which is an unclear first image due to the third effect, and the clear second image are used. Figure 1
Since the visibility of the character CRB of 38 (C) is not obstructed by the hold icon 9C, the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C), which is an unclear first image, and the clear second image. The character CRB of FIG. 138 (C) can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, FIG. 1 is a powerful and obscure first image.
It is possible to provide the player with the effect of the character CRA of 38 (C) and the character CRB of FIG. 138 (E) which is a clear second image.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 of the image blurring effect A
As shown in (I), the image display device 7 (display means) always displays the numerical value HMG (here, “0 0”) which is a numerical image indicating the number of hold icons, and the second effect is executed. However, the numerical value HMG (here, "0 0"), which is a numerical image, is clearly displayed. According to this configuration, the left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 135 (C) is displayed as a clear to unclear one by the second effect, whereas the numerical value HMG (here, “0”) is a numerical image. Since 0 ") is always displayed as clear, it is easy for the player to grasp the number of hold icons.
Image blur effect B of FIGS. 136 (A) to 136 (J), FIG. 137 (A) to FIG. 137 (J).
The same applies to the image blurring effect C of FIG. 138 (A) to the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (J).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 of the image blurring effect A
As shown in (D), after the third effect, the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is the first image obscured by the second effect, is shown on the left of FIG. 135 (D). It is made clear again like the decorative pattern 8L, and further, the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (D), which is the first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135 (D), which is the second image, do not overlap. The fourth effect to be displayed on can be executed. According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (D), which is the first image, is used.
And, when the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135 (D), which is the second image, is arranged, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as a clear image. Therefore, FIG. 135, which is the first image. It is possible to suggest to the player that the effects relating to the left decorative symbol 8L of (D) and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (D), which is the second image, will be further developed.
In the image blurring effect B of FIGS. 136 (A) to 136 (F), for example, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (F), which is the first image, and FIG. 136 (F), which is the second image. Sword image K
When the G and G are arranged, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as clear images. Therefore, the first image, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (F), and the second image are shown. 136 (
It is possible to suggest to the player that the production related to the sword image KG of F) will be further developed.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (F), for example, the character CRA of FIG. 137 (F), which is the first image, and the character C of FIG. 137 (F), which is the second image.
When RB and are placed, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as clear images.
The character CRA of FIG. 137 (F), which is the first image, and FIG. 137 (F), which is the second image.
), And the effect related to the character CRB can be suggested to the player.
In the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (D), for example, the character CRA of FIG. 138 (D), which is the first image, and the character C of FIG. 138 (D), which is the second image.
When RB and are placed, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as clear images.
The character CRA of FIG. 138 (D), which is the first image, and FIG. 138 (D), which is the second image.
), And the effect related to the character CRB can be suggested to the player.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 135 (B) to 135 of the image blurring effect A
As shown in (D), the left decorative pattern 8L of FIGS. 135 (B) and (D), which is the first image clearly displayed, and FIGS. 135 (C), (D), which are the second images. The right decorative pattern 8R is the focal point (
The left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135 (C), which is the first image that is in focus and is displayed indistinctly, is an image that is out of focus. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect B of FIGS. 136 (B) to 136 (F), for example, the effect button images BTN and the second image of FIGS. 136 (B) and 136 (F), which are the first images clearly displayed. The sword image KG in FIGS. 136 (C) and 136 (F) is an image in focus, and the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (C), which is the first image displayed indistinctly, is , The image is out of focus. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (F), for example, the character CRA and the second image of FIGS. 137 (C) and 137 (F), which are the first images clearly displayed. The character CRB of FIGS. 137 (E) and 137 (F) is an image that is in focus, and the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E), which is the first image that is displayed indistinctly, is in focus. Not an image. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (D), the character CRA of FIGS. 138 (B) and 138 (D) which are clearly displayed first images and FIG. 138 which is the second image. ((
The character CRBs of C) and (D) are images that are in focus, and the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C), which is the first image that is displayed indistinctly, is an image that is out of focus. be. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (A) of the image blurring effect A, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect have a symbol variation based on the hold icon 9C. It can be executed when the display is started and there is no hold icon. That is, in the image blur effect A, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the first hold display position 9
As the hold icon displayed on Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. It is a production performed in some cases.
Image blur effect B of FIG. 136 (A), image blur effect C of FIG. 137 (A), FIG. 138 (
The same applies to the image blurring effect D of A).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the image blurring effect.
[Modification 1]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG.
As the hold icon displayed in d moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. It was a production performed in some cases. However, as the second special figure hold, the first
As the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9B exists in the first hold display position to the fourth hold display position. It may be a production performed when it disappears. To briefly explain the first hold display position to the fourth hold display position where the hold icon 9B is displayed as the second special figure hold, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold, are explained. The hold icon 9C corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions are the first hold display position and the second hold display position toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd.
The hold display position, the third hold display position, and the fourth hold display position are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in this order.

[Modification 2]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG.
The focus should be out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus") indistinct, and the second image placed in the foreground should be in focus and clear. As a result, it has become possible to express an image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field. This is because an out-of-focus, unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blur, in which the standard deviation is varied by using a Gaussian function to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or for the target layer among the plurality of layers. Therefore, the depth of field may be freely adjusted to obtain an image taken with a shallow depth of field, or an image taken with a deep depth of field may be obtained.
By doing this, the expression of the production can be expanded.

[Modification 3]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG.
The focus is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image placed in the foreground is in focus and clear. rice field. However, in the opposite relationship to this, the first image placed on the back side is made clear in focus, and the second image placed on the front side is made clear. It may be unclear because it is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). Using a so-called zoom lens, it is possible to provide the player with the effect of focusing on one subject from among the images that are multiple objects in the depth direction, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect. can. An unclear image that is out of focus is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or for the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the image in real time from the in-focus clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103. The unclear image that is out of focus is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

[Modification 4]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG.
The focus is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image placed in the foreground is in focus and clear. rice field. However, among multiple subjects existing in the depth direction, the images that are some subjects having different distance dimensions in the depth direction are made clear and focused, and the images that are other subjects are defined. It may be out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus") indistinct. By doing so, since the image has a sense of discomfort, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort and suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the chance of winning is high. An unclear image that is out of focus is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or for the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus and unclear image is stored in ROM 103 in advance.
An unclear image that is out of focus and is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time from a clear image (image data) that is in focus and is read from the ROM 103 and is not stored in. Is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blur image processing in real time.

[Modification 5]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG.
As the hold icon displayed in d moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. It was a production performed in some cases. However, the game state may be a reduced working hours state and a limit on the number of times may be set. For example, the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time saving state may be changed only once or up to seven times.

[Modification 6]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. It is done and created by blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using the Gaussian function), and this blur image processing is performed on the target image (or the sprites that make up the image) or out of multiple layers. The target layer was performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101. But the focus (
In addition to a clear image (image data) that is in focus, an unclear image that is out of focus (image data)
Image data) may be stored in ROM 103 in advance and read from ROM 103 as needed. In this case, if the capacity of the ROM 103 has sufficient free space, it is possible to save an unclear image (image data) that is out of focus in addition to a clear image (image data) that is in focus. The image control microcomputer 101 does not need to perform blur image processing in real time, which can contribute to reducing the load on the image control microcomputer 101.

[Modification 7]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. It is done and created by blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using the Gaussian function), and this blur image processing is performed on the target image (or the sprites that make up the image) or out of multiple layers. The target layer was performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101. This blurred image processing may be, for example, an effect of displaying numbers one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and counting down. In this countdown effect, for example, the number "5" → the number "4"
→ Number “3” → Number “2” → Number “1” → Number “0” When displaying one after another on the display screen 7a, the number “5” is the first clear image that is in focus. Is displayed, and then the number "4" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image in which the number "5" is out of focus and is in focus on the front side of the number "5". indicate. Then, the number "5" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "4" is used as an unclear image that is out of focus.
The number "3" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image in which the front side of the number "4" is in focus. Subsequently, the number "4" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "3" is defocused as an unclear image, and the number "3" is focused on the front side of the number "3" as a clear image. 2 ”is displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the number "3" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
The number "1" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image in which the number "2" is out of focus and is in focus on the front side of the number "2". Subsequently, the number "2" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "1" is defocused as an unclear image, and the number "1" is focused on the front side of the number "1" as a clear image. 0 "
Is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, the number "1" is erased from the display screen 7a, and then the number "1" is deleted.
"0" is erased from the display screen 7a and expanded to a super reach effect.

[Modification 8]
In the image blur effect B of FIG. 136 and the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, the effect button 63
The effect button image BTN imitating the above was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63, the effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 9]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG.
As the hold icon displayed in d moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. It was a production performed in some cases. However, as the first special figure hold, the first
As the hold icon displayed in the hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. When it disappears, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 9L, the middle decorative symbol 9C, and the right decorative symbol 9R is started, and the image blur effect A of 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect C of FIG. The image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 may not be performed, and the left decorative symbol 9L, the middle decorative symbol 9C, and the right decorative symbol 9R may not be aligned with the same symbol (for example, the number “7”) and may be stopped and displayed and may be out of alignment. be. In this case, another reach effect different from the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. It may be missed through the so-called "normal reach"), which has the lowest expectation, or it may be missed without going through other reach effects.

[Modification 10]
The image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. An effect may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
The first effect that clearly displays the first image, and
A second effect of obscuring the first image clearly displayed by the first effect, and a second effect.
It is possible to carry out a third effect of clearly displaying the second image at a position different from the first image displayed indistinctly by the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E7-1.
The second image, which is clearly displayed by the third effect, overlaps with at least a part of the first image, which is obscured by the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E7-1 or the aspect E7-2.
The display means can display the hold icon.
The hold icon is hidden when the third effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-3.
The display means always displays a numerical image showing the number of hold icons.
Even if the second effect is executed, the numerical image is clearly displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-4.
After the third effect, the first image that is obscured by the second effect is made clear again, and further, the first image and the second image are displayed so as not to overlap each other. The fourth effect is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-5.
The first image and the second image that are clearly displayed are focused images.
The first image, which is displayed indistinctly, is an out-of-focus image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-6.
The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed when the symbol variation display based on the hold icon is started and when no hold icon exists.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning notification effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. This winning notification effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
Analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the winning notification effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is a production to display. It should be noted that the winning notification effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations in a predetermined period.

[Winning notification effect A]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuation is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final fluctuation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”) is losing. In the loss notification effect, the message image MSG "Loss" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed in the center of. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to make a so-called “right-handed” effect. Here, in the center of the display screen 7a, "
The message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player "right-hands", the second special figure hold is increased to the upper limit (4), and the four hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), the final battle notice effect is executed. The final battle notice effect is executed in the variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold described above. In the final battle notice production, the message image MSG "final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that until the defeat effect described later, the effect is a variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold, and the look-ahead effect including the three holds corresponding to the hold image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that is an opponent of an ally character appears. here,
An enemy character CRD appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and when the ally character wins this battle production, a hit (big hit or small hit) is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect when the change and all three holds are lost. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), the hold digestion effect is executed. Here, the message image MSG "expect next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect design is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the remaining three holds is fixedly stopped at "565" and is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (H), the hold digestion effect is executed. Here, the message image MSG "expect next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect design is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the variation corresponding to the last hold is "56"
It was shown that the decision was stopped at "5" and the situation was lost. After the defeat production is performed, the rest of the lost hold is quickly digested.

[Winning notification effect B]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), the loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuation is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final fluctuation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”) is losing. In the loss notification effect, the message image MSG "Loss" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed in the center of. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to so-called "right-handed". Here, in the center of the display screen 7a, "
The message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player "right-hands", the second special figure hold is increased to the upper limit (4), and the four hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), the final battle notice effect is executed. The final battle notice effect is executed in the variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold described above. In the final battle notice production, the message image MSG "final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that until the defeat effect described later, the effect is a variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold, and the look-ahead effect including the three holds corresponding to the hold image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that is an opponent of an ally character appears. here,
An enemy character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and when the ally character wins this battle production, a hit (big hit or small hit) is determined. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), the winning effect is executed. The winning effect is an effect when there is a hit in the fluctuation and the three holds. Here, the ally character CRA
Is displayed and the word "victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), the hold digestion effect is executed. Here, the message image MSG "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect design is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the remaining three holds is fixedly stopped at "565" and is lost. It is assumed that the next hold is a winning hold AT.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (H), the hold digestion effect is executed. Here, the message image MSG "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect design is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the pending AT of the hit is fixedly stopped at "555" and becomes a hit. The last hold is not digested.

[Winning notification effect C]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), the loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuation is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final fluctuation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”) is losing. In the loss notification effect, the message image MSG "Loss" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed in the center of. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), the right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to make a so-called “right-handed” effect. Here, in the center of the display screen 7a, "
The message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player "right-hands", the second special figure hold is increased to the upper limit (4), and the four hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), the first battle effect is executed. The first battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The first battle production is
It is a production with fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the second battle effect is executed. The second battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The second battle production is
It is a production with fluctuation corresponding to the second hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the third battle effect is executed. The third battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The third battle production is
It is a production with fluctuations corresponding to the third hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), the fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The 4th battle production is
It is a production with fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat production is a production indicating that the player has been defeated in the fourth battle production. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of performing a fixed stop of fluctuation. Here, the message image MSG "sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect design is displayed on the display screen 7.
It is displayed at the lower left of a. Here, the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is "56".
It was shown that the decision was stopped at "5" and the situation was lost.

[Winning notification effect D]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), the loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuation is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final fluctuation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”) is losing. In the loss notification effect, the message image MSG "Loss" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed in the center of. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), the right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to so-called "right-handed". Here, in the center of the display screen 7a, "
The message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player "right-hands", the second special figure hold is increased to the upper limit (4), and the four hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the first battle effect is executed. The first battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The first battle production is
It is a production with fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the second battle effect is executed. The second battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The second battle production is
It is a production with fluctuation corresponding to the second hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), the third battle effect is executed. The third battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The third battle production is
It is a production with fluctuations corresponding to the third hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), the fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD have fought and the ally character CRA has won. The 4th battle production is
It is a production with fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect indicating that the player has won in the fourth battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the character "victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect of performing a fixed stop of fluctuation. Here, the message image MSG "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect design is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is fixedly stopped at "555" and becomes a hit.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a predetermined number (4) of hold exists in the second special figure hold, a look-ahead for determining in advance whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure hold is performed. This is performed to notify whether or not there is a hit as a look-ahead effect (FIG. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 14).
0 (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the result of winning in a plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a predetermined number (4) of hold exists in the second special figure hold, a look-ahead for determining in advance whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure hold is performed. As a look-ahead effect, it is notified whether or not there is a hit in the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold (FIGS. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 140 (C)). (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the result of winning in a plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when a predetermined number (4) of holds are present in the second special figure hold, whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure hold is determined by the second special figure. Notifies whether or not there is a hit in each fluctuation corresponding to the hold (FIGS. 141 (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H), FIG. 142 (C) (D) (E) ( F) (G) (H)). According to this configuration, it becomes clear in order whether or not there is a hit in the fixed number of holds, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the gaming state is a time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”).
By executing the right-handed promotion effect at the time of, the second special figure hold increases to the upper limit (4) (FIG. 139 (B), FIG. 140 (B), FIG. 141 (B), FIG. 142). (B)). According to this configuration, it is possible to easily create a state in which a predetermined number of holds exist, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hit is notified by the look-ahead effect, and after the hit is notified, the hit is notified.
Digest past undigested hold rather than hit hold (Fig. 140 (G) (H))
). According to this configuration, after a series of productions, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the loss is notified by the look-ahead effect, and after the loss is notified, the loss is notified.
Digest undigested hold (FIG. 139 (G) (H)). According to this configuration, after a series of productions, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning notification effect.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy characters appearing after the final battle notice may be selected according to the degree of expectation to be hit (FIG. 139 (D), FIG. 140 (D)).
)).

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy characters appearing in the first battle, the second battle, the third battle, and the fourth battle may be selected according to the expected degree of hitting (FIG. 1).
41 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 142 (C) (D) (E) (F)).

[Modification 3]
In the above, the defeat effect, the victory effect, the definite stop effect (loss), and the definite stop effect (hit) were executed for the fourth battle effect (FIGS. 141 (G) (H), 142 (G)). (H)
). On the other hand, the defeat effect, the victory effect, the definite stop effect (loss), and the definite stop effect (hit) may be executed for the first battle effect, the second battle effect, and the third battle effect. ..

[Modification 4]
In the above, the example in which the ally character wins in the 4th battle production is given, but when the ally character wins in the 1st battle production, when the ally character wins in the 2nd battle production, the ally character wins in the 3rd battle production. May win. When an ally character wins in the first battle effect, it is conceivable to execute a victory effect and a fixed stop effect (hit) following the first battle effect. Similarly, if an ally character wins in the second battle effect, it is conceivable to execute a victory effect and a fixed stop effect (hit) following the second battle effect, and if the ally character wins in the third battle effect. Is conceivable to execute a victory effect and a fixed stop effect (hit) following the third battle effect.

[Modification 5]
In the above, the effect of the second special figure hold is given as an example, but the effect of the first special figure hold may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E8-1]
It is possible to suspend the lottery for winning the ball when the ball enters the starting port, perform pre-reading to determine in advance whether or not the ball hits the starting port, and perform a pre-reading effect based on the result of the pre-reading. , A gaming machine that can be executed prior to the digestion of the hold.
When a predetermined number of holds exists, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notification effect that notifies whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds as the look-ahead effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E8-1.
The look-ahead notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds in the fluctuation of digesting the first hold when the predetermined number of holds exists.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E8-1 or the aspect E8-2.
When a predetermined number of holds exists, it is possible to execute a variation notification effect that notifies whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds in each variation corresponding to the predetermined number of holds.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-3.
The predetermined number of hold is generated by entering the ball into the starting port in an advantageous game in which the ball is easily entered into the starting port.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-4.
If there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds, the hit is notified by the look-ahead notification effect.
Undigested hold in the past than the hit hold will be digested after the hit notification,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-5.
If there is no hit in the predetermined number of holds, the look-ahead notification effect notifies the loss.
About undigested hold, digest after notification of loss,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative symbol display area effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. This decorative symbol display area effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol display area effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is imaged. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern display area production A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect A. In the decorative symbol display area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. Design "1
It is stopped and displayed at 28 "). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. 1st display area R
11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is the first display area R1.
It is included in the second display area R21 (second area) larger than 1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Further, the specific image TG1 (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (B), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner.
Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the number “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the position of the upper right side of the display screen 7a to the position of the upper center. The specific image TG1 is above the first display area R11, more specifically, the first display area R11.
It is displayed above the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is variablely displayed inside.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps with the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate.
As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “1”) of the first display area R11 from above. Pushing down, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps with the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate.
As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced. The middle decorative symbol 8C, which is changed by the specific image TG1, is an image of the number "2", which is one before the number "3" which is the winning symbol, and is one of the middle decorative symbols 8C. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “2”) of the first display area R11 from above. Pushing down, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the first.
It is displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the display area R11 and move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (J), the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed in a larger size than when they are displayed in the first display area R11. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so that a part thereof overlaps with the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area production B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect B. In the decorative symbol display area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. Design "1
It is stopped and displayed at 28 "). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. 1st display area R
11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is the first display area R1.
It is included in the second display area R21 (second area) larger than 1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner.
Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
In 11, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the number “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

Then, when the reach state of the decorative pattern is formed, the specific image T is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a.
G (specific image) is displayed. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and
It also includes conceptual things whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here is
It includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are a plurality of specific objects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the position of the upper right side of the display screen 7a to the position of the upper center. The specific image TG1 is above the first display area R11, more specifically, the first display area R11.
It is displayed above the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is variablely displayed inside.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps with the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate.
As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11 from above. Pushing down, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps with the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate.
As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced. The middle decorative symbol 8C, which is changed by the specific image TG1, is an image of the number "2", which is one before the number "3" which is the winning symbol, and is one of the middle decorative symbols 8C. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “2”) of the first display area R11 from above. Pushing down, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the first.
It is displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the display area R11 and move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. Then, on the display screen 7a, the display of the first display area R11 disappears (the first display area R11 becomes non-display).

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (J), the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed in a larger size than when they are displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area production C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect A. In the decorative symbol display area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. Design "1
It is stopped and displayed at 28 "). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. 1st display area R
11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is the first display area R1.
It is included in the second display area R21 (second area) larger than 1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Further, a specific image TG (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
In 11, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner.
Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the number “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the position of the upper right side of the display screen 7a to the position of the upper center. The specific image TG1 is above the first display area R11, more specifically, the first display area R11.
It is displayed above the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is variablely displayed inside. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state displayed in the first display area R11 and the first display area R11 are enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps with the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate.
As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “1”) of the first display area R11 from above. Pushing down, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps with the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate.
As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced. The middle decorative symbol 8C, which is changed by the specific image TG1, is an image of the number "2", which is one before the number "3" which is the winning symbol, and is one of the middle decorative symbols 8C. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “2”) of the first display area R11 from above. The specific image TG1 cannot be pushed down and changed, and conversely, the specific image TG1 is pushed back from the bottom to the top by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the first display area R11. As a result, in the first display area R11,
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost modes (missing symbol "32".
3 ”) is displayed as a stop.

[Decorative pattern display area production D]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect D. In the decorative symbol display area effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. Design "1
It is stopped and displayed at 28 "). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area (first area) R11 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. 1st display area R
11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Further, on the display screen 7a, the second display area (second area) R21 surrounded by the rectangular frame is displayed. Second display area R21
Is larger than the first display area R11. The second display area R21 is located at the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Further, a specific image (specific image) TG is displayed in the second display area R21 on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner.
Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
In 11, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the number “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), the second display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
At 21, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the position of the upper right side of the display screen 7a to the position of the upper center. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is variablely displayed in the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps with the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate.
As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11 from above. Pushing down, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps with the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate.
As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced. The middle decorative symbol 8C, which is changed by the specific image TG1, is an image of the number "2", which is one before the number "3" which is the winning symbol, and is one of the middle decorative symbols 8C. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11 from above. Pushing down, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the first.
It is displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the display area R11 and move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (J), the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed in a larger size than when they are displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern display area effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, decorations that are variablely displayed in the first display area R11 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7. The first effect in which the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (a set of decorative symbols) form a reach state, and the decorative symbols 8L in the reach state in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Of the 8C and 8R, the second effect of varying the intermediate decorative pattern 8C by the specific image TG1 (specific image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, among the intermediate decorative symbols 8C in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific symbol (this embodiment). In the form, when the symbol image of the number "2" is changed by the specific image TG1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C in the reach state in the second display area R21 (second area) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The third effect of displaying 8R can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the reach-state decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. Appears to move to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the reach-state decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the second display area R21 are the first.
It is displayed in a larger size than when it is displayed in the display area. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, when the reach 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the second display area R21, the first The display area R11 is hidden. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, in the first effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state in the first display area R11, the first display area R11 and A set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8 in the reach state displayed in the first display area R11.
R is enlarged and displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and
It is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is included in the second display area R21. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern display area effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it is made to be changed according to the displayed specific image TG1, all the decorative patterns may be changed according to the specific image, not a part of a set of decorative patterns.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom by the specific image TG1 to be changed. It may be varied as follows. That is, the decorative pattern may be changed in any manner depending on the specific image.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are displayed so as to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. For example, in the first display area R11. The displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be temporarily hidden and then displayed in the second display area R21.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, the specific symbol in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is an image of the symbol "2" which is one before the symbol "3" which is the winning symbol, but it is different. The symbol of may be a specific symbol here. For example, it may be a symbol of another number, or it may be a special symbol other than the number.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the reach decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the second display area R21 are displayed in a larger size than when they are displayed in the first display area, for example. , The reach-state decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the second display area R21 may be displayed in a mode different from the mode displayed in the first display area. For example, they may be displayed in different colors and shapes, different types of patterns, and the like.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns.
In the first region of the display means, the first effect in which the set of decorative patterns to be variablely displayed forms a reach state, and
A second, in which at least one of the set of decorative symbols in reach in the first region of the display means is varied by a particular image displayed on the display means.
It is possible to produce and perform
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect F1-1.
When a specific symbol among the at least one decorative symbol in the first region of the display means is changed by the specific image, the set of decorative symbols reachable to the second region of the display means. It is possible to further execute the third effect of displaying
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect F1-2.
In the third effect, the set of decorative patterns in the reach state is transferred from the first region to the second.
Appears to move to the area of
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect F1-2 or the aspect F1-3.
In the third effect, the set of decorative symbols in the reach state displayed in the second area is displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-2 to F1-4.
In the third effect, when the set of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed in the second area, the first area is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-5.
In the first effect, when the set of decorative symbols forms a reach state in the first region, the set of the reach state displayed in the first region and the first region. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-6.
The first region of the display means is included in the second region.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, hold-corresponding image effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150. This hold-supporting image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold compatible image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Image production A for hold]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the hold-supporting image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C.
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7". Further, the reserved image 9C is changed from white to blue (shown by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies that the degree of expectation for a hit has increased. Here, the message image MSG "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), the pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown by hatching). For example, blue has higher expectations than white, and red has higher expectations than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A is hidden, and only the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), the victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Further, the pedestal image 9AT and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A are displayed. The reserved image 9C is hidden when the effect symbol is stopped.

[Image production B for hold]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the hold-supporting image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C.
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7". Further, the reserved image 9C is changed from white to blue (shown by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies that the degree of expectation for a hit has increased. Here, the message image MSG "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (D), the pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown by hatching). For example, blue has higher expectations than white, and red has higher expectations than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Further, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. The reserved image 9C is hidden when the effect symbol is stopped.

[Image production C for hold]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the hold-corresponding image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 149 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C.
CT is displayed. The pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image corresponding to the four reserved images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies that the degree of expectation for a hit has increased. Here, the message image MSG "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), the pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown by hatching). For example, blue has higher expectations than white, and red has higher expectations than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A is hidden, and only the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (G), the victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Further, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9
C, The pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is hidden almost at the same time as the effect symbol and the fixed stop.

[Image production D for hold]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the hold-supporting image effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 150 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C.
CT is displayed. The pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image corresponding to the four reserved images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies that the degree of expectation for a hit has increased. Here, the message image MSG "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (D), the pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are blue (shown with hatching). The change in the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is performed based on the degree of expectation for hitting. For example, blue has higher expectations than white, and red has higher expectations than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, and the hold image 9C.
Is hidden, and only the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (G), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat production is a production that notifies the battle production that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "8". Further, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden almost at the same time as the effect symbol and the fixed stop.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold-enabled image effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed corresponding to the reserved images (reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C). Then, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be changed based on the degree of expectation for hitting (FIG. 147 (D), FIG.
148 (D), 149 (D), 150 (D)). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed corresponding to the reserved images (reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT change based on the degree of expectation for hitting in the fluctuation. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for hitting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the change in the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is triggered by the execution of the chance-up effect (FIGS. 147 (C), 148 (C), 149 (C)).
), FIG. 150 (C)). According to this configuration, expectations for chance-up production will increase, and
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A are used in the battle production.
The pedestal image 9AT corresponding to is hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed (FIGS. 147 (F) and 149 (F). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C is displayed. The image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT will be conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the hold image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image are hidden, and the hold image 9C is displayed (FIG. 148 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the pedestal image 9AT and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A are hidden, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is displayed ( FIG. 150 (F). According to this configuration, the player can feel a sense of discomfort, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A and the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden in the victory effect or the defeat effect. (FIG. 147 (G), FIG. 148 (G), FIG. 149 (G).
), FIG. 150 (G)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be attracted to the victory or defeat of the ally character, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold-enabled image effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, following the chance-up effect, the pedestal change effect in which the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed is executed. On the other hand, the pedestal change effect may be executed with another effect as an opportunity. Further, the pedestal change effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to other effects.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed as the pedestal change effect.
Instead of or in addition to such a change in display color, the shapes of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT may be changed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a hold image and changing the hold image to another hold image based on the degree of expectation for a hit.
It is possible to display a hold-compatible image that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the hold image in correspondence with the display position of the hold image.
Based on the degree of expectation for the hit, it is possible to execute a hold-compatible image change effect that changes the hold-compatible image into another hold-compatible image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G1-1.
The hold-compatible image is a pedestal image displayed at the bottom of the hold image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G1-1 or the aspect G1-2.
The hold-corresponding image change effect is executed based on the degree of expectation for the hit in the fluctuation, which is the current fluctuation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-3.
The hold-corresponding image change effect is executed when a specific effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-4.
The hold image includes the hold image corresponding to the change which is the current change, and the hold storage image showing the number of holds.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G1-5.
The hold compatible image includes the hold compatible image corresponding to the hold image and the hold storage compatible image corresponding to the hold storage image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G1-6.
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a first display effect of hiding the hold storage image and the hold storage compatible image and displaying the hold image and the hold support image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-8]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G1-6 or the aspect G1-7.
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a second display effect of hiding the hold storage image, the hold storage compatible image, and the hold support image and displaying the hold image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-8.
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a third display effect of hiding the hold storage image, the hold storage compatible image, and the hold image and displaying the hold support image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-9.
In a predetermined effect, the hold storage image, the hold storage compatible image, the hold image,
And, it is possible to execute the fourth display effect of hiding the hold-corresponding image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the reserved image effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. This reserved image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
Analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the hold image effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is a production to display.

[Holding image production A]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), a pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-ream notification effect is an effect of announcing the occurrence of a pseudo-ream. Here, "NEXT" is in the center of the display screen 7a.
Message image MSG is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start high-speed fluctuation again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation is hidden, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought. Here, too, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation is hidden, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (G), the victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "victory" is displayed. Here, in particular, both the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Again, the first
Both the hold image 9A and the hold image 9C related to the special figure hold are hidden.

[Holding image production B]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C.
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), a pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-ream notification effect is an effect of announcing the occurrence of a pseudo-ream. Here, "NEXT" is in the center of the display screen 7a.
Message image MSG is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start high-speed fluctuation again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation is hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought. Here, too, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A and the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold is hidden, and the pedestal image 9 corresponding to the hold image 9C and the hold image 9C is hidden.
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "victory" is displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Again, the first
The hold image 9A relating to the special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

[Holding image production C]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C.
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (C), a pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-ream notification effect is an effect of announcing the occurrence of a pseudo-ream. Here, "NEXT" is in the center of the display screen 7a.
Message image MSG is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start high-speed fluctuation again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, and the pedestal image 9C corresponding to the hold image 9C.
T is hidden and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought. Here, too, the hold image 9A relating to the hold of the first special figure and the pedestal image 9A corresponding to the hold image 9A.
T and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden, and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (G), the victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "victory" is displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Again, the first
The hold image 9A relating to the special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

[Holding image production D]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C.
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), a pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-ream notification effect is an effect of announcing the occurrence of a pseudo-ream. Here, "NEXT" is in the center of the display screen 7a.
Message image MSG is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start high-speed fluctuation again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation is hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (F), the ring effect is executed. The ring production is a production performed during a battle production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Specifically, a band-shaped ring image RG around the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is indicated by an arrow Y.
Rotate as indicated by G. Here, the character "super heat" is displayed on the ring image RG, and the character "super heat" moves as the ring image RG rotates. Especially here
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the front side of the ring image RG. On the other hand, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is on the back side of the ring image RG and is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (G), the victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "victory" is displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Again, the first
The hold image 9A relating to the special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the reserved image effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed in the variable effect of the effect symbol in the first period (FIGS. 151 (A) (B) (C) (D)) and the reserved image 9A. Is included and the second period (FIGS. 151 (E) (F)) in which only the reserved image 9C is displayed is included. According to this configuration, the reserved image can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable effect of the effect symbol includes a third period (FIGS. 151 (G) (H)) in which both the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are hidden. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by not paying attention to the reserved information during this period.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT can be displayed corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT can be displayed corresponding to the reserved image 9C (FIGS. 152 and 15).
3, Fig. 154). According to this configuration, the display position of the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed in the first period of displaying the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C. (FIG. 152 (A) (B) (C) (D), FIG. 153 (A)
(B) (C) (D), FIGS. 154 (A) (B) (C) (D)). According to this configuration, the display position of the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed in the second period in which the reserved image 9A is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.
152 (E) (F), FIG. 154 (E)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second period in which the reserved image 9A is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed. It can be displayed (FIGS. 153 (E) (F) and 154 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a ring effect of displaying a ring image RG displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C. (Fig. 154 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made more conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the reserved image effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the order was 1st period → 2nd period → 3rd period, but each period may appear in any order during the variable effect. Further, it may be included twice or more during the variable effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was possible to execute a ring effect of displaying the ring image RG displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C. In this ring effect, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A may be displayed. At this time, it is conceivable that the ring image is displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9A and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9AT.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G2-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying the hold image corresponding to the change, which is the current change, and the hold storage image indicating the number of holds as the hold image.
During the variation of the effect symbol, it is possible to execute the hold image change effect including the first period in which both the hold image and the hold storage image are displayed and the second period in which only the hold image is displayed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G2-1.
The reserved image change effect further includes a third period in which both the reserved image and the reserved stored image are not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G2-1 or the aspect G2-2.
It is possible to display a hold-compatible image that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the hold image in correspondence with the display position of the hold image.
The hold compatible image includes the hold compatible image corresponding to the hold image and the hold storage compatible image corresponding to the hold storage image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G2-3.
The hold-compatible image is a pedestal image displayed at the bottom of the hold image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G2-3 or the aspect G2-4.
In the first period, the hold-compatible image can be displayed corresponding to the hold image, and the hold storage-compatible image can be displayed corresponding to the hold storage image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-5.
In the second period, the hold-corresponding image can be displayed in correspondence with the hold-holding image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-6.
In the second period, only the reserved image can be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-7.
When it overlaps with the hold image, it is displayed on the back side of the hold image, and when it overlaps with the hold compatible image, a special image displayed on the front side of the hold support image is displayed. Feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the disappearance effects A to D of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. In FIGS. 155 to 158, some decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (
The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front) may also be omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing.

The disappearance effect of the hold icon can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command) and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon disappearance effect. , The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command), and the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 and the like. The position and light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the disappearance effect A of the hold icon will be described, and then the disappearance effect B of the hold icon, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon will be described in order. In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon to the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, the hold icon is hidden (disappears) as described later, so that the display has a sense of incongruity. It is a production that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the chance of winning is high.

[Disappearance effect A of the hold icon]
First, the disappearance effect A of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. 155. Figure 155
Is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect A of the hold icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 155 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the above is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even when the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, at the hidden display position 9Cd, the holding icon 9C of the smiling sphere (
(Blue here) is displayed, white spherical hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. That is, two hold icons 9
A and 9A are in stock without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 155 (A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 155 (A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 155 (B),
The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have the same symbol (number) and are temporarily stopped (here, the number "3".
(Temporarily stopped), and the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (A), the hold display position 9Ad is also continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (A), and the hold display position 9Cd is also shown in FIG. 155 (A).
) Continues to be hidden. In addition, the number H indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively.
MG (here, “20”) is also shown in FIG. 155 (A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (C), the first ball based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The numbers HMG (here, "20") indicating the special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B). And Figure 155
The two hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9 displayed in (A) and (B).
C and the four hold display positions 9Ad disappear, and the hold display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed, which corresponds to the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. When the hold icon 9C disappears, the hold display position 9Cd appears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (D), the message MG "It is a big hit by winning the ally character !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number HM continues from FIG. 155 (C).
G (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (E), almost the whole body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA
And the enemy character CRB appear. After this, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CR
When the battle with B is unfolded and the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. In the initial stage of action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the production is performed to hunt down the ally character CRA to the right. Is displayed continuously in FIG. 155 (D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (F), in the middle stage of the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left, and the numbers are continued from FIG. 155 (E). HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9C
d is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (G), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), an effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and "victory". Message MG is placed and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA, and regarding hold, the number HMG (here, "20") is continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (F), whereas the hold is concerned. The display position 9Cd is hidden (disappeared). At the end of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB
When the effect of notifying the victory of is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8 are displayed on the display screen 7a.
C, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stop with the same symbols (here, the number "3"), and a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot. With respect to hold, the number HMG (here "20") is still displayed in FIG. 155 (G).
The hold display position 9Cd disappears from the display screen 7a (it is hidden).

When the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3" and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "2" on the display screen 7a. , Right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3" and the same symbol (here, the number "3"
If the stop display is not complete and the display is stopped, the deviation will be confirmed and displayed. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (G), and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position are displayed. 9Ad,
Then, the 4th hold display position 9Ad is displayed, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Ad and the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is displayed.
The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the hold display position 9Cd is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the digestion of the hold icon due to the definite display of disconnection.

As described above, in the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 155 (A), (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, a specific effect is given. During the period (FIGS. 155 (C) to (G)) in which is performed, the hold icon 9C is concerned.
It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying / hiding by the hold icon, which has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Disappearance effect B of the hold icon]
Next, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. 156. Figure 156
Is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect B of the hold icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the above is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the corresponding small decorative symbol, respectively, are formed.
Even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. In addition, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8
If C and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each corresponding small size. Each of the decorative symbols of is aligned with the same symbol as each of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, at the hidden display position 9Cd, the holding icon 9C of the smiling sphere (
(Blue here) is displayed, white spherical hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. That is, two hold icons 9
A and 9A are in stock without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 156 (A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 156 (A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 156 (B),
The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have the same symbol (number) and are temporarily stopped (here, the number "3".
(Temporarily stopped), and the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. The hold icon 9A is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (A), the hold display position 9Ad is also continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (A), and the hold display position 9Cd is also continuously hidden in FIG. 156 (A). In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. "20")
Is also continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (A). The hold icon 9C is shown in FIG. 156.
It is continuously displayed in (A), and is displayed as a mode in which light is also emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C.

The hold icon 9C in FIG. 156 (B) may be the same as the hold icon 9C (blue in this case) in FIG. 156 (A), or changes to one with a high expectation of being a big hit (for example, blue). It may be changed from green to green).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), the first ball based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The numbers HMG (here, "20") indicating the special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIGS. 156 (A) and 156 (B). And Figure 156
The two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad displayed in (A) and (B) disappear, and the light emitted from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9C in all directions is also shown in the figure. It will be in the state of being continuously displayed at 156 (B). That is, with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the light from the outer periphery of the hold display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9C are displayed in all directions.

The hold icon 9C in FIG. 156 (C) may be the same as the hold icon 9C (here, blue or green) in FIG. 156 (B), and is changed to one with a high expectation of a big hit. (For example, it may be changed from blue to green or from green to red).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), the first ball based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The numbers HMG (here, “20”) indicating the special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (C), and FIG. 156. The light emitted from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9C displayed in (C) in all directions is displayed in a manner of increasing in size while moving from the hold display position 9Cd to the display screen 7a. (Or, it is displayed in a mode in which the size increases while moving from the hold display position to the display screen 7a and rotating in the front-back direction). Further, in the center of the inner area of the outer shell of the hold icon 9C displayed in large size, the hold icon 9C is displayed.
In order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 so as to overlap the front surface of the screen, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged and in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white blinking). Is displayed. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. Further, the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, so as to overlap the front surface of the hold icon 9C in the inner region of the outer shell of the hold icon 9C displayed in large size and below the effect button image BTN). 3 seconds)
The timer bar TB indicating is displayed. As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven colors blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. Flashing (big hit rich))
Expectations for big hits are set high in this order.

Further, in FIG. 156 (D), the hold display position 9Cd appears and is displayed. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”), the large display of the hold icon 9C, and the light emitted from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C in all directions are shown in FIG. 156 (C). ) Continues to be displayed, and the reserved display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. That is, the hold display position 9C
d and the pending icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of appearing.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 156 (E), the left movable accessory 14L The right movable accessory 14R advances (moves) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and advances (moves) toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (advanced position (deployment position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the right movable accessory 14R.
The right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the above, is united, and the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. Two decorative members (combined accessories) are formed.

In addition, in FIG. 156 (E), the number HMG (here, “20”) is used for holding.
The hold display position 9Cd, the large display of the hold icon 9C, and the light emitted from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C in all directions are continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (D). The hold display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of appearing.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the combined accessory is formed in the annular shape as shown in FIG. 156 (F). The region to be formed is a region having a circular shape (hereinafter, referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. This circular region 14
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to D, the hold icon 9C of the smiling sphere displayed in large size is already arranged in FIG. 156 (D), and the hold icon 9C is combined. By forming an image expressing the emotion of a smile on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with respect to the circular region 14D of the accessory (that is, the hold icon 9C disappears as an image expressing the emotion of the combined accessory. ), It is possible to give emotion to the combined character. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the combined character.

In addition, in FIG. 156 (F), the number HMG (here, “20”) is used for holding.
And the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (E), and the hold icon 9 corresponding to the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R.
C disappears as an image expressing the emotions of the united character.

Further, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction close to each other).
Then, when the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the combined accessory is displayed on the display screen 7a. Since it covers a part of the hold display position 9Cd (the upper part of the hold display position 9Cd), it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the hold display position 9Cd.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Retreat (move) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

When the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move, respectively, FIG. 1
As shown in 56 (E) and 56 (F), the hold display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (G), the message MG "It is a big hit with the victory of the ally character !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number HMG (here, "20") is displayed for the hold. ) And the reserved display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (F).

After that, as shown in FIG. 156 (H), almost the whole body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA
And the enemy character CRB appear. After this, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CR
When the battle with B is unfolded and the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. In the initial stage of action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the production is performed to hunt down the ally character CRA to the right. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are performed. Is displayed continuously in FIG. 156 (G).

Next, although not shown, in the middle of the action production (battle production), the ally character C
RA becomes dominant, and the effect of cornering the enemy character CRB to the left is performed. Again, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are shown in FIG.
It is in a state of being continuously displayed at 56 (H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (I), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), an effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and "defeated". The message MG is placed and displayed on the left side of the enemy character CRB, and regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position are continued from the middle of the action production (battle production) not shown. 9Cd is displayed. If an effect is performed to notify the victory of the ally character CRA at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and the message MG "victory" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. Arranged and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3" on the display screen 7a.
If the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "4" and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3" and the same symbols (here, the number "3") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (I), and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position are displayed. 9Ad,
Then, the 4th hold display position 9Ad is displayed, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Ad and the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is displayed.
The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the hold display position 9Cd is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the digestion of the hold icon due to the definite display of disconnection.

If the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same on the display screen 7a ( Here, the numbers "3") are all stopped and displayed, and a big hit game (big hit production) in which a profit is given to the player as a big hit is performed. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears (is hidden) from the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the disappearance effect B of the hold icon, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 156 (A) to (E)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, it is a specific effect. During the period (FIGS. 156 (F) to (I)) in which the hold icon 9C is performed.
It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying / hiding by the hold icon, which has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Disappearance effect C of the hold icon]
Next, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. 157. Figure 157
Is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect C of the hold icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect C of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the above is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the corresponding small decorative symbol, respectively, are formed.
Even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. In addition, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8
If C and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each corresponding small size. Each of the decorative symbols of is aligned with the same symbol as each of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively. The hold icon is not displayed at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the two hold icons 9A and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 157 (A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 157 (A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 157 (B),
Light is emitted from the center of the white spherical hold icon 9C in all directions and a predetermined number of times (for example,
Flashes only 3 times), the flash image FH is displayed, and the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears).
.. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (here). Then "20"
) Is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (A), and the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "3" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is displayed in a variable manner and a reach is formed. At this time, the first ball is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The numbers HMG (here, “20”) indicating the special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (B), and FIG. 157. The two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad displayed in (B) are newly hidden, and the hold icon 9C is hidden following FIG. 157 (B). That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9C.
d is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). Advance (move) to the front (front) center position of the display screen 7a (advance position (advance position))
In the unfolded position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion, which is halved, is combined to form one decorative member (combined accessory) in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Less than,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of smiling with squinting eyes (not shown). By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the combined character.

In addition, in FIG. 157 (D), the number HMG (here, “20”) is used for holding.
Is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (C), and when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start to move in order to form the combined accessory, they are displayed in FIG. 157 (C) accordingly. The reserved display position 9Cd is newly hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), the left movable accessory 14L is the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. (Front) The movable accessory 14R on the right side moves backward (moves) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the movable accessory 14R on the right side is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R each start moving in order to release the formed combined accessory, the hold display hidden in FIG. 157 (D) is accompanied by this. Position 9
Cd will reappear. In addition, in FIG. 157 (E), with respect to hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (F), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. This effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN displays a timer bar TB indicating an operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 so as to overlap the lower front surface thereof. At this time, the reserved display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157 (E) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 157 (F), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is shown in FIG. 157.
It is displayed continuously in (E). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven colors blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that it will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 157 (G), the left movable accessory 14L The right movable accessory 14R advances (moves) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and advances (moves) toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (advanced position (deployment position)), the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, and the combined accessory is formed in the annular shape. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of a person wearing sunglasses and smiling is displayed. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the combined character.

In addition, in FIG. 157 (G), the number HMG (here, “20”) is used for holding.
Is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (F), and the reserved display position 9Cd is continuously hidden in FIG. 157 (F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (H), the left movable accessory 14L is the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. (Front) The movable accessory 14R on the right side moves backward (moves) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the movable accessory 14R on the right side is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R each start moving in order to release the formed combined accessory, the hold display hidden in FIG. 157 (G) is accompanied by this. Position 9
Cd will reappear. In addition, in FIG. 157 (H), with respect to hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (G).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (I), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. This effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN displays a timer bar TB indicating an operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 so as to overlap the lower front surface thereof. At this time, the reserved display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157 (H) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 157 (I),
With respect to hold, the number HMG (here "20") continues to be displayed in FIG. 157 (H). The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 157 (I) is shown in FIG.
The effect button image in 7 (F) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the BTN, or changes to one with a high expectation of being a big hit (for example, from white blinking to blue blinking or gold blinking (yellow blinking)). ) May be used.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 157 (J), the display screen 7
The left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3". When it is done, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, following FIG. 157 (I), the number HMG (here, "2"
0 ”) is displayed, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed again, and the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad are displayed. A white spherical hold icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and further, the hold display position 9Cd is displayed. Will reappear. The hold icon 9C is digested and the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappears) with the confirmation display of "off".

In addition, in FIG. 157 (J), the same symbols (here, the number "3") of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, and it becomes a big hit. , A big hit game (big hit production) that gives a profit to the player will be performed. In this case, regarding the hold, in FIG. 157 (J), the number HMG (here, "20").
”) Is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (I), and the reserved display position 9Cd is continuously disappeared (disappeared) in FIG. 157 (I).

As described above, in the disappearance effect C of the hold icon, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 157 (A) to (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, it is a specific effect. During the period (FIGS. 157 (C) to (I)) in which the hold icon 9C is performed.
It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying / hiding by the hold icon, which has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Disappearance effect D of the hold icon]
Next, the disappearance effect D of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. 158. Figure 158
Is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect D of the hold icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 158 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the above is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the corresponding small decorative symbol, respectively, are formed.
Even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. In addition, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8
If C and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each corresponding small size. Each of the decorative symbols of is aligned with the same symbol as each of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively. 3rd hold display position 9Ad and 4th hold display position 9
The hold icon is not displayed on Ad. That is, the two hold icons 9A and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 158 (A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 158 (A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 158 (B),
A flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C in all directions is displayed, and the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (here). Then, "20") is shown in FIG. 158 (A).
The two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "3" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is displayed in a variable manner and a reach is formed. At this time, the first ball is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The number HMG (here, "20") indicating the special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (B), and two The hold icon 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (B).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (D), the area of the display screen 7a becomes a pseudo abnormal display mode. "Pseudo abnormal display mode" includes, for example, a display mode such as a sandstorm, a display mode in which the screen is disturbed by noise, a display mode in which an image is not displayed normally due to a processing delay, and an alternative display mode in which the original screen cannot be returned. A display mode in which a message for displaying the effect is displayed can be mentioned.

In FIG. 158 (D), when the area of the display screen 7a is in a pseudo abnormal display mode, the first special figure hold and the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 The numbers HMG (here, "20") indicating the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the ball are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (C) and displayed in FIG. 158 (C). The two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are newly hidden, and further, FIG. 158 (C).
), The hold display position 9Cd is also newly hidden. That is, regarding the hold, only the number HMG (here, "20") is displayed. In the pseudo-abnormal display mode, the position where the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed and the area around it may be avoided. By doing so, the visibility of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is ensured. be able to.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). Advance (move) to the front (front) center position of the display screen 7a (advance position (advance position))
In the unfolded position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion, which is halved, is combined to form one decorative member (combined accessory) in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Less than,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of smiling with squinting eyes (not shown). By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the combined character.

In addition, in FIG. 158 (E), the number HMG (here, “20”) is used for holding.
Is subsequently displayed in FIG. 158 (D).

After that, although not shown, the left movable accessory 14L is located at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. Evacuation position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
While retreating (moving) toward, the right movable accessory 14R moves from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) Retreat (move). At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start to move in order to release the formed combined accessory, the reserved display position 9Cd, which is not shown, is not shown. Will reappear. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (F), the message MG "It is a big hit with the victory of the ally character !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number HMG (here, "20") is displayed for the hold. ) And the reserved display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (E).

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (G), almost the whole body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA
And the enemy character CRB appear. After this, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CR
When the battle with B is unfolded and the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. In the initial stage of action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the production is performed to hunt down the ally character CRA to the right. Is in a state of being continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (F).

Next, although not shown, in the middle of the action production (battle production), the ally character C
RA becomes dominant, and the effect of cornering the enemy character CRB to the left is performed. Again, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are shown in FIG.
It is in a state of being continuously displayed on 56 (F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (H), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is used to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. Is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. This effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN displays a timer bar TB indicating an operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 so as to overlap the lower front surface thereof. At this time, the reserved display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158 (G) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 158 (H), with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (G). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (blinking yellow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit.
The expectation that it will be a big hit is set high in the order of rainbow blinking (big hit rich)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 158 (I), the ally character CRA wins. An effect to notify is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and "
The message MG "Victory" is placed and displayed to the left of the friendly character CRA, and for hold, the number HMG (here "20") is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (H).
The reserved display position 9Cd is hidden (disappears) following FIG. 158 (H). If the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is not performed and the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG of "defeat" is displayed on the enemy character CRB. It is placed and displayed on the left side of.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8 are displayed on the display screen 7a.
C, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stop with the same symbols (here, the number "3"), and a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot. With respect to hold, the number HMG (here "20") continues to be displayed in FIG. 158 (I).
The reserved display position 9Cd disappears (is hidden) following FIG. 158 (I).

If the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed without the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA, the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3" on the display screen 7a.
The middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "2" and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3". Become. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (I), and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position are displayed. 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Ad and the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the 3rd hold display position 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad and the 4th hold display are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the position 9Ad. Further, the hold display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a by digesting the hold icon 9C with the confirmed display of disconnection.

As described above, in the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 158 (A) and 158 (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, it is a specific effect. During the period (FIGS. 158 (C) to (I)), the hold icon 9C is performed.
It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying / hiding by the hold icon, which has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the disappearance effect of the hold icon.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (A) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon.
) To As shown in FIG. 155 (H), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol) based on the hold icon 9C are provided. When the variable display by 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is started, the hold icon 9C is displayed, and then a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed.
When the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) is started before the variable display due to the above is stopped, the first effect of hiding the hold icon 9C can be executed. According to this configuration, a period of time from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern (FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B)).
) Shows the hold icon 9C, but FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G).
), The player can be provided with a novel effect of showing / hiding the hold icon 9C, which is not conventional, that the hold icon 9C is hidden during the period when the specific effect is performed. It can be improved.
In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (J), the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (E)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. Is displayed, but during the period when the specific effect shown in FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I) is performed, the hold icon 9C is hidden, which is a non-conventional display / non-display by the hold icon. It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of display, and it is possible to improve the interest.
In the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIGS. 157 (A) to 157 (J), the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 157 (A) to 157 (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. Is displayed, but the period during which a specific effect is performed (FIG. 157 (C) to FIG. 157 (FIG. 157)
In I)), it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying / hiding the holding icon 9C, which has never existed before, and it is possible to improve the interest. ..
In the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIGS. 158 (A) to 158 (J), although the hold icon 9C is displayed, a period during which a specific effect is performed (FIGS. 158 (C) to 15).
In 8 (I)), it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of showing / hiding the hold icon 9C, which has never been seen before, to improve the interest. Can be done.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (A) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon.
) ~ As shown in FIG. 155 (H), the hold display position 9A indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A.
d can be displayed, and the first effect is a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C).
, FIG. 155 (A) to FIG. 155 (B) when the variable display by the right decorative symbol 8R) is started.
In, the hold display position 9Ad is displayed, and the hold display position 9Ad is hidden during the period from the start to the end of the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G). According to this configuration, the hold display position 9Ad is hidden during the period (FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G)) in which the specific effect is performed, so that the visibility of the specific effect is the hold display position 9
Since it is not hindered by Ad, it is possible to suppress the loss of the powerful feeling of a specific effect.
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I), FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (C).
The same applies to the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 (I) and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon.
), The first effect is the winning in a specific lottery when the variable display by a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is started and stopped. When the winning is notified (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all the same symbols (here, the number "3") are stopped and displayed), FIGS. 155 (C) to
After finishing the specific effect in FIG. 155 (G), the hold display position 9Ad is continuously hidden in FIG. 155 (H), while the winners and losers in the specific lottery in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) are lost. Notify (the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "2", the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3", and the same symbol (here, the number "3") is not aligned and stops. (Displayed.) Occasionally, after finishing a specific effect, a hold display position 9Ad is displayed, although not shown. According to this configuration, when the winning game (winning effect) is started after the winning is notified as a winning in the specific lottery after the specific effect is completed, the winning game (winning effect) is held by the hold display position 9Ad. Since it is not hindered, it is possible to suppress the loss of the powerful feeling of the hit game (hit production). Further, even if the player is discouraged by being notified of the loss in a specific lottery, the hold display position 9Ad is displayed. Therefore, for example, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad exists. Depending on the color and shape of the hold icon 9A, the expected degree of hitting the hold icon 9A can be promptly conveyed to the player, which can contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation to play.
The same applies to the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156 (J), the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 (J), and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158 (J).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (C) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon.
) ~ As shown in FIG. 155 (H), the first effect is from the start of the variable display by a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) to the stop display. During the period in which the hold display position 9Ad is hidden, the hold icon 9A is also hidden. According to this configuration, since the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) is performed, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad, so that the hold icon 9A is displayed together with the hold display position 9Ad. By hiding 9A, the visibility of the specific effect is not hindered by the hold icon 9A in addition to the hold display position 9Ad, so that it is possible to further suppress the loss of the power of the specific effect. can.
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I), FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (C).
The same applies to the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 (I) and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (C) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon.
) ~ As shown in FIG. 155 (G), the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C can be displayed, and the first effect is a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decoration). In the period (the period from FIG. 155 (C) to FIG. 155 (F)) in which the hold icon 9C is hidden from the period from the start of the variable display by the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R) to the stop display. The hold display position 9Cd can be displayed. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9C is displayed while the hold icon 9C is hidden even though the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols by the hold icon 9C is started. Since the reserved display position 9Cd is displayed and the display has a sense of discomfort, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort and suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the chance of winning is high. ..
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I), FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (C).
The same applies to the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 (I) and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (A) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon.
)-As shown in FIGS. 155 (G), the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) is based on a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R). It can be executed after the variable display is started and the reach is formed. According to this configuration, the player can perform the discomfort effect in which the hold icon 9C is hidden by the first effect, triggered by the formation of reach due to the longer time for playing the game. Since it is possible to find out by oneself, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a sense of incongruity each time a reach occurs, and it is possible to suppress the pain even if the playing time is long.
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I), FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (C).
The same applies to the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 (I) and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the disappearance effect of the hold icon.
[Modification 1]
Disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156.
In the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the hold icon 9C was hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared), a dedicated sound for notifying the player that the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a may be played from the speaker 67. .. By doing so, the player can prevent the player from inadvertently overlooking that the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the hold icon 9C is displayed with a sense of incongruity that it is hidden (disappeared).

[Modification 2]
Disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156.
In the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the hold icon 9C was hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the display screen 7a disappears (disappears), a countdown effect may be performed on the display screen 7a. As a countdown effect, for example, a number "5", a number "4", a number "3", a number "2", a number "1", and a number "0" are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the speaker 6 makes a sound (announcement) to read out the numbers.
It may flow from 7. By doing so, the player can grasp the timing at which the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and can prevent the player from inadvertently overlooking it. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the time when the hold icon 9C is displayed with a sense of incongruity depending on the timing at which the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappears).

[Modification 3]
In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156 (D) and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158 (H), the effect button 63 is pressed in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. The imitated effect button image BTN was arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. However, instead of the BTN chased by the effect button, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 is arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode in order to encourage the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation). The effect button image BTN and the sword image may be arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. By doing so, it is possible to give variation to the production by changing the type of operation method, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in operation motivation even if the time for playing the game is long.

[Modification 4]
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156, disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157.
In the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the production button 6
The effect button image imitating 3 may be used as an effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 instead of the BTN. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
Disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157.
And in the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C.
When the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed to form a reach, the hold display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A, the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C, and the said hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, once the reach is formed, the hold display position 9C is subsequently formed.
Only d may always be displayed on the display screen 7a.
[Modification 6]
Disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156.
In the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed,
The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, even if one or both of the hold display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A and the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. good.

[Modification 7]
Disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156.
, The disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158 may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
The hold icon is displayed when the variable display by a plurality of decorative symbols based on the hold icon is started, and then the hold is started when a specific effect is started until the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped. The first effect of hiding the icon is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G3-1.
It is possible to display the hold display position that indicates the display position of the hold icon.
In the first effect, the hold display position is displayed when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started, and the hold display position is hidden in the period from the start to the end of the specific effect. do,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G3-1 or the aspect G3-2.
In the first effect, when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started and stopped, the hold display position is continued after the specific effect is finished when the winner is notified as a winner in a specific lottery. On the other hand, when the winner is notified in a specific lottery and the winner is notified, the hold display position is displayed after the specific effect is completed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G3-2 or the aspect G3-3.
In the first effect, the hold icon is also hidden during the period from the start of the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols to the stop display, during which the hold display position is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-4.
It is possible to display the hold display position indicating the display position of the hold icon.
In the first effect, the hold display position can be displayed during the period from the start of the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols to the stop display and the period in which the hold icon is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-5.
The specific effect can be performed after the reach is formed by starting the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the hold icon image display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. This hold icon image display effect may be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon image display effect, the ROM 103.
The corresponding image data is read from the image display device 7 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Hold icon image display effect A]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image display effect A. In the hold icon image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
In, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbols are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
It is a set of symbols that includes a symbol image of R and can notify whether or not it is a hit by a combination of these stop symbols. The diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears. The left decorative pattern 8
The subsequent effect may be performed in the state of variable display without erasing the variable display of L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.
The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents the face of a smile. note that,
The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), the hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a goes around in a clockwise direction so as to draw an ellipse in the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 disappears on the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after being displayed during the hold icon image display effect, or the display may be disappeared at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 159 (F) to 159 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (F), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. And FIG. 159
As shown in (G), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (H), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 159 (I) and 159 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (J), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed at a position above the center of the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon image display effect B]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image display effect B. In the hold icon image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
In, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbols are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
It is a set of symbols that includes a symbol image of R and can notify whether or not it is a hit by a combination of these stop symbols. The diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position, four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "128"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area moves to the hold display position, and the hold icon 9C is displayed. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a goes around in a clockwise direction so as to draw an ellipse in the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 disappears on the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after being displayed during the hold icon image display effect, or the display may be disappeared at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 160 (F) to 160 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160 (F), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. And FIG. 160
As shown in (G), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 160 (H), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 160 (I) and 160 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160 (I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (J), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed at a position above the center of the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon image display effect C]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image display effect C. In the hold icon image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 161 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
In, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbols are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
It is a set of symbols that includes a symbol image of R and can notify whether or not it is a hit by a combination of these stop symbols. The diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position, four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears. The left decorative pattern 8
The subsequent production may be performed in the state of the variable display without erasing the variable display of the L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.
The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents the face of a smile. note that,
The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 161 (D) and 161 (E), the hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
Is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (D), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move upward from the position of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to pop out upward from the back (back side) of the hold icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (E), the hold icon image HA
G moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a goes around in a clockwise direction so as to draw an ellipse in the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 disappears on the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after being displayed during the hold icon image display effect, or the display may be disappeared at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 161 (G) to 161 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (G), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. And FIG. 161
As shown in (H), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (I), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, the emblem image EG imitating a circular emblem including the diamond-shaped hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving to the right.

[Hold icon image display effect D]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image display effect D. In the hold icon image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
In, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbols are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
It is a set of symbols that includes a symbol image of R and can notify whether or not it is a hit by a combination of these stop symbols. The diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position, four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears. The left decorative pattern 8
The subsequent effect may be performed in the state of variable display without erasing the variable display of L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.
The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents the face of a smile. note that,
The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162 (D) and 162 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right of the first hold display area is imitated. The hold icon image HAG that has been set is displayed. Hold icon image HAG is hold icon 9
Similar to A, it is a diamond-shaped image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the hold icon image HAG moves diagonally upward to the right from the position of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right in the first hold display area. Is displayed. Hold icon image HA
G is displayed so as to pop out diagonally upward to the right from behind (the back side) of the hold icon 9A.
Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a goes around in a clockwise direction so as to draw an ellipse in the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 disappears on the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after being displayed during the hold icon image display effect, or the display may be disappeared at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162 (G) to 162 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162 (G), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. And FIG. 162
As shown in (H), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (I), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, the emblem image EG imitating a circular emblem including the diamond-shaped hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving to the right.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon image display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed at the hold display position (the hold display position) on the display screen 7a. After the effect and the first effect, the hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) displayed at the hold display position (the hold display position) is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is possible to produce and perform. According to this configuration
It is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in the second effect, the hold icon image HAG is displayed at the hold display position (the hold display position).
It is displayed so as to move from the position of A (the hold icon 9C). According to this configuration
It is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the second effect,
It is possible to further execute the third effect in which the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the third effect,
It is possible to further execute the fourth effect in which the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the fourth effect,
It is possible to further execute the fifth effect in which the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 the hold display position is the hold display position, and the hold icon is the hold icon 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the second effect is when a specific effect (for example, display of a specific image TG2, start of next variation of a decorative symbol, etc.) is performed. Is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon image display effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is a diamond, but the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) may have various other shapes, patterns, colors, and the like. The same applies to the hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a when a specific effect (for example, display of the specific image TG2, start of the next change of the decorative pattern, etc.) is performed, but the specific effect is specified. The production may be various other productions. For example, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R
May form a reach state, a specific image is displayed, a movable member or the like operates, and the like.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
One hold icon image HAG imitating C) is displayed, but the number of hold image HAGs displayed may be plural. Further, the hold icon image HAG having the same size as the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed, but is displayed in a different size, which is larger or smaller than the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). May be done.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a moves clockwise in the display screen 7a so as to draw an ellipse. However, the mode of movement within the display screen 7a is not limited to this, and movement may be made in various modes. For example, the hold icon image HAG may be moved while rotating.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
In the display means, the first effect in which the hold icon is displayed at a predetermined hold display position, and
After the first effect, the display means can execute a second effect in which a hold icon image imitating the hold icon displayed at the hold display position is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G4-1.
In the second effect, the hold icon image is displayed so as to move from the position of the hold icon displayed at the hold display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G4-1 or the aspect G4-2.
After the second effect, it is possible to further perform a third effect in which the hold icon image is displayed to move within the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G4-3.
After the third effect, it is possible to further perform a fourth effect in which the hold icon image is displayed as if it were moved from the inside of the display means to the outside of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G4-4.
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further perform a fifth effect in which the hold icon image is displayed as if it were moved from the outside of the display means into the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-5.
The hold display position is the hold display position.
The hold icon is the hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-6.
The second effect is executed when a specific effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation state suggestion effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. This operation state suggestion display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation state suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Operation status suggestion display effect A]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion effect A. Operation unit state suggestion effect A
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position,
Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "835"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is in the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative pattern is completed.
The next fluctuation is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L
, The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (in the present embodiment, the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (E), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "6" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8C, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 163 (F) and 163 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R
The symbol image of the number is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and FIG. 163 (F).
As shown in, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image which is the right decorative symbol 8R and is not a symbol image of normal numbers, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down the moving speed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a lost manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative symbol 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative symbols in the lost state (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R).

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image suggesting the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing a state in which the effect button 63 is inside the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective (No. 1). 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (H), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is in the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative pattern is completed.
The next fluctuation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (I), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. In the operation state suggestion image SSG, since the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, the effect button 63 can be pressed from the state where the effect button 63 cannot be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective from the state where the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective. It is suggested that the state is switched to the above state (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is in a state where the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not contained in the capsule.
That is, it suggests that the operation of the effect button 63 is in an effective state (third aspect). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in an effective state.

In the present embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar T are used as the operation state suggestion image SSG.
B is displayed. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggestion image SSG has an effect button 6 for the player.
An operation promotion image (for example, a character image of "press !!!!") that prompts the operation of 3 may be included.

[Operation status suggestion display effect B]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion effect B. Operation unit state suggestion effect B
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 164 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position,
Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "835"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is in the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative pattern is completed.
The next fluctuation is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L
, The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (in the present embodiment, the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (E), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "6" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8C, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 164 (F) and 164 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R
The symbol image of the number is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and FIG. 164 (F)
As shown in, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image which is the right decorative symbol 8R and is not a symbol image of normal numbers, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down the moving speed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a lost manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative symbol 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative symbols in the lost state (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R).

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a sword image KG (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the sword member 64 (operation unit), and is an image suggesting the operation state of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG shows a state in which the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen). The operation state suggestion image SSG is in a state where the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen), that is, the sword member 6
It is suggested that the operation of 4 is not effective. At this time, even if the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (H), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is in the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative pattern is completed.
The next fluctuation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (I), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing that the ice covering the surface of the sword member 64 is melted and the sword member 64 is exposed. Operation state suggestion image The SSG is in a state where the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the ice covering the sword member 64 has melted, that is, in a state where the operation of the sword member 64 is not effective. It is suggested that the operation of 64 is switched to the valid state (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the surface of the sword member 64 is not covered with ice, so that the sword member 64 can be pushed in, that is, the operation of the sword member 64 is effective (No. 1). 3 embodiments). At this time, when the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation is in an effective state.

In the present embodiment, the sword image KG and the timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG. note that,
Even if the operation state suggestion image SSG includes an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of "push in !!") that urges the player to operate the sword member 64 in addition to the sword image KG and the timer bar TB. good.

[Operation status suggestion display effect C]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion effect C. Operation unit state suggestion effect C
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position,
Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "835"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is in the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative pattern is completed.
The next fluctuation is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L
, The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (in the present embodiment, the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (E), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "6" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8C, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 165 (F) and 165 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R
The symbol image of the number is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and FIG. 165 (F).
As shown in, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image which is the right decorative symbol 8R and is not a symbol image of normal numbers, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down the moving speed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a lost manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative symbol 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative symbols in the lost state (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R).

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image suggesting the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing a state in which the effect button 63 is inside the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective (No. 1). 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (H), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG represents the face of Smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and
It also includes conceptual things whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific target here is
It includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are a plurality of specific objects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (I), after the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggestion image SSG which is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. In the operation state suggestion image SSG, the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, and the effect button 63 is
Is an image showing that is in an exposed state. The operation state suggestion image SSG is the effect button 6
Since the capsule covering 3 was broken, the effect button 63 could be pressed instead of being pressed.
That is, it is suggested that the operation of the effect button 63 is switched from the state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective to the state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is in a state where the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not contained in the capsule.
That is, it suggests that the operation of the effect button 63 is in an effective state (third aspect). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in an effective state.

In the present embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar T are used as the operation state suggestion image SSG.
B is displayed. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggestion image SSG has an effect button 6 for the player.
An operation promotion image (for example, a character image of "press !!!!") that prompts the operation of 3 may be included.

[Operation status suggestion display effect D]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion effect D. Operation unit state suggestion effect D
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position,
Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "835"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is in the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative pattern is completed.
The next fluctuation is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L
, The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (in the present embodiment, the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (E), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "6" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the left decorative symbol 8C, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 166 (F) and 166 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R
The symbol image of the number is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and FIG. 166 (F).
As shown in, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image which is the right decorative symbol 8R and is not a symbol image of normal numbers, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down the moving speed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a lost manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative symbol 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative symbols in the lost state (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R).

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image suggesting the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing a state in which the effect button 63 is inside the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective (No. 1). 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (H), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is at the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative pattern is completed.
The next fluctuation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R has
The operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed continuously from the previous fluctuation. Operation status suggestion image SSG
Is an image showing that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is cracked and the effect button 63 is exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG is in a state where the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, that is, the effect button 63 can be pressed.
It is suggested that the operation of the effect button 63 is switched from the state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid to the state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the operation state suggestion image S is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R.
SG is displayed. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (third). Aspects). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in an effective state.

In the present embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar T are used as the operation state suggestion image SSG.
B is displayed. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggestion image SSG has an effect button 6 for the player.
An operation promotion image (for example, a character image of "press !!!!") that prompts the operation of 3 may be included.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation state suggestion display effect.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an operation unit image (button image BG, sword image KG) representing an operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64), and is an operation unit. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggesting the operation state of (operation button 63, sword member 64) is displayed in the first aspect, and after the first effect, the operation state suggestion image SSG is first. After the second effect displayed in the second aspect different from the first aspect and the second effect, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed in the first aspect and the third aspect different from the second aspect. The third production to be done and
Is feasible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image S
The first aspect of the SG suggests that the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is not effective, and the second aspect of the operation state suggestion image SSG is the operation unit (operation button). 63
, The third aspect of the operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is switched from the state in which the operation of the sword member 64) is not effective to the state in which the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is valid.
It is suggested that the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is in an effective state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the first effect is the first aspect as at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in which the operation state suggestion image SSG is in a lost state. It is displayed in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are as follows from the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is executed across fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed, and the second effect and the third effect are performed. The effect is executed at the time of the next change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation state suggestion display effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation unit images are the button image BG and the sword image KG representing the operation button 63 and the sword member 64, but other operation units (lever, handle, touch panel, etc.).
It may be an image showing.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the decorative pattern 8L in which the operation state suggestion image SSG is in a lost state,
Of 8C and 8R, it is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R, but it may be displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L or as the middle decorative symbol 8C.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the decorative pattern 8L in which the operation state suggestion image SSG is in a lost state,
Of 8C and 8R, it was displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R, but the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R
Etc., or may be displayed as a plurality of decorative symbols, or may be displayed as all decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the three aspects of the operation state suggestion image SSG are the effectiveness of the operation of the operation unit (the operation is not valid, the operation is switched from the ineffective state to the valid state, and the operation is effective. However, it may be an embodiment that suggests, for example, how to operate the operation unit, the direction of operation, and the like.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect H1-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation state suggestion image that includes an operation unit image representing the operation unit and suggests an operation state of the operation unit.
The first effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first aspect, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a second aspect different from the first aspect,
After the second effect, it is possible to perform a third effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first aspect and a third aspect different from the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H1-1.
The first aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is not effective.
The second aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is switched from the ineffective state to the operation of the operation unit is valid.
The third aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is in an effective state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H1-1 or the aspect H1-2.
In the first effect, the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first aspect as at least a part of the decorative pattern in a lost state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H1-1 to H1-3.
The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are executed from the variation of the decorative symbol to the next variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H1-4.
The first effect is executed at the time of the change of the decorative pattern,
The second effect and the third effect are executed at the time of the next change of the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H1-5.
The second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbol is started.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation image stock effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. In FIGS. 167 to 170, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the drawing of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also seen. Some are omitted due to ease of use, and are the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Some of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged in the surroundings are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

This operation image stock effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation). That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 (for example, a variable effect start command).
When an instruction to execute the operation image stock effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and the left movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 is provided.
The position and light emission mode of L and the right movable accessory 14R may be changed.

Here, the operation image stock effect A will be described first, and the operation image stock effect B, the operation image stock effect C, and the operation image stock effect D will be described in order.

[Operation image stock production A]
First, the operation image stock effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect A. The operation image stock effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock effect A, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, FIG. 167 (A)
As shown in, the action production (battle production) is developed (started). Action production (
In the battle production), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), the ally character CRA in FIG. 167 (A).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and the character image "long press" is attached to one of the button image BGs. 2 from the bottom above the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom.
In the state where the button image BG with the character image "long press" is placed as the second, 2
One button image BG is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), the ally character CRA in FIG. 167 (C).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the sword image KG are action effects. It will be a reward for (battle production). Get button image B
The G and the sword image KG are stacked, displayed and stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. A character image of "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG to which the character image "long press" is attached do not have the character image "button" attached at all. Here, the button image B with the character image "long press", which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and is arranged second from the bottom.
Above G, a normal button image BG is arranged as the third from the bottom, and above this normal button image BG, a sword image KG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are three button image BGs (normal button image BGs).
, One button image BG with the character image "long press"), and one sword image KG. The number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit). In other words, as the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for winning (big hit or small hit) is high. It is supposed to be.

The button image BG with the character image "long press" has a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63). It is set high. Further, the sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG to which the character image "long press" is attached. That is, the degree of expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in the normal button image BG, and further compared to this normal button image BG. It is higher than the button image BG with the character image "long press" that is set high. Further, three button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a.
(Two normal button image BGs and one button image BG with the character image "long press") and one sword image KG have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). .. As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting based on the expectation degree (variable effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit)
In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (hit rich)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high in the order of blinking (blinking yellow) → blinking seven colors (blinking rainbow (rich hit)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a
) Are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG placed at the bottom is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (E) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation) is accompanied by the operation (pressing operation).
The pressing operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 167 (F), the display screen 7a is subsequently performed. Button image BG with the text image "long press" stocked on the right side of
Is digested, and when the button image BG with the character image "long press" disappears from the display screen 7a, the button image BG with the character image "long press" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the above in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image B
G is displayed on the left side of the upper part in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof.
A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "long press" prompting a long press operation (continuation of the press operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. It should be noted that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (F) is accompanied by the character image "long press" when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (for example).
It may be (blinking green) or lit red (blinking red).

The player presses and holds the effect button 63 during the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) (for example, 3 seconds).
When the pressing operation is continued), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is continuously played from the speaker 67 as the long pressing operation sound.

The player presses and holds the effect button 63 during the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) (for example, 3 seconds).
When the pressing operation is continued) or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 167 (G), the normal stock is subsequently stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the button image BG of is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is directed to the player so that it overlaps with the upper part of the front surface of the button image 63.
The downward arrow image prompting the operation (pressing operation) is displayed in a manner of moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 63 (for example, 3) is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front surface.
A timer bar TB indicating (seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. note that,
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (G) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking). It may be changed).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation) is accompanied by the operation (pressing operation).
The pressing operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 167 (H), the display screen 7a is subsequently performed. When the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the screen (located at the top) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as a large sword image KG. It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. This sword image KG is on the left side of the front,
A downward arrow image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) is displayed in a manner of moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and the operation acceptance period of the sword member 64 is valid (for example, so as to overlap the lower part of the front surface). A timer bar TB indicating (3 seconds) is displayed. Also, the sword image KG is
"Push in!" That encourages the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 so that it overlaps the upper part of the front surface.
Message MG is displayed. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (H) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same or it may be a hit (
Change to something with high expectations for big hits and small hits (for example, from white lighting to white blinking,
It may be changed from white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking).

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is accompanied by this.
A specific sound that is different from the above sound and announces the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and further, FIG.
As shown in 67 (I), an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. A final hit production is performed. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. Stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting with (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R
Is displayed with the number "7", it is stopped and displayed with the same pattern and becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) (big hit production or small hit production) ) Will be started.

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation) in FIG. 167 (H),
Alternatively, when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in FIG. 167 (I), and the ally character CRA is displayed. When the image is not displayed large in the center of the screen 7a, when the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67, and FIG. 167 is shown. Following (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lines connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area (left-right direction). The same pattern (here, the number "
7 ”) will not be aligned and will be stopped and displayed, and the deviation will be confirmed and displayed. The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (push operation sound).
It may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from a specific sound).

In this way, in the operation image stock effect A, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG, button image BG with the character image "long press") on the right side of the display screen 7a. When these are digested one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63, the player can operate the sword member 64, and a hit (big hit or small hit) is generated. Since the result of whether or not to do so (the winning confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest. can.

[Operation image stock production B]
Next, the operation image stock effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect B. The operation image stock effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock effect B, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, FIG. 168 (A)
As shown in, the action production (battle production) is developed (started). Action production (
In the battle production), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the ally character CRA in FIG. 168 (A).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom.
Two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (D), the ally character CRA in FIG. 168 (C).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get production, two button images BG imitating the production button 63 and the sword member 6
The sword image KG imitating 4 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the sword image KG are rewards for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. One of the two button image BGs obtained has a character image "continuous hit" attached to the button image BG. In addition, the character image "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG that was obtained. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG to which the character image "continuously hit" is attached do not have the character image "button" attached at all. Here, a normal button image BG is placed above the normal button image BG that is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and is placed second from the bottom, and a normal button image BG is placed as the third from the bottom. A button image BG with the character image "continuous hit" is placed above the image BG, and a sword image KG is placed above the button image BG with the character image "continuous hit" as the fourth from the bottom. Will be done.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are four button image BGs (normal button image BGs).
3), 1 button image BG with the character image "continuous hit") and 1 sword image K
G and are in a state of being arranged. The number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit). In other words, as the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for winning (big hit or small hit) is high. It is supposed to be.

The button image BG with the character image "continuous hit" is a hit (big hit or small hit) compared to the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63).
The expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the button image BG with the character image "continuous hit" shown in FIG. 167 (B) is the same as the expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit). Expectation or similar expectation (a little lower or a little higher than the expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the button image BG with the character image "continuous hit") It has become. Further, the sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG to which the character image "continuous hit" is attached. That is, the degree of expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in the normal button image BG, and further compared to this normal button image BG. It is higher than the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" which is set high. Further, four button image BGs (three normal button image BGs and one button image BG with the character image "continuous hit") and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). The "predetermined light emission mode" is based on the degree of expectation (variable effect start command) that is a hit (big hit or small hit).
For example, the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (hit rich)). In addition, the expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) is set in the order of white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (hit rich)) ing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a
) Are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG placed at the bottom is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (E) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)). But it may be.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation) is accompanied by the operation (pressing operation).
The pressing operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (F), subsequently, FIG. 168 ( Normal button image B stocked on the right side (second from the bottom) in D)
When G is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the above in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image B
G is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlap with the lower part of the front surface thereof. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (F) is the display screen 7.
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of a, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting). It may be changed from white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation) is accompanied by the operation (pressing operation).
The pressing operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (G), subsequently, FIG. 168 ( Normal button image B stocked on the right side (third from the bottom) in D)
When G is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the above in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image B
G is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlap with the lower part of the front surface thereof. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (G) is the display screen 7.
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of a, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting). It may be changed from white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation) is accompanied by the operation (pressing operation).
The pressing operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (H), the display screen 7a is subsequently performed. When the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" stocked on the right side of is digested and the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" disappears from the display screen 7a, "continuous hit" is accompanied by this. The button image BG to which the character image is attached is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is
A downward arrow image that urges the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface is displayed in a manner of moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and the effect button 63 overlaps the lower part of the front surface. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "continuous striking" is displayed, which prompts a continuous striking operation (continuous operation of pressing operation) of the effect button 63. It should be noted that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (H) is accompanied by a character image of "continuous hitting" when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue). It may be (blinking) or lit in green (changed to blinking green).

When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 (continuous operation of pressing operation) during the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds), each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation) as a continuous hit operation sound. The first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67.

When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 (continuous operation of pressing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (I), subsequently. , The sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (located at the top) is digested, and when this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large sword image KG in the center of the. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. , Sword member 6
A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of 4 is displayed. also,
The sword image KG displays a message MG of "push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (I) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking). change)
It may be made to.

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a second normal operation sound (a second normal operation sound) is accompanied by this.
The push-in operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67. The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (push operation sound).
It may be a different sound (a sound different from the specific sound that announces the confirmation of winning).

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L
, Medium decorative symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area. Will be done. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed with the number "8".
, And the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol (
Here, the numbers "7") are not aligned and the stop display is displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation) in FIG. 168 (I),
Alternatively, when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, the sound is different from the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) and the hit confirmation is announced. Sound flows from the speaker 67, and an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. A definite production may be performed. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit. When the rainbow image and the ally character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed in their own variable display areas, respectively, at the midpoint of the left side of the display screen 7a. The same pattern (here, the number "7") is lined up in a line connecting the midpoint on the right side and the center line in the left-right direction.
”) Will be stopped and displayed, and the hit (big hit or small hit) will be confirmed and displayed, and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) will be started. The Rukoto.

In this way, in the operation image stock effect B, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG, button image BG with the character image "continuous hit") on the right side of the display screen 7a. When digesting these one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63, the player can operate the sword member 64, and a hit (big hit or small hit) is generated. Since the result of whether or not (the winning confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest. ..

[Operation image stock production C]
Next, the operation image stock effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect C. The operation image stock effect C is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock effect C, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, FIG. 169 (A)
As shown in, the action production (battle production) is developed (started). Action production (
In the battle production), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (B), the ally character CRA in FIG. 169 (A).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom.
A normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom, and a normal button image as the third from the bottom above the second normal button image BG from the bottom. Three button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In some cases, an effect of retreating the ally character CRA due to an attack from the enemy character CRB may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (D), the ally character CRA in FIG. 169 (C).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the sword image KG are action effects. It will be a reward for (battle production). Get button image B
The G and the sword image KG are stacked, displayed and stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. A character image of "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG does not have the character image "button" at all. Here, a normal button image BG is placed above the normal button image BG that is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and is placed third from the bottom, and a normal button image BG is placed as the fourth from the bottom. Above the image BG, the sword image KG is placed as the fifth from the bottom. In addition, FIG. 169 (C)
In, when the button loss effect described later is deployed (started) due to the retreat of the ally character CRA due to the attack from the enemy character CRB, the button image BG and the sword member imitating the effect button 63 already obtained (acquired) The sword image KG imitating 64 is lost, and various images (button image BG and sword image KG) that are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a are displayed one or more from the bottom to the top. It will disappear from the screen 7a.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are four button image BGs (normal button image BGs).
4 and 1 sword image KG are arranged. The number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit). In other words, as the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for winning (big hit or small hit) is high. It is supposed to be.

The sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) than the normal button image BG. Further, the four button image BGs (four normal button image BGs) and the one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). The "predetermined light emission mode" is a hit (big hit or small hit).
Based on the expected degree (variable production start command), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich))
In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in this order,
The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high in the order of white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (hit rich)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (E), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (F), the button loss effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA recedes due to the attack from the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (E). In the button loss effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 obtained (acquired) by the button get effect and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are lost, and the display screen 7
Various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stacked and displayed on the right side of a disappear from the display screen 7a from the bottom row to the top row and are forcibly digested.
Here, the button image BG arranged at the bottom in FIG. 169 (D), and 2 from the bottom.
The second button image BG disappears.

In addition, in FIG. 169 (E), the action effect (battle effect) may not be developed again. In this case, the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, the display screen 7
The two button image BGs stocked on the right side of a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect) is accompanied by this. A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63) is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As such, a timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message "press" prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. However, even if the image is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking)) good. When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation)
Then, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed,
When the above-mentioned pressing promotion effect is developed (started) again and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, FIG. 169 It will proceed to (G).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (G), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB. In some cases, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (H), the button loss effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA recedes due to the attack from the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (G). Here, the button image BG arranged third from the bottom in FIG. 169 (D).
, And the button image BG placed fourth from the bottom disappears and is forcibly digested. After that, the sword image KG arranged at the uppermost stage in FIG. 169 (D) changes from a predetermined light emitting mode to another light emitting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking). In addition, FIG. 169 (G
), When the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed, the button get effect is developed (started) accordingly.

Further, in FIG. 169 (H), the sword image KG may not change from a predetermined light emitting mode to another light emitting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking), and the pressing promotion effect may be developed (started). be. In this case, the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (located at the top) is digested, and when this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a large sword image KG in a predetermined light emitting mode. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. , A timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. Further, the message "Push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface of the sword image KG. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be changed (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking) to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit). When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or
When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, the process proceeds to FIG. 169 (I).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (I), an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The hit confirmation effect that is displayed in large size is performed. At this time, a specific sound announcing the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67. In this hit confirmation production,
After that, it is a production to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.
The rainbow image BKH is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. Stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting with (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed. It becomes a big hit or a small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

When the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in FIG. 167 (I) and the ally character CRA is not displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, that is, in FIG. 169 (H). The sword image KG does not change from a predetermined light emitting mode to another light emitting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking), and the stocked (arranged at the top) sword image KG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When it disappears from the screen 7a, the specific sound notifying the confirmation of the hit does not flow at all from the speaker 67, and the sword image KG is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large sword image KG in the center of the. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. , Sword member 6
A timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of 4 is displayed. Further, the message "Push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface of the sword image KG. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Changes to those with high expectations for hits (big hits and small hits) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (for example)
It may be (blinking green) or lit red (blinking red). The player is a sword member 6
When 4 is operated (pushing operation), or the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64 (for example, 3)
After a lapse of seconds), when the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R is lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in its own variable display area, and the same symbol (here, the number " 7
"), It may be stopped and displayed, and the deviation may be confirmed. Even if the second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is the same as the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) in the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 and the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168. It may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from a specific sound).

In this way, in the operation image stock effect C, in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a, the sword image KG (the light emission mode of the sword image KG changes from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking. (Changes) are stocked, and when these are digested one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63, the player can operate the sword member 64, and further, a hit (big hit or small hit). The result of whether or not a hit) occurs (the hit confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, which improves the interest. Can be planned.

Further, in the operation image stock effect C, various images (button image B) are produced by the button get effect.
You can get G and sword image KG) to increase the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)), and the button image BG can be produced by the button loss effect. And the sword image KG can also be lost. That is, in the operation image stock effect C, the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) can be increased or decreased. ing. As a result, the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) is hit (big hit or small hit). It is possible to eliminate monotony by changing the degree of expectation.

[Operation image stock production D]
Next, the operation image stock effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect D. The operation image stock effect D is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock effect D, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, FIG. 170 (A)
As shown in, the action production (battle production) is developed (started). Action production (
In the battle production), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (B), the ally character CRA in FIG. 170 (A).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom.
Two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are two button image BGs (normal button image BGs).
Is in a state where two) are arranged. The stocked two-button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit). That is, as the number of stocked button image BGs (that is, the total number of stocked button image BGs (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) increases.

Two button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a (normal button image BG has a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). The "predetermined light emitting mode" is a hit (big hit or Based on the expectation (small hit), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)) In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit), it is called white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)) The expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in order is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (C), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the two button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 170 (C)
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in the above is
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example). It may be changed from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation) is accompanied by the operation (pressing operation).
The pressing operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 170 (D), subsequently, FIG. 170 ( Normal button image B stocked on the right side (second from the bottom) in B)
When G is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the above in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image B
G is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlap with the lower part of the front surface thereof. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (D) is the display screen 7.
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of a, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting). It may be changed from white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation) is accompanied by the operation (pressing operation).
The pressing operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 170 (E), subsequently, although not shown. , The action effect (battle effect) is developed, and the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. It will be a reward for action production (battle production). As shown in FIG. 170 (F), the obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked, displayed and stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. A character image of "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG does not have the character image "button" at all. Here, since the two button image BGs already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a have been digested, the sword image KG is the second from the bottom above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom. Be placed.

In addition, in FIG. 170 (E), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63,
Alternatively, when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the action effect (battle effect) is not developed, and the button image BG and the sword member 6 imitating the effect button 63 are not developed.
The sword image KG imitating 4 is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and FIG. 170 (Fig. 170)
As shown in F), it may be stacked and displayed and stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

As described above, one normal button image BG and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) suggest the degree of expectation for hits (big hits and small hits). In other words, as the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for winning (big hit or small hit) is high. It is supposed to be.

The sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) than the normal button image BG. Further, the normal button image BG and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variable effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (hit rich)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking →
The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high in the order of red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (hit rich)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (G), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started) again. In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The large button image B displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (G).
The predetermined light emitting mode of G may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or is a hit (big hit or small hit).
It may be changed to one with a high degree of expectation (for example, change from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to red lighting (red blinking) or yellow lighting (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation) is accompanied by the operation (pressing operation).
The pressing operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 170 (H), the display screen 7a is subsequently performed. When the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the screen (located at the top) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as a large sword image KG. It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. This sword image KG is on the left side of the front,
A downward arrow image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) is displayed in a manner of moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and the operation acceptance period of the sword member 64 is valid (for example, so as to overlap the lower part of the front surface). A timer bar TB indicating (3 seconds) is displayed. Also, the sword image KG is
"Push in!" That encourages the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 so that it overlaps the upper part of the front surface.
Message MG is displayed. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (H) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same or it may be a hit (
Change to something with high expectations for big hits and small hits (for example, from white lighting to white blinking,
It may be changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking) or rainbow lighting (rainbow blinking).

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is accompanied by this.
A specific sound that is different from the above sound and announces the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and further, FIG.
As shown in 70 (I), a winning effect is performed. Here, as a winning confirmation effect, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively.
Advance (move) toward the front (front) center advance position (in the direction close to each other), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L The left side decoration part, which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side, and the right side decoration part, which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united. , The left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Less than,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode).
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have a white light emitting mode, and the alphabetic character "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively, to win the ally character CRA. A suggestive production is performed. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light in a predetermined manner (for example,). Due to other light emission modes (for example, red light emission modes) different from the white light emission mode), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have a red light emission mode, but the alphabetic character "V" does not appear. , There is no production that suggests the victory of the ally character CRA.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), and the letter "V" is formed on the light guide plate, and the outer circumference excluding the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate is formed. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed on the light guide plate.
The letter "V" appears due to diffuse reflection at "V". In other words, the left movable accessory 1
The front side of the 4L and the right movable accessory 14R is a display screen in which the alphabetic character "V" appears by the light guide plate. Further, on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Lights up (for example, red) and emits light toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R through the light guide plate, but the alphabetic character "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Retreat (move) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed. It becomes a big hit or a small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation) in FIG. 170 (H),
Alternatively, when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are annular in FIG. 170 (I). When the ally character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D because one decorative member (combined accessory) having the above is not formed, the player operates the sword member 64 ( In the case of (pushing operation), a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67, and following FIG. 170 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R The same pattern (here, the number "
7 ”) may not be aligned and the stop display may be displayed, and the deviation may be confirmed and displayed. The second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound), or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound). ..

In this way, in the operation image stock effect D, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a, and when the player digests these one by one, the player The effect button 63 can be operated, the player can operate the sword member 64, and the result of whether or not a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (hit is confirmed only when a hit occurs). As an effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D formed by combining the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R. Since it is possible to display (displayed) on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the operation image stock effect D, even if various images (button image BG and sword image KG) obtained (acquired) by the button get effect are digested by the press promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) are obtained again by the button get effect. Since it is possible to increase the number of button images BG and sword images KG), the various images stocked again give the player joy and give them the expectation that hits (big hits and small hits) will occur. Can contribute to.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation image stock effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the effect button 63 (first operating means) that can be operated by the player A button image BG (first operating means image) imitating an effect button 63 (first operating means) provided with a sword member 64 (second operating means) that can be operated by a player is an image display device 7. Display screen 7a
The first effect stocked in the image display device 7 and the sword image KG (second operating means image) imitating the sword member 64 (second operating means) are stocked in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The effect and the button image BG (first operation means image) stocked by the first effect are the effect button 63.
The third effect digested by the operation of (first operating means) and the sword image KG (second operating means image) stocked by the second effect are the sword member 64 (second operating means). An image display device for the fourth effect digested by the operation and the winning result (result of whether or not a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs) in a specific lottery in the middle of the third effect or the fourth effect. The fifth effect that can be displayed on the display screen 7a of 7 can be executed. According to this configuration, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when digesting these, the player operates the effect button 63 or the player operates the sword member 64. In addition to being able to operate, the winning result (result of whether or not a winning (big hit or small hit) occurs) in a specific lottery can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.
Operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), FIGS. 169 (A) to 16
The same applies to the operation image stock effect C of 9 (J) and the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time. ..
According to this configuration, in addition to the button image BG (first operating means image), the sword image K
By stocking G (second operation means image) on the display screen, it is possible to increase the number of objects that the player can operate (in other words, to increase the number of objects that reflect the player's intention). Because it can be done), it can contribute to the improvement of operation motivation. In addition, sword image K
The degree of expectation for transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit)) set in G (second operation means image) is the button image BG (first operation means). It is preferably higher than the one set in the image). According to this configuration, in the state where the button image BG is stocked, the player cannot expect the degree of expectation of transition to the game state advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation for hit (big hit or small hit)), and the player is disappointed. Even so, when the sword image KG is stocked, the expectation of transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of hit (big hit or small hit)) set in the sword image KG can be expected. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation to play.
Operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), FIGS. 169 (A) to 16
The same applies to the operation image stock effect C of 9 (J) and the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a hit confirmation effect for notifying the hit confirmation, and is a rainbow image which is a background image. BKH (first hit confirmed image) and rainbow image BK which is a background image
The ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) different from H (first hit confirmed image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the rainbow image BK
By suddenly switching to the hit confirmation effect by H (first hit confirmation image) and ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image), it is possible to give an impact to the player and announce the hit confirmation. This makes it possible to impress the player with the combination of the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) as an effect that has an impact on the player. For this reason, the player sees the impactful hit confirmation effect, so that the effect button 63 (first operating means) and the sword member 64 (second)
Operation means) will be actively operated. By the hit confirmation effect by the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image)
It can contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation to play.
Operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), FIGS. 169 (A) to 16
The same applies to the operation image stock effect C of 9 (J).
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J), the left movable accessory 14L
And the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmed image) on which the front side of the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate, and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By suddenly switching to the winning confirmation effect, it is possible to give an impact to the player and announce the winning confirmation. As a result, the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmation image) in which the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate).
The combination of the character and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) can be impressed on the player as an effect that has an impact on the player. For this reason, the player sees the impactful hit confirmation effect, so that the effect button 63 (first operating means) and the sword member 64 (
The second operating means) will be actively operated. The game is played by the hit confirmation effect by the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image) in which the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate. It can contribute to the improvement of a person's willingness to play.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image). Since the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image), which is one of the above, is a background image, it is arranged backward, and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image), which is the other, is arranged forward. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
According to this configuration, the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character C
By suddenly switching to the hit confirmation effect by RA (second hit confirmation image), it is possible to give an impact to the player and announce the hit confirmation.
Operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), FIGS. 169 (A) to 16
The same applies to the operation image stock effect C of 9 (J).
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J), the left movable accessory 14L
And since the right movable accessory 14R appears on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is united, the alphabetic character "V" (the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate). First hit confirmed image) and ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image)
One of the ally characters CRA (second hit confirmed image) is arranged rearward and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the other is the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmed image). ) Is arranged forward, and the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14
The front side of R is suddenly switched to the hit confirmation effect by the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image) that appear by the light guide plate, giving an impact to the player and hit. Confirmation can be announced.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the effect button 6 is displayed on the button image BG (first operation means image).
Some include a character image (operation instruction image) of "long press" instructing "long press operation (specific operation)" to 3 (first operation means). According to this configuration, the effect button 63 (first)
Since it is possible to increase the variation in the operation method of (operation means), for the player,
By making it difficult to feel monotonous in the operation of the effect button 63 (first operating means), it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the operation motivation of the effect button 63 (first operating means).
In the operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), in the button image BG (first operation means image), the effect button 63 (first operation means) is "repeatedly hit (specified). Some include a character image (operation instruction image) of "continuous hitting" instructing "operation)". According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation in the operation method of the effect button 63 (first operation means), so that the player can operate the effect button 63 (first operation means) monotonously. By making it hard to feel, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the motivation to operate the effect button 63 (first operating means).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (H) to 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a winning result (hit (big hit)) in a specific lottery. When the result of whether or not a small hit) occurs) is a winning (win (big hit or small hit)), a specific sound that announces the confirmation of the hit is output. According to this configuration, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of the hit is played from the speaker 67, so that the player's surroundings are also won (win (hit (hit (hit)).
Since it is possible to convey that it is a big hit or a small hit)), the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority.
The same applies to the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation image stock effect.
[Modification 1]
Operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167 (D), operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168 (D)
In the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D) and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E), the sword image KG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the button image BG (at the same time as the button image BG). It was displayed. However, only the sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, one sword image KG may be displayed and stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or a plurality of sword image KGs may be displayed and stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It may be done. Since the sword image KG has a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the button image BG, the player can see that the sword image KG is displayed independently on the display screen 7a. It is possible to expect the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit)).

[Modification 2]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. The confirmation sound may continue to flow from the speaker 67. By doing so, the hit confirmation sound continues to be played from the speaker 67, so that it is possible to convey to the surroundings of the player that the hit confirmation effect is being performed, so that the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority. can. The hit confirmation sound may be the same as the specific sound for notifying the hit confirmation, or it may be a different sound (of course, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) and the second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound). It may be a different sound).

[Modification 3]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player ( The degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) was notified. However, for example, in the case of notifying the winning result in the lottery of the number of rounds in the big hit effect (big hit game), the operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the number of rounds which is the winning result, or the big hit effect. Transition to the high-accuracy state after the (big hit game) When notifying the winning result in the lottery, the operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the presence or absence of the transition to the high-accuracy state which is the winning result.

[Modification 4]
Operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167 (D), operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168 (D)
In the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D) and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E), one sword image KG is displayed together with one button image BG (at the same time as one button image BG). It was displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. However, one button image B
A plurality of sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with G (at the same time as one button image BG), or together with a plurality of button image BGs (at the same time as one button image BG).
At the same time), one sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By doing so, multiple button image BGs and sword image KGs will be displayed on the display screen 7a at a time, and by increasing the number of stocks, the degree of expectation for winning (big hit or small hit) as a winning result in a specific lottery can be obtained. Can be high.

[Modification 5]
Operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167 (D), operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168 (D)
In the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D) and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E), one from the bottom to the top stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The button image BG and the sword image KG were digested one by one. However, the display screen 7
The button image BG and the sword image KG may be digested one by one from the top row stocked on the right side of a to the bottom row, or from the top row stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. The button image BG and the sword image KG arranged at any position up to the lower row may be arbitrarily digested, or these may be combined to digest the button image BG and the sword image KG. ..

[Modification 6]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, the image display device 7
The button image BG and the sword image KG were stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. However, instead of the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG or the sword image KG may be stocked on any of the upper side, the left side, and the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. good.
In this case, on the upper side and the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in the strip-shaped area extending in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in the strip-shaped region extending in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be stocked in a strip-shaped region extending in the vertical direction at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By doing so, the band-shaped area in which the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked is not fixed to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and for example, the display position is changed by lottery every time the operation image stock effect is started. By being determined, the player himself discovers the relationship between the displayed position to be stocked and the degree of expectation for transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit)). Since it can contribute to finding out), it is possible to prevent the freshness of the operation image stock effect from being lost.

[Modification 7]
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (B) to 170 (G), the normal button image B
A plurality of G's were stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, out of a plurality of normal button image BGs, a button image BG with one or more "long press" character images may be obtained and stocked by a button get effect, or one or more "continuous hits" may be obtained. You may get and stock the button image BG with the character image.

[Modification 8]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (B), two button image BGs are obtained and stocked in the button get effect, and the character image "long press" is attached to one of the button image BGs. rice field. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, only the normal button image BG may be obtained and stocked by one or more, or only the button image BG with the character image "long press" attached. You may get one or more and stock them. Further, in the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (B),
In the button get production, two normal button image BGs were obtained and stocked. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, only one or more button image BGs with the character image "continuous hit" may be obtained and stocked.

[Modification 9]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, the image display device 7
The button image BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a is digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, and the sword image KG is digested by the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64, so that the button image BG is digested. And the sword image KG disappeared from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 one by one. However, the remaining number of stocked button image BG and sword image KG, that is, the message "remaining X pieces (X is the number of stocks)" as the stock number is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. You may try to do it. At this time, the announcement "X remaining (X is the number of stocks)" may be played from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. As the "predetermined display mode", for example, a specific sound and a specific image are lit in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich)). The appearance expectation of, the special sound, and the appearance expectation of the special image are set high respectively.

[Modification 10]
Operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167 (D), operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168 (D)
In the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D) and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E), the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 11]
The operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 may not include a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect H2-1]
A gaming machine provided with a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player.
The first effect in which the image of the first operating means imitating the first operating means is stocked on the display screen, and
A second effect in which an image of the second operating means imitating the second operating means is stocked on the display screen, and
A third effect in which the image of the first operating means stocked by the first effect is digested by the operation of the first operating means.
A fourth effect in which the image of the second operating means stocked by the second effect is digested by the operation of the second operating means.
It is possible to execute the third effect or the fifth effect in which the winning result in a specific lottery can be displayed on the display screen in the middle of the fourth effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H2-1.
The first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H2-1 or the aspect H2-2.
The fifth effect is a hit confirmation effect that announces the hit confirmation, and displays a first hit confirmation image and a second hit confirmation image different from the first hit confirmation image on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-3.
One of the first hit confirmed image and the second hit confirmed image is arranged rearward and the other is arranged forward and displayed on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-4.
Some of the first operation means images include an operation instruction image instructing a specific operation to the first operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-5.
The fifth effect outputs a specific sound when the winning result in the specific lottery is a winning result.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the effects A to D that can be notified will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 174. FIG. 17
1-In FIG. 174, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the visibility of the drawing, and the drawing of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also easy to see. Some of them are omitted from the above, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that is.

This winning notification possible effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 10
1 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and when an instruction to execute a winning notification possible effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position and light emission mode of 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the winning notification possible production A will be described, and then the winning notification possible production B, the winning notification possible production C, and the winning notification possible production D will be described in order.

[Direction A that can be announced]
First, the winning notification possible effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification possible effect A. The effect A that can be announced is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the result A, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 171 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (B), the ally character CRA in FIG. 171 (A).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, four button image BGs are obtained, and above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom.
A normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom, and a normal button image as the third from the bottom above the second normal button image BG from the bottom. A BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged, and a normal button image BG (that is, simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged above the third normal button image BG from the bottom and as the fourth from the bottom. Four button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the button image BG) is arranged.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are four button image BGs (normal button image BGs).
) Is placed. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

The four button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → based on the expectation degree (variable production start command) that is a hit (big hit or small hit).
In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (hit rich)), white blinking → blue The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high in the order of blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (hit rich)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (C), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 171 (C)
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in the above is
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example). It may be changed from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171 (D), the background image is subsequently provided with seven colors. The hit confirmation effect is performed when the image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of a hit.

In FIG. 171 (D), the stock is on the right side in FIG. 171 (B) (arranged second from the bottom).
When the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is designated as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the light emission mode of. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. like,
A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (D) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and announcing the display of the premier image is played from the speaker 67, as shown in FIG. 171 (E).
Subsequently, the premier image PMG1 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG1. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the hit confirmation effect is performed. This premier image PMG1 is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image (an image that appears in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. )one of. Here, as the background image of the premier image PMG1, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the premier image PMG1 having a rectangular shape. Has been done.
The ally character CRA, which is largely displayed in the central portion of the premier image PMG1 having a rectangular shape, may be a still image or a moving image.

As a condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG1, the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. ) Satisfies, followed by FIG. 171 (D) as the second condition.
It is necessary that the condition that the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 while the rainbow image BKH shown in the above is displayed on the display screen 7a is satisfied.

After that, the premier image PMG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (F), the normal button image BG stocked (third from the bottom) on the right side in FIG. 171 (B) appears. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As you can see, the production button 6
A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of 3 is displayed. also,
Above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (F) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to red lighting (red blinking) or yellow lighting (yellow blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and announcing the display of the premier image is played from the speaker 67, as shown in FIG. 171 (G).
Subsequently, the premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG2. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the hit confirmation effect is performed. This premier image PMG2 is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image (an image that appears in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. )one of. Here, as the background image of the premier image PMG2, the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a and the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the premier image PMG1 of FIG. 171 (E) are different rainbows. The image is displayed, and the character image "Victory" is displayed one after another from the right side to the left side of the premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape. The character image "Victory" is displayed in a plurality of stages (here, two stages each) on the upper side and the lower side of the premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape. The size of the outer shape of the premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape is the same as the outer shape of the premier image PMG1 in FIG. 171 (E).

As a condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG2, the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. ) Satisfies, followed by FIG. 171 (D) as the second condition.
With the rainbow image BKH shown in (1) displayed on the display screen 7a, the condition that the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again within the operation acceptance acceptance period of the effect button 63 is satisfied, and then the third As a condition, the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (F) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
The player is again in the state of being displayed in the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance acceptance period of the effect button 63.
It is necessary to satisfy the condition of operating (pressing operation).

The premier image PMG1 appearing in FIG. 171 (E) and the premier image PMG2 appearing in FIG. 171 (G) may be interchanged. In this case, as a condition for the premier image PMG2 to appear in FIG. 171 (E), the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player is within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation) is satisfied, and then, as the second condition, FIG. 171 (D).
), The condition that the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again within the operation acceptance acceptance period of the effect button 63 while the rainbow image BKH shown in) is displayed on the display screen 7a must be satisfied. As a condition for the premier image PMG1 to appear in FIG. 171 (G), the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player can perform the effect button within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The condition of operating (pressing) 63 is satisfied, and then the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition.
In the state displayed in, the player again returns the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance acceptance period of the effect button 63.
The condition of operating (pressing operation) is satisfied, and then the player again presses the effect button 6 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (F) displayed on the display screen 7a as the third condition.
It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation) within the operation acceptance valid period of 3.

After that, the premier image PMG2 disappeared from the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (H), it was stocked on the right side in FIG. 171 (B) (arranged fourth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top). When the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) emits a predetermined light as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. Displayed in mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As shown above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63.
Is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (H) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking) or rainbow lighting (rainbow blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound is played from the speaker 67.
As shown in FIG. 171 (I), subsequently, although the rainbow image BKH disappears from the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a winning effect. The left movable accessory 14L is advanced (moved) toward the front (front) center advance position (in a direction close to each other), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a. The left side decoration part, which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side, and the right side decoration part, which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united. Left decorative part of left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R
One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the above is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Less than,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode).
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have a white light emitting mode, and the alphabetic character "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), and the letter "V" is formed on the light guide plate, and the outer circumference excluding the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate is formed. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed on the light guide plate.
The letter "V" appears due to diffuse reflection at "V". Further, on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Lights up (for example, red) and emits light toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R through the light guide plate, but the alphabetic character "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Retreat (move) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 171 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed. It becomes a big hit or a small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. 171 (D) and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (that is, the hit confirmation effect is performed). After that, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63, so that something that is beneficial to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the image may be further notified, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (D) and the winning confirmation effect is performed, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. By performing the operation), the premier images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, can appear, which contributes to the improvement of the operation motivation of the effect button 63. be able to.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (D) and the winning confirmation effect is performed, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. Then, along with this, the premier images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate without duplication, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ing. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player can perform the effect button 63.
There was no need to operate (press operation), and it was just a matter of watching the progress of the production. Is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that it is difficult to lose the freshness of the effect during the fluctuation in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. Can be done.

[Direction B that can be announced]
Next, the winning notification possible effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification possible effect B. This noticeable effect B is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the result B, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 172 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the ally character CRA in FIG. 172 (A).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom.
Four button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (D), the ally character CRA in FIG. 172 (C).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two more button image BGs are obtained, which are usually stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, above the normal button image BG arranged second from the bottom, and as the third from the bottom. Button image BG is placed, and this normal button image B
Above G, a normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are four button image BGs (normal button image BGs).
) Is placed. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

The four button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → based on the expectation degree (variable production start command) that is a hit (big hit or small hit).
In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (hit rich)), white blinking → blue The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high in the order of blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (hit rich)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 172 (E)
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in the above is
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example). It may be changed from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 172 (F), the background image is subsequently provided with seven colors. The hit confirmation effect is performed when the image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of a hit.

In FIG. 172 (F), the stock is on the right side in FIG. 172 (D) (arranged second from the bottom).
When the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is designated as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the light emission mode of. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. like,
A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and announcing the display of the premier image is played from the speaker 67, as shown in FIG. 172 (G).
Subsequently, the premier image PMG having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the hit confirmation effect is performed. This premier image PMG is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image (an image that appears in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. )one of.
Here, as the background image of the premier image PMG, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the ally character CR is displayed.
A is largely displayed in the center of the premier image PMG having a rectangular shape. The ally character CRA, which is displayed large in the center of the premier image PMG having a rectangular shape, is
It may be a still image or a moving image.

As a condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG, the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 172 (E) is started as the first condition, and the player can perform the effect button 6 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63.
The condition of operating (pressing operation) 3 is satisfied, and then the player operates the effect button 63 again with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 172 (F) displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition. It is necessary that the condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation) within the reception valid period is satisfied.

After that, the premier image PMG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 172 (H), the normal button image BG stocked (third from the bottom) on the right side in FIG. 172 (D) appears. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As you can see, the production button 63
A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (H) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to red lighting (red blinking) or yellow lighting (yellow blinking). ) May be changed.

In FIG. 172 (H), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 172 (I). As shown in FIG. 172 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged fourth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As you can see, the operation acceptance validity period of the effect button 63 (
For example, a timer bar TB indicating (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (I) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking) or rainbow lighting (rainbow blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172 (H), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) whose appearance rate is extremely low, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, a premier image different from the premier image already displayed in FIG. 172 (G) is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 172 (I) described above.

In FIG. 172 (I), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 172 (J). As shown above, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each have a line connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area (center line in the left-right direction). ) Is lined up and stopped. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It will be stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) will be started.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172 (I), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) whose appearance rate is extremely low, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, a premier image different from the premier image already displayed in FIG. 172 (G) is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 172 (J) described above.

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. 172 (F) and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (that is, the hit confirmation effect is performed). After that, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63, so that something that is beneficial to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the image may be further notified, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, FIGS. 172 (H) and 172
In (I), the player operates the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance period of the effect button 63 (
When the pressing operation is not performed, the premier images other than the premier image PMG that appeared in FIG. 172 (G) do not appear at all. In other words, in the winning notification possible effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, a rare image (appears in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. image)
Since the player can give the opportunity for the premier image to appear by operating (pressing) the effect button 63, it can contribute to the improvement of the operation motivation of the effect button 63. ..

In addition, in the winning notification possible effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, FIGS. 172 (H) and 172
In (I), it is assumed that the player has the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63.
When the operation (pressing operation) is performed, the premier image PMG2 in the winning notification possible effect A shown in FIG. 171 (G) and other premium images (FIG. 171) are not duplicated.
Premium images (premium images different from the premier image PMG2 in the winning notification possible effect A of (G) and the premier image in the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172 (G)) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is designed to be displayed in.

In this way, in the effect B that can be notified of the result, the rainbow image BKH is shown in FIG. 172 (F).
Is displayed on the display screen 7a and the winning confirmation effect is performed. In FIGS. 172 (H) and 172 (I), the player temporarily presses the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. When the operation (pressing operation) is performed, the premier images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate without duplication, are displayed one after another in the image display device 7.
Is displayed on the display screen 7a of. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 at all and merely watches the progress of the effect. However, in the winning notification possible effect B, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the hit is achieved. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is confirmed that (big hit or small hit) will occur.

[Direction C that can be announced]
Next, the winning notification possible effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification possible effect C. This noticeable effect C is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the result C, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 173 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (B), the ally character CRA in FIG. 173 (A).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom.
Two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), the ally character CRA in FIG. 173 (C).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, we have obtained three more button image BGs, which are usually stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, above the normal button image BG placed second from the bottom, and as the third from the bottom. Button image BG is placed, and this normal button image B
Above G, a normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom, and above the normal button image BG, the normal button image BG is arranged as the fifth from the bottom.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are five button image BGs (normal button image BGs).
) Is placed. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

The five button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → based on the expectation degree (variable production start command) that is a hit (big hit or small hit).
In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (hit rich)), white blinking → blue The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high in the order of blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (hit rich)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the five button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 173 (E)
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in the above is
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it changes to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example). It may be changed from white lighting to white blinking and from white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 173 (F), the background image is subsequently provided with seven colors. The hit confirmation effect is performed when the image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of a hit.

In FIG. 173 (F), the stock is on the right side in FIG. 173 (D) (arranged second from the bottom).
When the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is designated as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the light emission mode of. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. like,
A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the embodiment, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting).

In FIG. 173 (F), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 173 (G). As shown in FIG. 173 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged third from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a,
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63)
Is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 173 (
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in G) is the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to red lighting (red blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (F), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) whose appearance rate is extremely low, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (G) described above.

In FIG. 173 (G), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 173 (H). As shown in FIG. 173 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged fourth from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a,
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63)
Is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 173 (
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in H) is the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (G), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) whose appearance rate is extremely low, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, in FIG. 173 (F), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premier image different from the already displayed premier image is displayed. It will be displayed on the screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (H) described above.

In FIG. 173 (H), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 173 (I). As shown in FIG. 173 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged fifth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As you can see, the operation acceptance validity period of the effect button 63 (
For example, a timer bar TB indicating (3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (I) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to rainbow lighting (rainbow blinking)). But it may be.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (H), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) whose appearance rate is extremely low, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, FIG. 173 (F) and FIG. 173 (
In G), the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 to display the premier image on the screen 7.
If it is displayed on a, a premier image different from the already displayed premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (I) described above.

In FIG. 173 (I), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 173 (J). As shown above, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lines connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area (center line in the left-right direction). ) Is lined up and stopped. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It will be stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) will be started.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (I), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) whose appearance rate is extremely low, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, FIG. 173 (F) and FIG. 173 (
When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in G) or FIG. 173 (H) and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premier image different from the already displayed premier image is displayed. It will be displayed on the screen 7a. After that, the above-mentioned FIG. 173 (J)
Will proceed to.

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. 173 (F) and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (that is, the hit confirmation effect is performed). After that, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63, so that something that is beneficial to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the image may be further notified, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, FIGS. 173 (F) to 173.
In (I), the player operates the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance period of the effect button 63 (
When the pressing operation is not performed, the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, does not appear at all. In other words, in the winning notification possible effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the winning confirmation effect is performed, a rare image (appears in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. The player operates the effect button 63 (the image) at the opportunity for the premier image to appear.
Since it can be given by pressing the button 63, it can contribute to the improvement of the motivation to operate the effect button 63.

In addition, in the winning notification possible effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the winning confirmation effect is performed, FIGS. 173 (G) to 172.
In (I), it is assumed that the player has the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63.
When the operation (pressing operation) is performed, for example, FIG. 171 (E), (
Premier images PMG1 and PMG2 in the winning notification possible production A shown in G), and other premium images (premier images PMG1 in the winning notification possible production A in FIGS. 171 (E) and 171 (G)).
, Premium images different from PMG2) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In this way, in the effect C that can be notified of the result, the rainbow image BKH is shown in FIG. 173 (F).
Is displayed on the display screen 7a and the winning confirmation effect is performed. In FIGS. 173 (G) to 172 (I), the player temporarily presses the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. When the operation (pressing operation) is performed, the premier images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate without duplication, are displayed one after another in the image display device 7.
Is displayed on the display screen 7a of. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 at all and merely watches the progress of the effect. However, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the result is a hit. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is confirmed that (big hit or small hit) will occur.

[Direction D that can be announced]
Next, the winning notification possible effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification possible effect D. The effect D that can be announced is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the result D, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 174 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), the ally character CRA in FIG. 174 (A).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom.
Two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (D), the ally character CRA in FIG. 174 (C).
The button get effect is developed (started) as the attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG is a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two more button image BGs are obtained, which are usually stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, above the normal button image BG arranged second from the bottom, and as the third from the bottom. Button image BG is placed, and this normal button image B
Above G, a normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are four button image BGs (normal button image BGs).
) Is placed. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

The four button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → based on the expectation degree (variable production start command) that is a hit (big hit or small hit).
In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (hit rich)), white blinking → blue The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high in the order of blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (hit rich)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 174 (E)
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in the above is
It is the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (here, it is lit in white).

In FIG. 174 (E), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 174 (F). As shown in FIG. 174 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a,
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63)
Is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 174 (
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in F) changes from the predetermined light emitting mode (white lighting) of the button image BG to blue lighting in FIG. 174 (E). It suggests to the player that the expectation of becoming a big hit or a small hit is high.

The reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG has changed from white lighting to blue lighting is that the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174 (E).
When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because it was not possible to perform a definite hit effect. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

In FIG. 174 (F), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 174 (G). As shown in FIG. 174 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged third from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a,
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63)
Is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In addition, FIG. 174 (
The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in G) changes from blue lighting to green lighting, which is the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG in FIG. 174 (F). It suggests to the player that the expectation of becoming a big hit or a small hit is high.

The reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG has changed from blue lighting to green lighting is that the player does not operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174 (F).
When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because it was not possible to perform a definite hit effect. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

In FIG. 174 (G), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 174 (H). As shown in FIG. 174 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged fourth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps with the lower part of the front surface thereof. As you can see, the operation acceptance validity period of the effect button 63 (
For example, a timer bar TB indicating (3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (H) is from green lighting to red lighting, which is the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG in FIG. 174 (G). It suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that it will change to and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

The reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG has changed from green lighting to red lighting is that the player does not operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174 (G).
When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because it was not possible to perform a definite hit effect. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

In FIG. 174 (H), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, it is subsequently shown in FIG. 174 (I). As described above, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction close to each other). At the front (front) center position (advanced position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, the left decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the right movable accessory. The right decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the 14R, is united, and the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Less than,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode).
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have a white light emitting mode, and the alphabetic character "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), and the letter "V" is formed on the light guide plate, and the outer circumference excluding the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate is formed. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed on the light guide plate.
The letter "V" appears due to diffuse reflection at "V". Further, on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Lights up (for example, red) and emits light toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R through the light guide plate, but the alphabetic character "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Retreat (move) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed. It becomes a big hit or a small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

As described above, in the winning notification possible effect D, when the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing, in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), the center of the display screen 7a. The large button image displayed on the part changes the predetermined light emission mode of the BG and hits (
By suggesting to the player that the expectation of becoming a big hit (big hit or small hit) is high and urging the operation (pressing operation) to the effect button 63, a rainbow image which is a background image for confirming the hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed. The player can get an opportunity to make it appear, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of the hit is played from the speaker 67, and the background image. An image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a.
The hit confirmation effect displayed on is performed. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is
It is a specific image and is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit. Further, for example, FIG. 174 (E)
In the above, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of the hit is played from the speaker 67, and the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. An effect is performed, and in FIG. 174 (F), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and announcing the display of the premier image is generated. A premier image flowing from the speaker 67 and having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image and displayed on the display screen 7a to perform a rainbow effect by the premier image. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the hit confirmation effect is performed. This premier image is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image (an image that appears in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. It is one. Here, as the background image of the premier image, another rainbow image different from the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the ally character is displayed large in the center of the premier image having a rectangular shape. There is. The ally character that is displayed large in the center of the premier image having a rectangular shape may be a still image or a moving image. In addition, after the winning confirmation effect is performed, tentatively
When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the rare image having an extremely low appearance rate in the effect A that can be notified of the result, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (E) and 171 (G), without duplication. In addition to the premier images PMG1 and PMG2 that are images that appear in the rare production), other premium images (other premier images that are different from the premier images PMG1 and PMG2 in the winning notification possible production A in FIGS. 171 (E) and 171 (G)). ) And the like are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As described above, in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), the player temporarily presses the effect button 6
When 3 is operated (pressed operation), a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is emitted from the speaker 67.
After the hit confirmation effect is performed in which an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player temporarily presses the effect button 6
When 3 is operated (pressed) at a predetermined timing, a premier image, which is a rare image (an image appearing in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, can appear, so that the effect button 63 is operated. It can contribute to the improvement of motivation.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect D, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), a specific sound for announcing the winning confirmation is emitted accordingly. After a hit confirmation effect is performed in which an image flowing from the speaker 67 and having seven colors as a background image (so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player temporarily presses the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. When the operation (pressing operation) is performed with, the premier images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate without duplication, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It has become so. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 at all and merely watches the progress of the effect. However, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the result is a hit. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is confirmed that (big hit or small hit) will occur.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image blur effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example,

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect of the effect that can be announced.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIGS. 171 (A) to 17 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 1 (J), the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the winning result (win (big hit or small hit)) by a specific lottery is operated by the effect button 63 (operation means). In the hit confirmation effect notified by, the effect button 63 in 171 (C) (
FIG. 171 for notifying the winning result (win (big hit or small hit)) by the operation of the operation means).
The first effect of displaying the rainbow image BKH (specific image) of (D) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the number of operations of the effect button 63 (operation means) following the first effect is the upper limit number of operations. When the image is not reached and remains, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (D) and 171 (F), a second effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means) can be executed. According to this configuration, the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and after notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the effect button 63 (operation) When the number of operations of the means) does not reach the upper limit of the number of operations and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 (operation means), so that something beneficial to the player is further notified. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may be done, and it is possible to improve the interest.
The same applies to the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIGS. 171 (A) to 17 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 1 (J), before the first effect is executed, the button image BG (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) in FIG. 171 (B) is displayed on the image display device 7. A third effect stocked on the display screen 7a is executed, and as shown in FIG. 171 (B), four button image BGs (normal button image BGs) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By being stocked in the state, the upper limit number of operations is four, which is the number of stocks of the button image BG (operation means image). According to this configuration, the four stocks are the effect buttons 63.
Since it is the number of times that (operation means) can be operated, the winning result (winning (winning)) within this number of times
The rainbow image BKH (specific image) that notifies the big hit or small hit)) is the image display device 7
Can be suggested to the player that it may be displayed on the display screen 7a of.
The same applies to the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIGS. 171 (D) to 17 of FIGS. 171 (D) to FIG.
As shown in 1 (G), when the second effect is being executed, the effect button 63 (operation means)
Is operated, the premier image PMG1 (special image) of FIG. 171 (E) and FIG. 171 (G) are operated.
The fourth effect of displaying the premier image PMG2 (special image) of the above on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be executed. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the effect button When the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated when the number of operations of 63 (operation means) does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the premier image PMG1 (special image) or the premier image PMG2 (special image) is operated. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. As a result, the player positively operates the effect button 63 (operation means) when he / she sees the special images such as the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. That is, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate the effect button 63 (operation means) at all and merely watches the progress of the effect. However, the effect A in which the result can be announced includes an effect that the player wants to further operate the effect button 63 (operation means) even when it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.
The same applies to the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIGS. 171 (A) to 17 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 1 (J), the special image is the premier image PMG1 or the premier image PMG2. According to this configuration, the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2 are one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare production) having an extremely low appearance rate, and the player positively directs the effect button by seeing the premier image. Since the 63 (operation means) is operated, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation to operate the effect button 63 (operation means).
The same applies to the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (E) and 171 (G) of the winning notification possible effect A, the third effect is a rare image (in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. A special sound for announcing the display of the premier image corresponding to the special images such as the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2, which are one of the appearing images), is output. When the special sound does not flow, the player can automatically (sequence) even if the special images such as the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2 are suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) Although it may be recognized as a normally appearing image that is only displayed, the special image becomes a rare image (an image that appears in a rare production) due to the flow of a special sound.
It is possible to recognize that it is, and prevent it from being inadvertently overlooked without being noticed.
The same applies to the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 171 (D) of the winning notification possible effect A, the first effect is a specific sound for announcing a hit confirmation corresponding to a specific image called a rainbow image BKH. Is output. If no specific sound is played, the player will see the rainbow image BKH.
Even if the specific image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be recognized as a normally appearing image that is merely automatically (sequentially) displayed as the effect progresses. By playing a specific sound, it is possible to recognize a specific image as an image that announces the confirmation of a hit, and to prevent the image from being inadvertently overlooked without being noticed.
The same applies to the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect that can be announced.
[Modification 1]
In the winning notification possible effect A of FIG. 171, the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D of FIG. 174, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is an image display device. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 displayed on the display screen 7a of 7, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image in the image display device 7. A special sound for announcing the display of the premier image as a specific image flows from the speaker 67, and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 may be used as appropriate. In this case, the expected degree of winning result by the specific lottery set in the sword image (that is, the expected degree of the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the sword image) is set in the button image BG. It is preferable that it is higher than the one that is used. Since the button image BG is set to have a low expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit), the player can expect a hit (big hit or small hit) when the button image BG is displayed on the display screen 7a. Even if you are discouraged, the sword image is set to have a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the button image BG, so the player can see that the sword image is displayed on the display screen 7a. You can expect a hit (big hit or small hit).

[Modification 2]
In the winning notification possible effect A of 171 and the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D of FIG. 174, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image for notifying the confirmation of hit. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, a specific sound announcing the winning confirmation is made to flow from the speaker 67 by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101).
A rainbow image may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a specific image. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 3]
In the winning notification possible effect A of 171 and the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D of FIG. 174, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound for announcing the display of the premier image as a special image is played from the speaker 67, and the premier image is displayed as a special image. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, a special sound for announcing the display of the premier image as a special image is made to flow from the speaker 67 by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and the premier image is displayed as a special image in the image display device 7. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 4]
The premier image PMG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image in the winning notification possible effect A of FIG. 171 (E), and the premier image PMG2 is displayed as a special image in the winning notification possible effect A of FIG. 171 (G). It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, a different premier image was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 each time. However, the same premier image may be displayed in the winning notification possible effect A to the winning notification possible effect D. For example, premier image PMG1 or premier image P
The premier image of either one of MG2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a as a common premier image. This can contribute to reducing the number of images (image data) stored in the ROM 103, and by reducing the capacity of the ROM 103, the ROM 13 can be reduced.
It can also contribute to cost reduction.

[Modification 5]
The winning notification possible effect A in FIG. 171, the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174 are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The button image BG was digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, so that the button image BG disappeared from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 one by one.
However, the remaining number of stocked button image BGs, that is, the number of stocks is "X remaining (X)".
The message "is in stock number)" may be displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. At this time, the announcement "X remaining (X is the number of stocks)" may be played from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. As the "predetermined display mode", for example, a specific sound and a specific image are lit in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich)). The appearance expectation of, the special sound, and the appearance expectation of the special image are set high respectively.

[Modification 6]
In the winning notification possible effect A of FIG. 171, the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D of FIG. 174, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is an image display device. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 7]
The winning notification possible effect A in FIG. 171, the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174 may not have a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect H3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player.
In the production of notifying the winning result of a specific lottery by the operation of the operating means.
The first effect of displaying a specific image notifying the winning result on the display screen, and
Following the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect of prompting the operation of the operation means when the number of operations of the operation means does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H3-1.
Before the first effect is executed, the third effect of stocking the operation means image imitating the operation means on the display screen is executed.
The upper limit number of operations is the number of stocks of the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H3-1 or the aspect H3-2.
If the operating means is operated while the second effect is being executed, the fourth effect of displaying a special image on the display screen can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H3-3.
The special image is a premium image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H3-3 or the aspect H3-4.
The third effect outputs a special sound corresponding to the special image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H3-1 to H3-5.
The first effect outputs a specific sound corresponding to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the specific target display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. This specific target display effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific target display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 10
7 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and drives the second movable accessory 15 and the like when an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect is included.

[Specific target display effect A]
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect A. In the specific target display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 175 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display unit TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display unit TH represents the characters of "OARO". The specific target display unit TH is "OARO".
Each character of is configured to emit light. In the present embodiment, the "O" of the specific target display unit TH
Each letter of "ARO" emits blue light. The color of the light emitted from the specific target display unit TH may be any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. And the second movable accessory 1
5 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG that imitates the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is the specific target display unit T.
It is a character image imitating the character of "OARO" of H. The character image of "OARO" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is the second movable accessory 1.
It is displayed as if moving from 5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is tilted diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed so that it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (E), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the characters "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH and the character image of "OARO" of the display unit image HG in the second movable accessory 15 are arranged in parallel in a state of being tilted at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (G), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move diagonally upward to the right, specifically toward the position of the second movable accessory 15 in an inclined state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. Specifically, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to jump behind (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 in a tilted state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. , The second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second
The movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to its original position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (J), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates counterclockwise and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

[Specific target display effect B]
FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect B. In the specific target display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 176 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific target display effect B is displayed.
The second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display unit TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display unit TH represents the characters of "OARO". The specific target display unit TH is "OARO".
Each character of is configured to emit light. In the present embodiment, the "O" of the specific target display unit TH
Each letter of "ARO" emits blue light. The color of the light emitted from the specific target display unit TH may be any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (C), "OA" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.
Of the characters of "RO", the last two characters "RO" that were emitting light disappear, and only the previous two characters "OA" are in a state of emitting light. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8 is used.
The display of L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG that imitates the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is the specific target display unit T.
It is a character image imitating the character of "OA" which is a part of H. The character image of "OA" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is the second movable accessory 1.
It is displayed as if moving from 5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is tilted diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed so that it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (E), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15.
That is, the light emitting "OA" character of the specific target display unit TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image of "OA" of the display unit image HG are arranged in parallel in a state of being tilted at the same angle. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (F), the display of the character image of "OA" in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position, and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (G), the “OA” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.
Of the characters of "RO", the previous two characters "OA" that had been emitting light disappear, and the two characters "RO" behind the disappearing character emit light. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit T) located at the retracted position (home position).
H) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (H), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG that imitates the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is the specific target display unit T.
It is a character image imitating the character of "RO" which is a part of H. The character image of "RO" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is the second movable accessory 1.
It is displayed as if moving from 5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is tilted diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed so that it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (I), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15.
That is, the light emitting "RO" character of the specific target display unit TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image of "RO" of the display unit image HG are arranged in parallel in a state of being tilted at the same angle. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (J), the display of the character image of "RO" in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position, and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

[Specific target display effect C]
FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect C. In the specific target display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 177 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display unit TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display unit TH represents the characters of "OARO". The specific target display unit TH is "OARO".
Each character of is configured to emit light. In the present embodiment, the "O" of the specific target display unit TH
Each letter of "ARO" emits blue light. The color of the light emitted from the specific target display unit TH may be any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. And the second movable accessory 1
5 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (D), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, at the same time, the “OARO” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 Of the letters
The previous two letters "OA" that were emitting light disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the characters of “OA” which is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "OA" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is the second movable accessory 1.
It is displayed as if moving from 5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is tilted diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed so that it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (E), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15.
That is, the light emitting "OA" character of the specific target display unit TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image of "OA" of the display unit image HG are arranged in parallel in a state of being tilted at the same angle. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (F), the display of the character image of "OA" in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position, and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (G), the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation).
Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (H), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, at the same time, the “OARO” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 Of the letters
The last two letters "RO" that were emitting light disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed.
The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the characters of "RO" which is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "RO" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is the second movable accessory 1.
It is displayed as if moving from 5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is tilted diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed so that it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (I), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15.
That is, the light emitting "RO" character of the specific target display unit TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image of "RO" of the display unit image HG are arranged in parallel in a state of being tilted at the same angle. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (J), the display of the character image of "RO" in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position, and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

[Specific target display effect D]
FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect D. In the specific target display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display unit TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display unit TH represents the characters of "OARO". The specific target display unit TH is "OARO".
Each character of is configured to emit light. In the present embodiment, the "O" of the specific target display unit TH
Each character of "ARO" emits blue light, but at this stage, each character does not emit light. The color of the light emitted from the specific target display unit TH may be any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), the fluctuating left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R disappear on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, among the characters "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, only the second character "A" from the front emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), "OA" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.
Of the letters "RO", the letter "A" that was emitting light disappears. Then, the image display device 7
Display unit image H imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 on the display screen 7a of
G is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the character "A" that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "A" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display unit image HG (character image imitating the character "A") is behind the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the character "A" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15. ((
It is displayed so that it pops out downward from the back side). The display unit image HG is displayed slightly smaller than the size of the character “A” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed in the same size as the size of the character “A” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being further enlarged. The display image HG is
It is displayed slightly larger than the size of the character "A" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (F), the display of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, among the characters "OARO" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, only the third character "R" from the front emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (G), the “OA” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.
Of the letters "RO", the letter "R" that was emitting light disappears. Then, the image display device 7
Display unit image H imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 on the display screen 7a of
G is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the character “R” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "R" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display unit image HG (character image imitating the character "R") is behind the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the character "R" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15. ((
It is displayed so that it pops out downward from the back side).

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed in the same size as the size of the character “R” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being further enlarged. The display image HG is
It is displayed slightly larger than the size of the character "R" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the display of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the specific target display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, a first effect in which the specific target display unit TH representing a specific target performs a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH. Based on the above, a second effect in which the display unit image HG imitating at least a part of the specific target display unit TH is displayed on the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7 is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the specific target display unit TH.
The second movable accessory 15 (movable member) configured to be movable, including the above, performs a predetermined operation, and the second
In the production of, the display unit image HG displays the display screen 7a based on a predetermined operation of the second movable accessory 15.
Is displayed in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, and in the first effect, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged. The motion of tilting at a predetermined angle is performed, and in the second effect, the display unit image HG is performed based on the motion of the second movable accessory 15.
Is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second effect,
A third effect is executed in which the display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15 in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second effect,
The display unit image HG is displayed as if it moves from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15, and the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Perform the production of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the first effect, the specific target display unit TH emits light, and in the second effect, based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH. , The display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed from the specific target display unit TH on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH. The display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a as if moving to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific target display effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 175 to 178, a predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 (
Here, the display unit image H is based on the effect that the specific target display unit TH operates or emits light.
Although G is displayed on the display screen 7a, the predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH is not limited to the operation and light emission, and may be various other effects. For example, the specific target display unit TH
May be an effect of deforming, an effect of moving in a predetermined direction, or an effect of extinguishing light emission.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 175 to 178, the specific target display unit TH is provided on the movable member (second movable accessory 15), but may be provided on a fixed member, for example, and may be displayed on the display screen 7a. It may be the one that has been done. That is, any mode may be used as long as it displays a specific object.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 178, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, but the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 blinks. The display unit image HG may be displayed on the display screen 7a based on the above. Further, the display unit image HG may also be displayed so as to repeat display and non-display so as to blink.
[Modification 4]
In FIG. 178, the blue display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, but for example, the display unit image displayed on the display screen 7a. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested depending on the aspect of HG. For example, the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested by the color, size, number of times of display, number of blinks, etc. of the display unit image HG displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I1-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine provided with a specific target display unit that represents a specific target.
The first effect in which the specific target display unit performs a predetermined effect, and
Based on the predetermined effect of the specific target display unit, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a display unit image imitating at least a part of the specific target display unit is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-1.
Including the specific target display unit, a movable member configured to be movable is further provided.
In the first effect, the movable member performs a predetermined operation.
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the predetermined operation of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-2.
The movable member is arranged adjacent to the display means, and the movable member is arranged adjacent to the display means.
In the first effect, the movable member is tilted at a predetermined angle.
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if it were moved from the movable member to the display means based on the operation of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-3.
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the display unit image is displayed in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image is displayed in a state of being tilted in the same manner as the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-3 or the aspect I1-4.
After the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if it were moved from the display means to the movable member, and the movable member tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. The fourth effect can be further executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-1.
In the first effect, the specific target display unit emits light.
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the light emission of the specific target display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-6.
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display unit as if the display unit image moves from the specific target display unit to the display unit based on the light emission of the specific target display unit. Be done,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the plurality of accessory combination effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 182. This combination effect of multiple characters can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the plurality of accessory combination effects, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is imaged. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 10
7 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and drives the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the like when an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect is included. ..

[Multiple roles combined production A]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of accessory combination effect A. In the plurality of accessory combination production A, first, as shown in FIG. 179 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire display is visible. Further, although not shown in FIG. 179 (A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located in the position (home position). The right-side movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the entire right-side movable accessory 14R because it is hidden behind the right-side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position.

Further, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is the lower portion 15.
1 (first part) is visible, and the upper portion 152 (second part) described later is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. That is, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is visually recognizable (a part of the second movable accessory 15 is difficult to see) at the retracted position.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. note that,
The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effect may be performed in the displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the left from a position (retracted position) behind the right side portion of the game board 2 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (E), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. also,
The second movable accessory 15 moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.
That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the coalescence here includes direct coalescence, indirect coalescence, non-contacting but close position arrangement, and combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (F), in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second
The movable accessory 15 and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (G), the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14
R moves to the right from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the position behind the right side portion of the game board 2 (evacuation position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the entire right side movable accessory 14R because it is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position. Further, in the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 is visible at the retracted position, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2 so that it is difficult to see.

[Multiple roles combined production B]
FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of accessory combination effect B. In the plurality of accessory combination production B, first, as shown in FIG. 180 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image display device 7 is displayed.
Of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire display is visible. Further, although not shown in FIG. 180 (A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located in the position (home position). The right side movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the right side movable accessory 14R because the entire right side movable accessory 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 in the retracted position (home position).

Further, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to be visible as a whole in the retracted position (home position) without being hidden by the upper portion of the game board 2.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. note that,
The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effect may be performed in the displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the left from a position (retracted position) behind the right side portion of the game board 2 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (E), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. also,
The second movable accessory 15 moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the coalescence here includes direct coalescence, indirect coalescence, non-contacting but close position arrangement, and combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (F), in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second
The movable accessory 15 and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (G), the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14
R moves to the right from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the position behind the right side portion of the game board 2 (evacuation position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the entire right side movable accessory 14R because it is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position. Further, the second movable accessory 15 is stationary in a state where the entire second movable accessory 15 can be visually recognized without being hidden by the upper portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position.

[Multiple roles combined production C]
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of accessory combination effect C. In the plurality of accessory combination effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 181 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire display is visible. Further, although not shown in FIG. 181 (A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located in the position (home position). The right side movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the right side movable accessory 14R because the entire right side movable accessory 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 in the retracted position (home position).

Further, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is the lower portion 15.
1 (first part) is in a state where it is difficult to see, and the upper portion 152 (second part), which will be described later, is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is in a state where it is difficult to see. That is, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is visually recognizable (a part of the second movable accessory 15 is difficult to see) at the retracted position (home position).

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. note that,
The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effect may be performed in the displayed state. And the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 1
A suggestion image SG suggesting that the effect of combining the 4R and the second movable accessory 15 is performed is displayed. Specifically, a suggestion image SG, which is a lightning-like image connecting the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15, is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the left from a position (retracted position) behind the right side portion of the game board 2 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (E), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. also,
The second movable accessory 15 moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.
That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the coalescence here includes direct coalescence, indirect coalescence, non-contacting but close position arrangement, and combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (F), in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second
The movable accessory 15 and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (G), the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14
R moves to the right from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the position behind the right side portion of the game board 2 (evacuation position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the entire right side movable accessory 14R because it is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position. Further, in the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 is visible at the retracted position, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2 so that it is difficult to see.

[Multiple roles combined production D]
FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of accessory combination effect D. In the plurality of accessory combination effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 182 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
Of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire display is visible. Further, although not shown in FIG. 182 (A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located in the position (home position). The right side movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the right side movable accessory 14R because the entire right side movable accessory 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 in the retracted position (home position).

Further, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is the lower portion 15.
1 (first part) is in a state where it is difficult to see, and the upper portion 152 (second part), which will be described later, is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is in a state where it is difficult to see. That is, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is visually recognizable (a part of the second movable accessory 15 is difficult to see) at the retracted position (home position).

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R
Are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. "Line up along the horizontal direction" here means
In addition to those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction, those that are lined up almost horizontally are also included. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. note that,
The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effect may be performed in the displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the left from a position (retracted position) behind the right side portion of the game board 2 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (E), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the right movable accessory 14R is arranged at a predetermined distance from the left fixed accessory 14L. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the combination here means to combine directly or indirectly.
Includes non-contact but close proximity or combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (F), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
A pair of movable members 1 hidden behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed accessory 14L
The 4LP projects to the right toward the right movable accessory 14R and moves. It should be noted that the illustration of the movable member 14LP hidden behind the upper end portion of the left fixed accessory 14L is omitted here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (G), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
A pair of movable members 14LP project, and an annular decorative member is formed by the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the pair of movable members 14LP. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the face image 14G is displayed in the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, the movable member 14LP, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (H), the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the pair of movable members 14LP move to the left so as to return to the positions behind the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the left fixed accessory 14L, respectively. After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (I), the pair of movable members 14LP return to the positions behind the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the left fixed accessory 14L, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (J), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the position behind the right portion of the game board 2 (evacuation position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R and the second
The movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the entire right side movable accessory 14R because it is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position. Further, in the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 is visible at the retracted position, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2 so that it is difficult to see.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the combined production of multiple characters.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) is arranged so as to be entirely visible, and the second movable part is arranged so as to be partially visible. It includes an accessory 15 (first movable member) and a right-side movable accessory 14R (second movable member) that is arranged so that it is difficult to see the whole. Then, the left fixed accessory 14L and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are used.
The second movable accessory 15 that has moved to a predetermined position (advanced position) in front of (display means) and the right movable accessory 14R that has moved to a predetermined position (advanced) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. And, are united, and it is possible to execute a united effect that represents a specific target. According to this configuration
It is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181 and 182, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to be difficult to see with the lower portion 151 (first portion) which is visibly arranged. Includes the top 152 (second part) and. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181 and 182, in the combined effect, the second movable accessory 15 is at a predetermined position (advanced position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ), The lower 151 and the upper 152 of the second movable accessory 15 are visibly arranged. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, it is suggested that the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R are combined before the combined effect. It is possible to further execute the combined suggestion effect (in the present embodiment, the effect in which the suggestion SG is displayed). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 182, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment further includes a movable member 14LP (third movable member) arranged so as to be difficult to see by the left fixed accessory 14L.
Movable member 14L moved to a visible position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
P is combined with the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R, and represents a part of a specific object. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, in the combined effect, a face image 14G representing a part of a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to the configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the combined production of multiple characters.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to represent a human face as a specific object, but the specific object is a character or the like. It is not limited to living things and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R are combined with the left fixed accessory 14L at the advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It may be combined at a position other than the advance position.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 181, the suggestion image SG is displayed as a coalescence suggestion effect suggesting that the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R are united, but as a coalescence suggestion effect. May be other than the display of an image, and may be, for example, an effect in which the characters move or emit light.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I2-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
Fixing members arranged so that the whole can be seen,
A first movable member, at least part of which is visibly arranged,
A gaming machine equipped with a second movable member, which is arranged so as to be difficult to see as a whole.
At least, the fixing member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, and the second movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means are united. , It is possible to perform a coalescing effect that represents a specific object,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I2-1.
The first movable member includes a first portion that is visibly arranged and a second portion that is arranged so that it is difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I2-2.
In the union effect, the first movable member moves to a predetermined position in front of the display means, so that the first portion and the second portion of the first movable member are visibly arranged. Be done,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-3.
Prior to the union effect, it is possible to further execute an effect suggesting that the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member are united.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-4.
Further, a third movable member arranged so as to be difficult to see by the fixing member is provided.
In the union effect, the third movable member that has moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means is united with the fixing member, the first movable member, and the second movable member, and the specific object. Represents a part of
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-5.
In the union effect, an image representing a part of the specific object is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning notification tilting effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 186. Figure 1
In 83 to 186, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the visibility of the drawing, and the drawing of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also easy to see. Some of them are omitted from the above, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that is.

This winning announcement tilting effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 1
When the 01 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command and a pre-judgment command) and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification tilting effect.
The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command), and the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 and the like. The position and light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the winning announcement tilting effect A will be described, and then the winning announcement tilting effect B, the winning announcement tilting effect C, and the winning announcement tilting effect D will be described in order.

[Aori production A]
First, the winning announcement tilting effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining the winning announcement tilting effect A. This announcement Aori effect A is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

In the announcement Aori effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 183 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even when the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed with a white spherical hold icon 9A, respectively. That is, the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Here, there are four first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "4" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 183 (A).

A selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, A mode, B mode, C mode,
The effect mode composed of the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated, and the effect button 6 is displayed.
Each time 3 is operated (pressed operation), the effect mode that reaches the specific area by rotating the reel is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode. Here, since the effect mode selected before the announcement Aori effect A was performed was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this B mode (here, a model of "cloud") is not shown, but it is an image. It is in a state of being greatly displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

In addition, during the period when the selection mode can be selected, "mode change with the effect button" tells that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to change. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning announcement tilting effect A is performed, the effect mode selected before the winning announcement tilting effect A is performed is continued in the winning announcement tilting effect A as well.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) in the state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is directed downward, so that the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the A mode is displayed. The B mode arranged above is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above toward a specific area.

In the B mode, the effect of the theme of "cloud" is advanced, and the theme image imitating the "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific region. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the D mode. The C mode arranged below the mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific region. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

It should be noted that, of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode, the winning announcement tilt effect A has three effect modes (a plurality of effects), the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode, excluding the A mode. It is a production that is commonly performed in mode). On the other hand, in the announcement-and-answer effect B, which will be described later, the effect is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode), that is, only the A mode.

The decorative pattern in FIG. 183 (A) starts to change, and the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9
When there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in A or 9A, the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of the hit (big hit or small hit) is in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed large in the part. The four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A,
Whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in 9A is included in the pre-judgment command, the big hit pre-judgment result (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type pre-judgment result), and the fluctuation pattern advance. It is determined based on the determination result.

The hit suggestion image ASG first displays the display screen 7 so that the front side thereof faces the front of the gaming machine 1.
It is displayed large in the center of a, and then the left and right sides of the hit suggestion image ASG are displayed.
A mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG repeatedly swings and sways in the front-back direction with a straight line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the hit suggestion image ASG as the central axis (hereinafter, may be referred to as “hit suggestion image ASG swinging motion”. ). When the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a while emitting a flash is repeated. A winning production will be performed. This hit confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player expects that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. It is designed to be able to hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3". Even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. This will result in
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit suggestion image ASG
By the swinging motion of, the hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be developed to be a hit (big hit or small hit) with the same symbol. It is possible to raise the expectation that there is no such thing to the player.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively. Starting port 2
The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to 0 becomes 3 and changes to the blue number "3", and the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 becomes 0. Continues to be the red number "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9Cd.
Even in the state where the hold icon 9C is moved to and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued, and the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated. , It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "4". Even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. This will result in
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit suggestion image ASG
By the swinging motion of, the hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be developed to be a hit (big hit or small hit) with the same symbol. It is possible to raise the expectation that there is no such thing to the player.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad to move to the third hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at the hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are the first numbers HMG. The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2", and the second starting port 21
The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the ball is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9Cd.
Even in the state where the hold icon 9C is moved to and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued, and the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated. , It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "5". Even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. This will result in
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit suggestion image ASG
By the swinging motion of, the hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be developed to be a hit (big hit or small hit) with the same symbol. It is possible to raise the expectation that there is no such thing to the player.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (G), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the second hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are the first numbers HMG. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening 20 becomes one and changes to the blue number "1", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 becomes one. With zero numbers, the red number continues to be "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9Cd.
When the icon is moved to 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, FIG. 183 (
As shown in H), a display mode in which a hit confirmation effect suddenly occurs during the fluctuation, and the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a while emitting a flash of light and pops out. Repeat. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad,
All the reserved display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9
The hold icon 9A displayed on Ad and the hold icon 9C displayed on the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable area where the small decorative symbol (not shown) is variablely displayed, which is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left of the display screen 7a. The numbers HMG (here) are the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Then, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a blue number "1", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Is zero and the red number "0") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 183 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in their own variable display area, respectively. Stops are displayed side by side in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It will be stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) will be started.

In FIG. 183 (I), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are numerical values. HMG (Here, there is one first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the blue number is "1", the second.
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is zero, and the red number "0") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 3 (H). Further, in FIG. 183 (I), the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad,
The state in which all the hold display positions 9Cd have disappeared is still maintained in FIG. 183 (H), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. The state in which the hold icon 9C has disappeared is still maintained in FIG. 183 (H). Further, in FIG. 183 (I), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained in FIG. 183 (H).

In this way, the hit suggestion image A suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9A.
The SG is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will be generated by starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the white spherical hold icon with the lowest expectation of hit (big hit or small hit) is obtained. Even if each is displayed, the hit suggestion image ASG
When the swinging motion of is started, a hit (big hit or small hit) can be suddenly generated to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the fluctuation is completed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a big hit or a small hit will occur.

In addition, the winning notification tilting effect A has three effect modes (plural effects), B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode constituting the effect mode. Since the effect is commonly performed in the mode), the display mode of the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the three effect modes (plurality of effect modes) is the common display mode. On the other hand, since the winning announcement tilting effect B, which will be described later, is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only the A mode, 1
In one effect mode (single effect mode), the display mode of the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Aori production B]
Next, the winning announcement tilting effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a diagram for explaining the winning announcement tilting effect B. This announcement Aori production B is performed during the variable production of the decorative pattern.

In the result B, first, as shown in FIG. 184 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even when the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the hold display position 9Ad.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed with a white spherical hold icon 9A, respectively. That is, the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are images as numerical values HMG, respectively. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Here, there are four first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "4" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 184 (A).

A selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, A mode, B mode, C mode,
The effect mode composed of the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated, and the effect button 6 is displayed.
Each time 3 is operated (pressed operation), the effect mode that reaches the specific area by rotating the reel is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode. Here, since the effect mode selected before the announcement Aori effect A was performed was the A mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this A mode (here, a model of the "sun") is not shown, but an image. It is in a state of being greatly displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

In addition, during the period when the selection mode can be selected, "mode change with the effect button" tells that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to change. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning announcement tilting effect B is performed, the effect mode selected before the winning announcement tilting effect B is performed is continued in the winning announcement tilting effect B as well.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) in the state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is directed downward, so that the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the A mode is displayed. The B mode arranged above is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above toward a specific area.

In the B mode, the effect of the theme of "cloud" is advanced, and the theme image imitating the "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific region. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the D mode. The C mode arranged below the mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific region. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

It should be noted that the winning announcement tilting effect B is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only the A mode among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode. .. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned winning announcement tilting effect A, it is an effect that is commonly performed in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes), that is, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode.

The decorative pattern in FIG. 184 (A) starts to change, and the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9
When there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in A or 9A, the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of the hit (big hit or small hit) is in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed large in the part. The four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A,
Whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in 9A is included in the pre-judgment command, the big hit pre-judgment result (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type pre-judgment result), and the fluctuation pattern advance. It is determined based on the determination result.

The hit suggestion image ASG first displays the display screen 7 so that the front side thereof faces the front of the gaming machine 1.
It is displayed in a large size in the center of a, and then, during the fluctuation, the hit suggestion image ASG expands and repeatedly repeats the operation of returning to the original size (hereinafter, may be referred to as "expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG"). .). When the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG repeatedly moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a while emitting a flash of light and pops out. A definite production will be performed. This hit confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit). You can flutter.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3". Since the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed. Is started, and after that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be aligned and hit (big hit or small hit) with the same symbol. It is possible to raise the expectation that there is no such thing to the player.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively. Starting port 2
The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to 0 becomes 3 and changes to the blue number "3", and the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 becomes 0. Continues to be the red number "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9Cd.
The display of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued even when the icon is moved to 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

During the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 184 (D), the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started. As a result, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur during the fluctuation, so that the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "4". By the time the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is completed and the size of the hit suggestion image ASG is returned to the original size. As a result, even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed, so that the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and then the hit confirmation effect is performed. The player is expected to develop a production in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and become a hit (big hit or small hit). Can be done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (F), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad to move to the third hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at the hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are the first numbers HMG. The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2", and the second starting port 21
The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the ball is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in FIG. 184 (F) moves to the hold display position 9Cd to become the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, FIG. 184 (F). ) ~ FIG. 184 (H), the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. As a result, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur during the fluctuation, so that the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (I), a hit confirmation effect suddenly occurs during the fluctuation, and the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a while emitting a flash of light and pops out. Repeat the display mode that comes. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth
The hold display position 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A and the first hold display position 9Ad displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad are displayed.
The hold icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable area where the small decorative symbol (not shown) is variablely displayed, which is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left of the display screen 7a. First starting port 2 provided on the side
The number HMG (here, to the first starting port 20) indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 0 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball is two and the blue number is "2", and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.
There are no special figure reservations and the red number "0") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 184 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in their own variable display area, respectively. The stop display is displayed side by side in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It will be stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) will be started.

In FIG. 184 (J), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are numerical values. HMG (Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the blue numbers are "2" and the second.
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is zero, and the red number "0") is shown in FIG.
It is continuously displayed in 4 (I). Further, in FIG. 184 (J), the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad,
The state in which all the hold display positions 9Cd disappeared was maintained in FIG. 184 (I), and was displayed in the hold icon 9A and the first hold display position 9Ad displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad. The state in which the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared is still maintained in FIG. 184 (I). also,
In FIG. 184 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained in FIG. 184 (I).

In the A mode, even if the decorative symbol starts to change in FIG. 184 (A) and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, The hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In this case, while the decorative pattern is changing, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, and the announcement "Please operate the effect button" is also made by the speaker 6.
When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) and reaches a predetermined number of times, even though the effect does not flow from 7 at all, that is, the effect of prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is not performed at all. An image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed in which the character is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. .. In other words, in the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button", when the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number of times in a state where the effect prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is not performed at all, So-called "hidden commands" can be generated and executed. This "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after that. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

As the "predetermined number of times", 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 7 times, 9 times, 11 times, 13 times, 15 times, 1
There are 7 times, 19 times, 21 times, and 23 times, and the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 1).
It is set by the lottery in 01). That is, even if the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 reaches 23 times, if the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed, the effect is lost. For example, when the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad (the winning information is out of order). ing.)
Is the hold icon 9C, the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation).
Even if this is done, the "winning confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed and the result is off, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad (the winning information is a hit (winning information)).
It is a big hit or a small hit). ) Is the hold icon 9C, it is set to 17 times by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 is 17. When the number of times is reached, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed, and it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

The "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is a dedicated effect performed only when the A mode is selected, and the decorative pattern starts to change in FIG. 184 (A), and the four hold icons 9
Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in A, 9A, 9A, 9A, a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit). 4 hold icons 9 in addition to the case where is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all.
A, 9A, 9A, 9A are digested as the hold icon 9C, and the first start port 20 and the second
This may be performed when a game ball enters the starting port 21.

In other words, in the A mode, even if the decorative symbol starts to change in FIG. 184 (A) and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A. When the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. , "Hit confirmation effect by effect button"
However, when the decorative symbol in FIG. 184 (A) starts to change and there is a case where the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are hit (big hit or small hit). When the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the player operates the effect button 63. Even if it is (pressed operation), the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is blocked and the winning announcement tilt effect B is advanced.

Further, in the C mode, when the decorative symbol starts to change in FIG. 184 (A) and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, a hit (big hit). Even if the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of (or small hit) is displayed on the display screen 7a or is not displayed at all, although not shown, the decorative pattern is changing. The effect of urging the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 that the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a is performed.
This is different from A mode. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63,
When an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed in which the character is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. There is. This "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after that. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

In this way, the hit suggestion image A suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9A.
The SG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will be generated by starting the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the white spherical hold icon with the lowest expectation of hit (big hit or small hit) is obtained. Even if each is displayed, the hit suggestion image ASG
When the expansion motion of is started, a hit (big hit) can be suddenly generated to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a small hit) will occur.

Further, as described above, the winning notification tilting effect A shown in FIG. 183 has the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode, excluding the A mode, among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode. Since it is a production that is commonly performed in three production modes (multiple production modes) called modes, a hit suggestion image AS is performed in the three production modes (multiple production modes).
The display mode of the rocking motion of G is a common display mode. On the other hand, since the winning announcement tilting effect B is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only A mode, it is suggested to hit in one effect mode (single effect mode). The display mode of the expansion motion of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Aori production C]
Next, the winning announcement tilting effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining the winning announcement tilting effect C.

In the winning announcement tilting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 185 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is produced by producing each round game in the big hit effect (big hit game) and ending all of them. At the end of the game production period and the beginning of the notification period, the message MG "continue right-handed" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue right-handed. In addition, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The number HM is the number HM for the special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.
As G, it is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number "0" is on the left side.
There are four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the red numbers "4" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, after the display is started in FIG. 185 (A),
It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In FIG. 185 (A), when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed and the beginning of the specific period is reached, here, as described above, the game ball to the first starting port 20 Since the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is zero and the number is "0", and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 is four, the second start opening. If there is a hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 21, it is displayed as shown in FIG. 185 (B). A flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (C), a solid suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The hit suggestion image ASG having a typical W-shape is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. Hit suggestion image ASG
Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a so that the front side thereof faces the front of the gaming machine 1. It should be noted that a preliminary determination command is used to determine whether or not there is any hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. It is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-judgment result), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in.

In addition, in the case where there is no holding information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 in the specific period. , The flash image FH shown in FIG. 185 (B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and further, FIG. 1
The hit suggestion image ASG shown in 85 (C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, in a specific period, there is no hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. In some cases), the announcement C will not be performed, and the decorative design will start to change.

After that, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 185 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in FIG. 185 (D), it is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 185 (C). The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a.
The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration are used. It is smaller than the size of each of the symbols 8R. At this time, in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the left side and the right side of the hit suggestion image ASG are in the front-back direction with the straight line passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the hit suggestion image ASG as the central axis. A mode in which it repeatedly swings and swings (hereinafter, "swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG")
In some cases. ). When the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the hit confirmation effect is performed by repeating the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the central portion of the display screen 7a while emitting a flash of light and pops out. This hit confirmation effect is a hit after the end of the change (
It is a production that notifies the player that a big hit or a small hit) will occur. For this reason, when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player expects that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. It is designed to be able to hit.

Although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even when the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the hold display positions 9C.
From a position close to d toward the right side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a is the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the line.

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9B, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Bd moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9B is the same as the size of the hold icon 9B immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Bd is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd. Each of the 9Bs is displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. That is, the three hold icons 9B, 9B, and 9B are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, as described above, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Each of them is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.
The number HMG for each special figure hold is that the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is still zero and the blue number is "0", and the game to the second start port 21. The number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the ball becomes 3 and changes to the red number "3".

Here, the hold icon 9B and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in FIG. 185 (D), the effect mode is selected on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The selection unit SEL that can be used is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, A mode, B mode, C
The effect mode consisting of the mode and the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the effect mode that reaches a specific area by rotating the reel is another. It is displayed larger than the production mode of. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode. Here, since the effect mode selected during the change of the decorative pattern before the winning announcement tilt effect C is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, the effect mode selected is the B mode described later, so this theme image of the B mode. Although (here, a model of a "cloud") is not shown, it is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In addition, during the period when the selection mode can be selected, "mode change with the effect button" tells that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to change. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning announcement tilting effect C is performed, the effect mode selected during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern before the winning announcement tilting effect C is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, is the winning announcement tilting effect C. It will be in a state of being continued.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) in the state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is directed downward, so that the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the A mode is displayed. The B mode arranged above is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above toward a specific area.

In the B mode, the effect of the theme of "cloud" is advanced, and the theme image imitating the "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific region. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the D mode. The C mode arranged below the mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific region. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

It should be noted that, of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode, the winning announcement tilt effect C has three effect modes (a plurality of effects), the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode, excluding the A mode. It is a production that is commonly performed in mode). On the other hand, in the announcement D, which will be described later, the effect is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode), that is, only the A mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3". Even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. This will result in
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit suggestion image ASG
By the swinging motion of, the hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be developed to be a hit (big hit or small hit) with the same symbol. It is possible to raise the expectation that there is no such thing to the player.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (F), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd to move to the third hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B disappears at the hold display position 9Bd. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are the first numbers HMG. The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number continues to be "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 2. It becomes a b piece and changes to the red number "2".

The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd is the hold display position 9Cd.
Even in the state where the hold icon 9C is moved to and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued, and the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated. , It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "4". Even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. This will result in
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit suggestion image ASG
By the swinging motion of, the hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be developed to be a hit (big hit or small hit) with the same symbol. It is possible to raise the expectation that there is no such thing to the player.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (H), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B disappears at the second hold display position 9Bd. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are the first numbers HMG. The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number continues to be "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 1. It becomes an individual and changes to the red number "1".

The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd is the hold display position 9Cd.
Even in the state where the hold icon 9C is moved to and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued, and the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated. , It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9Cd.
When the icon is moved to 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, FIG. 185 (
As shown in I), the hit confirmation effect suddenly occurs during the fluctuation, and the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the central portion of the display screen 7a and pops out while emitting a flash is repeated. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd
, The 4th hold display position 9Bd, the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. 9C also disappears from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the contrary,
In the sub-variable region in which a small decorative symbol (not shown) is variablely displayed, which is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is further provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1 start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are the numbers HMG (here, the first start). The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is red. The number "1") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 185 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in their own variable display area, respectively. The stop display is lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It will be stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) will be started.

In FIG. 185 (J), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are numerical values. HMG (Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. There is one special figure hold and the red number "1") is shown in Fig. 18
It is continuously displayed in 5 (I). Further, in FIG. 185 (J), the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd.
The state in which all the hold display positions 9Cd have disappeared is still maintained in FIG. 185 (I), and the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. The state in which the hold icon 9C also disappears from the display screen 7a is shown in FIG.
It is still maintained at 5 (I). Further, in FIG. 185 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained in FIG. 185 (I).

In this way, the hit suggestion image A suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9B.
After the SG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur by starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd, a white spherical hold icon with the lowest expectation of a hit (big hit or small hit) is obtained. Even if each is displayed, the hit suggestion image ASG
When the swinging motion of is started, a hit (big hit or small hit) can be suddenly generated to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the fluctuation is completed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a big hit or a small hit) will occur.

In addition, the winning notification tilting effect C has three effect modes (plural effects), B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode constituting the effect mode. Since the effect is commonly performed in the mode), the display mode of the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is the common display mode in the three effect modes (plural effect modes). On the other hand, since the winning announcement tilting effect D, which will be described later, is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only the A mode, 1
In one effect mode (single effect mode), the display mode of the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Aori production D]
Next, the winning announcement tilting effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a diagram for explaining the winning announcement tilting effect D.

In the winning announcement tilting effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 186 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is produced by producing each round game in the big hit effect (big hit game) and ending all of them. At the end of the game production period and the beginning of the notification period, the message MG "continue right-handed" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue right-handed. In addition, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20.
The number HM is the number HM for the special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.
As G, it is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number "0" is on the left side.
There are four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the red numbers "4" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, after the display is started in FIG. 186 (A),
It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In FIG. 186 (A), when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed and the beginning of the specific period is reached, here, as described above, the game ball to the first starting port 20 Since the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is zero and the number is "0", and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 is four, the second start opening. If there is a hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 21, it is displayed as shown in FIG. 186 (B). A flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186 (C), a solid suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The hit suggestion image ASG having a typical W-shape is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. Hit suggestion image ASG
Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a so that the front side thereof faces the front of the gaming machine 1. It should be noted that a preliminary determination command is used to determine whether or not there is any hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. It is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-judgment result), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in.

If there is no hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 in the specific period, the figure is shown in the figure. The flash image FH shown in 186 (B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and further, FIG. 186.
The hit suggestion image ASG shown in (C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, when there is no hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 in a specific period. H), the announcement D will not be performed, and the decorative design will start to change.

After that, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 186 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in FIG. 186 (D), it is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 186 (C). The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a.
The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration are used. It is smaller than the size of each of the symbols 8R. At this time, the hit suggestion image ASG is first displayed in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a so that the front side thereof faces the front of the gaming machine 1, and then the hit suggestion image ASG expands during the fluctuation. Then, the operation of returning to the original size is repeatedly performed (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG"). When the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the hit confirmation effect is performed by repeating the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the central portion of the display screen 7a while emitting a flash of light and pops out. This hit confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason,
Hit suggestion image When the expansion motion of ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. You can do it.

Although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable area. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even when the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the small decorative symbols corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. good. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, there are four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image).
Each of the hold icons 9B can be displayed, and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the hold display positions 9
From a position close to CD toward the right side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a is the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the line.

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9B, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Bd moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9B is the same as the size of the hold icon 9B immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Bd is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd. Each of the 9Bs is displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. That is, the three hold icons 9B, 9B, and 9B are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A, Hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21
In addition, as described above, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Each of them is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.
The number HMG for each special figure hold is that the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is still zero and the blue number is "0", and the game to the second start port 21. The number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the ball becomes 3 and changes to the red number "3".

Here, the hold icon 9B and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in FIG. 186 (D), the effect mode is selected on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The selection unit SEL that can be used is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, A mode, B mode, C
The effect mode consisting of the mode and the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the effect mode that reaches a specific area by rotating the reel is another. It is displayed larger than the production mode of. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode. Here, since the effect mode selected during the change of the decorative pattern before the winning announcement tilt effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, the effect mode selected is the A mode described later, so the theme image of this A mode. Although (here, a model of the "sun") is not shown, it is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In addition, during the period when the selection mode can be selected, "mode change with the effect button" tells that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to change. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning announcement tilting effect D is performed, the effect mode selected during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern before the winning announcement tilting effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, is the winning announcement tilting effect D. It will be in a state of being continued.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) in the state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL.
Then, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is directed downward, so that the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the A mode is displayed. The B mode arranged above is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above toward a specific area.

In the B mode, the effect of the theme of "cloud" is advanced, and the theme image imitating the "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side toward a specific region. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the D mode. The C mode arranged below the mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific region. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

It should be noted that the winning announcement tilting effect D is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only the A mode among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode. .. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned winning announcement tilting effect C, it is an effect that is commonly performed in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes), that is, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3". Even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. This will
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit suggestion image ASG
Is displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and then the hit confirmation effect is performed, so that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all hit with the same symbol ( It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a production that will be a big hit or a small hit) may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186 (F), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd to move to the third hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B disappears at the hold display position 9Bd. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are the first numbers HMG. The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number continues to be "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 2. It becomes a b piece and changes to the red number "2".

The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd is the hold display position 9Cd.
When the icon is moved to 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. As a result, the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can have the expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
Is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "4". By the time the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is completed and the size of the hit suggestion image ASG is returned to the original size. As a result, even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed, so that the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and then the hit confirmation effect is performed. The player is expected to develop a production in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and become a hit (big hit or small hit). Can be done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186 (H), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B disappears at the second hold display position 9Bd. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are the first numbers HMG. The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number continues to be "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 1. It becomes an individual and changes to the red number "1".

The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd is the hold display position 9Cd.
When it moves to the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. As a result, the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can have the expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the hold display position 9Cd.
When the icon is moved to 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, FIG. 186 (
As shown in I), the hit confirmation effect suddenly occurs during the fluctuation, and the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the central portion of the display screen 7a and pops out while emitting a flash is repeated. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd
, The 4th hold display position 9Bd, the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. 9C also disappears from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the contrary,
In the sub-variable region in which a small decorative symbol (not shown) is variablely displayed, which is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is further provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1 start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are the numbers HMG (here, the first start). The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is red. The number "1") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 186 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in their own variable display area, respectively. The stop display is lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It will be stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) will be started.

In FIG. 186 (J), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are numerical values. HMG (Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. There is one special figure hold and the red number "1") is shown in Fig. 18
It is continuously displayed in 6 (I). Further, in FIG. 186 (J), the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd.
The state in which all the hold display positions 9Cd have disappeared is still maintained in FIG. 186 (I), and the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. The state in which the hold icon 9C also disappears from the display screen 7a is shown in FIG.
It is still maintained in 6 (I). Further, in FIG. 186 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained in FIG. 186 (I).

In the A mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the sphere (four hold icons 9B)
, 9B, 9B, 9B), even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit), a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) May not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In this case, while the decorative pattern is changing, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all.
Moreover, even though the announcement "Please operate the effect button" does not flow from the speaker 67 at all, that is, the effect of prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is not performed at all, the player presses the effect button. When 63 is operated (pressed) to reach a predetermined number of times, an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a character is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A large "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed. In other words, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is
When the number of operations (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number in a state where the effect for prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is not performed at all, a so-called "hidden command" can be generated and performed. It has become like. This "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after that. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

As the "predetermined number of times", 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 7 times, 9 times, 11 times, 13 times, 15 times, 1
There are 7 times, 19 times, 21 times, and 23 times, and the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 1).
It is set by the lottery in 01). That is, even if the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 reaches 23 times, if the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed, the effect is lost. For example, when the hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd (the winning information is out of order). ing.)
Is the hold icon 9C, the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation).
Even if this is done, the "winning confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed and the result is off, whereas the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd (the winning information is a hit (winning information)).
It is a big hit or a small hit). ) Is the hold icon 9C, it is set to 17 times by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 is 17. When the number of times is reached, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed, and it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

The "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is a dedicated effect performed only when the A mode is selected, and is the end of the notification period in which the message MG "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A). At the beginning of the specific period, the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B,
Even if there is something that hits (9B) (big hit or small hit), it hits (big hit or small hit)
Hit suggestion image ASG with a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of big hits and small hits)
Is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, and the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds is digested as the hold icon 9C, and the first start is performed. This may be performed when a game ball enters the mouth 20 and the second starting port 21.

In other words, in the A mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the game ball to the second starting port 21 Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information (4 hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the 4 second special figure hold based on the ball entry, the hit (big hit or small hit) When the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of a big hit or a small hit is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, "effect" is displayed. While the "hit confirmation effect by the button" is performed, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the second start port Hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into 21 (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B)
When there is a hit (big hit or small hit), a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. When it is displayed in a large size, no matter how much the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is blocked and the winning announcement tilt effect D is advanced. There is.

Further, in the C mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the sphere (four hold icons 9B)
, 9B, 9B, 9B) When there is a hit (big hit or small hit), the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of the hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed on the display screen. Even if it is displayed on 7a or not displayed at all, although not shown, the operation of the effect button 63 that the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a while the decorative pattern is changing. An effect that encourages (pressing operation) is performed. This is different from A mode. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In some cases, a "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed. This "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after that. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces the confirmation of a hit.

In this way, the hit suggestion image A suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9B.
After the SG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will be generated by starting the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Can be improved.

Further, at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd, a white spherical hold icon with the lowest expectation of a hit (big hit or small hit) is obtained. Even if each is displayed, the hit suggestion image ASG
When the expansion motion of is started, a hit (big hit) can be suddenly generated to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a small hit) will occur.

Further, as described above, the winning notification tilting effect C shown in FIG. 185 is the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode, excluding the A mode, among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode. Since it is a production that is commonly performed in three production modes (multiple production modes) called modes, a hit suggestion image AS is performed in the three production modes (multiple production modes).
The display mode of the rocking motion of G is a common display mode. On the other hand, since the winning announcement tilting effect D is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only A mode, it is suggested to hit in one effect mode (single effect mode). The display mode of the expansion motion of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the announcement of the result.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIGS. 183 (A) to 1 of FIGS.
As shown in 83 (I), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and the winning information (preliminary determination command) of the hold icon 9A includes a hit (hit is included). ) Is displayed in the central portion (predetermined position of the display means) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the first effect of displaying the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape. After the effect of, the second effect of repeatedly changing the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) (starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG) can be executed. According to this configuration, a hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is displayed. The display mode of is repeatedly changed. As a result, the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur by starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the central portion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , It is possible to improve the interest.
In the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, a hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed. The display mode of (winning image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will be generated by starting the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and it is possible to improve the interest.
In the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185, an image display device 7 capable of displaying a plurality of types of images (
It is equipped with a display means) and is present (preliminary judgment command) for the winning icon 9B.
A hit suggestion image ASG with a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting that a hit is included)
(Winning image) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the image display device 7 is displayed.
The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is repeatedly variable after the first effect of displaying a small image (at a predetermined position of the display means) in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of. The second effect of performing (starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG) can be executed. According to this configuration, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the display screen of the image display device 7. It is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of 7a, and the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit) by starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It can be agitated and can improve the interest.
In the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning image) suggesting the existence of a hit in the winning information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the image display device. 7 is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a.
The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit) by starting the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183 and FIG. 18
In the winning notification tilting effect B of 4, the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and a plurality of types of effect modes (A) can be obtained by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 (operation means).
You can select one of the production modes (mode, B mode, C mode, D mode),
Of the multiple types of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode), the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) that is variable by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) ( The hit suggestion image ASG's expansion motion in the winning notification tilting effect B in FIG. 184, and other effect modes (B mode, C mode, except for a specific effect mode (A mode)).
The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) that is variable by the second effect in the D mode) (the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the hit notification tilt effect A in FIG. 183) is different. According to this configuration, it is variable by the second effect in the other effect mode (B mode, C mode, D mode) among the plurality of types of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode). The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is a common display mode that is commonly used, whereas the hit suggestion image that is changed by the second effect in a specific effect mode (A mode). The display mode of the ASG (winning image) is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode. As a result, among the plurality of types of effect modes, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) can be set to the dedicated display mode only in a specific effect mode, and thus it is provided to the player as a rare effect that appears rarely. be able to.
The same applies to the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185 and the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183 and FIG. 18
In the winning notification tilting effect B of 4, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) is the original after being enlarged in a predetermined direction as a specific operation. The operation of returning to (the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the winning notification tilting effect B in FIG. 184) is repeated, and is varied by the second effect in the other effect modes (B mode, C mode, D mode). The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is an operation of reciprocating in a predetermined direction (swinging in small steps in a predetermined direction) as an operation different from a specific operation (a hit suggestion image ASG in the hit notification tilting effect A in FIG. 183). The rocking motion of) is repeated. According to this configuration, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) in the specific effect mode (A mode) is a display mode in which the expansion motion (specific operation) of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeated. Suggested image A for the player
It is possible to repeatedly give an opportunity to visually recognize the expansion motion (specific motion) of the SG, and the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) in other production modes is the hit suggestion image AS.
Due to the display mode in which the rocking motion of G (movement different from a specific motion) is repeated,
It is possible to repeatedly give the player an opportunity to visually recognize the swinging motion (movement different from a specific motion) of the hit suggestion image ASG. This makes it easier for the player to confirm the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) in each selection mode.
The same applies to the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185 and the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific effect mode (A mode) in the winning notification tilt effect B of FIG. 184, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 (operation means) reaches a predetermined number, the winning is confirmed. The rainbow image (specific image) that announces the image display device 7 (
It is possible to execute the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" (third effect) to be displayed on the display means), and the first suggestive image ASG (winning image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the effect, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" (third effect) is blocked, and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG (second effect) is executed. According to this configuration, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 (operation means) while the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is displayed on the image display device 7 in the specific effect mode (A mode). Even if it is operated), the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed at all, so the expansion motion (second effect) of the hit suggestion image ASG is executed while making the player feel uneasy. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.
The same applies to the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183, after the first effect of displaying the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button is displayed. The selection of one of a plurality of types of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) by the operation of 63 (operation means) is prevented. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the change of the effect mode in the second effect of repeatedly changing the display mode of the winning image, which is performed after the first effect.
The same applies to the winning announcement tilting effect B in FIG. 184, the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185, and the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183 and FIG. 18
In the winning notification tilting effect B of 4, the winning image changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) in the winning announcement tilting effect B of FIG. 184, or FIG. 183.
The winning image that is variable by the second effect in the other effect modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) in the tilting effect A is moved from the predetermined position of the image display device 7 (display means) to another position. Then, it is possible to execute the fourth effect of changing to the hit notification display mode for notifying the hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 183 (H) of the winning announcement tilting effect A, a hit suggestion image that is variable by the second effect in another effect mode (B mode (same for C mode and D mode)). As a hit notification display mode, the ASG (winning image) is a display that moves from the central portion (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (other position) and pops out while emitting a flash of light. The embodiment is repeated. Figure 18 of Aori Production B
As shown in 4 (I), the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image), which is variable by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode), is an image display device 7 while emitting a flash as a hit notification display mode. The display mode of moving from the central portion (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a toward the front (other position) and popping out is repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a display mode in which a hit (big hit or small hit) suddenly occurs, so that the player may be shocked by the sudden display mode in which the hit (big hit or small hit) is announced. can.
In the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185 and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, as shown in FIGS. 185 (H) and 185 (I) of the winning notification tilting effect C, other effect modes (
The hit suggestion image ASG (winning image), which is variable by the second effect in the B mode (the same applies to the C mode and the D mode), is the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 as a hit notification display mode.
It jumps out of the rectangular area (first predetermined position) on the lower left side of a, moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a, and emits a flash from the central portion (second predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display mode of moving toward the front (other position) and popping out is repeated. As shown in FIGS. 186 (H) and 186 (I) of FIG.
The hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) that is variable by the second effect in (A mode) is
As a hit notification display mode, the image display device 7 is displayed while emitting a flash of light by jumping out of the rectangular area (first predetermined position) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moving to the central portion of the display screen 7a. The display mode of moving from the central portion (second predetermined position) of the screen 7a toward the front (other position) and popping out is repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a display mode in which a hit (big hit or small hit) suddenly occurs, so that the player may be shocked by the sudden display mode in which the hit (big hit or small hit) is announced. can.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the announcement of the result.
[Modification 1]
In the winning notification tilting effect A in FIG. 183, the winning notification tilting effect B in FIG. 184, the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185, and the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. ) Was repeatedly varied. At this time, a time may be set in which the display mode is repeatedly changed while the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) emits a flash of light. Keeping the player aware of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) may make the player tired. On the other hand, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image)
When the timing (timing) to turn the line of sight to is reached, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) can repeatedly change the display mode while emitting a flash to suggest to the player, so that the hit suggestion is made. It is not necessary to make the player always aware of the image ASG (winning image), and the fatigue of the player can be suppressed.

[Modification 2]
In the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185, and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. As a hit notification display mode, the winning image) repeatedly moves toward the front from the central portion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and pops out. However, even when the hit (big hit or small hit) is not notified, the display mode of moving toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash is one or more. Times (for example, 3 to 5 times)
If only the display mode is performed, the display mode may be returned to the original display mode. For example, in the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is displayed in FIG. 18 from the display mode of FIG. 183 (H).
Returning to 3 (B), the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted, and in the hit notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is displayed in FIG. 1 from the display mode of FIG.
Returning to 84 (B), the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted, and in the hit notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is displayed in FIG. Returning to D), the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted, and in the hit notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is displayed in FIG. ), And the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted. In this way, the player can be reminded of a hit (big hit or small hit) for a moment.

[Modification 3]
In the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185 and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started, the display screen of the image display device 7 is started. On the upper right side of 7a, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode was arranged and displayed. However, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIGS. 185 (A) and 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the game ball to the second starting port 21 If there is a hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the ball entering (big hit or small hit), the selection unit SEL is set. It may not be possible to select the effect mode as hidden. This is because when the winning notification tilting effect C in FIG. 185 and the winning notification tilting effect D in FIG. 186 are performed, the effect mode cannot be selected at all, so that there is no problem even if the selection unit SEL is hidden. In this case, only the currently selected effect mode may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the winning notification tilting effect A in FIG. 183, the winning announcement tilting effect B in FIG. 184, the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185, and the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. 186, the operation of the effect button 63 (
It has become possible to select one of the effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) by the effect mode (pressing operation). However, instead of the effect button 63, the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
The winning announcement tilting effect A in FIG. 183, the winning announcement tilting effect B in FIG. 184, the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185, and the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. 186 may not have a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect J1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
The first effect of displaying a winning image suggesting the existence of a hit in the winning information of the hold icon, and
After the first effect, a second effect of repeatedly changing the display mode of the winning image can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect J1-1.
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player
One of a plurality of types of effect modes can be selected by operating the operation means.
Among the plurality of types of effect modes, the display mode of the winning image changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode and the second effect in other effect modes other than the specific effect mode are variable. Is different from the display mode of the winning image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect J1-2.
The display mode of the winning image, which is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode, repeats a specific operation.
The display mode of the winning image, which is changed by the second effect in the other effect mode, repeats an operation different from the specific operation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect J1-2 or the aspect J1-3.
In the specific effect mode, when the number of operations of the operating means reaches a predetermined number of times,
It is possible to execute a third effect that displays a specific image that announces the winning confirmation.
After the first effect, the third effect is blocked and the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-4.
After the first effect, the selection of one of the plurality of types of effect modes by the operation of the operating means is prevented.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-5.
The winning image that is variable by the second effect in the specific effect mode or the winning image that is variable by the second effect in the other effect mode is moved from a predetermined position to another position to win a hit. It is possible to execute a fourth effect that changes to the notification display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The character selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. This character selection effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character selection effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Character selection effect A]
FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 187 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in the battle effect described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (E), the enemy character selection effect is executed. Enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect of selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information about the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, the information images IB, IC, correspond to each of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.
The ID is displayed.

The information image IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character by its display color. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is
It is white. Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching). For example, the type information image IK related to the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).
A bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed on the physical fitness information image IH. The longer this bar is, the stronger the enemy character's physical strength is, and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information image IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID, but with the passage of time, the order is the information image IB, the information image ID, and the information image IB. The order is information image IC and information image IB, and this is repeated. In the order change, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be enlarged and displayed more than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle production. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. The opponent at this time becomes the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRC is unfolded. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the bar of the physical strength information image IH is reduced by the attack of the ally character CRA. Physical fitness information image I
When the bar of H becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (G), the victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect B]
FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 188 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in the battle effect described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRC is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (E), the enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect of selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are placed in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.
Information about C and CRD is displayed as an image. Here, the enemy characters CRB, CRC,
Information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each of the CRDs.

The information image IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character by its character. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is "
It is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is "C.
". For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRD is "D". Although an example of one letter of the alphabet is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
A bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed on the physical fitness information image IH. The longer this bar is, the stronger the enemy character's physical strength is, and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information image IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID, but with the passage of time, the order is the information image IB, the information image ID, and the information image IB. The order is information image IC and information image IB, and this is repeated. In the order change, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be enlarged and displayed more than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle production. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. The opponent at this time becomes the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRC is unfolded. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the bar of the physical strength information image IH is reduced by the attack of the ally character CRA. Physical fitness information image I
When the bar of H becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (G), the victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect C]
FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 189 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in the battle effect described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (E), the enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect of selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are placed in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.
Information about C and CRD is displayed as an image. Here, the enemy characters CRB, CRC,
Information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each of the CRDs.

The information image IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK showing the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH showing the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character by its character. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is "
It is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is "C.
". For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRD is "D". Although an example of one letter of the alphabet is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
Five stars are displayed on the physical strength information image IH, indicating that the larger the number of black stars, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information image IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID, but with the passage of time, the order is the information image IB, the information image ID, and the information image IB. The order is information image IC and information image IB, and this is repeated. In the order change, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be enlarged and displayed more than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle production. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. The opponent at this time becomes the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRC is unfolded. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (G), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat production is a production that announces that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbol in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "8".

[Character selection effect D]
FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 190 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in the battle effect described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (E), the enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect of selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are placed in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.
Information about C and CRD is displayed as an image. Here, the information image IC corresponding to the enemy character CRC is displayed. The information image IB corresponding to the enemy character CRB and the information image ID corresponding to the enemy character CRD are not displayed.

The information image IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK showing the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH showing the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character by its character. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is "
It is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is "C.
". For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRD is "D". Although an example of one letter of the alphabet is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
Five stars are displayed on the physical strength information image IH, indicating that the larger the number of black stars, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in order at high speed. In the figure, the information image IC is displayed, but the information image IB is displayed with the passage of time, and the information image ID is displayed with the passage of time, and this is repeated. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent of the battle production. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the information image IC is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. The opponent at this time becomes the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRC is unfolded. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (G), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat production is a production that announces that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbol in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD that are the opponents of the battle effect are displayed by the enemy character appearance effect (FIGS. 187 (D), 188 (D), FIG.
189 (D), 190 (D)). Then, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are displayed by the enemy character selection effect, and this information image I
By selecting B, IC, and ID, an enemy character to be an opponent is selected (FIG. 187 (E), FIG. 188 (E), FIG. 189 (E), FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the enemy character becomes highly interesting, and the interestingness of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are the type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and the physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. It is composed of (FIG. 187 (F), FIG. 188 (F), FIG. 1).
89 (F), FIG. 190 (F)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interestingness of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the order of the information image IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed.
After a lapse of a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle effect (FIG. 187 (E), FIG. 188 (E), FIG. 189 (E)). Alternatively, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in order at high speed, and after a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent of the battle effect (FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interestingness of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID are combined with the enemy characters CRB, C.
A physical strength information image IH showing the physical strength of RC and CRD is included (FIG. 187 (E), FIG. 188).
(E), FIG. 189 (E), FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interestingness of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID are combined with the enemy characters CRB, C.
The type information image IK that can identify RC and CRD is included (FIG. 187 (E), FIG. 188).
(E), FIG. 189 (E), FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interestingness of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the character selection effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the information image IB, IC, and ID include two types of information, the type information image IK and the physical fitness information image IH. On the other hand, it may include three or more pieces of information.

[Modification 2]
In the above, an example of selecting an opponent's enemy character from the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the selection target can be selected by selecting the information to be selected. For example, an example may be used in which one is selected from a plurality of types of mini games.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the information image IB, IC, and ID are automatically selected, but for example, when the player presses the effect button 63, the information image IB, IC, and ID can be selected. good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect J2-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
It is an effect of selecting one of a plurality of selection targets, and the selection target is displayed, and the target information which is information about the selection target is displayed in an area different from the display area of the selection target. It is possible to execute a selection effect in which the selection target is selected by selecting the target information.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect J2-1.
The target information is displayed as an information image representing a plurality of information.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect J2-2.
After the information images as the target information are sequentially displayed, the selection target is selected by selecting one information image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J2-1 to J2-3.
The selection target is an opponent's character,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect J2-4.
The information image includes a graph image suggesting the difficulty of capturing the character.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect J2-4 or the aspect J2-5.
The information image includes an image that can identify the character.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the start port light emitting effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. Figure 191
-In FIG. 194, some decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted due to the legibility of the drawing, and are arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 to be moved are also omitted because of the legibility of the drawing.

This start port light emitting effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command) and includes an instruction to execute a start port light emission effect, the ROM 10
The corresponding image data is read from 3 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command) received from the sub control board 90, and changes the light emission mode of the first start port 20. Further, the voice control board 106 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command) received from the sub control board 90, and executes a voice effect that outputs various sounds from the speaker 67.

The first starting port 20 is provided with a decorative substrate for the first starting port on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (not shown) are mounted therein, and the light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107. The first starting port 20 emits light when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port emits light. When the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. In the big hit effect and the demo effect for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start port is controlled to be lit in white so that the light emitting mode of the first start port 20 is lit in white. Become.

The inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 is specially plated, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port emits light to illuminate the front surface of the first starting port 20. Some specifications are transparent. The type having this specification is referred to as a special plating specification, and the normal type not having this special plating specification is described below as a normal specification.
The first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification is both molded of a colored or colorless transparent resin, and is shaped (not shown). Although the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification is molded from a colored or colorless transparent resin, the surface thereof may be formed as a smooth surface (flat surface or curved surface).

On the inside of the front surface of the first start port 20 in the special plating specification, a decorative member (hereinafter, may be referred to as “decorative member modeling (smile modeling)”) having a smile printed on the surface thereof is the first start. A full-color LED placed in front of the decorative substrate for the mouth and mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port.
Is emitted, while the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 can be visually recognized through the front surface of the first starting port 20, it is mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port. When the full-color LED is turned off, the first starting port 20 is passed through the front surface of the first starting port 20.
It is difficult to visually recognize the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20, and the color of the special plating (for example, silver) is visible through the front surface of the first starting port 20.

In the special plating specification, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is turned off, and further, in the big hit production and the demonstration production for waiting for customers. , The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is turned off, and it is difficult to visually recognize the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. It is said that. In the jackpot effect, the decorative member placed inside the first starting port 20 is modeled (smiles) through the front surface of the first starting port 20 with the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port emitting light. The modeling) may be made visible.

Here, first, as the light emitting effect of the first starting port 20 in the normal specification, the starting port light emitting effect A,
The starting port light emitting effect B and the starting port light emitting effect C will be described in order, and then the starting port light emitting effect D will be described as the light emitting effect of the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification.

[Starting port light emission effect A]
First, the start port light emitting effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining the start port light emitting effect A. The start port light emitting effect A is performed during the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation.

In the start port light emitting effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 191 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the hold display positions 9C.
From a position close to d toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a is in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the line.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Each of the 9A is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 191 (A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the decorative substrate for the first starting port is used. By controlling the mounted full-color LED to be lit in white, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). ..

When the game ball enters the first starting port 20 after the fluctuation starts (that is, after the fluctuation starts),
As shown in FIG. 191 (C), a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested. The tank is full on hold. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is already controlled to be lit in white and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. As shown in FIG. 191 (D), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is used for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the ball. It is controlled to turn off and then turned on again in white. As a result, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port flashes white only once, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 flashes white only once. At this time, in order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned on). ).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the hold display position for displaying the hold icon exists because the hold is already full. Instead, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 191 (C). It does not change from the state where it was done. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist because the hold is full, and the hold ball does not increase. Therefore, FIG. 191. As shown in (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in the state of being lit in white. Become. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the hold ball does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the hold ball has increased. , The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "5", and the middle decorative symbol 8C.
Is the number "1" and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3".
The white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, respectively. .. At the end of such fluctuation, the full color LED is already on hold, and as shown in FIG. 191 (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in white. As a result, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a white lit state, and the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.
The holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 191 (I), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the decorative symbol starts to change, and the first start starts when the change starts. When the game ball does not enter the mouth 20, as shown in FIG. 191 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to light white, so that the first starting port 20 is lit. The light emitting mode of is lit in white. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is OFF).
Will be).

As described above, in the starting port light emitting effect A, the first starting port 20 is in a state where the light emitting mode is lit in white by controlling the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port to be lit in white. When the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20
The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and turned on again in white, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to turn off. The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 flashes white only once by the light emitting mode flashing white only once. On the other hand, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white and the tank is full. In some cases, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the holding display position for displaying the holding icon does not exist and the holding ball does not increase. Therefore, the full color mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port. The LED is not controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and is maintained and controlled to be lit in white, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is not in a state of blinking white only once but is maintained in a state of being lit in white. Will be done.

As a result, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the white lighting. It is controlled to light white again, and it is possible to change to a light emitting mode that blinks white only once, and when the holding ball does not increase, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained to white lighting. Because it is possible, it is possible to visually appeal whether or not the number of reserved balls has increased.
It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the start port light emission effect A, the effect of making the light emission mode of the first start port 20 blink in white is visually appealing, and the effect of holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is appealing to the auditory sense of flowing from the speaker 67. By using the effect together with the effect, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect that the increase in the number of reserved balls can be transmitted to the player.

[Starting port light emission effect B]
Next, the start port light emitting effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the start port light emitting effect B. The start port light emitting effect B is performed during the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation.

In the start port light emitting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 192 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The decorative symbol 8R on the right of the display is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode in which the decorative pattern fluctuates at a high speed. The background image placed behind the decorative pattern is displayed by changing the display mode from the opaque state to the translucent state and changing at high speed while the stopped display decorative pattern gradually increases in speed. It can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation.

After that, it decelerates just before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and a temporary stop display or a stop display is displayed (temporary stop display, then stop display). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8
R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.
Along with this, the fluctuation ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The hold icon corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are being changed as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The hold display position 9
In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the CD, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the hold display positions 9Cd.
From a position closest to It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the line.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 192 (A), the change is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. A yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the third hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. , The hold icon is not displayed. in short,
The three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in stock without being digested.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the change in FIG. 192 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, if the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the end of such change, FIG. 192 As shown in (B), a full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port.
Is controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).
.. The change in FIG. 192 (A) is completed, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7.
When disappearing from a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such fluctuation, the light emitted from the first starting port 20 in the starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D). The mode flashes white only once, and the speaker 67 has a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", in order to notify that the number of hold balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20.
(The music on hold is turned on).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third The hold icon disappears at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the decorative symbol starts to change, and when the change starts, the first start port 2
As shown in FIG. 192 (D), the color is the same as the color attached to the hold icon 9C, which is a yellow (gold) star, regardless of whether the game ball enters or does not enter 0. In other words, in conjunction with the color attached to the hold icon 9C, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start port is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) for the first start. The light emitting mode of the mouth 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting). If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). ..

After the fluctuation starts (that is, after the fluctuation starts), when the game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20 (that is, the two game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20 one by one). When you enter the ball)
, As shown in FIG. 192 (E), a white spherical hold icon 9A at the third hold display position 9Ad.
Is displayed, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad.
The four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in stock without being digested, and the hold is full. Full-color LED already mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port
Is controlled to light yellow (lights gold) and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit yellow (lights gold), but it is suspended because the game ball enters the first starting port 20. As shown in FIG. 192 (F), there is no control to notify that the number of spheres has increased.
The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in the yellow lit (gold lit) state. At the same time, the music on hold, which is a sound effect of "spot", is the speaker 6
No flow from 7 (holding sound is turned off).

As a control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, as described in the starting port light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the decorative substrate for the first starting port The full-color LED mounted on the above flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks in a predetermined color only once (blinks in white in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D)). In FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D), the white flashes, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In B, unlike the start port light emitting effect A, as shown in FIG. 192 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port lights yellow without blinking yellow (blinking gold) (blinking gold). By maintaining and controlling the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (gold color lighting), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a yellow lighting state (gold color lighting), and further.
The hold sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 192 (G), the hold display position for displaying the hold icon exists because the hold is already full. Instead, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 192 (E). It does not change from the state where it was done. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist because the hold is full, and the hold ball does not increase. Therefore, FIG. 192. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold color). The lit state will be maintained. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the hold ball does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the hold ball has increased. , The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 192 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3", and the middle decorative symbol 8C.
Is the number "4" and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3".
The white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, respectively. .. At the end of such fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 192 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, so that the first The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the fluctuation, the reserved ball is already full, so even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the reserved ball does not increase, and "
The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

As described above, in the starting port light emitting effect B, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (lighting in yellow). Even if the number of reserved balls increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 in the state of being lit in gold), the number of reserved balls increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold). The state of being lit in color) is maintained, and the hold sound, which is a "spot" effect sound, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).
..

As a result, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changed to a light emitting mode of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the first starting port 20 Even if the game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so that the light emission of the first starting port 20 is maintained. The yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is an embodiment, can contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect, and can improve the interest.

Further, in the start port light emitting effect B, when the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hit is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, the game ball enters the first start port 20. As a result, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased is not performed at all (in other words, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is blocked. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in yellow lighting (gold lighting). Therefore, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a. Further, since the hold sound, which is a “spot” sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the hold sound from interfering with the sound effect or music that flows in connection with the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Starting port light emission effect C]
Next, the start port light emitting effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining the start port light emitting effect C. The start port light emitting effect C is performed during the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation.

In the start port light emitting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 193 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the hold display positions 9C.
From a position close to d toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a is in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the line.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Each of the 9A is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 193 (A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 193 (B), the decorative substrate for the first starting port is used. By controlling the mounted full-color LED to be lit in white, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .. When the decorative symbol in FIG. 193 (A) starts to change and the game ball enters the first start port 20 at the start of the change, the first in the start port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D). The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 flashes white only once, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is used to notify that the number of holding balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20. Flows from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned on).

After the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 193 (C), the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd is a yellow (gold) star. When the color changes to the hold icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 193 (D), the color becomes the same as the color attached to the hold icon 9C in the shape of a yellow (gold) star, that is, the hold icon 9C is attached. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) in conjunction with the colored color, so that the first starting port 2
The light emission mode of 0 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 after the start of the fluctuation, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .. In addition, FIG.
When the game ball enters the first starting port 20 before the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd in 93 (C) changes to the star-shaped hold icon 9C. Is a state in which the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in the starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D) flashes white only once, and the holding ball is released due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In order to notify that the number has increased, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on).

After the hold icon 9C is changed to hold (that is, after the hold change), the first start port 20
When the game ball enters the ball, as shown in FIG. 193 (E), a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are not digested. It will be in a state of being stocked in and will be in a state of pending full tank. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is already controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit) and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold lit), As shown in FIG. 193 (F), it is mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port without any control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. Full color LED
Is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (lighted in gold), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (lit in gold), and the sound effect of "spot" is held. Sound does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned off).

As a control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, as described in the starting port light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the decorative substrate for the first starting port The full-color LED mounted on the above flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks in a predetermined color only once (blinks in white in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D)). In FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D), the white flashes, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In C, unlike the start port light emitting effect A, as shown in FIG. 193 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port lights yellow without blinking yellow (blinking gold). By maintaining and controlling the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (gold color lighting), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a yellow lighting state (gold color lighting), and further.
The hold sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 193 (G), the hold display position for displaying the hold icon exists because the hold is already full. Instead, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 193 (E). It does not change from the state where it was done. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist because the hold is full, and the hold ball does not increase. Therefore, FIG. 193. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold color). The lit state will be maintained. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the hold ball does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the hold ball has increased. , The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 193 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3", and the middle decorative symbol 8C.
Is the number "4" and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3".
The white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, respectively. .. At the end of such fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 193 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, so that the first The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the fluctuation, the reserved ball is already full, so even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the reserved ball does not increase, and "
The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect C, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (lighting in yellow). Even if the number of reserved balls increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 in the state of being lit in gold), the number of reserved balls increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold). The state of being lit in color) is maintained, and the hold sound, which is a "spot" effect sound, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).
..

As a result, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changed to a light emitting mode of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the first starting port 20 Even if the game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so that the light emission of the first starting port 20 is maintained. The yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is an embodiment, can contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect, and can improve the interest.

Further, in the start port light emission effect C, when the white spherical hold icon 9C is held and changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting, the game ball enters the first start port 20. As a result, the control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased is not performed at all (in other words, the control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is blocked). , The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in a state of being lit in yellow (lighting in gold). Therefore, the first one maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting).
The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a. Further, since the hold sound, which is a “spot” sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the hold sound from interfering with the sound effect or music that flows in connection with the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Starting port light emission effect D]
Next, the start port light emitting effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining the start port light emitting effect D. The start port light emitting effect D is performed during the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation.

In the start port light emitting effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 194 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The decorative symbol 8R on the right of the display is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode in which the decorative pattern fluctuates at a high speed. The background image placed behind the decorative pattern is displayed by changing the display mode from the opaque state to the translucent state and changing at high speed while the stopped display decorative pattern gradually increases in speed. It can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation.

After that, it decelerates just before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and a temporary stop display or a stop display is displayed (temporary stop display, then stop display). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8
R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.
Along with this, the fluctuation ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are being changed as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a.
The first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in this order.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A
The size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 194 (A), the change is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere having green color is displayed, and the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, and the first start port 20 is displayed at the end of the fluctuation.
The white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad because only one game ball has entered. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, simply "hold icon")
In some cases. ) Is briefly explained, the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the change in FIG. 194 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such change, FIG. 194. As shown in (B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be turned off, which is the normal light emitting mode, and is specially plated on the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20. Light does not pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 becomes the color of the special plating (for example, silver), which is the normal light emitting mode. As a result, the first
Due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the starting port 20, light does not pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is shaped ( Smile modeling) becomes difficult to see and smile modeling is hidden. That is, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained in the normal light emitting mode, the smile modeling is maintained in a non-display state.

At this time (that is, when the fluctuation in FIG. 194 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such fluctuation. (As shown in FIG. 194 (B)), in order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is heard. It flows from the speaker 67 (the music on hold is turned on).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), the hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere having green color displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may be the same color as the green color of the hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, or another color with high expectation (for example, red or seven colors (for example, red or seven colors). It may change to rainbow)). When the hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed in the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon disappears at 9Ad, and as shown in FIG. 194 (D), the hold icon 9 in which the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is a smiling sphere.
Light is transmitted through the front surface of the first starting port 20 by the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 by controlling the lighting to the same color as the color of C, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is the first. 1 The modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the starting port 20 (smile modeling) is in a state of emitting light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. As a result, the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20 and is arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20. The modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smiling model is displayed. That is, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C of the smiling sphere, the smiling face modeling is maintained in the display state.

At this time (that is, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), the hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and becomes the hold icon 9C (FIG. 194). As shown in D)), if the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67. (The music on hold is turned off).

After the fluctuation starts (that is, after the fluctuation starts), when the game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20 (that is, the two game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20 one by one). When you enter the ball)
, As shown in FIG. 194 (E), a white spherical hold icon 9A at the third hold display position 9Ad.
Is displayed, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad.
The four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in stock without being digested, and the hold is full. Full-color LED already mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port
Is controlled to be lit in the same color as the hold icon 9C, and the light is transmitted through the front surface of the first starting port 20 by the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20. As a result, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is the hold icon 9.
Although it is in a state of emitting light in the same color as the color of C (that is, the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, the smile modeling is suspended. Although it is displayed in the same color as the color of the icon 9C), the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is not performed at all. 194 (
As shown in F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port is maintained and controlled to have the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, so that the first start is as a light emitting mode of the first start port 20. The state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the mouth 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C is maintained (that is, it is arranged inside the first starting port 20). The decoration member's modeling (smile modeling) is easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C), and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot". Does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned off).

As a control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, as described in the starting port light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the decorative substrate for the first starting port The full-color LED mounted on the above flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks in a predetermined color only once (blinks in white in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D)). In FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D), the white flashes, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In D, unlike the start port light emitting effect A, as shown in FIG. 194 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port is the hold icon 9C.
By maintaining and controlling the color to be the same as the color of the first starting port 20, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 as the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is the same as the color of the hold icon 9C. (That is, the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is the same as the color of the hold icon 9C. (It is displayed in the color of), and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 194 (G), the hold display position for displaying the hold icon exists because the hold is already full. Instead, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 194 (E). It does not change from the state where it was done. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist because the hold is full, and the hold ball does not increase. Therefore, FIG. 194. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C, and the first starting port 20 is maintained.
Light can pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20 due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 2.
As a light emitting mode of 0, the state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C is maintained (that is,). The modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C).

At this time (that is, in FIG. 194 (G), the hold is already full), even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is a hold display position for displaying the hold icon. Since the number of reserved balls does not increase without the need to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased, "
The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

When the color of the hold icon 9C changes to another color with high expectation after the start of fluctuation, the color of the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is also changed to the hold icon 9C. The color changes according to the color of the holding icon 9C and becomes the same color as the changed color of the holding icon 9C. Will change to the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C and will appear by emitting light. That is, the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 194 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3", and the middle decorative symbol 8C.
Is the number "4" and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3".
The white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, respectively. .. At the end of such fluctuations, as shown in FIG. 194 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to turn off, which is the normal light emitting mode, and the first starting port 20 Due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface, light does not pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is the color of the special plating which is the normal light emitting mode (
For example, it becomes silver), and the smile modeling is hidden. At the end of the fluctuation, the hold is already full, so even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold ball does not increase, and the hold sound is a sound effect of "spot". Does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned off).

As described above, in the start port light emitting effect D, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port is controlled to have the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, so that the first start port 20 is used.
When the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the above is easy to see and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, the first starting port 20 is used. Even if the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of the game ball, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is not performed at all, and the first starting port is used. By maintaining and controlling the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate to the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, it becomes easy to visually recognize the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20. The smile modeling is maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, and the hold sound, which is the sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off). ..

As a result, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 appears by emitting light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C from the state where the smile modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is hidden. When the light emitting mode is changed to the state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is the first starting port. Since the smile modeling arranged inside the 20 is maintained in a light emitting mode in which it emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, it is the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 to be maintained. 1 Starting port 20
The state in which the smile model placed inside the screen emits light in the same color as the hold icon 9C can contribute to the effect as an additional light emission effect, and can improve the interest. ..

Further, in the start port light emitting effect D, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. When the state is set, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 is not performed at all (in other words, the game ball enters the first start opening 20). (By blocking the control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the ball), the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling becomes possible. It is possible to keep the display state in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in which the smile modeling is maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C contributes as an additional light emitting effect to the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a. can do. Further, since the hold sound, which is a “spot” sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the hold sound from interfering with the sound effect or music that flows in connection with the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the start port light emission effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 of FIG. 191 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (J), it has a first starting port 20 (reception port) capable of accepting a game ball, and the game ball has entered (accepted) into the first starting port 20 (reception port). The light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is changed based on the above (in FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (D), the white lighting is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). The first effect (which is controlled to turn white again and blinks white only once) and the execution of the first effect in FIGS. 191 (E) to 191 (F) are blocked to prevent the execution of the first effect of the first start port 20 (receptacle). A second that can maintain the light emission mode (white lighting)
And can be performed. According to this configuration, when the game ball enters (accepts) the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is changed from white lighting to a predetermined period (for example, 0). It is controlled to turn off only for .5 seconds) and is controlled to turn on white again so that it can change to a light emitting mode in which white blinks only once. When the holding ball does not increase, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 Since it is possible to keep the white lighting, it is possible to visually appeal whether or not the number of reserved balls has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest.
In the start port light emitting effect B of FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (J), a first start port 20 (reception port) capable of accepting a game ball is provided, and the game ball is provided at the first start port 20 (reception port). The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (FIG. 1).
In 92 (A) to FIG. 192 (D), the first effect of being controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and yellow lighting (gold color lighting), and FIGS. 192 (E) to 192 (H). The second effect, which can prevent the execution of the first effect and maintain the light emitting mode (yellow lighting (gold color lighting)) of the first starting port 20 (receptacle), can be executed. According to this configuration, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changed to a yellow lighting mode (gold color lighting), the first Even if the game ball enters (accepts) the start port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, this is maintained because the light emitting mode of the first start port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting). The yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and can improve the interest.
In the start port light emitting effect C of FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (J), a first start port 20 (reception port) capable of accepting a game ball is provided, and the game ball is provided at the first start port 20 (reception port). The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (FIG. 1).
In 93 (A) to FIG. 193 (D), the first effect of being controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and yellow lighting (gold color lighting), and FIGS. 193 (E) to 193 (H). The second effect, which can prevent the execution of the first effect and maintain the light emitting mode (yellow lighting (gold color lighting)) of the first starting port 20 (receptacle), can be executed. According to this configuration, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changed to a yellow lighting mode (gold color lighting), the first Even if the game ball enters (accepts) the start port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, this is maintained because the light emitting mode of the first start port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting). The yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and can improve the interest.
In the start port light emitting effect D of FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (J), a first start port 20 (reception port) capable of accepting a game ball is provided, and the game ball is provided at the first start port 20 (reception port). The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (FIG. 1).
In 94 (A) to 194 (D), the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes difficult to see, and the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) is performed from the state where the smile modeling is hidden. The modeling) will appear by emitting light in the same color as the hold icon 9C).
In FIGS. 194 (E) to 194 (H), the execution of the first effect is prevented and the first start port 20 (
It is possible to maintain the light emitting mode (light emitting state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C). The second effect and can be performed. According to this configuration, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C from the state where the smile modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is hidden. Even if the game ball enters (accepts) the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the first starting port 20 is in a state of being changed to the light emitting mode. Since the light emitting mode is maintained in the light emitting mode in which the smile modeling arranged inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C.
A state in which the smile modeling arranged inside the first starting port 20, which is the light emitting mode of the maintained first starting port 20, emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C is added to the effect. It can contribute to the effect of light emission, and can improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 of FIG. 191 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (J), the second effect allows the execution of the first effect until the number of hold icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4), while the number of hold icons 9A is predetermined. Number (4)
After reaching, the execution of the first production is blocked. Specifically, FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (FIG. 191)
First starting port 20 until the number of hold icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4) in D)
It is possible to allow variable light emission mode of (reception) (change in light emission mode in which the light is turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the white lighting, the white lighting is controlled again, and the white blinks only once). On the other hand, after the number of hold icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4) in FIGS. 191 (E) to 191 (H), the light emitting mode (white lighting) of the first starting port 20 (receptacle) is maintained. can do. According to this configuration, the fact that the number of hold icons 9A has reached a predetermined number (4 pieces) is added to the hold icons 9A that have reached a predetermined number, and further.
It is possible to inform the player by using the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 of FIG. 192 (A) to FIG. 192 of the start port light emitting effect B.
As shown in (J), the second effect is a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A (specific hold icon) set with a higher expectation to be a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A. Becomes the hold icon 9C and allows the execution of the first effect, and the first effect changes the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (reception) to a specific light emission mode (from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold). After changing to (color lighting)), the execution of the first effect is blocked and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receptacle) is maintained in yellow lighting ((gold color lighting) (specific light emitting mode)). .. Specifically, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A, which has a higher expectation of being a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A in FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (D), is the hold. After becoming the icon 9C and changing the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (reception) from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first effect is executed in FIGS. 192 (E) to 192 (H). The light emission mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is maintained. According to this configuration, the first starting port 20 (1st starting port 20) is in a state where the expectation of hitting is high.
It can be suggested to the player by the light emitting mode of the entrance).
In the start port light emitting effect D of FIG. 194, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon) of the smiling sphere, which is set to have a higher expectation to be a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A, is the hold. It becomes the icon 9C and allows the execution of the first effect, and after the first effect changes the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) to a specific light emitting mode (arranged inside the first starting port 20). The modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) becomes difficult to see, and the smiling model is hidden from the state where the decorative member modeling (smile modeling) appears by emitting light in the same color as the hold icon 9C. After that), the execution of the first effect is blocked and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is held, and the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) is suspended. It is maintained in a light emitting state (specific light emitting mode) in which it emits light in the same color as the icon 9C and appears. Specifically, in FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (D), the smile sphere hold icon 9A set with a higher expectation to be a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A is the hold icon 9C.
Then, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is decorated from the state where the smiling face modeling is hidden because the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes difficult to see. After changing the shape of the member (smile shape) to a state in which it emits light in the same color as the hold icon 9C, the execution of the first effect is prevented in FIGS. 194 (E) to 194 (H). 1st starting port 2
Maintains 0 (reception) light emission mode (light emission state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the hold icon 9C). do. According to this configuration, a state in which the degree of expectation of hitting is high is suggested to the player by the light emitting mode in which the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) emits light in the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C. be able to.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 of FIG.
As shown in (J), the second effect is the first effect when the white spherical hold icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C (specific hold icon). After allowing the execution of the above and changing the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receptacle) to a specific light emitting mode (after changing from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting)), the first effect The light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (reception) is lit in yellow ((gold lit)) by blocking the execution of the effect of 1.
(Specific light emission mode)). Specifically, in FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (D), the white spherical symbol variation due to the hold icon 9C (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C,
The first start when the right decorative symbol 8R) is started and the white spherical hold icon 9C changes to the star-shaped hold icon 9C, which has a higher expectation of being a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A. After changing the light emission mode of the mouth 20 (reception) from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first start is prevented by blocking the execution of the first effect in FIGS. 193 (E) to 193 (H). The light emitting mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the mouth 20 (receptacle) is maintained. According to this configuration, the first starting port 20 (reception port) is in a state where the expectation of hitting is high.
It can be suggested to the player by the light emitting mode of.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 of FIG. 191 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (J), the first effect further outputs a hold sound (allowable sound) based on the fact that the game ball has entered (accepted) the first starting port 20 (reception). Can be done,
The second effect further allows the output of the hold sound (allowable sound) when the first effect is allowed, while blocking the output of the hold sound (allowable sound) when the first effect is blocked. .. Specifically, in FIGS. 191 (C) to 191 (D), a "speaker" sound effect is used to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20. A certain music on hold is played from the speaker 67 (the sound on hold is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 191 (E) to 191 (H), even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the hold ball does not increase. It is no longer necessary to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased, and "
The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off). According to this configuration, based on the fact that the game ball has entered (accepted) the first starting port 20 (reception port), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is visually blinked in white. By using both the appealing effect and the auditory effect that the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67, it is possible to convey the increase in the holding ball to the player.
In the start port light emitting effect B of FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (J), FIGS. 192 (A) to 192.
In (B), for example, when the fluctuation is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such fluctuation, " A music on hold, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the sound on hold is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 192 (C) to 192 (H), when the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, the first start port 20 The control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball is not performed at all, and the reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). According to this configuration, the most promising yellow (gold)
When the star-shaped hold icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, the control for notifying that the number of hold balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is not performed at all, and the first 1 By maintaining the light emitting mode of the starting port 20 in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), it is possible to contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and a hold sound which is a sound effect of "spot". By not playing the sound effect from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the sound effect and the music flowing in relation to the production from being disturbed.
In the start port light emitting effect C of FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (J), FIGS. 193 (A) to 193.
In (D), for example, when the decorative symbol starts to change and the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the start of the change, the white spherical holding icon 9C displayed at the holding display position 9Cd is yellow. If a game ball enters the first starting port 20 before changing to the (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C, the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is the speaker 6
It flows from 7 (holding sound is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 193 (C) to 193 (H), when the white spherical hold icon 9C is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting, the first start port 20 The control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball is not performed at all, and the reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). According to this configuration, when the white spherical hold icon 9C is held and changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. As an additional light emission effect to the effect, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a yellow lighting state (gold color lighting) without any control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased. In addition to being able to contribute, by not playing the music on hold, which is the sound effect of "spot", from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the sound effect and music that flow in connection with the production from being disturbed.
In the start port light emitting effect D of FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (J), FIGS. 194 (A) to 194.
In (B), when the change is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such change, the hold ball is released. In order to notify that the number has increased, the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is set to the speaker 67.
(The music on hold is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 194 (C) to 194 (H),
When the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C, the first No control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20, and the reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is O).
FF). According to this configuration, modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (
When the smile modeling is easy to see and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C, the number of hold balls increases due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20. No control is performed to notify that the sound has been done (, the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is the same as the color of the hold icon 9C. By maintaining the display state in color, it can contribute to the effect as an additional light emission effect, and by not playing the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", from the speaker 67, it is related to the effect. It can be prevented from interfering with the flowing sound effects and music.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the start port light emission effect.
[Modification 1]
FIG. 192 (C) to FIG. 192 (H), the start port light emitting effect B, FIGS. 193 (C) to 193 (H).
), And the start port light emission effect D of FIGS. 194 (C) to 194 (H).
Even if the game ball entered the first starting port 20, the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", was not played from the speaker 67. However, the speaker 6 plays a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot".
It may flow from 7. In this case, the volume of the hold sound is adjusted to a volume that is 50% to 90% of the volume of the sound effect or music that is played in relation to the production, for example, so as not to interfere with the sound effect or music that is played in relation to the production. It is preferable to be done.

[Modification 2]
In the start port light emitting effect B of FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (H), the color of the hold icon 9A that can be displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad in FIG. 192 (A) is
When the hold icon 9A shifts each time it is digested, the color of the hold icon 9A does not change, but the color changes to a higher expectation (for example, changes from white to blue, changes from white to green). You may try to do it. In this case, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C,
Along with this, the color of the first starting port 20 becomes the same color as the color attached to the hold icon 9C.

[Modification 3]
In the start port light emitting effect C of FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (H), FIGS. 192 (A) to 192.
When the white spherical hold icon 9C is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation in (D), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold). It was lit in color), but in addition, it was lit in yellow (lit in gold) to seven colors (lit in gold).
It may be changed to rainbow (big hit rich)). In this case, the first starting port 20
The light emitting mode is changed from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)), and the color of the first starting port 20 is the same as the color attached to the hold icon 9C.

[Modification 4]
In the start port light emission effect A of FIG. 191, the start port light emission effect B of FIG. 192, the start port light emission effect C of FIG. 193, and the start port light emission effect D of FIG. Although the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 has been changed, it can also be applied to the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. In this case, a decorative board on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (not shown) is mounted inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is arranged, respectively, and the lamp control board 107. The light emission is controlled by. The first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 emit light when the full-color LED mounted on these decorative substrates emits light. When the first starting port 20 has a normal specification, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to be lit in white, so that the first gate (through chucker) is used. The light emitting mode of the 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is lit in white, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be lit in white even in the jackpot production and the demonstration production for waiting for customers. As a result, the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29
The light emitting mode of is lit in white.

On the other hand, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, the first gate (through chucker) 28 is further added.
The first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate are in a state where the decorative member is arranged in front of the decorative substrate inside the front surface of the second gate (through chucker) 29 and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light. While the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative members arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 can be visually recognized through the front surface of the (through chucker) 29, the decorative substrate can be used. When the mounted full-color LED is off, the inside of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 passes through the front of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. It is difficult to see the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative members arranged in the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the special plating color (for example, silver) can be visually recognized through the front surface of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. It is said that. Further, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off. The first gate (through chucker) 28 is controlled so that the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off even in the jackpot production and the demonstration production for waiting for customers.
And modeling of decorative members placed inside the second gate (through chucker) 29 (smile modeling)
Is difficult to see. When the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, in the jackpot effect, the first gate is in a state where the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light. (Through chucker) 2
The modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative members arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 can be visually recognized through the front surface of the 8 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. You may do so.

[Modification 5]
In the start port light emitting effect B of FIGS. 192 (E) to 192 (D), the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd. When the hold icon 9C was set, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 was changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A was set to have a higher degree of expectation to be a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A. When the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting), it is controlled to turn off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and turns yellow again (for example, 0.5 seconds). The control to return to (gold color lighting) may be repeated only 5 times to blink yellow (gold color blinking). Regarding this reason (the reason why the light emission mode is changed to blink yellow (gold blinking) repeatedly only 5 times), when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (receptacle), the first starting port 20 (the first starting port 20 (blinking gold)). This is because the light emitting mode of the entrance) is different from the change of the light emitting mode in which, for example, the white lighting is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the white lighting is controlled again, and the white blinking only once. In other words, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of hitting is high due to the change in the light emission mode of blinking yellow (gold blinking) repeatedly only 5 times, and the yellow (gold) star shape. Notifying the player that the hold icon 9A has moved to the hold display position 9Cd by the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (that is, by the change of the light emission mode of repeatedly blinking yellow (gold color blinking) only 5 times). Can be done.

[Modification 6]
In the start port light emission effect A of FIG. 191, the start port light emission effect B of FIG. 192, the start port light emission effect C of FIG. 193, and the start port light emission effect D of FIG. Although the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 was changed, it can also be applied to the second starting port 21. In this case, a full-color LED (not shown) capable of multicolor emission inside the second starting port 21
A decorative board on which a single or a plurality of the above are mounted is arranged, and light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107. The second starting port 21 emits light when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light. When the first starting port 20 has normal specifications, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to light white, so that the second starting port 21 emits light. The mode is lit in white, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to be lit in white in the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect for waiting for customers, so that the light emitting mode of the second starting port 21 is white. It will be lit.

On the other hand, when the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, a decorative member is further arranged inside the front surface of the second starting port 21 in front of the decorative substrate, and a full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate. In the state where the light is emitted, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting port 21 can be visually recognized through the front surface of the second starting port 21, while the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is visible. When the lights are turned off, it is difficult to see the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting port 21 through the front surface of the second starting port 21, and the color of the special plating is passed through the front surface of the second starting port 21. (For example, silver) is visible. Further, when the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off, and further, a big hit effect and a customer Even in the waiting demonstration effect, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to be turned off, and it is difficult to visually recognize the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting port 21. When the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, in the jackpot effect, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light and the second starting port 21 is passed through the front surface of the second starting port 21.
The modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the starting port 21 may be made visible.

[Modification 7]
In the start port light emitting effect D of FIG. 194, the inside of the front surface of the first start port 20 is specially plated, and the decorative member is arranged in front of the decorative substrate for the first start port, and the decorative substrate for the first start port is arranged. In the state where the full-color LED mounted on the vehicle emits light, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 can be visually recognized through the front surface of the first starting port 20, while the first starting. When the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the mouth is turned off, it is difficult to visually recognize the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. 1 The color of the special plating (for example, silver) was made visible through the front surface of the starting port 20. However, a decorative portion may be provided around the first starting port 20 (for example, the upper side, the right side, the lower side, the left side, etc. of the first starting port 20). The first starting port 20 and the decorative portion may be unitized, and if it is an independent component, the decorative portion is preferably arranged adjacent to the periphery of the first starting port 20. Inside the decorative part, there is a decorative board on which a full-color LED is mounted, and a decorative member that is placed in front of the decorative board and has, for example, a character printed on it.
Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "modeling of decorative members (character modeling)". ) And are housed. The back surface of the decorative portion, that is, the surface facing the decorative portion, is specially plated, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light so that the front surface of the decorative portion can be transparent. .. The decorative portion may be molded from a colorless and transparent resin and shaped, or its surface may be shaped as a smooth surface (flat surface or curved surface). When the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light, the modeling (character modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the decorative portion can be visually recognized through the front surface of the decorative portion arranged around the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off, the first starting port 2 is turned off.
Modeling of decorative members placed inside the decorative part through the front of the decorative part placed around 0 (
Character modeling) is difficult to see, and the color of the special plating (for example, silver) is visible through the front of the decorative part.

[Modification 8]
The start port light emission effect A of FIG. 191, the start port light emission effect B of FIG. 192, the start port light emission effect C of FIG. 193, and the start port light emission effect D of FIG. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect K1-1]
A gaming machine that has an entrance that can accept gaming balls.
The first effect of changing the light emitting mode of the entrance based on the acceptance of the game ball at the entrance, and the first effect.
After allowing the light emitting mode of the entrance to be changed by the execution of the first effect, it is possible to execute the second effect of blocking the execution of the first effect and maintaining the light emitting mode of the inlet. Is,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect K1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The second effect allows execution of the first effect until the number of hold icons reaches a predetermined number, while the first effect after the number of hold icons reaches a predetermined number. To prevent the execution of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect K1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
In the second effect, a specific hold icon set with a higher expectation of hitting than the hold icon becomes the hold icon, and the execution of the first effect is allowed, and the first effect receives the above. After changing the light emitting mode of the inlet to a specific light emitting mode, the execution of the first effect is prevented and the light emitting mode of the receiving port is maintained in the specific light emitting mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect K1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
In the second effect, when the symbol change due to the hold icon is started and the hold icon changes to a specific hold icon, the first effect is allowed to be executed and the first effect is the entrance. After changing the light emitting mode of the above to a specific light emitting mode, the execution of the first effect is prevented and the light emitting mode of the entrance is maintained in the specific light emitting mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect K1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
Further, the first effect can execute the output of the permissible sound based on the fact that the game ball is received at the entrance.
The second effect allows the output of the permissible sound when the first effect is permitted, while blocking the output of the permissible sound when the first effect is blocked.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine, but the gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than this. For example, the gaming machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. Further, the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example.
It is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from a gaming ball to a gaming medal.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the select button 68. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls.
It is not limited to this. For example, instead of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the image display device 7 to perform various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). Then, at least a part of the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub display device.

Although this embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments described above are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalent.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The pending image (the pending icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 20 ... 1st starting port (1st ball entry port)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd ball entry port)
66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image.
The first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and
It is possible to perform a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears when the specific fluctuation after the plurality of fluctuations starts.
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of holds that have been won before the predetermined image is displayed.
The specific fluctuation is a fluctuation corresponding to a hold won during the plurality of fluctuations.
The plurality of fluctuations is executed after the winning game.
The predetermined image is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations after the hit game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Claims (6)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image.
The first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and
A second effect, in which the predetermined image disappears when the specific fluctuation after the plurality of fluctuations starts, can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of holds that have been won before the predetermined image is displayed.
The specific variation is a variation corresponding to a hold won during the plurality of variations.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 2.
The plurality of fluctuations is executed after the winning game.
The predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, and is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations after the hit game.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image different from the predetermined image.
After the predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, the specific image is displayed overlapping the predetermined image, and after the hit game, the specific image is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The plurality of fluctuations is a fluctuation of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol.
The specific variation is the variation of the first special symbol or the other of the second special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The predetermined image is an image that encourages the ball to enter a specific position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images